/^BERKELEY*
LIBRARY
I UNIVERSITY OF
\CAUFORNIA
EARTH
SCIENCES
LIBRARY
Cambridge (geographical
GENERAL EDITOR : F. H. H. GUILLEMARD, M.D.,
FORMERLY LECTURER IN GEOGRAPHY IN THE UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE.
A GEOGRAPHICAL
HISTORY OF MAMMALS.
ilontion: C. J. CLAY AND SONS,
CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS WAREHOUSE,
AVE MARIA LANE.
ffilaggofo: 263, ARGYLE STREET.
: F. A. BROCKHAUS.
lorfe: MACMILLAN AND CO.
THE WORLD ON MERCATOR'S PROJECTION SHEWING THE
Cambridge TJniversi
UVIMALIAN GEOGRAPHICAL REALMS & REGIONS.
90- ins- io'
London^: Stamfords Geog*' Estab*.
A GEOGRAPHICAL
HISTORY OF MAMMALS,
BY
R. LYDEKKER, B.A., F.R.S., V.P.G.S. ETC.
CAMBRIDGE:
AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS.
1896
[All Rig/its reserved.}
PALEONTOLOGY LIBRARY
Gift of C. A. Kofoid
(JEamfartoge :
PRINTED BY J. AND C. F. CLAY,
AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS.
L3
PREFACE.
SCIENCES
LIBRARY
SINCE the publication of Dr Wallace's book on the geo-
graphical distribution of animals in general, the only works which
have appeared relating to Mammals from the same point of view
are the small volume by Mr F. E. Beddard and the series of
papers by Mr W. L. Sclater, referred to in the Appendix.
Both the latter admittedly take but little account of fossil
forms ; and there is accordingly ample room for a work which
should collect and arrange the information on this subject, and
indicate the deductions which may be drawn therefrom. This
task has been attempted in the present volume. The subject
is, however, so vast, and the information relating to it scattered
through so many publications, that it is probable many points of
interest or importance have not been noticed. From the mode
of arrangement of the work, a considerable amount of repetition
was inevitable.
The long time that the volume was in the press will account
for its containing no allusion to certain papers which have ap-
peared recently. It may therefore be mentioned here that
recent discoveries have shown a slight intermixture of northern
types in the Palaeozoic flora of Argentina, so that the isolation
of the northern and southern floras is .not so nearly complete
as was supposed. A paper just published by M. Boule 1 indi-
1 Comptes RenduS) vol. cxxii (1896).
VI PREFACE.
cates that the relationship between Cadurcotherium and the
Astrapotheria is closer than suggested on page 82. Hence there
is further evidence that South America received its Tertiary
ungulates by way of Africa. The extinct Patagonian birds
Phororhachis and Brontornis appear, according to Mr C. W.
Andrews, to be nearly allied to the existing South American
seriema (Cariama), and since Filholornis, of the French Phos-
phorites, has been shown by Prof. A. Milne-Edwards to be
related to the hoatzin (Opisthocomus), it would seem that all
these peculiar South American types of birds have a history
somewhat similar to that of the extinct ungulates of the same
region.
R. LYDEKKER.
HARPENDEN,
June ist, 1896.
CONTENTS.
CHAPTER I.
INTRODUCTORY.
Distributional Area and Station Influence of Temperature Humidity
Other Factors in Distribution Importance of Palaeontology Inequality
in the Ages of different Groups of Animals Different Groups have different
Geographical Distribution Importance of Mammals in Geographical
Distribution Classification of Mammals Barriers to Dispersal of Mam-
mals Influence of Man on Distribution Extinction of the larger
Plistocene Mammals Distributional Areas of Genera and Species
Centres of Evolution Permanency of Continents and Ocean-Basins
Zoological Realms and Regions ....... i
CHAPTER II.
THE NOTOG^EIC REALM.
Definition and Characters of the Realm Australian Region Monotremes
Marsupials Rodents Carnivores Ungulates Bats List of Australian
and Papuan Genera Polynesian Region Hawaiian Region Austro-
Malayan Region Palseontological History of Marsupials How Australia
received its Fauna . . . . . . . . .28
CHAPTER III.
THE NEOG^EIC REALM.
Extent and Characters Mammaliferous Deposits Monkeys Bats Insecti-
vora Carnivores Ungulates Horses Litopterna Astrapotheria
Toxodonts Pyrotheria Proboscideans Rodents Edentates Arma-
dillos and Glyptodonts Sloths Anteaters Ground-sloths Marsupials
Cetaceans Early Distinction of the Neogseic Fauna Early Separation
of N. and S. America Incursion of Northern Mammals Distinctness of
the existing Fauna Origin of the Santa Cruz Fauna Antarctica and the
South American element in the Ethiopian Fauna Conclusion Sub-
regions 64
Vlll CONTENTS.
CHAPTER IV.
THE ARCTOG^EIC REALM.
Features of the Arctogaeic Fauna Community of earliest Fauna Evidence of
Secondary Reptiles Puerco Fauna Lemuroids Insectivora Carnivores
Rodents Ungulates Summary of the Characteristics of the Mamma-
lian Fauna of Arctogaea . . . . . . . . 1 44
CHAPTER V.
EASTERN ARCTOG^EA.
Mammalian Groups peculiar to Eastern Arctogsea Tertiary Mammalian
Fauna of Eastern Arctogsea Oligocene Fauna Miocene Fauna Older
Pliocene Fauna Pikermi and allied Faunas Sivvalik Fauna Higher
Pliocene Faunas . . . . . . . . . 1/9
CHAPTER VI.
THE MALAGASY REGION.
Mammalian Fauna Relations of Madagascar to the Mainland . . 213
CHAPTER VII.
THE ETHIOPIAN REGION.
Characteristics of the Mammalian Fauna Birds Past History of Ethiopia
Sub-regions . . . . . . . . . . .227
CHAPTER VIII.
THE ORIENTAL REGION.
Sub-regions Characteristics of the Mammalian Fauna Past History of the
Region Malayan Sub-region Nicobars, Mentawi, and Christmas Islands
Philippine Sub-region ......... 264
CONTENTS. IX
CHAPTER IX.
THE HOLARCTIC REGION.
Characteristics of the Mammalian Fauna Mammals of the Eastern Holarctic
Region Plistocene Fauna of the Holarctic Region Geographical Changes
since the Plistocene Western Division of the Region Arctic Sub-region
European Sub-region Central Asian Sub-region Tibetan Sub-region
Mantchurian Sub-region Mediterranean Sub-region Kashmir Ca-
nadian Sub-region Transition Zone . . . . . . 308
CHAPTER X.
THE SONORAN REGION.
Limits Characteristics of Mammalian Fauna Extinct Groups of Mammals
characteristic of Western Arctogrea Distinctness of the Region Dual
origin of Groups . . .. . . .-..'.'' V '' '. 363
APPENDIX.
LIST OF WORKS AND PAPERS .- &*&, . . ..:..-, fj . 383
INDEX . . . . V . 386
MAP SHEWING DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS . . . , to face Title
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS.
PAGE
Fig. i. The Duckbill {Ornithorhyncus anatinus] . . . .32
2. Skull of Rat-Kangaroo 35
,, 3. Skull of Extinct Phalanger ( Thylacoleo carnifex) 37
4. Banded Anteater (Myrmecobius fasciatus] .... 39
,, 5. Fore Part of Skull of Babirusa (Babirusa alfums} . . -47
,, 6. Lower Jaw of Triconodon, or Allied Form . . . .52
,, 7. Lower Jaw of Phascolotheriiim . . . . . -53
,, 8. Lower Jaw of Amphilestes . . . . . . -53
,, 9. Lower Jaw of Homunculus ....... 69
,, 10. Skeleton of Macrauchenia patachonica ..... 76
,, n. Skeleton of Hind Foot of Rhinoceros 78
,, 12. Carpus and Metacarpus of Hyrax and Elephant . . -78
,, 13. Upper Molar of Macraiichenia .80
,, 14. Upper Molar of Oxyodontotherium ...... 80
,, 15. Upper Molar of Astrapotherium . . . . . . 81
16. Skull of Nesodon 83
,, 17. Palate of Typotherium ........ 84
1 8. External Skeleton of Armadillo ( Tatusia giganted] . . . 93
19. Internal Skeleton of a Glyptodont ...... 95
,, 20. External Skeleton of Glyptodon clavipes . . . . -97
,, 21. External Skeleton of Panochthus tuberculatus . . . -99
,, 22. Tamandua Anteater 102
,, 23. Skull of Mylodon ......... 104
,, 24. Skeleton of Scelidothcrium leptocephalum . . . .106
25. Lower Jaw of Prothylacinus ....... 108
,, 26. Lower Jaw of Acdestis oweni . . . . . . .no
,, 27. Lower Jaw of Abderites . . . . . . rii
,, 28. Lower Jaw of Plagiaulax 149
,, 29. Skull of Tritylodon 150
,, 30. Molar of Tritylodon -150
31. Upper Cheek-Teeth of Plesiadapis 155
,, 32. Upper Cheek -Teeth of Microcharus 156
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. xi
PAGE
Fig- 33- Upper Molars of A rctocyon 159
,, 34. Upper Molar of Ancodus . . . . . . . 161
,, 35. Skeleton of Elotherinm 162
36. Upper Cheek-Teeth of Palaotheriiim 166
37. Upper Cheek-Teeth of A nchitherium , . . . . 167
,, 38. Upper Molar of Horse 167
39. Skull of Hipparion . . . >. , . . ... .168
,, 40. Upper Molar of Rhinoceros . . ..' , i, . ;- . ,*.,.. 169
,, 41. Skeleton of Titanotherium . . . .- k , . 171
,, 42. Upper Molar of Mastodon . . .. : .;...: >.". - . 173
,, 43. Upper Cheek-Teeth of Coryphodon . . < .,...?!.;* . 174
,, 44. Upper Cheek-Teeth of Anoplotherium .. \ ,'. , . , ,. ... ; . 185
,, 45. Skull of PalcBorias . +< -; *,< '.;/*- .1. . . .. '. .. . 199
, , 46. Upper Molar of Merycopotanius . . : . 1 < c, . . 203
,, 47. Restoration of Sivatheriutn . . . . -. . v /... . 205
,, 48. Skull of Lemur . , ' . . . . .; ' ; . 217
,, 49. Ring-tailed Lemur (Lemur catta) * . ; '\ '. '{. rt&l . . 218
,, 50. Skull of Aye-aye (Chiromys madagascariensis} .,,.. . 219
,, 51. The Fossa (Cryptoproctaferooc] . ... *,;,., 221
,, 52. African Jumping-Shrew (Macroscelides tetradactylus} . . 232
> 53- West African Potamogale (Potamogale velox] ;.-. ... . 233
54. Cape Hunting-Dog (Lycaon pictus] . .i ....... . 236
,, 55. Fulgent African Flying Squirrel {Anomahirus fiilgens) . . 237
,, 56. Head of African Wart- Hog (Phacochcerus cethiopicus) . . 241
,, 57. Water-Chevrotain (Dorcatherium aquaticuni) .... 243
,, 58. Head of Gemsbok (Oryx gazelld) . . . . . . 246
,, 59. Cape Hy rax (Procavia capensis) .... . . 248
60. Slow Loris (Nycticebus tardigradus} ..... 269
,, 6r. Tree-Shrew (Tupaia tana) 271
,, 62. Indian Sloth-Bear (Melursus ursinus) 275
,, 63. Indian Ratel (Mellivora ratel) . 276
,, 64. Japanese Serow (Nernorh&dus crispus] 279
,, 65. White-bellied Pangolin (Manis trictispis) .... 283
,, 66. Russian Desman (Myogale moschatd] . . . . 320
,, 67. Head of Spanish Ibex (Capra pyrenaica} 323
,, 68. Musk-Deer (Moschus moschiferus] . . . . . 325
,, 69. Rocky Mountain Goat (Haploceros montanus] .... 343
,, 70. Musk-Ox (Ovibos moschatus) . . . . . i . 346
, , 71. Musquash (Fiber zibethicus) . 362
,, 72. Face of Geomys bursarius . . . . * . . . . 366
,, 73. Face of Thomomys talpoides . . . . ... . 366
74. Foot of Geomys 377
,, 75. Head of Mule-Deer (Cariacus macrotis) 368
,, 76. Head of Prong-buck (Antilocapra americana) .... 369
xii LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS.
PAGE
Fig. 77.
Skeleton of Patriofelis ferox .....
37 2
,. 78.
Skeleton of Agriochcerus latifrons ....
374
79-
Hind-foot of Agriochcerus .....
376
,. 80.
Skull of Protoceras ......
376
,, 81.
Molar of Palceosyops
377
82.
Extremity of Skull of Uintatherium
378
Figs, i, 4, 22, 28, 32, 48, 49, 50, 52, 53, 54, 55, 57, 59, 60, 63, 65, 66, 68,
70, 71 are from The Study of Mammals > Living and Extinct, by Flower and
Lydekker. Figs. 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 23, 24 are taken from the
author's work on Argentine Fossil Mammals, published in the An. Mus. La
Plata. Figs. 9, 25, 26, 27 are from Senor Ameghino. Fig. 67 is from a photo-
graph by Mr Abel Chapman. Fig. 82 is from Prof. Cope, fig. 81 from Prof.
Earle, fig. 40 from Prof. Boyd Dawkins, fig. 30 from Prof. Fraas, and figs. 7, 8
from Prof. Goodyear. Fig. 46 is taken from a plate in Hutchinson's Extinct
Monsters ; 58 from a photograph by Mr Eccles, of Reading, and 75 from one
in the possession of Mr J. E. Harting. Figs. 6, 35, 41, 43 are from Prof.
Marsh; and n, 12, 31, 33, 37, 78, 79, 80 from Prof. H. F. Osborn. For the
blocks of figs. 72, 73, 74, the author is indebted to Dr C. H. Merriam.
Fig. 45 is from Nicholson and Lydekker's Manual of Paleontology ; fig. 29
from Owen; fig. 64 from Dr Sclater in the Proc. Zool. Soc.; fig. 77 from Dr
Wortman, and 39 from Prof, von Zittel.
A GEOGRAPHICAL
HISTORY OF MAMMALS.
CHAPTER I.
INTRODUCTORY.
Distributional Area and Station Influence of Temperature Humidity
Other Factors in Distribution Importance of Palaeontology Inequality
in the Ages of different Groups of Animals Different Groups have different
Geographical Distribution Importance of Mammals in Geographical
Distribution Classification of Mammals Barriers to Dispersal of Mam-
mals Influence of Man on Distribution Extinction of the larger
Plistocene Mammals Distributional Areas of Genera and Species
Centres of Evolution Permanency of Continents and Ocean-Basins
Zoological Realms and Regions.
THAT there are differences in the animals and plants of different
districts and different countries is a fact apparent to every person
who has travelled at all; while to those who have travelled ex-
tensively it will further be evident that the amount of this difference
is by no means correlated with the distance of one country from
another, the fauna of Japan, for instance, being much more like
that of England and France than is the fauna of Eastern Africa to
that of the adjacent island of Madagascar. Unfortunately, among
persons who are not conversant with the principles of zoological
science, the distinction between the faunas of different countries
has been much obscured by the practice common to almost all
the old voyagers and colonists of bestowing upon the animals of
new countries the names of such Old World creatures as they
appeared most nearly to resemble. The puma of America was,
for instance, called the lion, and the jaguar of the same country,
the tiger; while the koala of Australia was christened the native
bear, and its marsupial allies the dasyures are still commonly
spoken of as native cats. To students of the science of
L. I
INTRODUCTORY. [CHAP.
Geographical Distribution it is, therefore, essential to discard such
misleading popular titles, and to speak of animals by their correct
names.
Apart from the specific or generic distinctions between the
animals of one country and another, the observer
Distributional
Area and sta- will not fail to notice more or less well-marked
differences between those inhabiting different dis-
tricts of a single country ; such differences being most intensified
when a country presents great variation in its physical features.
An excellent instance of this is afforded by South America, where
there are the open grassy plains of the Argentine, the dense tropi-
cal forests of Paraguay and Brazil, and the snow-clad heights of
the Andes. In the former tract the traveller will meet with the
peculiar rodents known as viscachas, the Patagonian cavy, a species
of deer, numerous armadillos, and the rhea (miscalled the American
ostrich). In the Brazilian forests, on the other hand, he will find
monkeys, marmosets, tapirs, tree-porcupines, sloths, and anteaters,
together with certain armadillos which are for the most part speci-
fically or generically distinct from those of the pampas. If, on
the other hand, he ascend high on the Andes, he will leave
behind the animals of the forest, to be confronted with chinchillas,
guanacos and vicunas. Different, however, as are the animals of
these various districts, yet an acquaintance with their zoological
affinities will prove that many of them belong to closely allied
groups, some of which are met with in no other parts of the world.
This will serve to show that they belong to what is known as one
zoological province or region, and that the differences between the
faunas of different districts of that province are due to the physical
variations between its component districts.
Perhaps this point may be still better illustrated by the cases
where the same species of animal is restricted to different districts
of one country or continent. For instance, the common squirrel
is only found in the wooded districts of Europe, and is entirely
absent from open plains. The chamois, again, is only met with
in the isolated mountain ranges of the Pyrenees, the Alps, and the
Caucasus ; while the Siberian ibex of the Altai reappears in Tibet
and the Himalaya, but is wanting in the intervening tracts. In
these instances Europe would be spoken of as the distributional
I.] INFLUENCE OF TEMPERATURE. 3
area of the squirrel and the chamois, and Central Asia as that of
the Siberian ibex ; but the particular districts suited to the exist-
ence of each would be termed its station. And here it may be
mentioned that whereas the distributional area of a species is
generally continuous, its various stations may be partially or com-
pletely isolated, as in the instances of the aforesaid mountain
animals, which cannot live on the plains below.
Station is thus seen to be very intimately connected with
temperature; and of this a very striking example may
be found among the mammals of South America.
As already mentioned, the llama-like animals respec-
tively known as vicunas and guanacos are met with in company
on the highlands of the Cordillera in Peru and Ecuador, but as
we go further south the latter are found on the plains of southern
Argentina and Patagonia, as well as in the island of Tierra-del-
Fuego, at the sea-level. Here, then, there is a clear proof of the
intimate connection existing between temperature and station;
the guanaco, being an animal which can live only in cold or
temperate climates, finds suitable conditions for its existence
in tropical latitudes solely at a height of many thousands of feet,
although further south it is able to thrive at the sea-level.
This being so, it is obvious that temperature must likewise
exert a very considerable influence on the whole distributional
area of many animals. Of this, the most marked instance is found
in the fauna of the Arctic regions, which forms a circumpolar zone
of animals more or less markedly distinct from those dwelling
further south. And if the whole land-area of the world were con-
nected, and not broken up by mountain-chains, its faunas might
probably be divided into zones or belts, whose limits would mainly
depend upon temperature.
In this connection it may be mentioned that the instance of the
range of the guanaco is of considerable importance in regard to
a decided difference between the Old and New Worlds in respect
to the influence of mountains on the present distribution of the
animals of the two areas. In the Old World the chief mountain-
ranges, such as the Pyrenees, Alps, Carpathians, Caucasus, Hindu-
Koh, Himalaya, Thian Shan, and Altai, run in a more or less
decided east-and-west direction; whereas in America, and more
I 2
INTRODUCTORY. [CHAP.
especially in the southern half of that continent, they have a north-
and- south trend. Consequently, whereas in the former area the
mountain-ranges have acted as barriers to the dispersal of animal
life, there has been no such obstacle to diffusion in America, and
animals have been able to distribute themselves according to tem-
perature-conditions. It is in consequence of this physical feature
that a single species of cold-loving animal like the guanaco can
range at the present day from the equator to latitude 55 south,
whereas in the Old World the common ibex is now restricted to
the isolated mountain-ranges of Europe, and the Siberian ibex is
confined to the systems of the Himalaya and the Altai. Such
isolated stations could, of course, only have been reached during
a period when the general temperature of the northern hemisphere
was much colder than it is at present, and the animals were thus
enabled to cross the lowlands from one chain to the other ; and
that such a cold period formerly existed, there is abundant evidence
in the traces of an extensive glaciation found over a large portion
of Europe and Asia. Although, therefore, strictly speaking, tem-
perature has really had as much effect in the distribution of
animals in the Eastern Hemisphere as in the Western, yet, since
the glacial epoch, its influences have been considerably masked
by the trend of the chief mountain-ranges, and likewise by the
greater isolation of the different countries of the former area as
compared with the latter.
These essential differences thus render it impossible to mark
out the Old World in the zones of animal distribution which have
been attempted for North America ; and they will likewise serve
largely to explain the divergence of views on this point which may
be noticed between the writings of Drs Wallace and Merriam.
The latter writer 1 , whose conclusions are mainly based on the
evidence of North American animals and plants, is of opinion
that in the northern hemisphere " animals and plants are restricted
in southward distribution by the mean temperature of a brief
period covering the hottest part of the year"; and it is added that
in certain districts the mingling of essentially northern types with
those characteristic of a more southerly zone is due to the mean
temperature of the hottest part of the year being sufficiently low
1 Appendix, No. 20.
I.] FACTORS IN DISTRIBUTION. 5
for the existence of the former, while the total quantity of heat
suffices for the latter. In other words, there is a low summer
temperature combined with a high total sum of heat.
Among the secondary causes affecting distribution, humidity,
according to the same observer, may occupy the first
place. "Humidity," he writes, " governs details of
distribution of numerous species of plants, reptiles and birds, and
of a few species of mammals, within the several temperature-zones.
. . . Humidity and other secondary causes determine the presence
or absence of particular species in particular localities within their
appropriate zones, but temperature predetermines the possibili-
ties of distribution ; it fixes the limits beyond which species
cannot pass ; it defines broad trans-continental belts within
which certain forms may thrive if other conditions permit, but
outside of which they cannot exist, be the other conditions never
so favourable."
Important as the influence of temperature and, in a smaller
degree, that of humidity, has undoubtedly been in other Fac
determining the distributional limits of the species tors in Distri-
f. , , , . , , . . bution.
or genera ot animals and plants now inhabiting
particular countries, and large as has been the part played by the
glacial epoch in producing the present condition of things, it is
evident that temperature has been by no means the only, even if
it be the chief factor in distribution. In the first place there are
several species, more especially among the carnivorous mammals,
which seem quite independent of both station and temperature,
the New World puma ranging from Patagonia to Canada, while
the tiger inhabits alike the burning jungles of India and Burma,
and the Arctic tundras of Siberia. Striking as such cases are, they
are, however, to be regarded merely as examples of the individual
adaptability of certain species, which, like the carnivores named,
are able to obtain suitable food in any part of the world, and
they do not throw any discredit on the power of temperature as
a controlling factor in animal distribution generally.
Of the utmost importance in this respect are the changes
which the surface of the globe itself has undergone in past
epochs, whereby continents that are now more or less completely
sundered from one another were formerly connected, while what
INTRODUCTORY. [CHAP.
are now islands were once parts of continents, and vice versa.
Such connections and disconnections, by allowing migrations at
one time, and preventing them from taking place in the reverse
direction at a subsequent epoch, have been the chief factors which
have resulted in the present very remarkable difference in the
faunas of different parts of the globe. And it is solely due to such
changes that many of the lower types of mammalian life, like the
marsupials of Australia, and the lemurs and insectivores of Mada-
gascar, have been preserved at the present day ; their insulation
having afforded them protection from the invasion of the larger
and more specialised mammals of other parts of the world, by
which they would inevitably have been swept away, had the two
groups ever come in contact. It is in regard to these migratory
movements of animals and changes in the land-surface of the
globe that zoology and geography are brought into such close
relationship ; the former science sometimes helping to explain the
alterations that have taken place in the contours of the land, while
in other cases the present distribution of the land explains the
past history of the animals by which it is inhabited.
To understand rightly the present distribution of animals, it is,
im ortance however, essential to study their past history as
of Paiaeonto- recorded by the preservation of their fossilised
remains in the strata of the earth's crust ; as with-
out such history it would be quite impossible to grasp the reason
of many apparent anomalies in their present distribution. How,
for instance, without the aid of palaeontology would it be possible
to understand how it came about that tapirs are now found only
in tropical America and the Malayan countries, or that marsupials
occur solely in America and Australasia at the present day ? And
here it may be well to mention that the science of geographical
distribution depends essentially upon a belief on the part of the
student that all animals are genetically connected one with
another, and that the existing forms have originated from earlier
kinds by some mode of evolution. Were this belief not accepted,
the whole science of distribution would fall to pieces ; as if animals
were separately created, there would be nothing calling for special
explanation in the fact of tapirs being restricted to the two areas
mentioned.
I.]
IMPORTANCE OF PALEONTOLOGY.
To those readers who may not be geologists, the following
table of the leading divisions into which the strata of the earth's
crust have been divided will probably be advantageous. Com-
mencing with the highest beds, the series will run in descending
order as follows, viz. :
Tertiary. PLISTOCENE. Cavern and River Deposits.
PLIOCENE. The "Crags" of the East Coast.
MIOCENE. (Eningen beds of Baden.
OLIGOCENE. Gypsum of Paris Basin; Phos-
phorites of Central France.
EOCENE. London Clay.
Secondary. CRETACEOUS. Chalk, Upper Greensand, Gault,
Lower Greensand, and Wealden.
JURASSIC. Purbeck beds, Portland series, Kim-
meridge Clay, Coral Rag, Oxford
Clay, Great Oolite, Stonesfield
Slate, Inferior Oolite, Lias.
TRIASSIC. New Red Sandstone of Cheshire.
Paleozoic. PERMIAN. Red Marls.
CARBONIFEROUS. Coal-Measures and Moun-
tain-Limestone.
SILURIAN.
ORDOVICIAN.
, CAMBRIAN.
Older rocks of Wales and the
Lake-District.
Before attempting to draw any conclusions as to the former
configuration of the surface of the earth from the
,. . .,,...,... Inequality in
distribution of the animals now inhabiting its dif- the Ages of dif-
ferent countries, it is essential to understand that
the different classes into which vertebrate animals
are divided (and these only will be taken into consideration in the
present volume) have a very different past history; the lower
groups, such as fishes, reptiles, and amphibians being much older
types than mammals and birds, and having attained their maximum
development at a time when the two latter formed but a small
minority of the earth's population.
There is a considerable probability that at least a very
large proportion of the animals that have populated the globe in
8 INTRODUCTORY. [CHAP,
the later geological epochs originated high up in the northern
hemisphere, if not, indeed, in the neighbourhood of the pole itself
(which is known to have enjoyed a genial climate during the
Tertiary period), and that they gradually migrated southwards in
a series of waves, probably under pressure of the development of
new and higher types in high latitudes; and it is to such southerly
migrations that the present marked differentiation of the fauna of
different parts of the earth's surface is chiefly due. Whether such
a northerly origin held good for the terrestrial life of the Secondary
epoch, there are no means of determining ; but it would appear
that the higher animals (which were chiefly reptiles) of that epoch
were very similar throughout the world, and that the differentiation
of faunas had scarcely, if at all, commenced. Instances of this
are afforded, as noticed in the sequel, by the occurrence of an
identical genus of mammal (Tritylodori) in the lower Secondary
rocks of Europe and South Africa ; as well as by the close alliance
between the dinosaurian reptiles from the Jurassic rocks of
Europe, North America, Argentina, India, and Madagascar (the
genera being in some cases identical), and likewise between
the anomodont reptiles of the Trias of Europe and the early
Secondary rocks of South Africa and India.
Reptiles belonging to orders still existing, such as crocodiles
and chelonians (tortoises and turtles), had already attained a high
degree of development in the Eocene division of the Tertiary
period, when many genera now living had already made their
appearance, whereas at that time the mammals were quite differ-
ent from the modern forms. At the same time the side-necked
tortoises (Pleurodira) were the dominant forms in the northern
hemisphere, whereas they have now all migrated to southern lands,
their place in the north being taken by the more specialised
S-necked group (Cryptodira). This, however, is not all, for the
rhynchocephalians, of which the sole existing representative is
the New Zealand tuatera (Sphenodori), attained their maximum
development in the northern hemisphere during the early part of
the Secondary epoch, and their southern migration must have
taken place during some portion of the same period. The
palaeontological history of amphibians is still very imperfectly
known, but since the group as a whole is an ancient one, the
I.] DISTRIBUTION OF GROUPS DISSIMILAR. 9
migrations of the earlier forms must likewise probably have taken
place at an early epoch.
With mammals the case is very different. The earliest known
forms, which date from the Triassic and Jurassic rocks, are chiefly
marsupials and forms apparently allied to the monotremes, and it
is probable that most of the descendants of these, as is more fully
indicated in the sequel, migrated southwards during the early part
of the Tertiary epoch, to find in Australasia a refuge from the
competition of higher forms. Of the higher placental mammals,
none of the modern types make their appearance before the
Oligocene and Miocene periods, while many do not antedate the
Pliocene. Their southern migrations accordingly took place later
on in the Tertiary period, one of the earliest movements being the
wandering of lemuroids, insectivores, and civet-like carnivores
into South Africa and Madagascar. On the other hand, many
other higher types, such as the hippopotami, giraffes, and antelopes,
which were abundant in Europe and southern Asia during the
Pliocene, only left their more northern homes to find a permanent
abiding place in Africa at a very late epoch in the earth's history.
Although the glacial epoch probably had a large share in the
southern movements of the later Tertiary mammals, some cause
with which we are unacquainted would appear to have been the
impelling power at earlier epochs. But be this as it may, it is
quite evident that a continuous series of waves of migrations of
animal life has taken place throughout a very long portion of the
earth's history. Similar migrations are also evident in the case of
birds (which are likewise a modern group), many forms, such as
secretary-birds and trogons, now exclusively southern in their
distribution, being represented in Europe during the middle part of
the Tertiary period.
From this inequality in the ages, and consequently in the date
of migration, of different groups of animals, it is
manifest that there will be great differences in the
present distribution of such groups; and hence it different
. . .. , Geographical
will be evident that zoological provinces indicated Distribution.
by one group will not hold good for others. Notable
instances of this are afforded by the very different divisions into
which the globe is divided by those who take mammals, reptiles,
10 INTRODUCTORY. [CHAP.
or amphibians as their standards. Between birds and mammals,
as might have been expected from the comparatively recent high
development of these groups, there is much greater accord.
Birds, however, differ from mammals (with the exception of bats)
in their power of flight, which enables many of them to cross
wide ocean-tracts, and therefore renders them less valuable as
indicative of the changes that have taken place in the distribution
of land and water than the latter, which, as a rule, require
direct means of land transit for their wanderings.
Excluding man (and for the most part bats) and likewise the
aquatic forms, such as seals, whales, and porpoises,
o/ Mamma" niammals are the animals best adapted for parcelling
in Geographi- out the globe into zoological provinces for two chief
cal Distribu- 3 _. . , r , . , ,
tion. reasons. Firstly, they form a group which only at-
tained its maximum development at a comparatively
late epoch of the earth's history; and, secondly, their movements
are mainly limited by the extent of the land-surfaces of the globe
which were in actual communication at the time of such migra-
tions. Consequently they afford the safest and truest indications
of the latest changes which have taken place in the distribution
of land and water.
As reference in the following pages will constantly have to be
. fi made to the various groups of mammals, it will be
tion of Mam- well to give a list in this place of the chief ordinal
and subordinal groups into which the class is
divided ; such as are now extinct being indicated by an asterisk.
The list stands as follows, viz. :
i. Order PRIMATES. Apes, Monkeys, and Lemurs.
1 Suborder ANTHROPOIDEA. Apes and Monkeys.
2 LEMUROIDEA. Lemurs.
ii. Order CHIROPTERA. Bats.
1 Suborder MEGACHIROPTERA. Fruit-bats.
2 ,, MICROCHIROPTERA. Insectivorous Bats.
iii. Order INSECTIVORA. Insectivores.
1 Suborder DERMOPTERA. Flying-Lemurs.
2 ,, INSECTIVORA VERA. Shrews, Moles,
Hedgehogs, etc.
I.] CLASSIFICATION OF MAMMALS. II
iv. Order CARNIVORA. Carnivores.
1 Suborder CARNIVORA VERA. Cats, Dogs, Bears,
Weasels, etc.
2 PINNIPEDIA. Seals and Walruses.
3 *CREODONTA. Hyanodon, etc.
v. Order RODENTIA. Rodents.
1 Suborder SCIUROMORPHA. Squirrels, Marmots, and
Beavers.
2 MYOMORPHA. Dormice, Mice, and Jer-
boas.
3 HYSTRICOMORPHA. Porcupines, Agutis,
Cavies, etc.
4 ,, LAGOMORPHA. Picas and Hares.
vi. Order UNGULATA. Hoofed Mammals.
1 Suborder ARTIODACTYLA. Antelopes, Camels, Pigs,
etc.
2 ,, PERISSODACTYLA. Horses, Tapirs, and
Rhinoceroses.
3 ,, *LITOPTERNA. Macrauchenia, etc.
4 *ASTRAPOTHERIA. Astrapotherium, etc.
5 *PYROTHERIA. Pyrotherium.
6 *TOXODONTIA. Toxodon, etc.
7 ,, HYRACOIDEA. Hyraces.
8 ,, PROBOSCIDEA. Elephants and Mastodons.
9 ,, *AMBLYPODA. Coryphodon, etc.
vii. Order SIRENIA. Manatis and Dugongs.
viii. CETACEA. Whales and Porpoises,
ix. EDENTATA. Edentates.
x. ,, EFFODIENTIA. Aard-varks and Pangolins.
xi. ,, MARSUPIALIA. Pouched Mammals.
1 Suborder DIPROTODONTIA. Kangaroos, Phalangers,
and Wombats.
2 ,, POLYPROTODONTIA. Dasyures, Bandicoots,
etc.
xii. Order MONOTREMATA. Egg-laying Mammals,
xiii. *MULTITUBERCULATA. Pldgiciulax, Tritylodon, etc.
12 INTRODUCTORY. [CHAP.
These orders are further subdivided into families and genera.
In regard to the number of the latter of these, there is still a con-
siderable difference of opinion among naturalists ; but in the
present work those adopted in Flower and Lydekker's Study of
Mammals 1 will be in the main adhered to, with such corrections
and additions as are necessary owing to recent emendations in
nomenclature or to the discovery of new forms.
Omitting from consideration the purely aquatic and volant
members of the class, the most effectual barriers to
Dispersal of the dispersal of mammals are formed by channels
Mammals.
their being crossed by swimming. And it is this inability to
traverse any extent of water that renders what are known as
oceanic islands practically devoid of all mammalian life, with
the exception of a few bats and small rodents ; the latter animals
having apparently some means of dispersal not common to other
members of this class. Oceanic islands, it may be explained, are
such as rise from great depths in the ocean, and are composed,
almost invariably, either of volcanic rocks or of coral. They show,
for the most part, no decisive evidence of having been connected
with any continental land, and thus have never been enabled to
receive a mammalian fauna 2 . In marked distinction to these are
the so-called continental islands, such as Madagascar and Great
Britain, which, both from the evidence of their mammalian fauna
and their geological conformation, have indubitably been in direct
communication with the adjacent continent at no very distant
epoch. As a rule, the channels between such islands and the
mainland are comparatively shallow, so that a moderate degree of
upheaval would place the two in direct connection.
The relative depth of the channel between two islands, or
between an island and a continent is indeed of much more im-
portance in regard to the dispersal of mammals than is its width.
This is best exemplified by the well-known case of "Wallace's
line " in the Malayan archipelago ; that name being applied to
1 London, 1891.
2 There is a possibility that some oceanic islands may have been connected
with continents, and that their original mammalian fauna has been destroyed
by submergence.
I.] BARRIERS TO DISPERSAL. 13
the narrow strait separating the islands of Bali and Lombok, and
its northward continuation, the Makassar Strait, dividing Borneo
from Celebes. Although the two former islands are extremely
close together, while Celebes is much less widely separated from
Borneo than is the latter from Sumatra, yet the faunas of Lombok
and Celebes are markedly distinct from those of the islands lying
to the north and west of Wallace's line. Soundings show that the
Makassar Strait, and likewise the Bali-Lombok Strait are of greater
depth than the channels separating the other islands of the archi-
pelago; and consequently that Wallace's line indicates a very
old barrier which has long been impassable to the majority of
mammals.
That continental islands have received the great bulk of their
mammalian fauna by means of a more or less complete land-
connection with the mainland, is perfectly evident. Nevertheless,
there are cases where certain mammals have crossed the inter-
vening channel, either by swimming, or by having been carried
across on natural rafts of some kind ; an instance of this nature
being exemplified by the occurrence of an African type of pig in
Madagascar. It thus becomes a question of considerable interest
to ascertain what stretches of sea large mammals are capable of
crossing. It is stated that the jaguar has been known to swim
across the Rio de la Plata, which at its mouth is something like
eighty miles across ; and a polar bear has been observed swim-
ming at a distance of twenty miles from land in Bering Strait.
The tiger frequently crosses the narrower channels in the Sandar-
bans of Lower Bengal; and both deer, pigs, and elephants are
good swimmers. The latter animals have, indeed, been known to
swim for six hours at a stretch, and, with a rest, for upwards of
nine ; but their rate of progress is extremely slow, and probably
exceeds but little, if at all, a mile an hour. The Palk Strait,
which is considerably less than forty miles in width at its narrowest
part, has formed an effectual barrier to the passage of the tiger
from India into Ceylon; and it may accordingly be assumed
that about twenty miles is the utmost limit which mammals are
likely to cross by swimming, even when favoured by currents.
Such passages as these must, however, be of very rare occur-
rence, for a terrestrial mammal is not likely to take it into its head
14 INTRODUCTORY. [CHAP.
to swim straight out to sea in an unknown direction. Moreover,
supposing a mammal new to a particular island to have arrived
there by swimming, unless it happen to be a pregnant female, or
unless another individual of the same species but of the opposite
sex should arrive soon after (a most unlikely event), it would in
due course die without being able to propagate its kind. And
even if it should happen to be a pregnant female, there would be
no certainty that its offspring, if but one in number, should be of
the opposite sex to its parent. Accordingly, it would seem that
the population of islands by mammals that have arrived by swim-
ming must be a very rare event indeed. Rafts may be of more
importance. Mr Aplin, in the Proc. Zool. Soc. for 1894, mentions
that jaguars and pumas are frequently transported by them from
one side of the Rio de la Plata to the other; and in the rainy
season many are to be seen off the northern coast of Borneo,
some of which may be as much as thirty yards in length. Still
such rafts are not likely to cross straits, except when there is a
current setting from one bank to the other.
Before leaving this part of the subject, it must be mentioned
that the degree of difference between the fauna of an island and
that of the adjacent continent, or between the faunas of two
islands, affords a most important clue as to the relative date of the
land-connection between them. Madagascar, for instance, has a
mammalian fauna which although clearly derived from Africa, is
yet so different from that now inhabiting the mainland, that the
land-connection between the two must have been broken up at an
epoch comparatively remote. Ceylon and India present a condition
in respect of their faunas intermediate between the last and that of
Great Britain as compared to the Continent. In the latter instance,
with the exception of a single Irish weasel, all the mammals are
identical with species now inhabiting the Continent, thus proving
that the connection has been a comparatively recent one ; although
the peculiar weasel indicates that the separation between Ireland
and Britain has been of sufficient duration to admit of the develop-
ment of a distinct specific type in the former country.
Although large rivers like the Amazon and La Plata un-
doubtedly form serious barriers to the migration of mammals, yet
these are not so insuperable as might at first sight be supposed,
I.] BARRIERS TO DISPERSAL. 15
owing to the fact that in districts where vegetation is luxuriant,
huge natural rafts are formed by the trunks of trees intermingled
with vegetable matter, upon which numbers of animals may be
borne down stream, and thus transferred from one bank to the
other. Nevertheless, in treeless districts, or near their mouths,
large rivers afford absolutely impassable barriers to the movements
of mammals. In South America, for instance, even such an
aquatic creature as the carpincho, or capibara (ffydrochcerus) has
been unable to cross the Plata river from Uruguay into the
Argentine, while, conversely the viscacha (Lagostomus) of Argentina
is prevented by the same river from reaching Uruguay.
Deserts are, perhaps, even more impracticable than rivers ; the
Sahara which was long supposed to have been the site of an
ancient sea, although it has really been a desert since very remote
ages having apparently formed a barrier preventing the fusion of
the mammals of North Africa with those to the south of that tract
since at least the Pliocene epoch. It must not, however, be sup-
posed that what are desert-tracts at the present day have always
been such, the existence of a fossil chimpanzee in North-Western
India during the Pliocene period indicating that the open sandy
plains of the Punjab were at that time covered with dense tropical
forests, and probably that the same was the case with parts of
Syria and Arabia.
Before taking leave of seas and deserts, it should be mentioned
that in the polar regions ice may act in lieu of a land-connection
to enable mammals to pass from one country to another. On this
subject Dr Heilprin writes that " the reindeer is stated to cross
the Bering Strait by way of the Aleutian Islands and the Frozen
Sea, and in a somewhat similar manner the musk-ox finds its way
to Melville Island; it is, however, somewhat singular that the last-
named animal, despite its long ice-journeys, never manages to
reach either the continent of Asia or Greenland."
High mountain ranges form an effectual barrier to the migration
of mammals, not only on account of the physical difficulties of
crossing them, but likewise by the lowness of the temperature at
great altitudes, coupled with the absence of proper food, being
fatal to the existence of many. As already stated, however,
mountain-ranges are much more far-reaching in their effects on such
l6 INTRODUCTORY. [CHAP.
migrations when, as in the Old World, their trend is from west to
east, than when, as in America, they run from north to south, and
thus do not interfere with the free movements of plain-dwelling
animals on either side. In many instances the mammals inhabit-
ing each of the isolated mountain-chains, as those of Europe, are
to a great extent specifically identical one with another, not having
had time to become modified into distinct species since they
reached their present haunts at the close of the glacial period.
Even among these, however, there are indications of the com-
mencement of specific differences, the chamois of the Caucasus
forming a variety differing somewhat from the typical Alpine race.
Where the isolation has been longer, as in the case of the fauna
of the highlands of Tibet, the difference is much more strongly
marked ; the mammalian fauna in this instance being as peculiar
and distinct as that of many ancient continental islands.
Probably ever since man has existed in any numbers on the
influence of glbe he has been exerting a more or less strongly-
ManonDistri- marked influence on the distribution of animals,
either by destroying them, or by conveying them to
countries or districts which are not their natural home. By the
involuntary aid of man the common rat and mouse, which belong
to a genus unknown in the New World, have been conveyed to
every country in the globe ; while the rabbit has been carried to
the Antipodes, where it has flourished and increased in an
unprecedented manner. Cattle and horses have been introduced
into South America, Australia, and other countries where they
were naturally unknown, and by their rapid increase have shown
that the absence of particular animals from particular districts is
not necessarily due to their being unsuited to live there, but rather
to the fact that they have been unable to find their way thither.
The fallow-deer, again, has been imported from its Mediterranean
home into England and other countries of northern Europe; while
goats and pigs have been carried to a number of oceanic islands,
where they have done irreparable harm in exterminating the native
fauna and flora.
In all these instances the fact of the introduction has always
been more or less clearly known, and therefore no difficulty arises
as to what are native and what are introduced forms. Very
I.] MAN AND DISTRIBUTION. 1 7
different, however, is the case with the islands of the Malay Archi-
pelago, where the natives, who have a wonderful facility for
taming animals, have carried a species peculiar to one district or
island to localities where it is quite unknown as a native ; and in
consequence of this transportation and acclimatisation it is pro-
bable that several mammals have been given a habitat to which
they have not the most remote right. To the Malays is due the
introduction of the small civet known as the rasse into Mada-
gascar. Whether the dingo, or native dog of Australia, was intro-
duced at an exceedingly remote era by the original colonisers of
that island, or whether it is truly indigenous, is a question that
will probably never be decisively answered. It is likewise quite
impossible to say what part man may have played in the extermi-
nation of the large mammals that inhabited Europe about the
close of the glacial period, but it seems quite probable that he
may have had a considerable share in their destruction. Be this
as it may, the domestication of certain mammals has undoubtedly
had the effect of destroying the wild race, as is remarkably ex-
emplified by the two existing species of camel, of neither of which
do we know the original habitat. The original European wild ox
unless, indeed, the half-wild cattle of the British parks be its
direct descendants has likewise disappeared at some unknown
epoch owing to the hand of man. Although other mammals, such
as the quagga (Equus quagga}, Burchell's rhinoceros (Rhinoceros
simus), and the blaubok (Hippotragus leucophaus) have been
almost or completely exterminated by human agency in South
Africa, while the American bison has been practically swept away
from its native prairies, yet in all these instances there is a more
or less full record of the original range of the creatures. In
other cases also mammals have been utterly exterminated by
human agency from countries of which they were originally in-
habitants, as is exemplified by the disappearance from the British
Islands of the bear, the wolf, the beaver, and the wild boar within
the historic period, although they still survive in other parts of
their habitat. In these particular instances there is fortunately
full evidence as to the former existence of these animals in
Britain ; but it is highly probable that in more remote countries
mammals have been exterminated without any record being left
L. 2
1 8 INTRODUCTORY. [CHAP.
of their existence, so that the full extent of their range, if they be
surviving forms, can now never be ascertained.
To quote the words of Dr Wallace, it is evident that in the
present day we live in an impoverished epoch, so
Extinction
of the larger iar as the larger mammals are concerned, as com-
pared with the Plistocene era ; this being true not
only as regards the northern half of the Old World,
but likewise North and South America, as well as Australia.
From the northern half of the Old World have disappeared the
mammoth, the elasmothere, the woolly and other species of
rhinoceros, the sabre-toothed tigers, etc.; North America has lost
the megalonyx and the Ohio mastodon ; from South America the
glyptodonts, mylodons, the megalothere, and the macrauchenia have
been swept away ; while Australia no longer possesses the dipro-
todon and various gigantic species of kangaroos and wombats.
In the northern hemisphere this impoverishment of the fauna has
been very generally attributed to the effects of the glacial period,
but although this may have been a partial cause, it can hardly be
the only one. The mammoth, for instance, certainly lived during
a considerable portion of the glacial epoch, and if it survived thus
far, why should it have disappeared at the close? Moreover, all
the European mastodons and the southern elephant (Elephas
meridionalis] died out before the incoming of glacial conditions ;
and the same is true of all the extinct elephants and mastodons of
southern Asia. Further, a large number of English geologists
believe the brick-earths of the Thames valley, which contain
remains of rhinoceroses and elephants in abundance, to be of
post-glacial age. As regards the southern hemisphere, it can
hardly be contended that glacial conditions prevailed there at the
same time as in the northern half of the world.
It is thus evident that although a very great number of large
mammals were exterminated (perhaps partly by the aid of human
agency) at the close of the Plistocene period, when the group
had attained its maximum development as regards the bodily size
of its members, yet other large forms had been steadily dying
out in previous epochs. And it would seem that there must
be some general deep-seated cause affecting the life of a species
with which we are at present' unacquainted. Indeed, as there
I.] DISTRIBUTIONAL AREAS. 19
is a term to the life of an individual, what is more natural than
that there should also be one to the existence of a species ? It still
remains, indeed, to account for the fact that the larger Plistocene
mammals had no successors in the greater part of the world, but
perhaps this is in some way connected with the advent of man.
Before coming to the consideration of the zoological divisions
into which, from the present geographical distribu-
tion of mammals, the world may be mapped out, it tionai Areas of
is necessary to devote a brief space to the considera- Genera^ and
tion of two other points ; the first relating to the
relative size of the distributional area of genera and species, and
the second to the permanency of ocean-basins and continents.
As regards the first point, it appears to be true in the case of
mammals (although not of all other groups) that every species has
a continuous distributional area, except where this has been broken
up by human destructiveness. It is not meant by this that every
part of such area is inhabited by the particular species, as
"station" renders this impracticable; but merely that the whole
area is ranged over by the species in such spots as are suited to
its particular mode of life. Great variation obtains, however, in
regard to the size of such distributional area; and it will be
obvious that the size of the area varies directly as the adaptability
of the species to different climatic and other physical conditions.
Perhaps the most important condition of all is the possibility of
obtaining suitable food ; and in this respect carnivorous mammals
are in a far better position than any other members of their class,
since the kind of animal on which they prey is immaterial. This
will readily account for the extensive geographical ranges enjoyed
by the puma and the tiger, which, as stated on page 5, embrace
almost every degree of latitude. Animals with such a wide dis-
tribution are of but little use to the student of geographical
distribution. Moreover, it will generally be found that species
with a wide range belong to large genera having a still more
extensive distributional area; this being markedly the case with
the puma and the tiger ; the genus Felts being one of the largest
in the class, and ranging over the whole world with the exception
of Australasia. Such cosmopolitan genera are likewise almost
valueless to the distributionist.
2 2
20 INTRODUCTORY. [CHAP.
On the other hand, species with a small distributional area
usually belong to small genera, of which they may be the only
representatives. Instances of this nature are afforded by the
panda (sElurus] and binturong (Arctictis) of the eastern Himalaya,
and the parti-coloured bear (^Eluropus] and chiru antelope (Pan-
tholops] of the Tibetan plateau. Although such single representa-
tives of genera are highly important to the study of distributional
zoology, of vastly greater importance are small genera having two
or more species living in widely separated areas. Examples of
such are to be found among the porcupines of the genus Atherura,
of which one species is Malayan and the other two West and
Central African ; in the mice of the genus Golunda, with one
African and one Indian representative ; and likewise by the tapirs
(Tapirus\ of which there is one Malayan, and several tropical
American species. These examples of " discontinuous distribu-
tion " among genera are of the very highest import to the science ;
since they clearly indicate that some of the lands lying between its
present disconnected distributional areas must have formerly been
the habitat of the genus, and thus enable important conclusions to
be drawn as to the former land-connections between such areas.
Both in the case of the tapirs and of the brush-tailed porcupines,
remains of extinct species have been discovered in the intermediate
areas.
Equally important are families, either large or small, which
contain two or more closely allied small genera respectively con-
fined to distant areas. As an instance of a large family containing
such allied genera, may be cited the Viverridce, among which the
true linsangs (Linsangd) are represented by several species from
the Eastern Himalaya and the Malayan countries, while the
closely-allied Poianais confined to West Africa. The chevrotains
(Tragulidee), on the other hand, form a small family with a dis-
continuous distribution ; one genus (Tragulus) being now Oriental,
while the other (Dorcatheriuni) is West African. Here it is quite
evident, of course, that the distributional area of the family must
once have been continuous ; and, as a matter of fact, remains of
both genera occur in the Pliocene of India, those of the latter being
also found in the European Miocene.
In other families with a discontinuous distribution, as in the
I.] CENTRES OF EVOLUTION. 21
rodent family Octodontida, which is now mainly confined to Africa
south of the Sahara, and Central and South America, the genera
may be less closely allied, although sufficiently so to indicate
a continuous distributional area, or rather a common centre of
dispersal, at no very remote epoch.
Allied families, with a small number of genera, severally con-
fined to distant localities are likewise of the highest value in
building up the former history of the globe. As examples of this
nature may be cited the tree-shrews (Tupaiida) of the Oriental
countries and the jumping shrews (Macroscelidida) of Africa on the
one hand, and the Solenodontidce of the West India islands, and
the Centetidce of Madagascar on the other. Such families must
clearly have had a common centre of origin and dispersal ; the
available evidence suggesting that in the case of the two former
such centre was Europe.
Although of far less common occurrence than among families
or genera, discontinuous distribution in an order is perhaps of even
more importance than either of the other cases, as it implies a
greater interval of time since the original dispersal took place, and,
therefore, carries back such conclusions as can be drawn in regard
to former land-connections to a still earlier epoch. Among
mammals the only instance of this nature is to be found in the
marsupials 1 , of which two families are American (and mainly
South and Central American), while all the others are confined to
Australasia and some of the adjacent Malayan islands. In this
case also there is abundant evidence of the wide distribution of
the whole group in former epochs of the earth's history.
This last instance leads on to the consideration of what may
be termed "centres of evolution." In a previous
paragraph it has been stated that, according to the " f
available evidence, a very large proportion, if not
the whole, of the terrestrial mammalian life of the globe has
originated in the northern hemisphere, from which it has spread
southwards in a continuous successive series of waves. When,
however, certain groups of mammals had once reached the more
1 In this work the Effodientia are separated from the Edentata; but when
these are united, there is a second instance.
22 INTRODUCTORY. [CHAP.
remote parts of the southern hemisphere, where they were free
from the competition of the higher forms, and met with favourable
conditions, they seemed to take a new lease of life, and attained a
fulness and variety of development which they had never reached
before. As a rule, more or less complete isolation has been a
dominant feature of this development; of which the best and most
striking instance is that of the marsupials in Australasia. That
area may accordingly be called the marsupial evolutionary centre.
Scarcely less striking is the instance of the edentates (of which the
original derivation is unknown) in South America, where, in
company with certain peculiar extinct groups of ungulates, they
attained an extraordinary development, both as regards the
number of specific, generic, and family types, and likewise in
respect of the bodily size of some of its members. This second
area may be termed the evolutionary centre of the edentates. A
third great centre is constituted by Europe, Asia, and North
America, which appear to have been the main developmental
centre of the higher mammals, and may accordingly be named the
placental evolutionary centre. Two other minor centres are
respectively indicated by Madagascar and Africa south of the
Sahara : the former as being the headquarters of the lemurs, may
appropriately be spoken of as the lemuroid centre, while the
great development of the antelopes in Africa suggests the name of
the antelopine evolutionary centre for that continent.
The circumstance that throughout the greater part of North
America and Europe a very large proportion of the
of Conine nts y continents are built up of sedimentary strata of
and Ocean- marine origin, naturally led geologists in the early
Ba.si.ns. . . . 1 1*1
days of their science to the conclusion that every
part of the land had at one time been deep ocean, and every
stretch of ocean dry land. More careful study led, however,
to the belief that this idea was not founded on fact, and that
although it was perfectly true that what are now continents had
been many times under the sea, yet that such areas had never
formed abyssal ocean-depths ; and, conversely, that such ocean-
depths had never been dry land. In addition to many other lines
of evidence, this view of the permanency of continents and ocean-
basins is strongly supported by the circumstance that nearly all
I.] CONTINENTS AND OCEAN-BASINS. 23
oceanic islands are either of volcanic or coral origin, and do not
contain sedimentary rocks; and also that deposits analogous to
those laid down in the deepest ocean beds are generally wanting
from among the sedimentary series of rocks of which the continents
and islands are composed. A further argument was afforded by
the discovery that the greater portion of peninsular India and
South Africa has been dry land since the Palaeozoic epoch.
As is so commonly the case in similar instances, the promulga-
tors of the doctrine of the permanency of continents and ocean-
basins pressed their hypothesis too far; and it is now evident
that although the doctrine is true as a whole, and more especially
as regards the later stages of the earth's history, yet it requires
very considerable modification from the original form in which it
was advanced. In the first place, it has been shown that crystal-
line granitic and gneissic rocks occur in the Seychelles, which were
formerly regarded as true oceanic islands ; and, secondly, deep-sea
deposits have been discovered in the West Indies and the Solomon
Islands. Moreover, various lines of evidence indicate that during
the Jurassic and Cretaceous epochs there was a continuous land-
connection between Africa (by way of Madagascar and the
Seychelles) and India; while at some time in the Secondary era,
in the opinion of Drs Neumayr and Blanford, South America and
South Africa were in communication across the South Atlantic.
The latter connection appears, indeed, to have been a survival
from an older Palaeozoic girdle of land which, from the evidence of
fossil floras, seems to have existed in low latitudes round nearly
three-quarters the circumference of the globe, and which was cut
oft" from the land to the north. There is, moreover, the possibility
of a Tertiary connection of Australia with Patagonia by way of
Polynesia, to which allusion is made in the third chapter. Then,
again, the recent investigations of Dr J. W. Gregory 1 on the fossil
corals of the West Indies have afforded strong support to the view
that the Atlantic is of comparatively recent origin. After referring
to the remarkable resemblance between the existing fauna of the
West Indian seas and that of the Miocene deposits of the Mediter-
ranean basin, Dr Gregory 2 observes that the sea-urchins, or
1 Quart. Joitrn. Geol. Soc. vol. LI. pp. 255 312 (1895).
2 Ibid., pp. 306, 307.
24 INTRODUCTORY. [CHAP.
echinoderms, yield still more conclusive evidence. "As I have
previously pointed out," he writes, "the intimate affinity between
those of the West Indies and the Mediterranean can only be
explained by the assumption of the existence of a shallow-water
connection across the Central Atlantic in at latest Miocene
times. That the fauna did not follow along the shores of the North
Atlantic basin, is shown by its absence from the northern Miocenes
of Europe and North America. The evidence now adduced from
the fossil corals of Barbados lends support to this view, as showing
that the West Indian fauna is only a fragment of that of the
Mediterranean Miocene, and has received nothing from the
Pacific. This is in full agreement with Prof. Suess's theory that
the Atlantic is of comparatively recent geological age, and arose
by the gradual enlargement of two bays which ran north and south
from a sea that once extended across the Mid-Atlantic from
Europe to America, including both the Mediterranean and the
Caribbean Sea."
The question of the southward extension of America, Africa,
and Australia to join the Antarctic continent during Tertiary times
is alluded to in the sequel.
Summing up the evidence in regard to the permanency of
oceans and continents, Dr Blanford 1 several years ago observed
" that whilst the general permanence of ocean-basins and conti-
nental areas cannot be said to be established on anything like
firm proof, the general evidence in favour of this view is very
strong. But there is no evidence whatever in favour of the
extreme view accepted by some physicists and geologists that
every ocean-bed now more than 1000 fathoms deep has always
been ocean, and that no part of the continental area has ever been
beneath the deep sea. Not only is there clear proof that some
land-areas lying within continental limits have at a comparatively
recent date been submerged over 1000 fathoms, whilst sea-bottoms
now over 1000 fathoms deep must have been land in part of the
Tertiary era, but there are a mass of facts both geological and
biological in favour of land-connection having formerly existed in
certain cases across what are now broad and deep oceans."
1 Appendix, No. 8, p. 107.
I.] ZOOLOGICAL REALMS. 25
Although much previous work had been done on the subject,
the first real attempt to divide the land-areas of the
, , . i-i Zoological
globe into zoological provinces, or regions, was made Realms and
by Dr P. L. Sclater 1 in 1858. According to this Regions '
scheme, which was mainly based on the study of Passerine birds,
the world was parcelled out into the following six zoological
regions, viz.:
1. Palczarctic ; Europe, Northern Africa, Northern and Cen-
tral Asia.
2. Ethiopian ; Africa south of the Atlas, and Madagascar.
3. Indian, renamed Oriental by Dr Wallace; India, South-
eastern Asia, and part of the Malay Archipelago.
4. Australian ; Australia, with New Guinea and the adjacent
islands, New Zealand, and Polynesia.
5. Nearctic ; America as far south as Mexico.
6. Neotropical ; Central and South America, with the West
Indies.
This scheme, which has been adopted and developed in the
brilliant writings of Dr Wallace, has the important merit that it
coincides to a great extent with the leading geographical divisions
of the globe. It has, however, the serious drawback that it gives
no greater rank to Australasia and South America than to the other
divisions ; whilst the remarkable difference between the fauna of
Africa and Madagascar is overlooked. Further, the northern parts
of America are widely separated from those of Europe and Asia
to which they are faunistically extremely close.
It should be added that in Dr Sclater's scheme the first four
regions, or those belonging to the Old World, were brigaded
together under the title of PAL^OG^EA, while the two last, or New
World regions, were bracketed as NEOG^EA.
The next important classification was one propounded in 1868
by Professor Huxley 2 , who, basing his conclusions on the distri-
bution of the game-birds, divided the world into a northern and a
southern division, taking the name of ARCTOG^EA for the former,
and NOTOG^EA for the latter ; Notogaea being further sub-divided
into a Novo-Zelanian (New Zealand), Australian, and Austro-
1 Appendix, No. 26. ' 2 Ibid., No. 18.
26 INTRODUCTORY. [CHAP.
Columbian region, the latter being equivalent to the Neotropical
of Sclater.
Six years later, Dr Sclater 1 , who had by this time turned his
attention to the distribution of mammals, proposed to group the
regions he had previously named under three larger divisions,
making a fourth division for New Zealand and Polynesia. This
scheme is as follows, viz. :
I. ARCTOG^EA. Palsearctic, Nearctic, Oriental, and Ethiopian
regions.
II. DENDROG^A. Neotropical region.
III. ANTARCTOG^EA. Australian region (exclusive of New
Zealand and Polynesia).
IV. ORNITHOG^EA. New Zealand and Polynesian region.
So far as mammals are concerned, this scheme was a great
advance on the first one, although the distinctness of Madagascar
was not recognised, while the Palasarctic and Nearctic regions
were still maintained. Most of the names for the major divisions
are, however, open to objection.
In 1878 Dr Heilprin 2 , who does not employ these larger
groups, proposed, after a suggestion of Professor A. Newton, to
unite Dr Sclater's Palsearctic and Nearctic regions under the
common title of the Holarctic region ; separating, however, from
the former a "transitional" Mediterranean region, and from the
latter a similar Sonoran region.
A further step was made in 1890 by Dr Blanford 8 , who pro-
posed the following scheme, viz. :
I. Australian region.
II. South American region.
III. Arctogaan region ; this being divided into Malagasy,
Ethiopian, Oriental, Aquilonian ( Palaearctic and northern part
of Nearctic), and Medio-Columbian ( = Sonoran).
Several other minor modifications have been suggested from
mammalian evidence, Dr Allen 4 in 1892 reviving the view that the
Oriental and Ethiopian regions should be united, under the name
of the Indo-African ; but the next most important memoir is that
1 Appendix, No. 27. 2 Ibid., No. 17.
3 Ibid., No. 8, p. 76. 4 Ibid., No. 2.
I.] REALMS AND REGIONS. 2J
of Dr Hart Merriam 1 in 1892, whose views are fully discussed in
the sequel.
It will accordingly suffice for our present purpose to say that in
1893 an anonymous writer 2 proposed to take the terms NOTOG^EA,
NEOG^A, and ARCTOG^A to indicate the three major divisions of
Dr Blanford's classification ; the same terms being used by Mr
W. L. Sclater 3 in a nearly similar sense.
The following scheme is the one adopted in the present
volume, viz. :
I. NOTOG^EIC REALM. i. Australian Region.
2. Polynesian Region.
3. Hawaiian Region.
4. Austro-Malayan Region.
II. NEOG^EIC REALM. Neotropical Region.
III. ARCTOG^EIC REALM. i. Malagasy Region.
2. Ethiopian Region.
3. Oriental Region.
4. Holarctic Region.
5. Sonoran Region.
It will be noticed that the three realms correspond to the three
great evolutionary centres of mammals alluded to in an earlier
page.
It may be added that, in a work expressly devoted to the
geographical distribution of mammals, it will be unnecessary to
allude to the schemes proposed on the evidence of other groups of
animals, and we may accordingly proceed forthwith to the con-
sideration of the distinctive features of the various realms and
regions here adopted.
1 Appendix, No. 19. 2 Ibid., No. 4, p. 289. 3 Ibid., No. 28.
CHAPTER II.
THE NOTOG^IC REALM.
Definition and Characters of the Realm Australian Region Monotremes
Marsupials Rodents Carnivores Ungulates Bats List of Australian
and Papuan Genera Polynesian Region Hawaiian Region Austro-
Malayan Region Palaeontological History of Marsupials How Australia
received its Fauna.
THE term Notogaea was first proposed, as stated in the preced-
ing chapter, by Professor Huxley 1 , to include not only the
Australian region of Dr Sclater, but likewise the Neotropical region
(Austro-Columbia) ; but an anonymous writer 2 appears to have
been the first to restrict it to the former of these areas 3 . This
view, as being, on the whole, the most convenient, is adopted here;
and the Notogasic realm may accordingly be taken as the first of
the three primary zoological divisions of the globe, and as equiva-
lent to the Australian region of Drs Sclater and Wallace. Accord-
ing to the latter writer 4 , " its central and most important masses
consist of Australia and New Guinea, in which the main features
of the region are fully developed. To the north-west it extends to
Celebes, in which a large proportion of the Australian characters
have disappeared, while Oriental types are mingled with them to
such an extent that it is rather difficult to determine where to
locate it. To the south-east it includes New Zealand, which is in
some respects so peculiar that it has even been proposed to con-
stitute it a distinct region. On the east it embraces the whole of
Oceania [Polynesia] to the Marquesas and Sandwich Islands,
1 Appendix, No. 18. ' 2 Ibid., No. 4.
3 The term Antarctogsea has been proposed by Dr Sclater (Appendix,
No. 27, p. 214), for this area, but it is not a happy one.
4 Appendix, No. 32, vol. i., p. 387.
CHAP. II.] THE NOTOG/EIC REALM : ITS CHARACTER. 29
where a very scanty and often peculiar fauna must be affiliated to
the general Australian type." To the north-east the line of de-
marcation of the realm from the Oriental region of Arctogsea has
been finally fixed at the deep channel separating the islands of
Celebes and Lombok on the one side from those of Borneo and
Bali (at the extremity of Java) on the other ; this division being
now well known under the name of " Wallace's line."
All writers are, however, by no means agreed as to the right of
the whole of the area thus indicated to form a single zoological
division. Before the publication of Dr Wallace's great work,
Professor Huxley had proposed to separate New Zealand as a
region of equal rank with his Australasian region. At a later date
Professor Heilprin 1 suggested that the Australian realm should
include only Australia, Tasmania, New Guinea, with the smaller
Papuan islands, and New Zealand ; Polynesia, including all the
islands lying to the east of the Coral Sea, being raised to the rank
of a distinct realm (the Polynesian), while the Austro-Malayan
islands were regarded as forming a transitional tract between the
Australian realm and what is here termed the Oriental region. In
this connection it may be well to notice that the Austro-Malayan
sub-region of Dr Wallace is by no means coterminous with the
Austro-Malayan transition-tract of Heilprin, the former including,
and the latter excluding New Guinea.
So far as mammals alone are concerned, Notogaea is widely
separated from the whole of the rest of the world by being the sole
habitat (both now and in the past) of the typical diprotodont
marsupials and the monotremes; although it must not be sup-
posed that either of these groups is distributed over the entire
area. As a matter of fact, apart from introduced rodents,
Polynesia is devoid of mammalian life with the exception of bats
and a rat 2 , while New Zealand has but two representatives of the
former group, and a rat which may or may not be indigenous.
But wherever we meet with a fully developed mammalian fauna,
as in the transitional Austro-Malayan islands, there a certain
number of marsupials are met with, although the monotremes
1 Appendix, No. 17.
2 Mus exulans, see Proc. Zool. Soc. 1895, p. 338.
30 THE NOTOGyEIC REALM. [CHAP.
are restricted to Australia, with Tasmania ; and New Guinea, with
the adjacent islands, such as the Aru group.
The Notogaeic realm, as denned above, may be conveniently
divided into four distinct regions, as follows. Firstly the Australian
region, comprising Australia, Tasmania, New Guinea and the adja-
cent Papuan islands; characterised by marsupials and monotremes
forming by far the predominant element in the mammalian fauna.
Secondly the Austro-Malayan region, embracing Lombok, Celebes
and the other islands lying between them and the Australian region;
this area being characterised by the absence of monotremes and by
the marsupials (all of which belong to the diprotodont division of
the order) forming only a small minority of the mammalian fauna.
Thirdly, there is the Hawaiian region, including only the Sandwich
Islands; and, lastly, the Polynesian region, which maybe taken to
include all the islands, save those last named, lying to the eastward
of the Coral Sea, together with New Zealand, and is characterised
by the general absence of terrestrial mammals. There is some
difficulty in deciding whether the islands of the Solomon group
should be included in this region, or classed with the Papuan
division of the Australian region, seeing that, in addition to a
considerable number of bats, they have four species of mice, and
one diprotodont marsupial (Phalanger) 1 . When, however, the
poverty of this fauna as compared with that of Papua is taken
into consideration, and it is also borne in mind that Mr C. Hedley 2
has come to the conclusion that the Solomon Islands, together
with the New Hebrides, New Caledonia, Fiji, and Norfolk Island,
are closely connected by means of their flora with New Zealand,
and have but little in common with Australia and New Guinea, it
seems preferable to include the former group in the Polynesian
region. On the same grounds, New Zealand is regarded, in
accordance with the views of Heilprin, as also forming a portion
of the same zoological region, and not as the representative of a
separate region by itself. The fauna of the Solomon Islands has
doubtless been derived directly from that of the Duke of York
group, which clearly belongs to the same region as New Guinea,
and shows a much more strongly marked Papuan facies, having
three species of mice, and four marsupials.
1 See Thomas, Appendix, No. 30. 2 Appendix, No. 16.
II.] AUSTRALIAN REGION. 31
Although the northern half of Australia lies within the tropics,
yet few portions of this great island present that
luxuriance of vegetation which we are accustomed
to associate with tropical scenery ; and large tracts
of the interior, owing doubtless to the absence of elevated moun-
tain ranges in the central districts, form arid sandy deserts more or
less unsuited to the maintenance of animal life. The coast regions
and the borders of the larger rivers are accordingly those where
vegetation flourishes best ; the finest tracts of pasture-country, well
supplied with water, lying to the east and south-east, and Victoria
possessing a mountain range whose summits are perpetually
clothed with snow. Mountains also occur in the dry and hot
western districts. Although Tasmania enjoys moister conditions,
Australia as a whole is characterised by the lack of water and the
general dryness of its climate ; and it is probable that to this
aridity the number of jumping animals, such as kangaroos, rat-
kangaroos, and jerboa-rats, now characteristic of this part of the
region is due, since such creatures are admirably adapted for
traversing long distances in search of food and water. On the
other hand, New Guinea, together with the Papuan islands, has a
moist tropical climate, essentially different from that of Australia,
but similar to the conditions obtaining in a large portion of
the Austro- Malayan islands. Hence it is not to be wondered
at that the mammals of New Guinea differ very markedly
from those of Australia ; this being especially noticeable in the
paucity of typical jumping kangaroos, and the proportionately
large number of arboreal members of this group. Nevertheless the
mammalian fauna of Queensland and North Australia exhibits a
marked approximation to that of New Guinea, one species of
kangaroo, as well as a cuscus, a striped phalanger (DaJylopsila), a
flying phalanger (Petaurus), a pouched-mouse (Phascologale), and
an echidna, being common to the two areas, and it is in these
countries alone that tree-kangaroos are met with. From these
resemblances in their faunas and especially from the restriction
of the monotremes to these two areas, there can be no question
as to the propriety of including Australia and New Guinea in the
same zoological region, and thus separating the latter country from
the Austro-Malayan region.
THE NOTOG^IC REALM.
[CHAP.
The egg-laying mammals, or monotremes, constitute not only
a distinct order (Monotremata), but likewise a
Monotremes. . N
separate sub-class (Prototheria); and are broadly
distinguished from all other members of their class by laying eggs,
from which the young are in due course hatched; as they are likewise
by the milk-glands of the female opening on the surface of the
skin by means of a number of minute perforations, without being
furnished with nipples. The group is represented by three genera,
FIG. i. THE DUCKBILL. (Ornithorhynchus anatinus.}
one of which is widely different from the other two and forms a
family by itself, while the latter constitute a second family. The
duckbill {Ornithorhynchus anatinus}, as the single representative
of the first family (OrnithorhynchidcB) is commonly termed, is an
aquatic, somewhat mole-like, burrowing animal, easily recognised
by the expansion of the muzzle into a broad duck-like beak
covered during life with a sensitive skin, and also by the broadly
webbed feet, of which the soles are naked and devoid of pads.
II.] MONOTREMES. 33
Although in the adult the mouth is furnished only with horny
plates, in young individuals the sides of the jaws are provided
with three pairs of molar teeth, quite unlike those of any other
living mammals. At the present day the duckbill is confined to
Queensland south of latitude 18, New South Wales, Victoria,
South Australia, and Tasmania; it is represented by an extinct
species from the Plistocene of Queensland, but otherwise the
pakeontological record of the group is a complete blank.
Just the same is the case with the echidnas, or spiny anteaters
(Echidnidce], of which the only fossil remains known have been
obtained from the superficial deposits of New South Wales.
Terrestrial and fossorial in their habits, the echidnas differ from
the duckbill in having the muzzle in the form of an exceedingly
slender cylindrical toothless beak, furnished with an extensile
worm-like tongue ; while the fur is thickly mingled with short
spines, the tail being rudimental, and the unwebbed toes provided
with extremely powerful claws. Of the two species, the common
five-clawed echidna (Echidna aculeata] extends from south-eastern
New Guinea throughout Australia to Tasmania; whereas the
three-clawed echidna (Proechtdna 1 bruijni} is restricted to New
Guinea.
With the exception of the Plistocene forms already alluded to,
no fossil monotremes whatever are known to science. It is, how-
ever, not improbable that certain extinct mammals from the
Secondary and lower Tertiary rocks of Arctogaea, commonly termed
Multituberculata, which will be more fully alluded to in the sequel,
may indicate a second order of the sub-class Prototheria. Both
the extinct and the living groups are, however, of a highly special-
ised type, so that the one cannot apparently be regarded as
ancestral to the other ; but if the presumed distant relationship
between the two be substantiated, it will indicate that we are to
look to a northern origin for the existing monotremes.
The marsupials, which likewise represent both a separate
order (Marsupialia) and a sub-class (Metatheria)
Marsupials.
oy themselves, differ from the monotremes by
producing living young, and by the milk-glands of the female
1 It has recently been proposed to substitute the term Zaglossus, which is
stated to be earlier, for this genus.
L. 3
34 THE NOTOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
discharging their secretion by means of nipples. From the higher
mammals (Eutheria) they are distinguished by the imperfectly
developed condition of the newly-born young, and the absence
of any prenatal connection between the vascular system of the
foetus and the maternal parent by means of the organ known
as the placenta. Very generally the young are carried about for
some time after birth in a pouch situated on the abdomen of the
parent, where they at first remain immovably fixed to the nipples,
the milk being injected into their throats by the action of a special
muscle. In the carnivorous and insectivorous forms the number
of incisor teeth in the upper jaw usually exceeds the three pairs
which form the general maximum limit in the higher mammals. A
further peculiarity of the order is to be found in the replacement
of the teeth. Instead of the whole or nearly the whole of the first,
or milk-set of teeth in advance of the true molars or hinder cheek-
teeth being replaced by a second set of permanent teeth, only one
tooth is thus (and that by no means invariably) replaced. The
tooth thus replaced was long regarded as corresponding to the last
or fourth milk-molar of the higher mammals, while the apparently
replacing tooth was identified with the last or fourth premolar of
the same. From recent researches, however, it would seem that
in reality this is not a case of true replacement, and that the tooth
which makes its appearance late in life is a retarded premolar,
representing the fourth in that series, while the replacing tooth is
the fifth.
Marsupials may be divided into two main sections or sub-
orders, readily distinguished from one another by their dentition,
both of which are represented in Notogaea. In the first of these,
or Diprotodont sub-order, which is the more specialised of the two,
the incisor teeth are separated by a gap from those of the cheek-
series, and do not usually exceed three in number on each side of
the upper jaw 1 , and in the lower jaw are generally reduced to a single
pair, while the tusks, or canines (<:), are either small or wanting. In
their habits the members of this section are more or less exclusively
herbivorous. On the other hand, in the Polyprotodont mar-
supials, all of which are mainly carnivorous or insectivorous in
1 The only exception to this occurs in the South-American forms.
II.] MARSUPIALS. 35
their diet, the incisor teeth are numerous and pointed, the canines
are large and well developed, and the whole of the anterior teeth
form a series more or less nearly continuous with those on the
sides of the jaws. The typical diprotodonts, or those in which
two of the toes of the hind foot are enclosed in a common integu-
ment 1 , are exclusively confined to the Notogaeic realm, where they
attain their maximum development in the Australian region ; but
the polyprotodonts and an aberrant group of diprotodonts are
still represented in the Neogaeic realm, while during the Secondary
and earlier part of the Tertiary period the former were widely
FIG. 2. SKULL OF RAT-KANGAROO.
(To exhibit Diprotodont type of dentition.}
spread over Arctogaea. In the Australian region marsupials play
the part of the eutherians of other regions, and show a remark-
able diversity of external form and structure, adapting them to all
modes of life with the exception of the aquatic. And it is fairly
evident that within the limits of this region the diprotodonts were
originally evolved from the more generalised polyprotodonts.
Of the three existing family groups into which the Notogaeic di-
protodonts are divided the first is the Macropodidce, or the kangaroos
and their allies ; this being in some respects the most specialised
group of all, and characterised by certain peculiar features in the
skull and dentition. Among these the typical genus Macropus, in-
cluding the true kangaroos, comprises a total of twenty-three
species, out of which twenty are confined to Australia and
1 The term syndactylous is applied to this type of foot.
32
36 THE NOTOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
Tasmania, one (M. agilis) is common to Australia and Queens-
land, and two others (M. bruijni and M. browni} are confined to
New Guinea or the adjacent islands. Of the six species of rock-
kangaroos (Petrogale), none are found out of continental Australia,
and the same is true with regard to the three representatives of
the nail-tailed wallabies (Onychogale), and likewise with the three
hare-wallabies (Lagorchestes}. On the other hand, the three kinds of
dorca kangaroo (Dorcopsis) are exclusively Papuan ; while of the
climbing tree-kangaroos (Dendrolagus), three are from Papua
and two from Queensland. The single species of banded wallaby
(Lagostrophus) is Australian ; as are also the whole of the rat-
kangaroos, forming the genera Potorous, Caloprymnus, Bettongia,
and sEpyprymnus, and likewise the peculiar musk-kangaroo
(Hypsiprymnodon), which serves to connect the other members of
the family with the phalangers.
Several of the existing representatives of the above-mentioned
genera are found in a fossil state in the cavern-deposits of New
South Wales and the Plistocene formations of Queensland, in
addition to which there are likewise several extinct representatives
of the genus Macropus, some of which considerably exceed the
largest living forms in point of size. The same formations have
also yielded the remains of three extinct genera, namely Palor-
chestes, Procoptodon, and Sthenurus, all of which appear to have
been allied to the wallabies, although some of the species were
vastly larger than any existing kangaroo. Another, but very im-
perfectly known genus Triclis, seems to have connected the
musk-kangaroo so closely with the phalangers, that it is scarcely
possible to draw any distinction between these two families.
In the family of the phalangers (Phalanger idcz], which
differs from the more typical representatives of the preceding
by the more generalised characters of the skull, teeth, and
limbs, there is an exclusively Australian form in the koala,
forming the sole representative of the genus of the same name.
Of the five species of cuscuses (Phalanger}, one is, however,
common to northern Australia, New Guinea, and the Austro-
Malayan Islands, while the other four are restricted to the two
latter areas. The two species of true phalanger (Trickosurus) are,
on the other hand, exclusively Australian ; while the ring-tailed
II.] MARSUPIALS. 37
phalangers, constituting the genus Pseudochirus, are common to
Australia and New Guinea. Another exclusively Australian type
is to be found in the taguan flying phalanger (Petauroides) ; but of
the non-volant striped phalangers (Dactylopsila) one species is
common to Queensland, the Aru Islands, and New Guinea, while
the second is exclusively Papuan. The true flying phalangers of
the genus Petaurus include two Australian species, and a third,
common to northern and eastern Australia and New Guinea and
the adjacent islands. Leadbeater's phalanger (Gymnobelideus),
which appears to be closely related to the ancestral stock
from which were evolved the members of the last genus, is
restricted to Victoria ; but the dormouse-phalangers of the genus
FIG. 3. SKULL OF EXTINCT PHALANGER (Thylacoleo carnifex).
Dromicia have both Australian and Papuan representatives, while
the pen-tailed phalanger (Distachurus) is exclusively from New
Guinea, and of the two pigmy flying phalangers (Acrobates), one is
Australian and the other Papuan. Lastly, the aberrant long-
snouted phalanger ( Tarsipes), representing a sub-family by itself,
is confined to Western Australia. Remains of species belonging
to some of the existing genera have been disinterred from the
caves of New South Wales and the Plistocene deposits of Queens-
land; while several more or less imperfectly known extinct
generic types have been described. Among the latter, by far the
most remarkable is Thylacoleo, which was a gigantic phalanger
comparable in size to a large leopard, and distinguished by the
great development of the last premolar tooth in each jaw. The
38 THE NOTOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
tooth in question has an elongated cutting-blade, adapted to work
against its fellow in the opposite jaw with a scissor-like action,
somewhat after the fashion of the carnassial teeth of a tiger ; but
the other cheek-teeth were all relatively small, although the tusks
were large. The giant among the marsupials was the extinct
Diprotodon of the Australian Plistocene, a creature rivalling in size
the extinct South American Megalotherium, and allied on the one
hand to the kangaroos, and on the other to the phalangers. It
was not, however, endowed with the leaping powers of the former,
and doubtless walked on the ground in the ordinary manner, its
toes having apparently been covered with structures intermediate
between hoofs and nails. Nearly related, but likewise repre-
senting a family by itself, is the somewhat smaller, but still
gigantic Nototherium, which in the conformation of its limb-bones
appears to approximate to the wombats, and may consequently
have been, like those animals, of fossorial habits.
The last Notogaeic family of the Diprotodont section is that of
the wombats (Phascolomyidcz\ distinguished from all the preceding
forms by the presence of only a single pair of incisor teeth in both
the upper and lower jaws ; canines being absent, and the whole
dentition thus curiously simulating that of the rodents among
the higher mammals. All the three existing species, which
are included in the single genus Phascolomys, are confined to
Australia and Tasmania; and, except certain extinct species
belonging to the same genus, the only other member of the
family is the extinct Phascolonus (Sceparnodoti) from the Australian
Plistocene, distinguished by the peculiarly flattened and chisel-
like form of the upper incisor teeth. This, the only known
species, attained much larger dimensions than either of the
existing wombats.
The Polyprotodonts likewise include three existing families
found within the limits of the Australian region, none of the mem-
bers of which stray either into the Austro- Malay an or Polynesian
regions, although the separate family of the opossums (Didelphyidcz}
inhabits the New World. In the family of the bandicoots (Pera-
melidtz}, the two species of rabbit-bandicoot (Peragale) are ex-
clusively Australian, whereas the true bandicoots (Perameles] have
both Papuan and Australian representatives ; the third genus
II.]
MARSUPIALS.
39
( Chceropus\ which includes only the pig-footed bandicoot, being
confined to Australia.
In the second family, or Dasyurida, the genus Thyladnus is
now confined to Tasmania, but it was represented during the
Plistocene period on the Australian mainland, where one species
is stated to have been obtained from beds of Pliocene age. A
similar distribution also obtains in the case of the genus Sarcophifas,
now represented only by the well-known Tasmanian devil.
FIG. 4. BANDED ANTEATER. (Myrmecobius fasciatus.)
Although mainly Australian, the smaller animals known as dasyures
(Dasyurus] have, however, a single Papuan representative ; while
the pouched mice (Phascologale) are likewise common to the two
areas, one of the species ranging from New Guinea to eastern and
southern Australia. On the other hand, both the narrow-footed
pouched mice (Sminthopsis) and the jumping pouched mouse
(Antechinomys] are exclusively Australian. The same is the case
40 THE NOTOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
with the aberrant banded anteater (Myrmecobius), which although
generally included in the Dasyuridce, should perhaps form the
type of a family by itself; this animal differing from all the fore-
going in the number, and also in the structure of the cheek-teeth,
and thereby making a marked approximation to certain Marsupials
of the Jurassic epoch noticed in the sequel.
Before leaving this family, it should be mentioned that certain
extinct Marsupials from the Tertiaries of Patagonia, referred to in
the next chapter, seem to be inseparable from it, while there are
strong reasons for regarding one of them (Prothylacinus) as very
nearly allied to the existing genus Thylacinus.
The last of the Australian families {Notary ctidce] of the sub-
order is represented solely by the marsupial mole (Notoryctes),
from the sandy deserts of central South Australia ; this being the
only member of the order which has taken to a subterranean mode
of life. There are no extinct Australian genera of the sub-order.
Exclusive of the bats, the only other order of mammals well
represented in the Australian region is that of the
Rodentia, or Gnawing Mammals, which bear, how-
ever, a small proportion to the marsupials, and all of which belong
to the mouse-family (Murtdce). And it is noteworthy that although
several of these belong to generic types unknown elsewhere, the
whole of them are animals of comparatively small size, so that it
is possible that their ancestors may have been introduced without
a direct land-connection with any other part of the world. A
curious feature in connection with this group is that two of the
Australian species, namely Hydromys chrysogaster and Musfuscipes,
are aquatic in their habits ; whereas, as we have seen, none of the
Australian marsupials are natatorial, although the duckbill is
eminently so. The Australian water-rat (Hydromys), which is
common to Australia and New Guinea, belongs to a sub-family
typically distinguished from all other Murtdce by the reduction of
the molar teeth to two pairs in each jaw. While this animal has
partially webbed toes, and is strictly aquatic in its habits, the
allied Xeromys from Queensland is terrestrial, and approximates
to the more typical members of the family, although to which
group is still uncertain. The only other representatives of the
sub-family Hydromyina are met with in the mountains of Luzon,
II.] RODENTS. 41
in the Philippine group, where there is one genus allied to
Hydromys, while other species have been assigned to the genus
Xeromys. Whereas the typical Australian representative of the
latter has but two pairs of molar teeth, one of the Philippine
forms has three, thus approximating to more ordinary murines.
The occurrence of these Australian types of rats in the Philippines
is of the utmost importance in respect to Australia having received
its mammalian fauna from south-eastern Asia.
Of the typical genus Afus, whose geographical distributional
area includes the whole of the eastern hemisphere with the ex-
ception of Madagascar and many of the Polynesian islands 1 ,
Australia has upwards of twenty-six representatives, while two
species occur in the Duke of York group, and others probably on
the Papuan mainland. One of the Duke of York species (M.
prcetor) ranges eastwards into the Solomons, where three other
kinds are also found. The jerboa-rats (Conilurus*) form a pe-
culiar saltatorial group restricted to the sandy deserts of the
mainland of Australia, where they are represented by about a
dozen species ; while the broad-toothed rat (Mastacomys) is con-
fined to Tasmania, although its fossilised remains, like those of
the other genus, are met with in the caverns of New South Wales.
More nearly allied to the true rats and mice, the mosaic-tailed rats
(Uromys) inhabit Queensland and the Aru Islands, one of the
species from the former area also occurring in the Solomons.
Lastly, the prehensile-tailed rat (Chiruromys], from the mountains
of south-eastern New Guinea, represents a genus distinguished
from all other placental mammals of the eastern hemisphere,
with the exception of the British harvest-mouse and the Oriental
binturong, by the prehensile nature of its tail.
In connection with these rodents it is important to observe
that fossil Murida are unknown from any part of the world earlier
than the Miocene epoch, so that it is evident the living Australian
representatives of the family are comparatively recent immigrants
into the region they inhabit.
1 The Pacific rat (Mus exulans) appears to be widely distributed in these
islands, see note on p. 29.
2 Commonly known by the preoccupied name Hapalotis.
42 THE NOTOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
Much discussion has taken place with regard to the date of
introduction of the native dog, or dingo ( Canis dingo]
Carnivores. . ,. . . -jj^i^-j.
into Australia, and it was long considered that it
was imported by human agency. Seeing, however, that its remains
have been found in association with those of extinct kangaroos
and Diprotodon, there seems considerable probability of its being
an indigenous inhabitant of the country l .
The only other non-volant mammal found in the Australian
region is a species of pig (Sus papuensis). This
animal is, however, so closely allied to certain
Malayan species that it seems quite possible that its introduction
may be due to human agency.
The Australian region contains representatives of all the families
of Bats with the exception of the Neogaeic Phyllo-
stomatid(z\ some of the genera, such as the tube-
nosed bats (Uronycteris*}, among the Pteropodida, being peculiar
to this and the Austro- Malayan region, while others are more or
less widely spread, or even cosmopolitan. It will be unnecessary
to mention the various genera by name ; but the affinity of the
Notogaeic Chiroptera to those of Eastern Arctogaea, as exemplified
by the abundance of fruit-bats (Pteropodidce) and the absence of
the PhyllostomatidcR) is noteworthy.
In the following synoptical list the higher groups and genera
(exclusive of Bats) peculiar to the Notogaeic realm
are printed in italic type ; the letters A, P, and M
Papuan following the names respectively indicate that the
Genera.
groups in question occur in Australia (inclusive of
Tasmania), New Guinea (with the adjacent Papuan islands), or the
Austro-Malayan region ; extinct groups have an asterisk prefixed.
I. MONOTREMATA.
Ornithorhynchidce, A.
OrnithorhynchuS) A.
EchidnidcB, A. P.
Echidna, A. P. (The living species common to
both areas.)
Proechidna, P.
1 See Ogilby, "Catalogue of Australian Mammals," Sydney, 1891 92.
2 This name replaces the preoccupied Harpvia.
II.]
LIST OF MAMMALS.
43
II. Marsupialia.
i. DlPROTODONTIA, A. P. M.
Macropodidce, A. P.
Mac r opus, A. P.
Petrogale, A.
Onychogale, A.
Lagorchestes, A.
Dorcopsis, P.
Dendrolagus, A. P.
Lagostrophus, A.
Potorous, A.
Caloprymnus, A.
Bettongia, A.
sEpyprymnus, A.
Hypsiprymnodon, A.
*Palorchestes, A.
* Procoptodon, A.
*Sthenurus, A.
*Triclis, A.
Phalangerida, A. P. M.
Koala, A.
Phalanger, A. P. M.
Trichosurus, A.
Pseudochirus, A. P.
Petauroides, A.
Dactylopsila, A. P.
Petaurus, A. P. M.
Gymnobelideus, A.
Dromicia, A. P.
Distcechurus, P.
Acrobates, A. P.
Tar sip es, A.
*Thylacoleo, A.
*Diprotodontidcz, A.
* Diprotodon, A.
(Elsewhere represented only
by an aberrant group in
South America.)
44 THE NOTOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
4. *Nototheriid(K) A.
* Nototherium^ A.
5. Phascolomyid&i A.
PhascolomyS) A.
*Phascolonus, A.
ii. POLYPROTODONTIA, A. P.
1. Peramelid&i A. P.
Peragale, A.
Perameles, A. P.
Chc&ropuS) A.
2. DASYURID^E, A. P.
ThyladnuS) A.
SarcophiluS) A.
Dasyurus, A. P.
Phascologale, A. P.
Smmthopsis, A.
AntechinomyS) A.
MyrmecobiuSj A.
3. Notoryctidce, A.
Notoryctes, A.
III. Rodentia.
i. MuRiDjE. Cosmopolitan.
Hydromys, A. P.
Xeromys, A. and Philippines.
Mus, A. P. M.
Conilurus, A.
Mastacomys, A.
Uromys, A. P.
Chiruromys, P.
IV. Carnivora.
CANID^:, Cosmopolitan.
Canis, A. Cosmopolitan.
V. Ungulata.
SUID.E. Throughout Eastern Hemisphere, except
Australia.
Sus, P. Elsewhere throughout greater part of
Eastern Hemisphere.
II.] ITS REGIONS. 45
VI. Chiroptera. All the families, with the exception of
the Neogaeic Phyllostomatidae, well re-
presented.
The Polynesian region, as already said, is characterised by the
general absence of non-flying mammals, and there-
fore claims but little notice here. The only mar-
supial occurring within the region is a variety of the
widely-spread grey cuscus (Phalanger orientalis], which occurs in
the Solomon Islands, where four species of Mus are likewise met
with. As the cuscus, together with one of the rats, is also found
in the Duke of York group, it may be inferred that the non-volant
mammals of the Solomons have been derived from the latter area.
In addition to members of widely-spread types, the Solomons
possess two peculiar genera of bats.
New Zealand appears to be inhabited only by two peculiar
generic types of bats, each represented by a single species, and a
rat (Mus maorimri}, but whether the latter is indigenous or intro-
duced appears doubtful.
Although a work devoted to mammals has little to do with an
area where the sole member of the class is a bat of
the genus Atalapha, brief mention must be made of R^on*"'
the Sandwich Islands, which from their bird-fauna
are regarded as entitled to distinction from the Polynesian region.
Of the birds of this area, Mr W. L. Sclater ' writes that the greater
number not only of the species, but even of the genera "are
peculiar and wholly restricted to these islands. It is, of course,
among the smaller land-birds (Passeres) that this individuality is
most marked; but even in the other groups, where the distribu-
tion is generally wider, the Hawaiian birds are, in many cases,
local."
Poverty, and an admixture of Australian and Malayan types,
with a very marked preponderance of the latter, are
the leading features in the mammalian fauna of the lay^n Region.
Austro-Malayan region. This area includes the
islands lying between Makassar Strait and the narrow channel
separating Lombok from Bali on the west and the Australian region
1 Appendix, No. 28.
46 THE NOTOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
on the east. The largest of these is Celebes, while those of the
Moluccan group, such as Gilolo, Buru, Ceram, and Timor-Laut,
together with Timor and Sumbawa, are of smaller size. Unfor-
tunately no complete lists of the fauna of these islands, so far as I
am aware, have yet been published.
Commencing with Timor and the Moluccas, we find several
of the latter group of islands inhabited by four species of
cuscus (Phalanger\ two of which are common to the Australian
region, while the third (P. ornatus] is peculiar, and the fourth
(P. celebensis], which in this group is found only in Sanghir Island,
is an inhabitant of Celebes, where the other three are unknown.
The only other Austro-Malayan marsupial 1 is a variety of the
Australian lesser flying-phalanger (Petaurus breviceps\ this variety
ranging eastwards from Gilolo to the New Britain group. With
the possible exception of certain shrews, most of the few Moluccan
species of eutherian mammals appear to be identical with those
of Celebes, whence they were probably introduced. A deer from
Timor has received a distinct name (Cervus timoriensis\ and the
same island is also inhabited by a common Malayan monkey
(Macacus cynomolgus), a palm-civet (Paradoxurus hermaphroditus],
and a true civet ( Viverra tangalungci], the latter being common to
the Moluccas. The common Javan porcupine (Hystrix javanica),
which is widely spread in the Malayan islands, is also found in
Timor. There is likewise a cat in the same island, which although
described under the name of Felis megalotis as a distinct species,
and regarded by Mr Jentink as such, has been identified by
Mr W. L. Sclater in his " Catalogue of the Mammalia in the
Indian Museum " as a mere variety of the domestic species. In
regard to all the Timorese forms which are closely allied to, or
identical with well-known Malayan species, it is necessary to take
into consideration the well-known partiality of the Malays for
taming wild animals and carrying them about during their voyages;
and it is highly probable that all or most of such animals found
in Timor have been thus introduced. From the small island of
Flores Mr Jentink has described a rat (Mus armandvillei), which is
the largest member of its genus.
1 The Kei Islands, like the Aru group, may be best affiliated to Papua.
II.]
AUSTROMALAYAN REGION.
47
In addition to the above-mentioned cuscus, which appears to
be its only marsupial, Celebes possesses several peculiar types of
eutherian mammals. Among these is a black and nearly tailless
ape (Cynopithecus niger) representing a genus by itself; while there
is also a species of macaque (Macacus maurus) peculiar to the
southern portion of the island. A species of the lernuroid tarsiers
(Tarsius fuscomanus) is found both in Celebes and the neighbour-
ing islands of Salayer and Sanghir, although represented by an
FIG. 5. FORE PART OF SKULL OF BABIRUSA (Bcibirusa alfurus],
allied form in the Philippine group. In the Carnivora there is a
Malayan species of civet ( Viverra tangalunga), and also a peculiar
species of palm-civet (Paradoxurus musschenbroecki). In the pig-
tribe the babirusa (Babirusa alfurus), characterised by the extra-
ordinary development of its tusks, is the sole representative of a
genus confined to this island and Bum; while scarcely less peculiar
is the small and somewhat antelope-like buffalo known as the anoa
(Bos depressicornis\ which although allied to the tamarao (B. mindo-
48 THE NOTOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
rensts) 1 of the Philippines, has its nearest relatives in certain
extinct species from the Pliocene of Northern India. There is
also a true pig (Sus celebensis], nearly allied to Malayan forms ; as
well as a deer forming a variety of the widely spread sambar
(Cervus unicolor}. Among the rodents, a rat with an extremely
long muzzle constitutes a peculiar genus (Echinothrix)^ and there
are also other Muridce, as well as squirrels (Sciurid<K), in addition
to numerous bats, mostly belonging to Oriental types ; certain of
the squirrels, such as Sciurus prevosti, being common to the
Malayan countries.
Unfortunately there is absolutely no palseontological evidence
to help us in regard to the past history of these islands ; but from
the living mammalian fauna we should be inclined to place the
whole area within the limits of the Oriental region. On the other
hand, a large number of the birds both of the Moluccas and
Celebes are peculiar; and Australian affinities are displayed by the
presence of a bird of paradise (Semioptera) in Gilolo and Batjan,
and of a cassowary (Casuarius) in Ceram. Accordingly, it may be
well to include not only the Moluccas, but likewise Celebes within
the limits of the Notogseic realm, which will then embrace the
whole of the countries where monotremes, typical diprotodont
marsupials, birds-of-paradise, and cassowaries occur. Still it
must be confessed that this is, after all, mainly a matter of con-
venience, seeing that since, as will be shown below, the diprotodont
marsupials have in all probability originated in the Australian
region, those inhabiting the Austro-Malayan region must ap-
parently be regarded as comparatively late immigrants from the
south-east 2 ; the same being also true with regard to the single
bird-of-paradise and the cassowary inhabiting this area. And it
is noteworthy that both genera of Austro-Malayan marsupials are
precisely such as, from their arboreal habits, would be likely to be
transported on floating timber. Dr Wallace has suggested that
Celebes has been separated from the Oriental region since the
1 It has been suggested that this animal is a hybrid between the anoa and
the Indian buffalo.
2 In this view I am in accord with Dr Blanford, who (GeoL Mag. decade
3, vol. IX. p. 165, 1892) writes that the marsupials of Celebes "are probably
of later introduction than the mammals with Oriental affinities."
II.] CELEBES. 49
Miocene ; this, however, is obviously too early a date, since the
only known allies of the anoa are met with (in common with the
earliest of all the oxen) in the Siwalik Pliocene of northern
India.
In regard to the Moluccas, Dr Wallace 1 observes that the
absence of many characteristic groups of Papuan birds, and
likewise of kangaroos and the smaller marsupials of New Guinea,
leads to the conclusion that these islands " cannot be mere frag-
ments of the old Papuan land, or they would certainly, in some
one or other of their large and fertile islands, have preserved a
more complete representation of the parent fauna. Most of the
Moluccan birds are very distinct from the allied species of New
Guinea; and this would imply that the entrance of the original
forms took place at a remote period. The two peculiar genera
with clearly Papuan affinities, show the same thing. The casso-
wary, found only in the large island of Ceram and distinct from
any Papuan species, would however seem to have required a land
connection for its introduction, almost as much as any of the
larger mammalia."
In another work 2 , summing up the general conclusions with
regard to the fauna of Celebes, the same writer observes that " we
are fully justified in classing it as an ' anomalous island,' since it
possesses a small but very remarkable mammalian fauna, without
ever having been directly united [during Tertiary times] with any
continent or extensive land ; and, both by what it has, and what
it wants, occupies such an exactly intermediate position between
the Oriental and Australian regions that it will perhaps ever
remain a mere matter of opinion with which it should properly
be associated. Forming, as it does, the western limit of such
typical Australian groups as the marsupials among mammalia,
and the Trichogfassida* and Mdiphngidct* among birds, and being
so strongly deficient in all the more characteristic Oriental families
and genera of both classes, I have always placed it in the Austra-
1 Geographical Distribution of Animals, Vol. I. p. 419.
2 Island Life, p. 432.
3 Equal LoriidfB ; includes the brush-tongued lories and loriquets.
4 Honey-suckers.
L. 4
50 THE NOTOG.EIC REALM. [CHAP.
lian region 1 ; but it may perhaps with equal propriety be left
out of both till a further knowledge of its geology enables us to
determine its early history with more precision."
Having now briefly surveyed the leading features of the terres-
trial mammalian fauna of the whole Notogaeic realm,
Palaeonto-
logicai History and discussed the relationship of the mammals of
the Austro-Malayan to those of the Australian region
(in the restricted sense of the term), we are in a position to enter
upon the consideration of the probable past history of Australia
and New Guinea, so far as the same group of animals is con-
cerned. Before doing so, it is, however, essential to state what
is known concerning marsupials from other regions of the world.
Here it may be premised that in regard to Australia mammalian
palseontological history is a total blank previously to the Pliocene
epoch ; while apparently but little is known even of that period,
the great majority of the fossil mammals of that country belonging
to the Plistocene epoch of the earth's history. As to the past
history of the mammals of New Guinea, we know absolutely
nothing ; and, as already mentioned, the same is the case with
regard to those of the Austro-Malayan islands. This, however, by
no means exhibits the whole depth of our deficiency of informa-
tion. Throughout the whole of eastern Asia, to say nothing of
Alaska and western Canada, we have no information whatever as
to mammalian life previous to the Pliocene era; while even in
that period our sole knowledge relates to a portion of northern
India and China. If, therefore, some of the modern types of
marsupials originated in eastern Asia from the older forms, the
blank in the palaeontological history of the group relates to just
the very countries where these animals might naturally be expected
to occur during the Tertiary period. While there is no record of
their existence in Asia, in Europe fossil Tertiary marsupials are
unknown at a later date than the upper Oligocene, and in North
America than the middle Oligocene, and the whole of those
hitherto discovered belong to the existing American group of
opossums. If, however, we were to infer from this that the whole
order (with the exception of that group) never existed in conti-
1 Equivalent to the Notogaeic realm of this work.
II.] PALEONTOLOGY OF MARSUPIALS. 51
nental Arctogaea after the Secondary epoch, a very serious error
might be committed. And although it is improbable that any
marsupials of an Australian type ever existed in Europe or North
America, there is no reason why they should not have occurred
in south-eastern Asia.
The extinct dasyurids of the Patagonian Miocene have been
already mentioned, and these, together with another S. American
group, are more fully noticed in the next chapter. With regard
to the opossums, it will suffice to state that while they are
unknown in the aforesaid Patagonian deposits, certain species
occur in the middle Oligocene White River beds of the United
States, and others in the lower, middle, and upper Oligocene 1 beds
of Europe. Although the number of their incisor teeth is unknown,
there is little doubt that the European Oligocene opossums 2 (which
have been very generally separated as Pcrathtrium\ should
be included in the existing genus Didelphys. Remains of
these animals have been obtained from the upper Oligocene of
Cournon in France, from the middle Oligocene beds of Hordwell
in Hampshire, from the equivalent deposits of Debruge in
Vaucluse, and of Montmartre near Paris, and likewise from
the Quercy Phosphorites in the south of France. With the
exception of a peculiar South American group of diprotodonts,
the remaining fossil mammals which can be referred to the
Marsupialia are mainly if not exclusively confined to the Second-
ary period ; all being of small dimensions, and many of them
exceedingly minute. While many of them evidently died out
without leaving any existing descendants, one group seems to
have been the ancestral type from which the existing Dasyurida
have originated. Among the former, we have the family Tricono-
dontidce, as represented by the genus Triconodon of the upper
Jurassic of England and also by nearly allied forms from the
corresponding rocks of the United States. In this family the
1 It may be well to mention that the beds of St Gerand-le-Puy, in France,
which many writers reckon as lower Miocene, are here classed as upper Oligo-
cene. See Lydekker, Cat. Foss. Mamm. Brit. Mus. Pt. ,iv. p. xvii.
2 The existing Didelphyida differ from the Dasyurida in the presence of four,
in place of three, pairs of incisor teeth in the lower jaw, and of five pairs in the
upper jaw instead of four.
42
52 THE NOTOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
molar teeth consist of three simple compressed trenchant cusps
arranged in a longitudinal line ; the upper ones biting on the
outer side of those of the lower jaw. In the upper jaw the
number of teeth is still unknown, but the lower jaw carries three
pairs of incisors, four of premolars, and either three or four of molars,
in addition to the tusks or canines, which are implanted by two
distinct roots. In this respect the latter teeth present an approxi-
FlG. 6. INNER SURFACE OF RIGHT HALF OF LOWER JAW OF TriCOHodon,
OR ALLIED FORM.
mation to those of the bandicoots, where the root of the canine is
partially divided by a longitudinal groove. A second family
(Spalacotheriidce), likewise represented in the upper Jurassic rocks
both of Europe and the United States, is distinguished by the
cusps of the molars being arranged in a triangle, with the apex
pointing inwards in the upper, and outwards in the lower jaw ;
these teeth being similar in structure to those of the marsupial
mole.
Of more interest is the large family of the Amphitheriida,
which may be taken to include a great number of forms apparently
agreeing with the opossums in having four pairs of lower incisor
teeth. The lower molars never consist solely of three simple
cusps arranged in a straight line like those of the Triconodontida,
or in a triangle like those of the Spalacotheriidce. Among these
forms the genus Phascolotherium, from the lower Jurassic Stones-
field Slate of Oxfordshire, appears to have had only seven pairs of
cheek-teeth ; the lower molars having three cusps arranged in a
longitudinal line, of which the middle one is considerably larger
II.]
PALEONTOLOGY OF MARSUPIALS.
53
than the other two, while there are minute additional cusps at the
two extremities, and a distinct ledge at the base of the inner side
Nat. size.
FIG. 7. IMPERFECT RAMUS OF LOWER JAW OF Phascolotherium.
of each tooth. In the allied Amphilestes, from the same forma-
tion, of which the imperfect lower jaw is shown in the annexed
figure, the molars are of the same general type as in the preceding,
but much more numerous, their total number being probably
nearly the same as in the next genus.
Nat. size.
FIG. 8. IMPERFECT RAMUS OF LOWER JAW OF Amphilestes.
Another type is represented by the genera Amphitherium of
the Stonesfield Slate and Amblotherium of the upper Jurassic of
Dorsetshire, in which, in addition to the canines, there are from
six to eight molar teeth, four premolars, and four incisors in each
half of the lower jaw. The lower molars differ from those of the
preceding genera, and thereby resemble the corresponding teeth
54 THE NOTOG/EIC REALM. [CHAP.
of the opossums and bandicoots, in that they consist of an anterior
portion carrying three cusps in a triangle, and of a posterior
moiety or heel. Several more or less nearly related genera have
left their remains in the upper Jurassic rocks of the United States,
among which Dryolestes may be specially mentioned ; and it
appears that in North America the group survived till the succeed-
ing Cretaceous epoch. The especial interest attaching to these
marsupials is that they, and they alone, have molar teeth com-
parable in number, and to a certain extent in structure, with those
of the living Australian Myrmecobius ; and there can be but little
hesitation in regarding the latter as the specially modified descen-
dant of these ancient forms of mammalian life. It is, however,
important to notice that all the Jurassic types have four pairs of
lower incisor teeth, which are now retained by the opossums alone,
having been reduced in all the Australian polyprotodonts to three.
Although a very low type of mammal (Dromatherium) occurs
HOWAUS- i n t ^ ie Triassic rocks of North America, the fore-
traiia received going include all the leading extinct forms that can
be included among the marsupials. During the
Jurassic epoch the group seems to have been widely distributed
over Europe and North America ; it is known to have existed in
the latter area during the Cretaceous epoch, and it probably also
survived to that date in some part of the northern half of- the
Old World. After that, our knowledge is a blank till we meet
with the Oligocene opossums of Europe and North America, and
the Miocene Patagonian marsupials ; so that as regards the
Eocene epoch there is absolutely no record whatever of the group.
That Australia received its original fauna of polyprotodont
marsupials from the northward may be regarded as practically
certain ; and the question as regards the Notogseic realm accord-
ingly narrows itself to the approximate date of the immigration.
On this point Dr Wallace 1 writes that "it was probably far back
in the Secondary period that some portion of the Australian
region was in actual connection with the northern continent, and
became stocked with ancestral forms of marsupials ; but from that
time till now there seems to have been no further land-connection,
1 Geographical Distribution of Animals, Vol. I. p. 465.
II.] ORIGIN OF AUSTRALIAN FAUNA. 55
and the Australian lands have thenceforward gone on developing
the marsupial and monotremate types into the various living and
extinct races we now find there."
Since this passage was written, the case has been somewhat
materially altered by the discovery of the dasyuroid marsupials of
the Patagonian Tertiaries ; while recent researches have tended to
show that the alliance between the Dasyuridce and the Didelphyida
is much more intimate than was formerly supposed to be the
case 1 . This being so, it is a fairly safe assumption that both
families are descended from a single common ancestral stock
which, apart from any question of a connection between Australia
and South America, can hardly have originated anywhere than in
the northern hemisphere, seeing that the Didelphyidce are totally
unknown in Notogaea. There is, however, as already stated, no
evidence of the existence of opossums before the Oligocene ; and
it is in the highest degree improbable that the two families were
differentiated as far back as the Jurassic, or even the Cretaceous
epoch. Not improbably polyprotodont marsupials survived in
south-eastern Asia till the early portion of the Eocene division of
the Tertiary epoch, and in this region both Dasyuridce and
Didelphyidce. were differentiated. Representatives of the former
family soon afterwards found their way into Australia and New
Guinea, while the opossums would appear to have dispersed
in one direction into Europe and in the other into North America,
eventually making their way from the latter country at a late
epoch in the Tertiary period into South America.
Assuming that the Patagonian dasyurids are more or less
closely allied to the Australian forms (and this certainly appears
to be the case), it may be taken for granted that they have not
originated independently. From considerations advanced in the
next chapter, it is almost impossible to believe that they travelled
by way of North America ; and if this be so, their only mode of
migration would be by means of a land-bridge between South
America and Australia by way of the Antarctic continent, or
1 In the British Museum "Catalogue of Marsupials and Monotremes,"
p. 315 (1888), Mr O. Thomas writes that the family Didelphyidce "is, on the
whole, very closely allied to the Dasyurida, from which, were it not for its
isolated geographical position, it would be very doubtfully separable."
56 THE NOTOG;EIC REALM. [CHAP.
possibly in a zone nearer the equator 1 . Assuming such a connec-
tion to have existed in Tertiary times (and there is no reason why
it should not have existed), it must either have taken place
before the development of the diprotodonts in Australia, or must
have been in such high latitudes, or so transitory, as to permit of
the passage of only a few forms. It is true that there is no
definite evidence that land mammals ever existed on the Antarctic
continent, but during a recent expedition certain seals were killed
bearing on their hides marks which appeared to have been inflicted
by the claws of a land carnivore. If this be substantiated by
future discoveries, it would be not only probable, but essential
that there should have been a Tertiary connection between
'Antarctica' and other lands. With regard to the probability that
'Antarctica' is of continental origin, in summarising what is known
with regard to the geology of 'Antarctica,' Messrs David and
Smeeth observe that whether a continent, or an archipelago the
islands of which are united by thick sheets of ice, the southern land
is considered to have a superficial area of 4,000,000 square miles,
being, therefore, larger than Australia. A great chain of volcanoes
has been described, which in Victorialand rise over 15,000 ft.
above the sea. On the South American side of Antarctica may
be specially noticed the active volcano of Bridgman, and the
large and partially-submerged volcano of Deception Island, with
its crater over five miles in diameter, the wall of which, built up of
alternating layers of ice and volcanic scoriae, rises to 1,800 ft.
above the sea. Sedimentary rocks of Eocene age, with fossil trees,
were discovered in 1893 at Seymour Island; and the French ship
Talisman many years previously dredged off the Antarctic conti-
nent fragments of rock containing Gyroporella, a fossil plant very
characteristic of the Triassic rocks of Europe. Near Laurie Island,
in the South Orkneys, limestone occurs. The rocks collected by
Mr Borchgrevink are of especial interest as confirming the theory
that Antarctica is a continent rather than an archipelago, for the
microline-granite with garnet and tourmaline, and the mica-schists
must have had a continental origin, such rocks being almost
unknown in oceanic islands, but being of frequent occurrence in
continental areas.
1 See Chapter III.
II.] MARSUPIALS IN ASIA. 57
With regard to the presumed survival of marsupials in south-
eastern Asia till the Tertiary epoch, it may be mentioned that
although there is a total lack of knowledge of the early Tertiary
mammals of Asia, yet there are not wanting indications of an
affinity between the fauna of the eastern portion of the latter
continent and that of North America which points to a migration
from a common centre along the two sides of the Pacific; a
migration which in the early Tertiary period received on the
American side an abrupt check by the sea then dividing North
and South America. There is, for instance, living in Central Asia
a species of deer so closely allied to the North American wapiti,
that it is a question whether the two are really entitled to specific
distinction ; while the Chinese alligator has its nearest living ally
in the species inhabiting the Mississippi. Another piece of
evidence is furnished by the occurrence in the Tertiaries of the
Balkan Peninsula of remains of the perissodactyle genus Titano-
therium, belonging to a family only known elsewhere in North
America. Quite recently remains of the North American masto-
don {Mastodon americanus] have been discovered in eastern
Russia 1 .
The existence of such essentially American types in Eastern
Europe and Central Asia clearly seems to point to a more intimate
connection between the faunas of those regions than exists
between those of Western Europe and North America; and thus
lends countenance to the idea that marsupials may have lingered
on in Eastern Asia till long after the earlier forms had disappeared
from Western Europe. On this view, it is quite probable that the
opossums of the Oligocene of Europe may have been immigrants
into that area from the south-east ; this being confirmed by the
absence of the group from the Ethiopian and Malagasy regions.
As already said, the existence of Australian types of Muridce
in the Philippines affords a pretty clear proof that Notogaea
received its fauna from south-eastern Asia, where types that had
died out elsewhere at an earlier epoch appear to have survived.
Doubtless, however, the Muridce effected their entrance into
Australia at a later epoch than the marsupials.
1 See Pavlow, Mem. Ac. St Petersbourg, ser. 8, vol. i. pt. 3 (1894).
58 THE NOTOG^EIC REALM. [CHAP.
The case of the ratite, or flightless struthious birds of Notogaea,
as represented by the extinct moas (Dinornithidcz) and the living
kiwis (Apterygidce) of New Zealand, and the cassowaries and
emeus (Casuariidcz) of Papua and Australia, seems to confirm the
conclusions drawn from the evidence of the marsupials as to the
isolation of the Notogseic realm not being so ancient as supposed
by Dr Wallace. It is to be presumed that all will agree that
more or less complete land-connections must have been necessary
for the migration of these birds ; and if it can be shown that the
group is a comparatively modern one, it cannot but support the
marsupial evidence. Before proceeding to do so, allusion must,
however, be made to the views of other writers as to the relation-
ships of the different Notogeeic lands.
In Island Life 1 , Dr Wallace considers that during the
Cretaceous, and probably also for a considerable portion of
Tertiary times, Western Australia was cut off by a deep sea from
the eastern margin of the continent, which was united with Tas-
mania, and possibly also with New Guinea. The eastern and
western islands, he writes, " would then differ considerably in
their vegetation and animal life. The western and more ancient
land already possessed, in its main features, the peculiar Australian
flora, and also the ancestral forms of its strange marsupial fauna,
both of which it had probably received at some earlier epoch by
a temporary union with the Asiatic continent over what is now
the Java Sea. Eastern Australia, on the other hand, possessed
only the rudiments of its existing mixed flora derived from three
distinct sources The Marsupial fauna had not yet reached the
eastern land, which was, however, occupied in the north by some
ancestral struthious birds, which had entered it by way of New
Guinea through some very ancient continental extension, and of
which the emeu, the cassowaries, the extinct Dromor?iis of Queens-
land, and the moas and kiwis of New Zealand, are the modified
descendants." He further concludes that a large area of what is
now the Tasman Sea was upheaved, and nearly, or quite, con-
nected New Zealand with Australia, whereby the fauna and flora
then existing in Eastern Australia were enabled to colonise New
1 Pages 465 et seq.
II.] AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND. 59
Zealand. Finally, this hypothetical bridge sank, isolating such
forms as had reached New Zealand, and, soon after, Eastern and
Western Australia became connected by land, and thus assumed
a homogeneous fauna. From this and other passages, we are led
to conclude that the author believes that the Notogaeic flightless
birds immigrated, if not in Cretaceous, at least in early Tertiary
times 1 , from more northern regions.
Dr Wallace's conclusions are, however, challenged by Mr C.
Hedley 2 , who, from a study of the floras of these regions, supple-
mented by the distribution of land molluscs, and recent geological
observations, refuses to admit that Western Australia ever pos-
sessed a monopoly of characteristic Australian animals or plants.
Although he considers the separation of the western and eastern
portions of the continent by a Cretaceous sea may be granted,
yet the land representing Western Australia was much smaller
than Wallace supposes. " The shallow inland Cretaceous sea was
studded with islands, large and small, which served the fauna and
flora as stepping-stones in their migrations from west to east and
from east to west." During a late era in the Tertiary epoch he
believes New Guinea to have been in connection with Australia ;
and further urges " that an ancient continent, separated on the
west from Australia by the abysses of the Coral and of the Tasman
Sea, is represented by the Solomons, the Fijis, the New Hebrides,
New Caledonia, Lord Howe Island, and New Zealand, with its
outlying islands In conclusion, I would contend that New
Zealand is associated with the Solomons and the New Hebrides,
firstly, as a member of their volcanic system ; secondly, by com-
munity of fauna and flora; whereas to Australia it is related not
at all physically, and to a foreign and intrusive element bio-
logically ; and that a theory which derives the fauna and flora of
New Zealand primarily from these archipelagoes and remotely
from New Guinea, necessitates fewer unproved assumptions than
that which derives them from Australia."
To return to the ratite birds, it may be observed in the first place
1 If the immigration into Eastern Australia was Tertiary, what becomes of
the author's statement that Australia has been isolated since the Secondary
epoch ?
a Appendix, No. i6>
60 THE NOTOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
that the giant flightless species such as Phororhachis and Bron-
tornis of the Patagonian Tertiaries have been recently shown to
form a totally distinct group the Stereornithes, and it is quite
probable that the same may prove to be the case with Gastornis,
Dasornis, and Diatryma of the lower Eocene of the northern
hemisphere. Apart from these, the earliest known ratites are
Hypselornis of the Pliocene of India which appears to be allied
to the emeus and cassowaries and the Australian Dromornis,
one species of which is likewise of Pliocene age; all the other
forms being Plisiocene. Moreover, it is now tolerably certain
that the true ratites have originated from flying birds, and it is
therefore highly probable that the group is an essentially modern
one 1 . Accordingly, there is a strong presumption that the ances-
tors of these birds did not enter Notogsea till comparatively late
in the Tertiary period ; and that, in fact, their southern migration
was not far removed in time from that of the giant land-tortoises,
noticed in the next chapter. Possibly they may have entered
Australia by way of New Guinea during the connection which
Mr Hedley believes to have existed between those two countries
late in the Tertiary epoch ; while the New Zealand forms may
have made their way by means of the presumed land-connection
between these islands and the Solomons, New Hebrides, etc.
Of course there is the difficulty as to why mammals did not
enter the Polynesian region at the same time; but it is conceivable
that even at this date the mammalian fauna of South-eastern Asia
may have been very poor in Eutherians, while it is quite possible
that the ancestral forms of these birds may not have required the
complete land-connection necessary for the passage of the higher
mammals. Such connection as served for these birds, however,
may have well sufficed for the transit of the ancestors of the
Australian murine rodents, which almost certainly entered the
country at a later date than the original marsupials and mono-
tremes.
Assuming, then, that the marsupials and monotremes of the
Australian region did not reach their present home till the early
part of the Tertiary epoch, we must make the further assumption
1 Captain Hutton is of opinion that the moas originated directly from flying
birds in New Zealand, but the evidence in favour of this view appears insufficient.
II.] ORIGIN OF MONOTREMES. 6l
that at this period South-eastern Asia was entirely, or to a great
extent, devoid of higher mammals. Nor is this unlikely, seeing
that the ungulates and carnivores of the lower Eocene of the
northern hemisphere would clearly have required time to spread
themselves to the southward. Hence it may be suggested that,
towards the close of the Cretaceous epoch there was first a migra-
tion towards the south-east of the ancestral marsupials (and
monotremes) inhabiting the northern hemisphere during the
Secondary epoch ; and that similar migrations of the higher mam-
mals took place during Tertiary times.
When once the ancestral polyprotodont marsupials obtained a
footing in New Guinea and Australia, where they have since been
isolated from any serious competition with the higher mammals,
they flourished and developed to a degree which they could not
possibly have attained in any other part of the world under
existing conditions. And it is doubtless within this region that
the more specialised diprotodont types were evolved. Remark-
able as it undoubtedly is, the present state of development of the
Australian marsupials is nothing to what it was during the
Plistocene period, when there lived the giant kangaroos, pha-
langers, wombats, diprotodons, and nototheres already alluded to,
by the side of which the largest existing species would appear
almost dwarfs. The cause of this universal extinction (for uni-
versal it is) of all the larger types of mammalian life throughout
the world soon after the appearance of man, is one of those
problems which at present is not capable of being satisfactorily
solved, as not even a glacial period could have made a clean
sweep of the whole globe. It may be added that the evolution of
the diprotodont marsupials within the limits of the Australian
region, points to the conclusion that the outlying discuses of the
Austro-Malayan regions are immigrants from the south-east.
With regard to the monotremes, it has already been mentioned
that there is no record of their past history beyond the limits of
the Australian region. It can, however, scarcely be doubted that
their ancestors came from the north with the primitive marsupials ;
and if, as is not improbable, the Secondary and early Tertiary
Multituberculata of the northern hemisphere are an allied type,
there can be no doubt whatever as to this having been the case.
62 THE NOTOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
That Notogaea, as typified by the Australian region, is entitled
to form one of the three primary zoological divisions of the globe,
the distinctness of its mammalian fauna from that of any other
area, not only at the present day, but likewise during the Plisto-
cene, and probably also the Pliocene epoch, amply demonstrates.
The inclusion within the same realm of the Polynesian region,
which evidently never had such a close connection with south-
eastern Asia during the time that area was mainly populated with
marsupials, is justified partly on account of its containing more
or less similar types of birds, and partly by the practical absence
of terrestrial mammals. On the other hand, the Austro-Malayan
region, which is really a kind of zoological No-man's-land, is
placed within the limits of the same great realm more as a matter
of convenience than anything else, although it is undoubtedly
sharply differentiated from the Oriental region by Wallace's line.
In conclusion, a few lines may be devoted to showing that
certain other groups indicate that the vertebrate fauna of Notogaea,
as a whole, has had a northern origin. Among the lizards, the
family of iguanas (IguanidcB], which in this realm occurs only in
the Fiji and Friendly Islands, is represented in a fossil state in
the Oligocene beds of France ; while the gigantic extinct monitor
( Varanus priscus) of the Australian Plistocene appears to have its
nearest ally in the smaller V. sivalensis of the Pliocene of northern
India. The Notogseic Chelonians, which are confined to Australia
and New Guinea, all belong to the side-necked group (Pleurodira)
of the order, and are represented by the families Chelyidce. and
Carettochelyidce, the latter containing only a single species from
the Fly River. Now, although none of the Australian genera have
been detected in the northern hemisphere, the side-necked chelo-
nians, as shown in the next chapter, were abundantly represented
there during the early Tertiary and Secondary epochs ; and it
is a remarkable fact that an extinct genus believed to be allied
to Carettochelys occurs in the Eocene of northern India. Although
from their aquatic, and sometimes partially marine habits, the
crocodiles are of less importance than some other groups from a
distributional point of view, yet it is noteworthy that the single
representative of that group ( Crocodilus porosus] inhabiting Noto-
gaea (where it is found in North Australia, the Solomons, and
II.] SURVIVAL OF OLD FORMS. 63
Fiji) is spread over India, Ceylon, and the south of China ; while
the absence of caimans and jacaras from Notogaea aifords, so far
as it goes, an additional argument that any land connection which
may have existed in Tertiary times between Australia and South
America must either have been very transitory, or must have been
situated in such latitudes that tropical forms could not have used
it as a means of transit.
Of more importance than all is the tuatera lizard (Sphenodon) of
New Zealand the sole existing representative of the order
Rhynchocephalia, since this curious creature is closely allied to
the extinct Rhynchosanrus and Hyperodapedon of Triassic strata of
the northern portion of the Old World. Finally, the Port Jackson
shark (Cestracion philippi) belongs to a genus which was living in
the seas of Europe during the Jurassic and Cretaceous periods ;
and the sole living survivor of the. swarms of species of the
Molluscan genus Trigonia inhabiting the same seas occurs in
Australian waters.
CHAPTER III.
THE NEOG^IC REALM.
Extent and Characters Mammaliferous Deposits Monkeys Bats Insecti-
vora Carnivores Ungulates Horses Litopterna Astrapotheria
Toxodonts Pyrotheria Proboscideans Rodents Edentates Arma-
dillos and Glyptodonts Sloths Anteaters- Ground-sloths Marsupials
Cetaceans Early Distinction of the Neogaeic Fauna Early Separation
of N. and S. America Incursion of Northern Mammals Distinctness of
the existing Fauna Origin of the Santa Cruz Fauna Antarctica and the
South American element in the Ethiopean Fauna Conclusion Sub-
regions.
THE second primary zoological division of the globe may be
known as Neogsea 1 , or the Neogseic realm. It
characters"** includes only the Neotropical region. Comprising
not only the whole of South and Central America,
as well as the West Indian Islands, this area also embraces the
lowlands lying on either side of the Mexican plateau the so-
called tierras calientes thus running up in a fork-like manner to
the lower extremity of North America. While, therefore, the
greater part of this vast area is sharply delineated by its coast-
boundary, to the north it has a kind of No-man's-land connecting
it with the Sonoran region of Arctogaea, and, as will be shown
later, through this transitional area there has been a certain
amount of intermixture of the proper faunas of the Neotropical
and Sonoran regions. Neogaea, as a whole, may be characterised
as a country of extensive tropical forests or open grassy plains ;
deserts occupying only a few scattered areas in the upper Argen-
tine (Tucuman, etc.), and certain parts of the coasts of Chili
1 This term was originally proposed by Dr Sclater to include the whole of
the New World, but has been used by an anonymous writer (Appendix, No. 4)
in the present sense. Dr Sclater 's term Dendroggea (Appendix, No. 27,
p. 214) is open to considerable objection, as the greater part of Argentina is
woodless.
CHAP. III.] EXTENT AND CHARACTERS. 6$
and Peru ; the whole of the rest of the area, with the exception of
the higher regions of the Andes, being thus admirably adapted for
the support of animal life. At least one half of the whole area is
occupied by a dense tropical forest, attaining its richest develop-
ment in the hot steamy tracts of Brazil and Paraguay, and being
unequalled in extent in any other part of the globe. With a width
of some three thousand miles from the Atlantic seaboard at Per-
nambuco to the foot of the Andes, this forest extends north and
south for nearly thirty degrees of latitude ; while not only does it
clothe the lowlands and valleys, but extends high up the mountain-
sides, as may be seen in the exquisitely lovely harbour of Rio de
Janeiro, where the forest-vegetation commences immediately above
the wash of the waves, and thence extends in one continuous leafy
mass to the summits of mountain-ranges at an elevation of eight
or nine thousand feet. In the northern part of the area open
grass-lands, like the "campos" of Brazil and the savannas of
Venezuela, alternate with the forest ; while in the neighbourhood
of Buenos Aires the open pampas 1 forms one extensive sea of grass.
The Andes, constituting the backbone of the country, run in one
continuous chain from north to south on the Pacific seaboard, and
present the usual varieties of climate and physical conditions
common to other elevated mountain-ranges. Such climatic
variations are, however, only an epitome of those met with in
travelling from the northern to the southern extremity of the area ;
the steamy valley of the Amazons having a tropical climate, whereas
when we reach the southern point of Patagonia and Tierra del
Fuego we are in the midst of snows and glaciers. To the hot
forest-regions are restricted the monkeys, marmosets, sloths, ant-
eaters, and tree-porcupines ; while the open plains of the south are
tenanted by guanaco, deer, viscachas, and rheas. Moreover, in
the forests, the variety of mammalian life, especially as regards the
larger forms, is in marked contrast to its comparative paucity in
the open plains ; not but that, till civilised man made his appear-
ance on the scene, the number of individuals may have been
nearly, if not quite as large in the latter area as in an equal extent
of the former.
1 Although in Spanish the term 'pampas' is plural, in English it seems
preferable to use it as singular.
L. 5
66 THE NEOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
At the present day the mammalian fauna of Neogaea is mark-
edly distinct not only from that of Notogaea but likewise from that
of the whole of the rest of the globe (Arctogsea), although the dis-
tinction is now, owing to free communication with the north,
much less marked than it was in Tertiary times, and it is accord-
ingly essential to enter at once into the consideration of the
extinct forms in order to show why this part of the world is
entitled to rank as one of three primary zoological regions.
There are several districts in South America where fossil
Mammal- remains of mammals have been found ; most of these
iferous being remarkable for the extraordinary profusion in
which the bones occur. The first that may be men-
tioned are the celebrated caves of Lagoa Santa, in the province of
Minas Geraes, to the northward of Rio, which have yielded re-
mains of a great variety of Plistocene genera and species, inclusive
of those of man. Probably contemporaneous with these are the
sand-dunes on the coast of Buenos Aires, which likewise contain
human remains in association with those of extinct mammals ;
while the so-called Pampean beds of the Argentine pampas are
apparently somewhat older, although still pertaining to the Plisto-
cene period. As these Pampean deposits are exceedingly rich in
fossil mammals, they may be described in some detail. They
form the great level tract of country extending southwards from
the Rio de la Plata and the Parana to the Rio Colorado, south of
Bahia Blanca, and westwards from the Atlantic seaboard about
half the distance to the Andes; thus occupying some 200,000
square miles of country. The pampas is an almost level grass-
covered plain, intersected by water-courses, and penetrated near
its margins by small mountain-ranges, while it is almost entirely
barren of trees. It is composed of a- rich black alluvial mud,
mingled with beds of sand, and underlain by, or in some places
interstratified with layers of a hard white calcareous deposit
known as tosca\ but in certain spots it contains beds of marine
shells belonging to species still living in the adjacent seas. Except
in those spots where the tosca comes to the surface, there is not a
stone or a pebble to be seen in the whole deposit, and near
Buenos Aires the formation has been bored to a depth of ninety
feet without touching bottom. From its composition it is evident
III.] MAMMALIFEROUS DEPOSITS. 67
that the deposit has been carried down from the interior of the
north by the Parana, Paraguay, and other tributaries of what is
now the Rio de la Plata ; but since there is no splitting of the
latter river at its estuary, it is evident that the formation cannot
properly be called a delta. That it is mainly of freshwater origin
seems evident not only from its intrinsic character, but likewise
from the vast number of entire skeletons of mammals buried
within it, since these creatures must certainly have lived very near
to the places where their bones are now entombed. In the more
southern part of its area the pampas is, however, probably to
a large extent of estuarine origin ; and the presence of layers of
marine shells in its uppermost horizon near Buenos Aires proves
that at least a portion was submerged beneath the sea before its
final upheaval. Whereas the Rio de la Plata now flows in a single
channel in a south-easterly direction near the northern limit of the
coast-portion of the pampas, it would seem probable that the
Parana and Paraguay rivers may have originally continued their
southerly course across the southern pampas, through which they
may have flowed in a number of streams. Most likely the Pam-
pean formation was laid down in a slowly subsiding area, in which
the rate of deposition approximately counterbalanced the sinking,
so that the greater part of it has been always land until the period
of the great submergence. After the latter, the entire area was
upheaved to a small degree above the sea-level, when the rivers
assumed their present approximate courses. Whereas in certain
localities the deposit is barren of mammalian remains, in other
spots it appears absolutely crowded with them, and the number of
entire skeletons that are entombed in it must doubtless be counted
by thousands.
Somewhat older than the Pampean is a mammaliferous deposit
occurring on the coast near Bahia Blanca in a small hill known as
Monte Hermoso ; and beds of approximately equivalent age occur
in Catamarca at the foot of the Andes. Probably these beds should
be regarded as of Pliocene age ; and it may be mentioned that
equivalents of these deposits are met with in other parts of
Argentina, while representatives of the Pampean occur in Pata-
gonia, Chili, Bolivia, etc. Still older than the Monte Hermoso
deposits are the Santa Cruz beds of Patagonia, occurring not only
52
68 THE NEOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
on the river of that name, but likewise further north in the Chubat
district. These Santa Cruz beds are exceedingly rich in mamma-
lian remains, which are stained of a deep black colour ; and while
they contain many groups common to the Pampean formation,
they lack those forms found in the latter which have an Arctogseic
fades, thus indicating that we have reached an epoch when the
fauna of South America was far more completely isolated from
that of the rest of the world than is at present the case. By Dr
Ameghino the Santa Cruz beds were at first correlated with the
lower Eocene of Europe, although he subsequently admitted that
they must occupy a somewhat higher position in that period 1 .
From the nature of their entombed mammals 2 it is, however,
certain that they must be still newer, and they cannot be regarded
as older than lower Miocene. Indeed, they are underlain by the
so-called Patagonian beds 3 , which are of marine origin, and
contain numerous cetaceans, among which are whalebone whales
(Mystacoceti). From equivalent beds in the Chubat district of
Patagonia, a large number of such cetaceans have been described
by the present writer 4 , and it is quite evident that the oldest age
that can be assigned to these beds is upper Oligocene, seeing that
in Europe whalebone whales are unknown till a considerably later
epoch. Probably the freshwater beds containing the peculiar
mammal alluded to below under the name of Pyrotherium are the
freshwater equivalents of the Patagonian horizon 5 .
Additional evidence in support of the comparatively late age
of the Patagonian beds is afforded by the researches of Prof. Cope 6
on the cetaceans of the Miocene (or Upper Oligocene?) of the
United States. From these beds have been obtained remains of
Hypocetus (Paracetus) a genus elsewhere known only from the
Patagonian beds together with Cetotherium (also occurring in the
latter deposits), Balcenoptera, and a species of Balcena identified
with one from the European Pliocene ; the North and South
American species of Hypocetus being closely allied.
1 Bol. Ac, Cordoba, Vol. xin. p. 260 (1894).
2 Remains of the existing genus Dasypus occur in these beds.
3 Ameghino, loc. cit.
4 Ann. Mus. La Plata, Pal. Argent. Pt. II. (1893).
5 Ameghino, op. cit. p. 262.
6 Prof. Amcr. Phil. Soc. Vol. XXXIV. pp. 135 155 (1895).
III.] MONKEYS. 69
With these preliminary considerations, we pass to a critical
examination of the recent and fossil mammalian fauna of Neogaea,
which will show how intimately investigations of this nature are
connected with the present and past configuration of the land-
areas of the globe.
Like as are many of them superficially to their cousins of the
Old World, the monkeys of the New World, which
,, , , .... . - Monkeys.
are now confined to the tropical forest-regions of
the Neogaeic realm, are structurally quite different to the former ;
and this circumstance, coupled with their isolated distribution, in-
dicates that their relationship is, at most, but a very distant one.
Indeed it is not improbable that the Old and New World monkeys
may have originated independently from the group of lemurs, which
were formerly very widely distributed over Arctogaea. Of the
two families of Neotropical monkeys, the first is represented by
the beautiful little marmosets, constituting the family Hapalida.
Although having the same number (32) of teeth as the Old World
monkeys, the marmosets differ in that the number of premolars on
each side of both jaws is three, and that of the molars two ; these
numbers being transposed in the other group. The marmosets
are further distinguished by the broad septum between the nostrils,
the absence both of pouches in the cheeks and of callosities on
the buttocks, and the want of any prehensile power in the tail ; in
addition to which it may be noticed that the thumb is not op-
posable to the other fingers, while all the digits, with the
exception of the first on the hind foot, are provided with long
claws. None of these animals are known from the Santa Cruz
FlG. 9. PART OF RIGHT LOWER JAW OF HoniUHCulus.
deposits. In the second family or Cebidce, which includes much
larger species than the diminutive marmosets, the total number of
70 THE NEOG^EIC REALM. [CHAP.
teeth is 36, owing to the retention of the three pairs of molars
found in the Old World group ; these monkeys being further dis-
tinguished from the marmosets by the presence of nails on all the
fingers, and by the tail being frequently prehensile. The Santa
Cruz beds have yielded remains of monkeys (JFTomunculus) refer-
able to this family, showing that they belong to the original South
American fauna, but beyond this nothing is known as to the
palseontological history or origin of the group. Lemurs, both in
the past and the present, are quite unknown in the realm under
consideration.
Although bats might be thought of comparatively little im-
portance from a distributional point of view, yet the
Bats. :_
Neogseic realm presents some very remarkable
features in this respect. In the first place the two Old World
families of fruit-bats (Pteropodtdce) and horse-shoe bats (Rhinolo-
phidce] are entirely wanting, whereas the great family of vampire-
bats (Phyllostomatida) is mainly restricted to it, although a few
representatives straggle northwards along the Pacific coast of
North America. The family of Emballonuridtz is also more
strongly represented here than in any other part of the world.
Probably on account of their small size, there is no palaeonto-
logical record of the South American bats from the earlier
Tertiary deposits.
The Insectivora are almost unrepresented in the continental
portion of the realm, although a shrew (Sorex)
Insectivora. ' .
reaches Guatemala and Costa Rica, and a member
of the allied N. American genus Blarina is also found in the
last-named country; both these being doubtless very recent
immigrants from the north. Very remarkable is the occurrence in
the West Indian Islands of the two species of Solenodon, consti-
tuting a distinct family (Solenodontidce) by themselves. These
have generally been considered as very nearly allied to the tenrecs
(Centetidce) of Madagascar, but Mr O. Thomas 1 is of opinion
that the relationship is not really very close, the similarity in the
structure of their molars being merely a generalised character.
Both, however, probably indicate an ancient group, which has
1 Proc. Zool. Soc. 1892, p. 500.
III.] CARNIVORA. 71
migrated from the higher latitudes of the northern hemisphere to
find a refuge in these two far distant localities. It may be
mentioned that the Solenodontidce and Centetidce, together with the
Potamogalida of western, and the Chrysochloridcz, or golden moles,
of southern Africa, constitute a section of the order distinguished
from all the other forms by having the cusps on their upper molar
teeth arranged in the form of the letter V, instead of in that of a
W ; and it will not fail to be noticed that the whole group is now
exclusively a southern one. Whether it is represented in the Santa
Cruz beds is not quite certain, although one lower jaw has been
referred to it by Dr Ameghino 1 under the name of Necrolestes.
Be this as it may, it is clear that, with the exception of the afore-
said shrews, insectivores with W-shaped molars are entirely want-
ing in the realm ; and that such V-shaped types as still exist, or
formerly occurred, evidently indicate an ancient northern group.
Other instances of the survival in South America and Madagascar
of allied forms will be noticed in the sequel, and admit of a
somewhat similar explanation.
Although fairly well represented at the present day, the carni-
vores of this realm have but few absolutely charac-
. Carnivora.
tenstic forms, and as no remains of the true Carni-
vora occur in the Santa Cruz beds, the whole of them may be
regarded as comparatively late immigrants from the north. The
civet family ( Vsvtrrida) and hyaenas (Hyanidcz) are totally wanting
at all epochs, as indeed they are throughout the whole of the New
World; but the weasel tribe (Mustelidce) have a comparatively
small number of representatives. Cats (Felidcz) on the other
hand are numerous, although several species, and more especially
the puma (Felts concolor), range to a greater or less extent into
North America. Such a cosmopolitan genus is, however, of no
importance whatever from a distributional point of view; and
much the same may be said of the extinct sabre-tooths (Machar-
odus), which were distributed in Tertiary times throughout the
entire northern hemisphere. Unknown in the deposits of Monte
Hermoso and Santa Cruz, this genus is represented by a gigantic
species in the Pampean, which undoubtedly reached the country
t
1 Bol. Ac. Cordoba, Vol. xm. p. 364 (1894).
72 THE NEOG^ilC REALM. [CHAP.
from the north in company with the other late immigrants. The
dog tribe (Canidcs) likewise comes under the category of cosmo-
politan groups, and has numerous South American species,
although only one from the Monte Hermoso beds dates earlier
than the Pampean. It may be mentioned that while true wolves 1
are absent from this realm, all the continental living members of
the genus Cants found in it form a group by themselves, quite
distinct from the true foxes of other regions. Very remarkable is the
occurrence in the Pampean of a large species (C. moreni) perfectly
distinct from all those now inhabiting the country, and presenting
some curious approximations in the structure of the skull to
domestic dogs. Peculiar to the realm is the bush-dog (Icticyori),
of Guiana and Brazil, a small short-haired and short-legged
species differing from all other members of the family by the
small size and reduced number of the molar teeth. Its remains
occur in the Brazilian caves, but are unknown from earlier
deposits ; and it may thus be regarded as a comparatively late
immigrant from the north, which perhaps developed its special
characters after its arrival in the country. Of the Ursidce. there is
but a single existing species in Neogaea, namely the spectacled
bear ( Ursus ornatus) of the highlands of Chili and Peru ; but
there occur in the Pampean formation of the Argentine remains of
an allied extinct genus known as Arctotherium, another species of
the same genus being recorded from the superficial deposits of
California. Far more characteristic of the realm are the raccoons
and coatis (Procyonid<z\ although several of these are common to
North America. Till recently it was considered that this family
was entirely restricted to the New World, but the Oriental cat-bear
or panda (Ailurus) is now included ; and since fossil remains of
the latter genus have been discovered in the Pliocene of England,
while those of raccoons and of the extinct genus Leptarctus occur
in that of the United States, it is practically certain that the group
was formerly widely distributed over the northern hemisphere.
Among this family the raccoons (Procyon) extend over most parts
of both North and South America ; the coatis (Nasua} range from
Mexico to Paraguay; the kinkajou (Cercoleptes) is found from
1 The Falkland Island wolf (Cants antarcticus) forms a remarkable ex-
ception.
III.] UNGULATES. 73
Mexico to Peru and Brazil; while the two species of the genus
Bassariscus are inhabitants of the southern United States, Mexico,
and Central America. From the Tertiaries of Catamarca and
Parana there has been described the extinct genus Cyonasua,
differing from the c.oatis in the form of its teeth ; this genus
showing that the family had obtained an entrance into South
America as early as the Pliocene period, although it is quite
unknown in the Santa Cruz epoch. In the Mustelidce. where all
reference to the cosmopolitan otters, of which there is one Brazilian
species, may be omitted the southern skunks (Conepatus], which
have mostly but thirty-two teeth, are now practically character-
istic of this realm although the common species ranges into
Texas and their remains occur fossil in the caverns of Brazil.
The true skunks (Mephitis), on the other hand, which have
thirty-four teeth, are North American, although one species
ranges as far south as Guatemala ; and since the whole group is
unknown in the earlier Tertiary deposits of the Argentine, it may
likewise be considered a recent immigrant from the north. The
same is true of the genus (Galictis) now represented by the
South American grison and tayra, since remains of this group of
mustelines occur in the Plistocene of the United States, as well
as in the Brazilian caves.
Of far more importance than either of the preceding orders
are the hoofed mammals or ungulates, since here we
meet with certainly three, and probably four extinct
subordinal groups exclusively confined to this realm, while a large
number of the existing families are unrepresented even in the
Pampean formation. Whereas this order is entirely absent from the
West India Islands, South America at the present day is singularly
poor in ungulates. The only existing forms are the peccaries
(Dicotyles), which are peculiar to the New World; certain deer
belonging to a genus ( Cariacus) which is likewise confined to the
western hemisphere, and a Chilian form constituting a genus
(Pudud] by itself; the exclusively South American guanacos and
vicunas, which, together with their domesticated allies constitute
the genus Lama; and tapirs (Tapirus). The first three of these
belonging to the Artiodactyla, while the last alone represents the
Perissodactyla, or odd-toed division of the order. At all periods
74 THE NEOG^EIC REALM. [CHAP.
of its history true pigs (Sus), hippopotami (Hippopotamus], camels
(Came/us), chevrotains (Tragulida\ giraffes (Giraffida), true deer
(Cervus), antelopes, sheep, goats, and oxen, together with a
number of extinct forms connecting the ruminants with the pigs,
have been conspicuous for their absence. The same is true,
among the perissodactyles, of the rhinoceroses (Rhinocerotidce)
and the extinct palseotheres (Pal&otheriida) and lophiodons
(Lophiodontida) of Europe, and the uintatheres {Uintatheriida)
and titanotheres ( Titanotheriidce] of the United States ; while the
true elephants (Elephas] among the Proboscidea have likewise
been always absent.
Of the existing South American ungulates the peccaries
belong to a family (DicotylidcB) which is abundantly represented in
the Tertiary formations of the United States ; while in those of
Europe and Asia there occur allied forms apparently connecting
the peccaries with the true pigs. On the other hand, in South
America their remains occur only in the superficial and cavern-
deposits, so that there can be no doubt as to their late intrusion
into the country from the north. The vicunas and guanacos are
the western representatives of a family (Cameltda) whose other
members are Asiatic and African, and of which the past history
seems to have been very similar to that of the last group. Fossil
camels occur in the Pliocene of India, while a host of extinct
genera more or less closely allied to the living South American
forms occur in the Tertiaries of the United States ; and since in
Argentina and Brazil remains of Lama and the related types
occur only in the Monte Hermoso, Pampean, and cavern de-
posits, there can be no hesitation in regarding the group as com-
paratively recently immigrant into the country. The deer of the
genus Cariacus are likewise only known in South America from
the Pampean and some other of the later Tertiaries, as well as the
Brazilian caves, while in the Pliocene of the United States they
appear to be represented by the ancestral Blastomeryx; and these
accordingly come under the category of intruders from the north.
As regards the tapirs, the genus and family now presents a
remarkable instance of discontinuous distribution, one species
being confined to the Malayan countries, while all the others are
South American. Whereas in the realm under consideration re-
III.] HORSES. 75
mains of these animals occur only in the superficial deposits, they
are met with abundantly in the Miocene and Pliocene deposits
of Europe and Asia, as well as in the United States; and it is
accordingly clear that the group was once widely distributed over
the northern hemisphere, whence its surviving members have
wandered southwards to Malaysia in the east and South America
in the west.
Till introduced by the early Spanish settlers, horses, which are
now so abundant in the pampas, were totally un- H orses
known in South America in a living state, although
their fossilised remains occur commonly in the Pampean, as well
as in the somewhat older deposits of Parana, and Monte Hermoso.
They are, however, entirely unknown in the Santa Cruz beds.
Some of these fossil Argentine horses belong to the typical genus
Equus\ while others, on account of the simpler structure of their
molar teeth and the great length of the slits in the skull beneath
the nasal bones, are referred to a separate genus, under the name
of Hippidium. A third genus (Onohippidimn) is distinguished
from the latter by a large lachrymal depression in the bones of the
sides of the face, corresponding to the so-called larmier of the deer.
Fossil species of Equus occur in the Plistocene deposits of the
whole northern hemisphere, while those of the United States yield
remains of a genus (Pliohippus] nearly allied to the South American
Hippidium; and as both these genera are the descendants of
extinct forms whose remains occur in the older Tertiaries of the
same hemisphere, the extinct South American horses must likewise
be classed with the groups that have entered the country from the
north. Why these Plistocene South American Equida became
extinct in a country so admirably suited to their existence as
Argentina, is a question to which it is impossible to find a
satisfactory answer. With the horses we reach the last of the
Neogaeic representatives of the more typical ungulates, that is to
say the Artiodactyla and Perissodactyla ; and we pass on to the
other extinct subordinal groups, at least three of which, as already
said, are peculiar to it.
From the preceding paragraphs it will be apparent that, if we
except the deer, horses, and the guanacos and their
allies, South America, so far as the Artiodactyla and
THE NEOG^EIC REALM.
[CHAP.
III.] LITOPTERNA. 77
Perissodactyla are concerned, was exceedingly poorly off for
ungulates during the Plistocene epoch. Nevertheless, the
country was very rich in hoofed mammals, not only during the
Pampean, but likewise during the Santa Crucian epoch, and in
this respect it was quite as peculiar as it is in its edentates. It is
not a little remarkable that three of the extinct subordinal groups
of the order which are confined to this realm exhibit a more or
less decided approximation, more especially in the structure of
their molar teeth, to the earlier northern Tertiary representatives
of the Perissodactyla. Hence it is probable that all the four
suborders in question have originated from a common ancestral
stock, although apparently before the perissodactyles were differen-
tiated from an earlier group known as the Condylarthra. The
date when the ancestors of the South American forms reached
their present home is, however, enveloped in mystery, and
although it is fairly certain that such ancestors had a northern
origin, yet it is highly improbable that they entered South America
from that direction.
The first of the three extinct subordinal groups in question,
for which the name of Litopterna has been proposed, is the one
showing the nearest parallelism with the Perissodactyla, and is
typified by the genus Macrauchenia, of which the skeleton is
figured in the accompanying illustration. In this group the cheek-
teeth approximate in general structure to those of the well-known
European Oligocene genus Palaotherium, although in the typical
genus Macrauchenia they have been so modified as to render the
resemblance obscure. An essential characteristic of the upper molar
teeth (fig. 13) is to be found in the presence of two distinct lobes
to their outer walls. The toes of both fore and hind feet are
elongated, and constructed on the same general plan as those of
the Perissodactyla, never exceeding three in number on each foot,
and the middle one being symmetrical in itself. Moreover the
astragalus of the tarsus or heel-joint resembles the corresponding
bone of the latter group in having a deep pulley-like groove on its
upper surface for the articulation of the tibia, although inferiorly
it is unlike. The calcaneum, or heel-bone, on the other hand,
resembles that of the Artiodactyla in bearing a small facet for the
articulation of the fibula, or small bone of the leg. A more
THE NEOG^IC REALM.
[CHAP.
FlG. II. SKELETON OF HIND FOOT OF AN EXTINCT SPECIES OF RHINOCEROS.
(To exhibit Perissodactyle type of structure.}
FlG. 12. LEFT CARPUS AND METACARPUS OF HYRAX AND ELEPHANT.
(Showing linear and alternating arrangements of carpal bones.}
III.] MACRAUCHENIA. 79
important difference, from both the Perissodactyla and Artio-
dactyla, occurs in the structure of the carpus (wrist) and tarsus
(ankle), in both of which the two rows of small component bones
are arranged in vertical series one above another, instead of
overlapping and interlocking; this so-called linear arrangement
being a more primitive type than the interlocking or alternating
arrangement characterising the two existing suborders. The
vertebrae of the neck are elongated, with flat terminal faces, and
have the vertebral artery piercing the sides of the neural arch
in a manner elsewhere found only in the camel family and the
great anteater. In the femur, or thigh-bone, the projection known
as the third trochanter is much less developed than in the Perisso-
dactyla. All the members of the group were long-limbed, long-
necked, and slenderly built animals, Macrauchenia itself being
as large as a camel, although the genera from the Santa Cruz
beds of Patagonia were represented by species of much smaller
dimensions.
Of the typical genus Macrauchenia fossil remains occur not
only in the Pampean formation, but likewise in the superficial
deposits of both Patagonia and Bolivia. The most curious feature
about this remarkable animal is the position in the skull of the
aperture for the nostrils, which instead of being situated at the
extremity of the muzzle, is placed in the middle of the forehead,
between the eyes. Otherwise the skull is not unlike that of a
horse in general contour. The teeth, which are forty-four in
number, and form a continuous uninterrupted series, are a special-
ised modification of the type of those of the undermentioned
genus ; their crowns being taller, with a more complicated ar-
rangement of folds. In nearly all points of its structure, especially
in the number of the teeth, and the absence of large tusks, as well
as in the structure of the wrist- and ankle-joints, Macrauchenia
is a very primitive kind of animal. In the Santa Cruz beds of
Patagonia the family to which this genus belongs is represented
by several smaller animals, such as those named Oxyodonto-
therium, in which the aperture for the nostrils occupied a more
normal position in the skull, and the crowns of the molar teeth
were shorter and of a more simple structure. The crown-surfaces
of worn upper molar teeth from the right side of the jaw of both
8o
THE NEOG^IC REALM.
[CHAP.
genera are shown in the accompanying figures (13 and 14); the
letters indicating the corresponding elements in each.
FlG. 13. GRINDING SURFACE OF RIGHT UPPER MOLAR OF Macrauchenia.
FlG. 14. GRINDING SURFACE OF RIGHT UPPER MOLAR OF
Oxyodontotherium .
The second family, or Proterotheriidce, is confined to the Monte
Hermoso, Parana, and Santa Cruz beds of Patagonia, in the last
of which it is represented by the genera Proterotherium and Dia-
diaphorus. In these animals, none of which much exceeded a
sheep in size, the upper molar teeth are much more like those of
the European Palceotherium ; and, in place of forming a continuous
series, the teeth are interrupted; one pair, both in the upper and
lower jaw, being developed into tusks. In structure the feet pre-
sented a general resemblance to those of the extinct three-toed
horses (Hipparion) of the northern hemisphere, but in some in-
stances the toes were reduced to a single one, thus showing a
III.]
ASTRAPOTHERIA.
8l
Astrapotheria.
curious parallelism in the development of this group to that of the
horses.
A second sub-order of ungulates, entirely confined to the Santa
Cruz and Patagonian beds of Patagonia, is repre-
sented by the two generic types known as Astrapo-
therium and Homalodontotherium, each of which constitutes a
family by itself. Rivalling the rhinoceros in bulk, both of these
extraordinary creatures differ from the last group by the structure
of their molar teeth, which approximate to those of the Rhino-
cerotidce, those of the upper jaw having a continuous outer wall, not
divided into lobes. In the ankle-joint the astragalus differs from
that of the preceding group in having its upper surface flat, thus
resembling that of the elephants. In both the wrist and ankle
FlG. 15. GRINDING SURFACE OF RIGHT UPPER MOLAR OF Astrapotheiium.
the component bones were arranged on the linear plan, and not
improbably each foot had five toes. The vertebrae of the neck
were short, with flat terminal faces ; and in correlation with this
shortness of the neck, the limbs and feet were more or less
abbreviated. In the first-named of the two genera each jaw was
provided with an enormous pair of tusks, wearing obliquely against
L. 6
82 THE NEOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
one another like those of a wild boar ; and although there were
no small teeth in the upper jaw, the lower jaw carried three pairs of
spatulate incisors quite unlike those of any other known animal.
On the other hand, Homalodontotherium takes its name from having
its forty-four teeth arranged in a continuous even series, unbroken
either by tusks or by gaps. Whereas the molar teeth of Astrapother-
ium present a marked resemblance to those of the rhinoceroses,
it is noteworthy that those of the allied genus make a certain
approximation to the corresponding teeth of an extinct ungulate
from the European Oligocene known as Cadurcotherium, ap-
parently more or less closely allied to the rhinoceroses. It is,
however, quite improbable that it is to these allied forms we
have to look for the origin of the peculiar South American
ungulates, seeing that they must have branched off from the primi-
tive stock at an earlier stage.
The third extinct subordinal group, or Toxodontia, takes its
name from a gigantic species from the Pampean
Toxodonts.
formation to which Owen, on account of the pecu-
liarly curved form of the molar teeth, gave the name of Toxodon.
Rivalling the largest existing rhinoceros in point of size, the
Toxodon has at first sight very much the general appearance of
one of those animals, having a massive skull, short limbs and
neck, and three-toed feet. The middle toe is, however, scarcely
larger than the lateral ones ; and while the bones of the wrist are
arranged in the alternating manner, those of the tarsus are placed
in a linear series, and the astragalus has a nearly flat, instead of a
grooved, superior surface ; the terminal faces of the vertebrae of
the neck being also flat, instead of articulating together by ball-
and-socket joints. Omitting mention of other more or less strongly
pronounced peculiarities in the structure of the limbs, attention
may be specially directed to the teeth, which differ from those of
all existing ungulates in that the whole of them grow continuously
throughout the life of their owner, without ever forming roots.
The front or incisor teeth are chisel-like, and thus resemble in
form, although not in number, those of a beaver or rabbit; and,
indeed, in the general conformation of the teeth, as well as in the
non-development of roots, the whole dentition of this animal
presents a most curious similarity to that of the rodents. Some
III.]
TOXODONTS.
idea of the huge size of these animals may be gathered from the
fact that the skull may measure as much as a yard in length.
Whereas Toxodon itself is confined to the Pampean beds, it is
represented in the somewhat older deposits of Monte Hermoso
and Catamarca by allied forms known as Toxodontotherium and
Xotodon.
FIG. 1 6. SKULL OF Nesodon. Much reduced.
In the Santa Cruz beds of Patagonia the place of the fore-
going is taken by the allied genus Nesodon, likewise belonging to
the same family Toxodontidce. In these animals, of which the
skull is shown in the figure, the molars retain marked resem-
blances to those of the rhinoceroses, which have been lost in the
more specialised Toxodon ; these teeth growing for a considerable
period, yet late in life developing roots in the ordinary manner.
The front teeth are very peculiar, the canines remaining small
throughout life, but the second pair of incisors in the upper, and
the third in the lower jaw growing beyond the others to form large
tusks in the adult, and never developing roots. In their rooted
molars the Nesodons depart less widely from the primitive Peris-
62
8 4
THE NEOG^EIC REALM.
[CHAP.
sodactyle type than do their more specialised descendants the
Toxodons, although there are no forms known from other parts of
the world to which they present any direct relationship or show any
marked resemblance.
A second family ( Typotheriidce) of the sub-order is represented
in the Pampean by the typical genus Typotherium and in the
Santa Cruz, or Patagonian, beds by the allied Trachytherus. Both
these have a dentition still more like that of the rodents ; the
front, or incisor teeth being reduced to a single chisel -like pair in
FlG. 17. IMPERFECT PALATE OF Typotht
Reduced.
each jaw, while the molars are narrow, rootless, and of compara-
tively simple structure and relatively small size. Moreover, in-
stead of hoofs, these highly modified ungulates appear, like many
III.] PYROTHERIUM. 85
members of the rodent order, to have had their toes protected
by nails. Like as are these animals to rodents, the resemblance
to that group is carried to a still greater extent in certain small
forms from the Santa Cruz beds which have been named Pachy-
ruchus and Hegetot her turn ; these constituting a third family, the
Pachyruchida. From the features referred to, the reader might
be disposed to consider that there is some direct genetic affinity
between rodents and the group under consideration, but this is
clearly not the case, such resemblances as exist being solely the
result of that parallelism in development which appears to have
been such an important factor in the evolution of mammals.
It may be well to mention here that in a recent paper 1 Dr
Noack suggests an intimate affinity between the toxodonts and
the existing hyraces (Hyracoidea) of Africa and Syria; adding
that the presumed affinity affords evidence of a land-connection
between Africa and South America. The two groups are, however,
essentially different in regard to the structure of the fore-foot, in
which the bones of the carpus or wrist are arranged, as already
shown, in the alternating manner among the toxodonts, whereas
in the Hyracoidea they form a linear series. Moreover, the molar
teeth of the two groups are markedly distinct, although in both
they approximate to the perissodactyle type. Still there is a pos-
sibility that the Hyracoidea may represent a less specialised branch
which has originated from the primitive toxodont stock, but has
retained the linear type of carpus ; and if this really be the case,
it would afford very strong confirmation of the view that South
America received its earliest ungulates by way of Africa and the
Antarctic Continent.
A remarkable ungulate from the Patagonian beds, with molar
teeth very like those of the extinct European genus
Dinotherium, and bearing a pair of large tusks in
the lower jaw at least, has been tentatively assigned by the present
writer to the Proboscidea ; but judging from the distinction of the
other ungulates of the older Argentine Tertiaries from those of
the rest of the world, it is more probable that it represents a
sub-order by itself. Pyrotherium, as the animal is called, was
1 ZooLJahrb.-AbtheilfurSystemat. vol. vil. pp. 540 542.
86 THE NEOG^EIC REALM. [CHAP.
associated with nesodons, astrapotheres, and homalodontotheres,
which have been assigned by Dr Ameghino to genera distinct
from those of the Santa Cruz beds. But from my own observations
on a series of remains of these animals in the La Plata Museum
obtained in association with those of Pyrotherium, they appear to
be genetically inseparable from their Santa Crucian represen-
tatives.
Now represented only by the living Indian and African
elephants the Proboscidea were formerly a some-
deans b SC1 what extensive subordinal group of the ungulates,
easily characterised by their peculiar molar teeth
and tusks (the latter of which may be present either in the upper
or lower jaw alone, or in both) ; their five-toed feet, in which the
bones of the ankle and wrist are arranged on the linear plan, and
the astragalus has a flat upper surface; and the presence of a
trunk. While true elephants (Elephas) are totally unknown in
South America, the genus Mastodon, distinguished by the low
crowns and simpler structure of the molar teeth, is represented by
two species in the Pampean of Buenos Aires, and is also stated to
occur in the Monte Hermoso beds ; but (assuming the distinct-
ness of Pyrotheriuni) the sub-order is unknown in the older deposits.
Although at the present day Neogaea contains no existing fami-
lies of either carnivores or ungulates absolutely pecu-
Rodents. .. ....... 3 *
liar to it, the case is widely different with regard to
the rodents, or gnawing mammals. Existing rodents are divided
into seventeen families, arranged under four sectional groups ;
nine out of these seventeen families occurring in the Neogaeic
realm, among which four are absolutely peculiar to it. A fifth
(Octodontida) is mainly South American and West Indian although
possessing a few representatives in Africa south of the Sahara, and
a sixth (Hystricida) has two genera which are practically only
South American. The significance of these facts will be apparent
when it is stated that of the other zoological regions of the globe
only two have any families of the order peculiar to them, and
neither of these has more than two such families. In the Ethio-
pian region, for instance, the only peculiar family is that of the
African flying-squirrels (Anomalurid(E\ represented by two genera ;
while the western division of the Holarctic region has the sewel-
III.] RODENTS. 87
lels (Haplodontida), with one genus ; and the Sonoran region the
pouched rats (Geomyidce) with two. It is further highly significant
that all of these families which are mainly or chiefly Neotropical
belong to one division of the order, the Hystricomorpha, and
that certain of them are represented either in the Santa Cruz beds
of Patagonia, or the Parana beds, where the whole of the other
sections and families are totally unknown. This, however, is by
no means all, for throughout the Tertiaries of North America
below the Pliocene there are no Hystricomorpha at all, and at the
present day there is but a single species the Canadian porcupine
(Erethizott) inhabiting the whole of that country. On the other
hand, both at the present day and in the Tertiaries, North America
abounds in Sciuromorpha and Myomorpha. These facts clearly
point to the existence of an impassable barrier between North
and South America during a large portion of the Tertiary
period. Moreover, even at the present day the Sciuromorpha
are scarcely represented at all in Neogaea, while the Myomorpha
are not very numerous.
Of the squirrel-like rodents, constituting the section Sciuro-
morpha, and including the four existing families of the African
flying-squirrels (Anomalurid(z\ the squirrels and marmots (Sciur-
idcK], the sewellels (Haplodontida), and the beavers (Castoridce),
as well as the extinct American Castoroidida, the only living
Neogaeic representatives are certain species of squirrels, none x>f
which range south of Paraguay. The extinct Castoroididcz include
large beaver-like rodents with complex molars like those of the
viscacha, and are represented by the typical Castoroides from the
Plistocene of the United States, and likewise by Amblyrhiza
(Loxomylus) from caves in the West Indies, and, it is said, also
from the later Tertiaries of Argentina. This family is accordingly
a northern type.
The second or murine group of rodents (Myomorpha) contains
five families, namely the dormice (Myoxidce), the jumping-mice
and jerboas (Dipodidce), the mice and rats (Muridce), the mole-rats
(Spalarida), and the American pouched rats (Geomytda). Out of
all these, practically the only one represented in the realm is the
cosmopolitan Muridce, although among the Geomyidce the genus
Heteromys enters the transitional Mexican sub-region. In the
88 THE NEOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
Muridce, however, as in North America, the true rats and mice
(Mus) of the Old World are entirely wanting, except through
human introduction ; their place being taken by the white-footed
mice (Sttomys) common to the whole of the New World, and
nearly related to the European hamsters. Being essentially a
northern type, they are certainly recent immigrants into South
America from the north ; and the same is doubtless true of certain
genera of the family now peculiar to this realm, such as the fish-
eating rats (Ichthyomys\ of Peru and Venezuela, the groove-toothed
mice (Rhithrodori), one of which ranges as far south as Tierra del
Fuego, and the Brazilian genus Holochilus, which is another form
allied to the hamsters. Although the cotton-rat (Sigmodon) occurs
in Central America, and occasionally wanders still further south,
the whole tribe of voles and their kindred are absent from the
entire realm.
Represented by six families, all of which occur within its limits,
the porcupine-like group, or Hystricomorpha, may be regarded as
the characteristic rodents of Neogsea. From both the preceding
sections of the order the members of this section may be readily
distinguished by the angle (or hinder inferior projection) of the
lower jaw taking its origin from a prominent ridge running along
the side of the jaw, instead of from the inferior edge of the socket
for the incisor teeth. Of the families confined to this realm, that
of the cavies (Caviidcz], includes heavily-built rodents, with four
front and three hind toes, rudimental or short tails, and the
cheek-teeth divided by transverse folds of enamel into a number
of thin parallel plates. The genera of this family include the true
cavies (Cavia] so well known through the domestic guinea-pig
all of which are small short-limbed forms ; the larger and taller
Patagonian cavy (Dolichotis}; and the carpincho, or capivara
(Hydrocha>rus\ which is the largest living member of the order,
and is characterised by the large number of plates going to form
the last molar tooth in each jaw. Although they do not appear to
have been recorded from the Santa Cruz beds, remains of members
of this family occur in the Parana 1 horizon, and also in that of
1 There is some confusion with regard to the age of the Parana beds. They
are overlain by marine strata which have been identified with the Patago-
nian ; but it is more probable that they are newer than the Santa Cruz beds,
III.] RODENTS. 89
Monte Hermoso. Of the former Plexochairus differs from Hydro-
chorus only by the somewhat simpler structure of the last molar,
Hydrochcerus itself occurring in the Monte Hermoso beds. Other
forms from the Parana stage are Eucardiodon and Cardiotherium,
apparently more nearly allied to Cavia. Here it should be
mentioned that certain European Oligocene genera (Issiodoromys
and Nesocerodori) have the molars so like those of the cavies that
they are regarded by Dr Schlosser as nearly allied' to the family.
By Prof. Zittel they are, however, included in the extinct family
Theridomyidce, which is classed with the dormice and certain
other families in a group regarded as intermediate between the
Sciuromorpha and Hystricomorpha. If, as would seem probable,
they are really allied to the latter, they are of the utmost import-
ance as indicating a connection between the middle Tertiary
rodent fauna of Europe with that of South America 1 .
Nearly allied to the cavies are the agutis (Dasyprocta) and
pacas (C&logenys), collectively constituting the family Dasy-
proctidcE, and differing from the former in that the folds of enamel
merely form notches on the sides of the crowns of the cheek-teeth.
In a fossil state the family seems to be only known by remains of
the existing genera from the Brazilian caves. The third peculiar
family (Dinomyidce) is known merely by a single specimen from
Peru. The only other family exclusively confined to the realm is
that of the Lagostomatidcz (Chinchillidce], which includes not only
the true chinchillas (Eriomys) and Cuvier's chinchilla (Lagidium),
but likewise the viscacha (Lagostomus] of the Argentine pampas.
All the members of this family have long bushy tails, elongated
hind limbs, and the cheek-teeth divided by complete transverse
folds of enamel into thin plates. Lagostomus occurs fossil not
only in the Pampean, but likewise in the older Tertiaries of
Parana; while it may be doubted whether Pliolagostomus and
Prolagostomus of the Santa Cruz beds are really entitled to generic
distinction. Other allied forms from the latter deposits are
although their lowest portion is older than the Monte Hermoso stage. (See
Ameghino, Bull. Ac. Cordoba, Vol. xiil. pp. 260, 261, 1894.) They may be
partly made up of the remains of pre-existing beds.
1 Dr Schlosser writes me to the effect that he is fully assured these forms
are the ancestors of the Caviidce.
90 THE NEOG-^IC REALM. [CHAP.
described under the names of Perimys and Sphodromys, and thus
indicate that the family is essentially South American. The
largest known rodent is the extinct Megamys, from the Parana
beds ; the typical species of the genus being described as equal in
size to an ox. The porcupines (Hystricida), which form a
practically cosmopolitan family, sufficiently distinguished by their
spiny covering, are represented in South America by the two
arboreal genera Synetheres and Chcztomys, differing from all their
allies by their prehensile tails, although otherwise related to the
North American Erethizon, with which they form a separate sub-
family. Of Chcetomys an extinct representative occurs in the
cavern-deposits of Brazil; and in the Santa Cruz beds the family
is represented by apparently extinct generic types described under
the names of Stiromys, Acaremys, and Sciamys. Since fossil
remains of Hystrix date from the European Miocene or Oligocene,
there is distinct evidence of a connection between the early South
American rodents and those of the Old World ; while as Erethi-
zon is first known from the Plistocene of North America, it may
probably be regarded as a late immigrant into that country from
the south.
The largest of all the families of the Hystricomorpha is that of
the Octodontidal, in which out of a total of nineteen genera
upwards of fifteen belong to the realm under consideration, while
the remaining four are African and mainly Ethiopian. In addition
to other features, the rodents of this family have the crowns of
the cheek-teeth marked by infoldings of enamel from both sides;
there are usually five toes to each foot ; and the general form is
more or less rat-like. Of the Neogaeic forms, the typical genus
Octodon is represented by the degu of Chili and Peru, which is a
large rat -like animal, with a brush-tipped tail; other species
occurring in Bolivia. The latter country is likewise the home of
the allied genus Habrocoma, the members of which vie with the
chinchillas in the delicate softness of their fur. Nearly related are
the burrowing South American tuco-tucos (Ctenomys\ characterised
1 By some the family is divided into three; viz. Capromyidce, with the
West Indian Capromys, the S. American Myopotamus, and. the African
Triaulacodus ; Ctenodactylidcz, including the remaining African forms; and
Octodontidce, comprising all the other American types.
III.] RODENTS. 91
by the comb-like bristles on the hind feet, and their bell-like cry ;
two Chilian species, constituting the genus Spalacopus, being
distinguished by their rudimental ears. Schizodon, on the other
hand, of which there is a single species from the Southern Andes,
has the ears larger than in the tuco-tucos. The South African
Petromys has been regarded as very closely allied to Spalacopus^
but it is more probable it should be classed with the other two
African genera Ctenodactylus and Pectinator, to constitute a
separate sub-family. The third sub-family includes all the other
genera, one of which (Triaulacodus 1 }, as represented by the cane-
rats, is Ethiopian, while the whole of the remainder are Neogaeic.
Many of the species are of large size, some being arboreal and
others aquatic. Of the latter the best known and largest is the
coypu (Myopotamus), widely spread over South America ; while
in the West Indies the group is represented by the equally large
arboreal hutias (Capromys and Plagiodori). The other seven
genera are South American, and include smaller rat-like forms,
which in the case of the two genera Loncheres and Echinomys have
flattened spines mingled with the fur; the others being known
as Mesomys, Dactylomys, Cannabateomys, Cercomys, and Cartero-
don. Several of the existing genera occur fossil in the caves of
Brazil and the Pampean ; Myopotamus also occurring in the
infra-pampean beds of Parana, together with the reputedly
extinct forms described as Orthomys and Morenia. Other extinct
genera, such as Neoremys, Scleromys, and Addphomys occur in the
Santa Cruz deposits, and appear to be very closely allied to
Myopotamus. It is noteworthy that an extinct Octodont (Pelle-
grinia) allied to Ctenodactylus occurs in the Plistocene or Pliocene
of Sicily; while Ruscinomys from the Pliocene of France is
believed to belong to the same group. Finally, the genus
Eocardia, together with certain other allied forms from the Santa
Cruz beds, are regarded as indicating a separate family (Eocar-
ditdce) of the section.
With regard to the extinct family Theridomyida from the
middle and upper Oligocene of Europe, which includes not only
Theridomys and Archceomys, but probably also the above-men-
1 The name Aulacodus being preoccupied, that of Triaulacodus is proposed
in substitution.
92 THE NEOG^IC REALM. [CHAP. III.
tioned Nesocerodon and Issiodoromys (p. 89), it seems highly
probable that these are really the ancestral forms of the modern
Hystricomorpha, although their lower jaws approximate to the
general type of those of the more generalised Sciuromorpha and
Myomorpha.
The last section of the order (Lagomorpha), which includes the
hares and picas, and is essentially a northern one, is but poorly
represented in Neogaea ; the picas (Lagomyidcz) being unknown
there, while in the whole of the realm there are only two species of
Leporidce, one of which is Brazilian.
It has been usual in zoological systems to include under the
title of Edentata not only the armadillos, anteaters,
and sloths of South America, but likewise the Old
World pangolins (Manida) and aard-varks (Orycteropodidaz).
There can, however, be no doubt that there is little or no
connection between the two groups, and the latter may accord-
ingly be separated as a distinct order under the title of ErTodientia.
In this restricted sense the edentates at the present day are, per-
haps, the most characteristic and remarkable of all the Neogaeic
mammals. Whereas, however, the sloths and anteaters are
entirely Neogseic, a few of the armadillos have wandered at a
comparatively modern date as far north as Texas ; but this does
not detract from their essentially southern character, seeing that
they are well represented in the Santa Cruz beds, and, if we
exclude certain remains of doubtful affinity from the Oligocene
of France, are quite unknown elsewhere. This, however, is by
no means all, since there are two extinct families of the order,
dating from the Santa Cruz beds, which were extremely abundant
during the Pliocene and Plistocene epochs ; some few of these
having managed to obtain an entrance into North America
about the Miocene epoch. Central and South America may
accordingly be considered as essentially the home of the edentates ;
and are thus broadly demarcated from all other parts of the world.
It would be superfluous to point out all the distinctive features of
the order, but it may be mentioned that none of the living forms
have teeth in the front of the jaws ; while in all those genera in
which teeth are present, these are of comparatively simple
structure, being unprovided with a coating of enamel, growing
94 THE NEOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.III.
continuously without ever forming roots, and being mostly very
similar throughout the series.
The mailed, or loricate edentates are represented by the two
families of the armadillos (Dasypodidce] and glypto- Armadillos
donts (Glyptodontida], the latter of which died out and Glypto -
at the close of the Plistocene or the commence-
ment of the Recent epoch, whereas the former is still abundant.
With the exception of the two species of pichiciagos (Chlamydo-
phorus] from Mendoza and Bolivia, in which a solid coat of mail
is confined to the hinder region of the body, the members of both
families have their bodies protected by a bony armour, while
their heads are guarded above by a shield of the same nature,
and their tails are enclosed in a tubular sheath. Covered exter-
nally with horny shields, like the shell of a tortoise, the carapaces
of these animals are formed of a number of small plates of bone,
either united everywhere by their edges into a continuous solid
armour, or in the middle region of the body overlapping one
another like the tiles on a roof. In the true armadillos (of which
the living Argentine forms are all comparatively small creatures,
although one Brazilian species reaches nearly a yard in length) the
carapace consists of a nearly solid buckler in front and behind, while
between the two are situated a variable number of movable over-
lapping bands, which in some instances admit of the body being
rolled up into the form of a ball. They have all long snouts, and
simple, subcylindrical teeth. The true existing armadillos may
be divided into the genera Dasypus, Xenurus, Priodon, Tolypeutes,
and Tatusia. The first of these, in which there are six or seven
movable bands to the carapace, is found throughout the Argentine
Tertiaries to the Santa Cruz beds, one of the fossil species from
the higher beds of the series having a skull of nearly a foot in
length, and thus vastly exceeding all its living congeners in size.
Tatusia, in which the carapace has from seven to nine movable
bands, does not appear to be known below the Pampean beds,
where it is represented by the large species of which the
external skeleton is shown in the figure on p. 93. A third genus,
Eutatus, which likewise comprises species of large size, and
ranges from the Pampean to the Santa Cruz beds, is distinguished
by having over thirty movable bands in the carapace. More
96 THE NEOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
remarkable than any is the extinct Peltephilus of the Santa Cruz
deposits, in which the teeth form a continuous series up to the
front of the jaws, while the skull has a very broad snout, and the
humerus is of such a remarkable shape that it has been described
as that of a monotreme. Indeed this genus seems to suggest
that edentates are derived from animals with a fully developed
series of teeth in the front of the jaws. The pichiciagos (Chlamy-
dophorus], which are unknown before the Plistocene, form a
sub-family by themselves ; and yet another sub-family group is
indicated by the gigantic Chlamydotherium, of the Brazilian caves
and the Pampean, which rivalled the largest glyptodonts in size,
and had teeth of a more complex type than the true armadillos.
Other species occur in the Catamarca and Monte Hermoso Ter-
tiaries, although the genus is unknown in those of Patagonia.
From the armadillos and their immediate kin the extinct
glyptodonts differ in having the carapace in the form of a con-
tinuous solid shield, without any movable bands in the middle
region ; in addition to which the skull is characterised by its
depth and shortness, while the teeth form long fluted prisms.
The internal skeleton, as shown in figure 19, is characterised by
the union of nearly the whole of the vertebrae of the back into
a solid girder for the support of the massive carapace ; and the
feet are furnished with much shorter claws than those of the
burrowing armadillos, the hinder ones being almost nail-like in
form. Most of the species from the Pampean formation are
animals of gigantic dimensions, the length of the carapace being
not unfrequently from six to eight feet ; and they are unquestion-
ably some of the most extraordinary creatures that ever trod the
earth. Although the majority are South American, some members
of the genus wandered as far north as Texas, while from the
upper division of the Loup Fork beds, corresponding to the
lowest Pliocene, a North American form has been described under
the name of Carioderma.
In the typical genus Glyptodon, which ranges from the sand-
dunes and Pampean formation to the Monte Hermoso beds, the
tail-sheath, as shown in the annexed figure, is composed of a
number of spiny rings, gradually decreasing in size from the root
to the tip, and the polygonal plates of the carapace are each
I
Cs. O
98 THE NEOG/EIC REALM. [CHAP.
ornamented with a distinct rosette-like sculpture. The allied
genus Plohophorus, of which the remains occur alike in the
Brazilian caves and the Catamarca and Monte Hermoso beds of
Argentina, while agreeing with the last in the characters of the
skull, has a carapace more like that of the undermentioned
Panochthus, and a tail-sheath resembling that of the next genus.
In addition to well-marked distinctive features of the skull, Loma-
phorus is characterised by the great elongation and slender form
of the carapace, which is produced on either side of the neck in
the same manner as in the armadillos, while its margins lack the
large bosses exhibited by the typical genus. The tail-sheath
consists of a small number of rings at the base, followed by a
long terminal tube ornamented with smooth, oval, bony plates,
of which those along the sides and at the tip are larger than the
rest. The genus, of which the species are much inferior in point
of size to those of Glyptodon, has the same geological range as
Plohophorus.
Another type of the family is represented by the animals
constituting the genus Panochthus, in which the hexagonal bony
plates of the carapace are arranged in more distinct rows on the
sides of the body ; those of the back being ornamented either
with a number of small granular tubercles (as in the species here
figured), or with one circular central disc surrounded with several
rows of much smaller discs. A more striking difference is dis-
played in the structure of the sheath of the tail, which consists at
the base of six or seven large smooth rings diminishing very
rapidly in diameter, and terminates in a long and massive de-
pressed tube, the sides of which are ornamented with large
roughened bosses, probably surmounted during life with horny
knobs, while the intervening spaces are covered with small bony
ossicles. The species are of very large or medium size, and range
from the Pampean to the Monte Hermoso beds in Argentina,
while some occur in the Brazilian caves. Still more extraordinary
is the gigantic Dadicurus of the Pampean, represented by a some-
what smaller form from the Monte Hermoso beds. Having a
total length in a straight line of close upon twelve feet, five of
which are taken up by the ponderous tail, the Pampean repre-
sentative of this genus has the outer surface of the plates of the
III.]
GLYPTODONTS.
99
72
100 THE NEOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
carapace smooth ; each being perforated by three or four large
holes for the passage of blood-vessels, and the whole being pro-
bably invested with a continuous leathery skin, instead of each
disc bearing a separate horny shield. Commencing with a small
series of enormous, narrow, hoop-like rings, the tail-sheath termi-
nates in a long, massive, depressed, and nearly smooth club-
shaped tube, at the extremity of which are a number of rough
disc-like surfaces, apparently for the attachment of large horns.
None of the preceding forms, which include all the largest
members of the family, range below the horizon of the Monte
Hermoso, Catamarca, and Parana beds, but the group is also
represented in the Santa Cruz deposits of Patagonia, although the
single species found there is of much smaller dimensions than any
of its later cousins, the whole length of the carapace not exceeding
about two feet. It is noteworthy that this earliest known glypto-
dont, on which the unwieldy name of Propalczohoplophorus has been
conferred, presents certain indications of affinity to the armadillos
in the structure of its carapace, in which incipient movable bands
may be detected on the margins of the middle region. In this
small size of their earliest definitely known representative, the
glyptodonts resemble the under-mentioned ground-sloths.
Unless the aforesaid remains from the Oligocene Phosphorites
of France should prove to belong to the group, we are at present
totally in the dark as to whence both the glyptodonts and the
armadillos originally came ; and it is, indeed, quite probable
that, like the other members of the order, they may have origi-
nated in South America (if not in an Antarctic continent) from
some at present quite unknown mammalian type. How such
creatures, which seem absolutely unassailable, came to be extermi-
nated, is one of those questions which it appears quite impossible
to answer.
Although they have not hitherto been discovered in a fossil
state, the sloths, constituting the family Bradypodidce,
are just as characteristic of Neogaea as the two pre-
ceding groups. Their habits, however, necessarily restricting them
to the tropical forest-districts, their absence in a fossil state 1 must
1 A presumed fossil sloth was described from the Argentine, but the jaw on
which it was founded proves to belong to the Megalotheriidce.
III.] SLOTHS AND ANTEATERS. IOI
not be taken as an indication that they did not exist during the
Pampean epoch, since their remains are not likely to occur in
the Argentine, although they might with more probability be
looked for in Brazil. On the other hand, their specialised struc-
ture makes it highly probable that they had not come into being
at the date of deposition of the Santa Cruz beds. Of the dimen-
sions of medium-sized monkeys, sloths are characterised by their
short, rounded heads, and extremely long limbs, armed with very
elongated curved claws ; in the genus Bradypus the latter being
three in number on each foot, but in Cholcepus reduced to two
in the fore feet. Their bodies are coated with very coarse ragged
hair, and the tail is wanting. The teeth are oval prisms, some-
what cupped in the middle of their grinding surfaces ; but in
the last-named of the two genera the first pair in each jaw are
larger than the rest, from which they are separated by an interval,
and form tusks wearing against one another to oblique facets.
Usually there are five upper, and four lower teeth on a side.
The range of sloths extends from Mexico throughout the greater
part of the forest-districts, although they do not appear to reach
as far south as Paraguay.
Likewise unknown in a fossil condition, the true anteaters, or
Myrmecophagidce, constitute another exclusively Neo-
.. ' . . i , Anteaters.
gseic family, with nearly the same geographical range
as the sloths, but represented in Paraguay. So unlike are these ani-
mals to sloths, that it is at first difficult to believe that there is any
close relationship between the two, and it is largely due to the evi-
dence of the ground-sloths referred to below that it has been possible
to discover how close the connection really is. In place of being
rounded and shortened, the skull in the present family is more or
less elongated and slender, with the jaws entirely devoid of all
vestiges of teeth, and the tongue long, cylindrical, and extensile.
An equally striking difference obtains in regard to the structure of
the limbs, the fore foot of the great anteater having five toes, of
which the middle one is much more powerful than the others,
while all except the fifth are furnished with strong claws. In
walking, the outer side and part of the upper surface of the fore
foot is applied to the ground ; but in the hind limbs the sole
forms the support in the ordinary manner. Whereas sloths are
102 THE NEOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
highly specialised as regards the structure of their limbs, in the
present group the greatest degree of specialisation shows itself in
the skull, in the majority of the species. There are but three
FlG. 22. TAMANDUA ANTEATER.
members of the family, each representing a genus by itself, namely
the great anteater (Myrmecophaga\ the tamandua (Tamandua], and
the two-toed or little anteater ( Cycloturus] ; the latter being ex-
clusively arboreal in its habits.
The foregoing remarks on some of the structural features of
the sloths and anteaters will the more easily enable
si?th s Und " the rea der to understand the peculiarities of the
extinct group of ground-sloths. They have been
divided into a large number of genera and several families; but
the former may be considerably reduced, and the whole of them
included in the single family Megalotheriidce. Ranging in the
Argentine from the Santa Crucian to the Pampean epoch and the
overlying sand-dunes, the family has a geographical distributional
area including North America as far as Kentucky. The South
American forms vastly exceed those of N. America in point of
number; and whereas the latter are found only in deposits of
upper Pliocene and Plistocene age, the former, as we have seen,
extend downwards to the Miocene. The members of this family
may be denned as edentates without a carapace, the skull and
dentition of the general type of those of the sloths, and the
III.] GROUND-SLOTHS. IO3
limb-bones and vertebrae like those of the anteaters. The skull is,
however, somewhat more elongate than in the former, and in the
case of the genus Scelidotherium approximates to that of the latter.
The Plistocene forms include by far the largest representatives of
the order, the Megalotherium 1 attaining a total length of about
eighteen feet, with a bodily bulk fully as great as that of an
elephant. Whereas all the members of the family whose remains
occur in the Plistocene walked on the outer sides of their feet, in
the small ancestral Patagonian forms this specialised character
seems to have been less developed.
The typical genus Megalotherium which includes several
species, ranging in time from the Monte Hermoso and Cordoba
beds to the Pampean, and in space from Argentina and Chili to
South Carolina and Texas is sufficiently distinguished by having
the teeth in the form of large quadrangular prisms, sometimes
measuring as much as a foot in length, and wearing on their sum-
mits into a pair of transverse ridges, owing to the presence of layers
of unequal hardness. The allied genus Mylodon, including smaller
forms which may be compared in size to rhinoceroses, differs from
the preceding in the structure of the teeth, which are similar to
those of the sloths ; the skull, as shown in the figure on
p. 104, being comparatively short, with the teeth extending nearly
up to the extremities of the jaws. In the skeleton of this genus
the limbs are of moderate length and very powerful. The two
outer toes of the fore feet are rudimental and clawless, but the
three innermost provided with claws, of which the third is much
larger than either of the others, this discrepancy being carried
to a still greater extent in Megalotherium. It will be observed
that the creature walked on the outer sides and part of the upper
surfaces of the fore feet after the manner of a sloth ; but, unlike
the latter, only the outer sides of the hind feet were applied to the
ground ; the great middle toe, which in Megalotherium carried a
gigantic claw, not touching the ground at all. In the structure of
their feet these animals are thus more like anteaters than sloths,
although the hinder pair are of a somewhat more specialised
structure than in the latter. It may be mentioned that the
1 The name Megatherium clearly requires amendment to Megalotherium.
104
THE NEOG^IC REALM.
[CHAP.
conformation of their teeth indicates that the ground-sloths were
vegetable-feeders, and it is probable that they subsisted largely
upon the young twigs and leaves of trees, which may have been
FIG. 23. UNDER-SURFACE OF SKULL OF Mylodon. (Reduced.)
brought within reach by the animals rearing themselves up
against the trunks and pulling down the boughs with their fore
paws. The present treeless condition of the Argentine pampas
suggests that the ground-sloths were grazing rather than browsing
III.] GROUND-SLOTHS. IO5
animals, but their structure is not in favour of this view, and it
must be remembered that their remains are likewise met with in
Brazil, which was probably always as well wooded as at the present
day. The disappearance of forests from the pampas cannot, in-
deed, be regarded as more marvellous than the extinction of its
Plistocene mammals. In the sand-dunes near the coast at Buenos
Aires bones of some of the ground-sloths, as well as of glyptodonts,
have been found in association with human remains, so that their
extinction is an event of comparatively recent date. The genus is
typically represented by Mylodon harlani of the Plistocene of
Kentucky and other parts of North America, but is nevertheless
essentially South American, ranging in Argentina from the Pam-
pean beds to those of Parana and Monte Hermoso. The allied
genus Megalonyx is exclusively restricted to the North American
Plistocene and Upper Pliocene ; and here may be repeated the
observation that the absence of remains of these ground-sloths
from the Miocene of North America, coupled with their presence
in the Santa Cruz beds of Patagonia, clearly indicates that they are
late immigrants from the south into the northern half of the
continent. ,
Nearly allied to Mylodon, the genus Glossotherium from the
Plistocene of Argentina and Uruguay serves to connect it with
another generic representative of the family known as Scelido-
therium. In place of the comparatively short skulls of the
mylodons, the species of this genus have the muzzle of the skull
greatly elongated, so that there is a long toothless space in
advance of the dental series ; and whereas the skulls of the species
of Mylodon are essentially sloth-like, those of Scelidotherium show
a marked approximation to the anteater-type. The species of
Scelidotherium are of medium or rather small size ; and in space
the genus ranges from Patagonia, through the Argentine, to Brazil,
Bolivia, and Chili ; while in time it extends from the superficial
sand-dunes and Pampean deposits to the lower Tertiaries of
Parana, Monte Hermoso, Catamarca, and Santa Cruz, with a
gradual decrease in the size of the species as we descend in the
geological scale '. Nearly allied is the genus Catonyx, from the
1 The Santa Cruz form has been quite unnecessarily separated under the
name of Analcithermm.
io6
THE NEOG^EIC REALM.
[CHAP.
!
w ^
K^* -
III.] MARSUPIALS. 107
Brazilian caverns ; while Nothrotherium of the same deposits
seems to have been another nearly related form with teeth of the
Megalotherium type. The imperfectly known Nothropus of the
Pampean and Ortotherium of the Parana beds seem, on the other
hand, to be late survivals of another group typically represented
by the genera Eucholaops and Pseudhapalops of the Santa Crucian
epoch of Patagonia. These forms differ from all those noticed
above in that the terminal joints of some of the toes have a
median cleft as in the great anteater, and likewise in the
elongation of the metatarsal bones ; and it seems probable that the
hind foot was not so much everted as in the later representatives
of the family. The skull is of the general type of that of Mylodon ;
most of the molars being prismatic in form, and surmounted by a
pair of transverse ridges, more or less closely connected at their
extremities so as to produce an oval cavity on the grinding surface.
The first tooth is, however, tusk-like, and separated by a gap from
the others. In some of these early ground-sloths the skull did
not exceed three inches in length ; but other species were con-
siderably larger. They are evidently generalised types, and were
probably nearly allied to the ancestral stock which gave rise to
Mylodon and Megalonyx, if indeed they be not the actual pro-
genitors of both.
The last group for consideration is that of the marsupials, or
pouched mammals, among which the family of the
opossums (Didelphyidce), with the three genera
Didelphys 1 , Dromiciops, and Chironectes, is now confined to the
New World, the great majority of the numerous species being
Neogaeic, although the common opossum (Didclphys marsupialis}
ranges from Chili and Brazil to the United States. Although
certain forms from the Santa Cruz beds described under the
names of Eodidelphys and Prodidclphys were originally assigned to
the present family, these have been subsequently identified t^y
Dr Ameghino 2 with the under-mentioned family of the Microbio-
theriidce. True opossums occur, however, in the Monte Hermoso
1 This genus is divided into several sub-genera, regarded by some writers as
entitled to generic rank.
2 Bol. Ac. Cordoba, Vol. xm. p. 363 (1894).
io8
THE NEOG^IC REALM.
[CHAP.
beds while, as mentioned in the last chapter, they were widely
distributed in the northern hemisphere during the Oligocene. If
the conclusions of Dr Ameghino are right as to the absence of
these marsupials from the Santa Cruz beds, it is evident that
opossums only reached South America from the north at the close
of the Miocene or commencement of the Pliocene, and that they
do not belong to the indigenous fauna. It has been generally
considered that the common opossum of the United States is a
direct survivor from the Oligocene forms of North America, but it
is more probable that it is really a very recent immigrant from the
south, seeing that fossil representatives of the genus are unknown
from the North American Miocene and Pliocene. During the
Miocene the group perhaps survived in the extreme south of
North America.
Although opossums are apparently wanting, the Santa Cruz
beds have yielded remains of undoubted marsupials, but several
FIG. 25. LEFT HALF OF LOWER JAW OF Prothylctcinus,
nat. size.)
of them are assigned by Dr Ameghino to a distinct group under
the name of Sparassodonta. Foremost of these is the genus
ProthylacinuS) already mentioned in the last chapter, which may
be provisionally assigned to the Australian Dasyuridce. In having
only three in place of four lower pairs of incisors this genus agrees
with the latter family, and differs from the opossums ; while the
whole character of the lower jaw and dentition is very similar to
that of the Tasmanian Thylatinus, with the exception that the
premolars are closer together. As in the Dasyuridce generally,
III.] MARSUPIALS. 109
there are four pairs of upper and three of lower incisor teeth in
Prothylacinus, and the same is the case with the smaller Santa
Crucian form described as Amphiproviverra, which appears to be
of a distinctly dasyurid type, although not coming very near to
any Australian genus. v
With regard to the Microbiotheriida, as typified by the genus
Microbiotherium, these, although they are not included by Dr
Ameghino in the order, appear to be undoubted marsupials, since
they have a dentition numerically the same as that of the opossums,
vacuities in the palate, and an inflected angle to the lower jaw.
From the opossums they differ by the non-production of the palate
behind the last molars, and in the form of the lower jaw, in which
the extremity is produced to a greater extent in advance of the
canine. In all these respects they approximate to the Dasyurid
genus Phascologale, from which they differ in having one pair less
of incisors in each jaw. The ancestors of the Australian Dasyuridce.
must, however, have originally had five pairs of upper and four of
lower incisor teeth, as the former are retained in many of the ban-
dicoots (Peramelida), while Myrmecobms occasionally develops four
pairs of these teeth in the lower jaw. It seems therefore probable
that the Microbiotheriidcz were minute polyprotodont marsupials
of an Australian type.
There is more difficulty in arriving at any satisfactory con-
clusions as to the serial position of certain carnivorous mammals
from the Santa Cruz beds, of which a large form described as
Borhycena may be taken as an example. In these animals the
dentition approximates to a certain extent to that of the primitive
or creodont Carnivora of the earlier Tertiaries of the northern
hemisphere, although retaining the marsupial feature of four pairs
of molars and only three of premolars. The replacement of the
teeth is also fuller than in the marsupials. Dr Ameghino has
suggested that these animals were transitional between marsupial
and eutherian carnivores, and that the latter group originated in
South America ; but this idea is obviously untenable. A possible
suggestion is that they may be specialised offshoots from the
marsupial stock which died out without giving origin to any
descendants.
A small mouse-like mammal first described in 1863 upon the
110 THE NEOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
evidence of a single specimen from Ecuador under the name of
Hyracodon fuliginosus, but whose affinities were not determined
till 1895, when an example of a second and larger species was
procured from Bogota, belongs to the sole surviving genus of a
group of small marsupials which occur abundantly in the Santa
Cruz beds, and were till quite recently regarded as extinct. Un-
fortunately the name Hyracodon has been previously employed
to designate an extinct ungulate, and it has accordingly been
replaced by Ccenolestes. The essential characteristic of this group
of marsupials, is that while their upper dentition is of a poly-
protodont type, that of the lower jaw is very similar to the
diprotodont modification. In the living species, for instance,
there are four pairs of small upper incisors of a normal type,
FlG. 26. FORE PART OF THE RIGHT HALF OF THE LOWER JAW OF
Acdestis oweni. (Much enlarged.)
The first tooth on the right is the first incisor, and the one on the extreme
left the first molar.
followed by a large canine, while in the lower jaw, as shown in
the accompanying figure of that of one of the extinct forms, there
is a large pair of horizontally projecting incisors, succeeded by
several minute functionless teeth, of which the first three represent
the second and third incisors and the canine. In all the forms
the molar teeth have quadrangular crowns, surmounted by four
blunt tubercles, somewhat resembling in structure those of certain
ungulates, and thus totally different from the triangular and
sharply-cusped molars of the opossums and other polyprotodonts.
In the living forms, as well as in certain fossil kinds (Epanorthus,
Decastis and Acdestis] from the Santa Cruz beds, the last premolar
tooth, as shown in the figure of the jaw of Acdestis, is of normal
dimensions : and these forms may consequently be grouped in a
single family, under the name of Epanorthidce. In another group,
III.] MARSUPIALS. 1 1 1
confined to the Santa Crucian horizon, where it is represented by
the family Abderitidce, the last premolar in each jaw is much
larger and taller than the other teeth, and has its crown in the
form of a compressed cone, marked on the sides with vertical
grooves, as exhibited in the figure of Abderites. A third family is
FlG. 27. RIGHT HALF OF LOWER JAW OF Abderites, MUCH ENLARGED.
known as the Garzoniidce. In all the skull is of an elongated
form, with large vacuities both in the front and hinder part of the
palate, and presents a considerable general resemblance to those
of the Australian genera Peragale and Perameles. With the ex-
ception of the retention of four pairs of upper incisors and the small
size of all these teeth, the dentition exhibits, however, a remark-
able approximation to that of the Australian diprotodont genus
Dromicia. On the other hand, the feet are of normal structure,
with five complete toes, none of which are united by integuments;
the thumb and great toe being apparently slightly opposable to
the other digits. Probably the rat-like tail is slightly prehensile
at the extremity ; and a small pouch is present in the female. In
the skeleton the lower jaw exhibits the usual inflection of the
angle ; and the pelvis carries marsupial bones.
Probably these Patagonian marsupials, which may be known
as selvas, must be included in the diprotodont sub-order ; from
the Australian representatives of which they differ by the small
and numerous upper incisors and the non-syndactylous hind feet.
Both these being generalised features, it is evident that if the
selvas are true diprotodonts their ancestors must have originated
from the polyprotodonts in Notogaea, for if they are of exclusively
South American origin they must form a subordinal group by
112 THE NEOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
themselves. Assuming their affinities with the Australian type
to be rightly determined, they constitute a most important link
in the chain connecting the faunas of South America and Aus-
tralia.
In the last chapter it has been argued that, from the absence
of allied forms in the Tertiaries of North America and Europe, as
well as from their resemblance to the Australian dasyurids, it is
difficult to come to any conclusion other than that the ancestors of
the Santa Crucian polyprotodont marsupials reached the country
from Australia, either by way of the Antarctic continent, or by a
land-bridge in a more northern part of the Pacific. If this be
correct, and likewise the supposition that the opossums origi-
nated from the ancestral stock in South-eastern Asia, it will be
evident that Didelphys and Ccenolestes met in South America
after their ancestors had travelled half round the world in opposite
hemispheres.
It may be added that the alleged occurrence of monotremes
in the Santa Cruz beds is due to bones of aberrant armadillos
(Peltephilus) having been mistaken for those of that group 1 .
Although in this volume the writer avoids laying much stress
upon aquatic mammals, it may be mentioned that
Cetaceans.
there are two genera ot dolphins belonging to the
family Platanistidce, each represented by a single species, which are
peculiar to the Neogaeic realm. These are Stenodelphis (Pontoporia]
from the mouth of the Rio de la Plata, and Inia of the upper
Amazon; the only other existing representative of the family
being Platanista of the larger Indian rivers.
After the foregoing survey of the chief features of the recent
and fossil mammalian fauna of the Neogaeic realm,
tinction ofThe ^ ts g enera l bearings on the relations of South America
t o other parts of the world may be taken into con-
sideration. It will, however, facilitate matters to
give a tabular view of the orders, suborders, and families of non-
volant land mammals represented in the realm. In the following
table such groups as are either confined to Neogsea, or have only
reached North America at a comparatively recent epoch are
1 See Lydekker, An. Mus. La Plata Pal. Argent. Pt. III. p. 67 (1894).
III.] LIST OF THE FAUNA. 113
printed in italics ; the extinct types being indicated by the prefix
of an *, while those dating from the Santa Crucian (or the earlier
Patagonian) epoch are followed by the words Santa Cruz, and
those from the Parana beds by the word Parana.
I. PRIMATES. Santa Cruz.
Cebida, Santa Cruz (* Hdmunculus).
Hapalidcz.
II. CHIROPTERA.
Phyllostomatida. One genus ranging to Cali-
fornia.
Emballonuridae. Seven peculiar genera.
Vespertilionidae. Natalus, Thyroptera.
III. INSECTIVORA.
Solenodontidce. West Indies.
IV. CARNIVORA.
Felidae. No peculiar genera.
Canidae. In addition to the cosmopolitan Canis,
represented in Brazil by the peculiar
Icticyon.
Ursidae. No peculiar genera; *Arctotherium,
common to N. America.
Procyonidae Nasua, Cercoleptes, Bassaricyon, and
* Cynonasua.
Mustelidae. Galictis, and Conepatus, the latter
extending into Texas.
V. UNGULATA.
i. ARTIODACTYLA.
Cervidae. Cariacus, peculiar to New World.
Dicotylidae. Peculiar to New World at present
day.
Camelidae. Lama.
L. 8
114 THE NEOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
2. PERISSODACTYLA.
Tapiridae. Elsewhere only in Malaysia at the
present day, but formerly widely distributed
over the northern hemisphere.
Equidae. Now unknown, except through intro-
duction. In addition to the cosmopolitan
Equus (including Tertiary forms), the pecu-
liar Pampean genera * Hippidium and * Ono-
hippidium.
3. * Litopterna. Santa Cruz.
* Macraucheniidce. Santa Cruz.
* Proter other iidtz. Santa Cruz.
4. * Astrapotheria. Santa Cruz.
* A strapotheriidce. Santa Cruz.
* Homalodontotheriida. Santa Cruz.
5. * Toxodontia. Santa Cruz.
* Toxodontidce. Santa Cruz.
* Typotheriida. Santa Cruz.
* Pachyruchidce. Santa Cruz.
6. * Pyrotheria. Patagonian beds lying below those of
Santa Cruz.
* Pyrotheriidte. Patagonian beds.
7. PROBOSCIDEA.
Elephantidse. Represented by Mastodon in
the Pampean and Monte Hermoso beds.
VI. RODENTIA.
I. SCIUROMORPHA.
Sciuridae. Represented by Sciurus as far south
as Paraguay.
* Castoroididse. Peculiar to New World.
2 MYOMORPHA.
Muridae. Represented by species of the New
World genus Sitomys, as well as by several
peculiar types such as Rhithrodon, Ichthyomys
of Peru, Holochilus of Brazil, etc.
III.] LIST OF THE FAUNA. 115
3. HYSTRICOMORPHA. Santa Cruz.
Caviidce. Paran a.
Dasyproctidce .
Dinomyidce.
Lagostomatidcz. Santa Cruz.
Hystricidae. Santa Cruz.
Octodontidae. Mainly Neotropical, but also Ethi-
opian. Santa Cruz.
* Eocardiidce. Santa Cruz.
4. LAGOMORPHA.
Leporidae. Represented by two species of
Lepus.
VII. EDENTATA. Santa Cruz.
Dusypodida. Santa Cruz. A few forms range
as far as Texas.
* Glyptodontida. Santa Cruz. One Neogaeic genus
ranges as far north as Texas, and a peculiar
one has been described from further north.
* Megalotheriidce. Santa Cruz. Mainly Neogaeic,
but also ranging into North America.
Myrmecophagidcz.
Bradypodidcz.
VIII. MARSUPIALIA. Santa Cruz.
1. DIPROTODONTIA. Santa Cruz. (Elsewhere only in
Notogaea).
Epanorthidcz. Santa Cruz. (One existing genus,
Ccenolestes).
* Abderitidcz. Santa Cruz.
* GarzoniidcB. Santa Cruz.
2. POLYPROTODONTIA. Santa Cruz.
Didelphyidae. Now mainly Neogaeic, where they
date from the Monte Hermoso stage, but
ranging into North America, and formerly
widely spread over the northern hemisphere.
Chironectes, several subgenera of Didelphys,
and Dromiciops peculiar to the realm.
82
Il6 THE NEOG^EIC REALM. [CHAP.
VIII. MARSUPIALIA (continued}.
Dasyuridae. Santa Cruz. Now confined to
Notogaea, but apparently represented in the
Santa Cruz beds by * Prothylacinus and
* Amphiproviverra.
* Microbiotheriidcz. Santa Cruz.
Incertce, Seats.
* Borhyanidce. Santa Cruz.
Although the addition of the names of all the peculiar genera,
both recent and extinct, would have rendered the distinctness of
the Neogaeic mammalian fauna still more pronounced, yet the
foregoing table as it stands is amply sufficient to show that
Neogaea is entitled to form one of the three primary zoological
realms of the world. Starting with the Santa Crucian epoch of
Patagonia and the somewhat older Patagonian stage, which form
the earliest date at which the history of the Tertiary land mammals
of Neogaea can be taken up, there is evidence that at least the
southern part of the area was populated by the following pecu-
liar fauna. Firstly, monkeys of a type quite different from those
of the Old World, but evidently allied to the existing Neogaeic
forms, were abundant; while rodents, belonging to the same
groups as those now inhabiting the continent, several of which
were nearly allied to existing African forms, and more remotely to
certain Oligocene European types, attained a great development.
Probably Insectivora with V-shaped molars were also present.
More peculiar are the extinct subordinal groups of ungulates
described above, which appear to have been allied to the ancestors
of the perissodactyles of the northern hemisphere, and may
possibly be remotely connected with the African hyraces. At the
same period flourished several families of edentates (a group
which in its restricted sense was originally peculiar to Neogaea),
such as armadillos, glyptodonts, and ground-sloths, most of the
members of which were of comparatively small size ; but of the
ancestry of this group nothing can be said with certainty.
Among the marsupials, although opossums appear to have been
wanting, there were several types seemingly allied to Notogaeic
forms, while others which may be included in the order were more
III.]
RELATIONS OF THE FAUNA.
117
or less unlike any from other regions. In addition to true mar-
supials, the only carnivorous types were the problematical
Borhycenidce.
Now, as stated in the earlier part of the chapter (p. 68),
this fauna cannot be older than the lowest Miocene or highest
Oligocene ; and among its deficiencies may be noted lemuroids, true
carnivores, creodonts, artiodactyle and perissodactyle ungulates,
and opossums, all of which were in existence during the Oligo-
cene or Miocene in North America and Europe. Moreover, at those
epochs the former country lacked the whole of the Neogaeic types.
Clearly, then, there must have been a barrier between North
and South America during the Oligocene and a
Early Separ-
portion or the whole of the Miocene; but before ationofN.and
entering into the consideration of other evidence S ' Amenca -
showing the nature of that barrier, it may be well to give a table of
the mammaliferous Tertiary strata of North and South America,
with their approximate European equivalents 1 . In descending
order this runs as follows :
Plistocene
Up. Pliocene
Low. Pliocene
Miocene
Up. Oligocene
Mid. Oligocene
Low. Oligocene
Up. Eocene
Mid. Eocene
Low. Eocene
Lowest Eocene
South America.
Pampean
Santa Cruz
Patagonian
North America.
Equus beds.
Blanco
Monte Hermoso f Palo Duro.
(?) Parana Loup-Fork -j Nebraska
tDeep River
(Hiatus)
John Day
/ Protoceras
Beds
White River j reodon
Beds
Titanother-
ium Beds
Uinta
rWashakii
Bridger -I Bridger.
IWind River.
Wahsatch
Puerco
Europe.
Cave-deposits etc.
? Crag.
| Pikermi
Sansan
St Gerand-Le-Puy
Ronzon.
Montmartre
Parisian
Suessonian
Cernaysian
1 In compiling this table the writer is indebted to Prof. W. B. Scott.
Many American geologists (among them Dr Scott) include the whole of the
Il8 THE NEOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
Regarding the geological evidence of a separation between the
two Americas, Cretaceous marine strata occupy a large portion of
Mexico; and in 1879 Dr Le Conte 1 wrote as follows. The shore
line of the Gulf of Mexico "was much more extended both north-
ward and westward than either now or in Tertiary times. From
the Gulf there extended northwestward an immensely wide sea,
covering the Plains region and the Rocky Mountain region as far
westward as the Wahsatch range, and dividing the continent into
two continents, an eastern or Appalachian, and a western or
Basin-region continent. Probably also this sea connected across
the region of Mexico with the Pacific, thus dividing the western
continent into two, a northern and southern." Later observations
have shown that the Cretaceous sea undoubtedly made a wide gap
between North America and the southern portion of the con-
tinent 2 ; while the existence of Oligocene or Miocene strata in the
region of the isthmus of Parana shows that the separation, which
probably continued through the Eocene, was in existence during
Loup-Fork in the Miocene; while to the lower part of the same era they
assign the John Day beds of America, and the St Gerand-le-Puy beds of
Europe. Others (e.g. Prof. Osborn, Studies Biol. Labor. Columbia Coll.
vol. i. pt. 2, p. 28, 1893) refer the Equus beds of North America to the
Pliocene. The following quotation from a paper by Prof. Cope (American
Naturalist, 1895, p. 599) conclusively proves their Plistocene age. There it
is stated that "the Equus beds are found covering areas of various extent in
Oregon, Nevada, California, the Staked Plains, Southern Texas, Chihuahua
and the valley of Mexico. Their most eastern station is western Nebraska.
They contain a fauna which includes one extinct species (Equus major Dek.) of
the Megalonyx fauna, and the recent Castor fiber. They contain the extinct
genus of sloths Mylodon, of a species different from that of the east, and four
species of camels of the extinct genus ffolomeniscns, and a peccary. Recent
species of Cam's and Thomomys occur, while two extinct horses (Equus occi-
dentalis Leidy and E. tau Owen) are common. The hairy elephant (E. primi-
genius) is abundant, while the Mastodon americanus is rare, if occurring at all.
The proportion of recent to extinct species and genera in the Equus bed fauna
is very similar to that occurring in the Megalonyx fauna, while they differ as to
details."
1 Elements of Geology, pp. 451, 452, New York (1879).
2 This separation also existed in the Jurassic era, when, as shown by
Neumayr (Erdgeschichte, 2nd ed. vol. II., p. 263), South America was united
across the Atlantic area with Africa and Madagascar.
I
III.] RELATIONS OF THE FAUNA. 119
the middle portion of the Tertiary epoch 1 . When the connection
between North and South America was completed is not precisely
fixed by geological evidence ; but the occurrence of a glyptodont
in the Nebraska stage of the Loup-Fork group, shows that it must
have been by the end of the Miocene 2 . The question of a con-
nection between the two continents by way of the West Indies
is discussed later in this chapter, where it is concluded that if
such a connection existed at all, it must have been of a transient
nature.
Having thus shown, both from palaeontological and geological
evidence, that the early mammalian fauna of
Incursion of
Neogaea appears to have been totally isolated from Northern
that of North America up to about the end of the
Miocene, the question of the origin of that fauna may be deferred,
and the irruption of northern types after the connection between
North and South America had been established taken into con-
sideration. It may be mentioned, however, that it was not till
after this irruption of the northern forms that the essentially
Neogaeic fauna attained its maximum development in respect to
the bodily size of its constituents ; since a gradual increase in this
respect maybe traced from the small glyptodonts and sloths of the
Santa Cruz epoch, through the larger ones of the Monte Hermoso
horizon, to the gigantic forms characteristic of the Pampean and
the cavern deposits of Brazil.
The presence of a glyptodont in the Nebraska stage of the
Loup-Fork group in North America, and of northern forms in the
Monte Hermoso horizon of South America, marks, then, the first
commingling of the original faunas of the two halves of the New
World. For the first time in the history of the southern continent
this connection allowed of the immigration from the north of the
true Carnivora, such as the existing cats (Felts) the extinct sabre-
toothed tigers (Macharodus), dogs and foxes (Canida), bears
(Ursus and Arctotherium\ raccoons (Procyonidtz), skunks and
their allies (Mustetida), together with various ungulates belonging
to sub-orders previously unknown in the realm. These latter
include the guanaco and vicuna (Lama] of which ancestral forms
1 See J. W. Gregory, Quart. Joum. GeoL Soc. Vol. LI. pp. 299, 300 (1895).
2 As stated above, many refer the whole Loup-Fork group to the Miocene.
I2O THE NEOG^EIC REALM. [CHAP.
are abundant in the North American Tertiaries New World deer
(Cariacus], horses (Equidce) of various genera, tapirs (Tapirid&\
peccaries (Dicotylidte), and mastodons. Among the rodents,
squirrels, the various genera of Muridce, and the hares, likewise at
this epoch made their first, appearance on the scene. Opossums
also at this time effected an entrance into the land which has now
become their chief home. That this new fauna came in from
North America, and not from any other part of the world, may be
regarded as certain from the presence of such essentially New
World types as raccoons and their allies, skunks, peccaries,
Cariacus, and Camelidce (exclusive of the Old World genus
Came/us, which is of late origin), coupled with the absence of
true deer (Cervus), pigs (Sus), Old World monkeys, and lemurs.
At the same time this union of the northern and southern
halves of the New World allowed certain members of the original
Neogaeic fauna to make their escape into North America, glypto-
donts, as already said, making their appearance in the Nebraska
stage of the Loup-Fork group of the United States, while the
ground-sloth Megalonyx occurs in the Blanco Beds.
Although it is not universally admitted 1 , there is some
evidence to indicate that this land connection was of com-
paratively brief duration, seeing that none of the characteristic
extinct types of South American ungulates, nor any of the peculiar
Neogaeic rodents, reached the northern half of the continent.
During the whole time that the alluvial deposits of the Parana
and Paraguay rivers were being laid down, and well on into the
human period, the mammalian fauna of the Pampean epoch, formed
by an admixture of southern and northern types, continued to
flourish, until the time when there came a complete sweep of all
the larger forms, clearing off the whole of the ground-sloths,
glyptodonts, mastodons, toxodonts, macrauchenias, horses, sabre-
toothed tigers, and the larger members of the camel tribe, and in
the Argentine leaving only armadillos, guanacos, a few deer, a
number of rodents, various cats and foxes, as well as skunks and
certain other members of the weasel family, to represent the vast
assemblage of strange and giant creatures that once roamed over
1 See Gregory, op. cit. p. 300.
III.] DISAPPEARANCE OF LARGE FORMS. 121
its plains. With regard to this extraordinary, and apparently
sudden disappearance of almost all the larger forms of animal life
from South America, it may be pretty confidently asserted, from
the organisation of the creatures themselves, that at the time when
the ground-sloths flourished, extensive portions of what is now the
open pampas of Argentina were covered with forest ; and why the
whole district should have become practically treeless, seeing that
trees like the Australian eucalypti grow, when introduced, with
more vigour than in their native home, is exceedingly hard to
understand. That the country even when thus denuded was
unsuited to the needs of the larger forms of mammalian life, is,
however, negatived by the circumstance that in many parts the
horses and cattle introduced from Europe have run wild and
increased to an almost unprecedented extent. Neither does it
appear that the extermination can be attributed to a period of
extreme cold, since a glaciation of the pampas would assuredly
have left unmistakable evidence of its presence. It is likewise
practically certain that the clean sweep of the forests of Argentina
and the larger mammals of the whole of South America is not due
to the hand of man. It has, indeed, been suggested that the vast
herds of guanaco which formerly roamed the pampas may have
cleared the forests by preventing the growth of the seedlings ; but
when we recall the fact that numbers of this group of animals
flourished during the period when the alluvial formation was in the
course of being deposited, it scarcely looks as though this could
have been a vera causa. Moreover, if the forests were by some
means or other actually destroyed, and the extermination of their
animal denizens thus encompassed, there would still remain the
disappearance of plain-dwelling forms, like horses, to be accounted
for. Some have thought that pumas, by preying on the colts,
were the active agents in this instance ; but even if such were
really the case, it gives no help with regard to the disappearance
of the ground-sloths and glyptodonts; the latter being such
strongly armoured creatures that it is absolutely certain they were
not killed off by any animal foes. The problem is further com-
plicated by the circumstance that the fossil remains of nearly all
the larger animals which formerly inhabited the pampas are also
found in the caverns of Brazil, where the climate is now, and
122 THE NEOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
probably always has been, tropical. Up to the present, it is,
accordingly, impossible to account satisfactorily for the disappear-
ance of all the larger forms from among the mammalian fauna of
South America.
Returning to the fauna itself, it may be asserted that before
the great intrusion of northern forms the mammals of Neogaea
were far more distinct from those of the rest of the world than
is the case with the fauna of any other region, with the exception
of Australasia; and that consequently there can be no hesita-
tion in allowing this part of the earth's surface to take rank as a
primary realm. At the time when the Santa Cruz fauna was so
decidedly marked off there was a much more general similarity
between the faunas of all the other regions of the world (exclusive
of Notogaea) than is the case at the present day, and it is this
antiquity of the differentiation of the Neogaeic fauna that supports
so strongly its claim to distinctness.
It has been suggested that the first land-connection between
South and North America was probably of limited extent or short
duration ; and some evidence of a later separation between the
two areas is afforded by the beds of marine shells already mentioned
as occurring in the upper part of the Pampean deposits ; these
beds marking an epoch of submergence of a considerable portion
of the area 1 . Subsequently to this final submergence of portions
of Argentina and Uruguay there was a great upheaval of the
country, indicated not only by the upraising of the aforesaid marine
beds, but likewise by that of the sand-dunes fringing most parts of
the Argentine coast. This upheaval, which has taken place within
the human period, certainly resulted in the final union of the two
Americas ; and since its date there has probably continued to be
a greater and greater admixture of the two originally distinct
faunas, so far as climatic conditions have permitted. It is, how-
ever, not a little curious that some of the original northern types,
such as the vicunas and guanacos, have entirely died out in their
original habitat, to flourish only in the southern half of the con-
tinent.
1 There is some evidence to show that the isthmus of Panama was never
completely submerged after the Pliocene, but it may have been so narrow as
not to allow of much migration of the fauna.
III.] DISTINCTNESS OF EXISTING FAUNA. 123
Hitherto especial stress has been laid on the fossil mammals
of Neogaea as entitling the tract to form a primary Distinctness
realm, on account of the distinctness of its fauna of the existing
from that of the rest of the world during a consider-
able portion of the Tertiary epoch. Even at the present day,
however, when, as already shown, its mammalian fauna contains a
very large admixture of types which have immigrated from the
north at a comparatively recent epoch, it still stands widely apart
from other regions. On this point may be quoted the admirable
summary given in "Island Life" 1 by Dr Wallace, who writes that
among the peculiar mammals we have " the prehensile-tailed
monkeys and the marmosets, the blood-sucking bats, the coati-
mundis, the peccaries, the llamas and alpacas [vicunas and
guanacos], chinchillas, the agutis, the sloths, the armadillos, and
the ant-eaters ; a series of types more varied and more distinct
from those of the rest of the world than any other continent can
boast of. Among birds we have the charming sugar-birds, forming
the family C&rebidce, the immense and wonderfully varied group
of tanagers (Tanagridce), the exquisite little manakins and the
gorgeously-coloured chatterers ( Cotingidce) ; the host of tree-
creepers of the family Dendrocolaptidce, the wonderful toucans
(Rhamphastid<z\ the puff-birds (Bucconidcz), jacamars (Galbu-
lid<z), todies ( Todidce), and motmots (Momotida) ; the marvellous
assemblage of four hundred distinct kinds of humming-birds
(Trochilidce\ the gorgeous macaws (Ara), the curassows (Cracida),
the trumpeters (Psophiidcf), and the sun-bitterns (Eurypygida).
Here again there is no other continent or region that can produce
such an assemblage of remarkable and perfectly distinct groups of
birds ; and no less wonderful is its richness in species, since these
fully equal, if they do not surpass, those of the two great tropical
regions of the Eastern Hemisphere (the Ethiopian and the
Oriental) combined." Not less noteworthy among the birds are
the screamers (PalctTiiedeidcz) ; the tinamus ( Tinamida), which
while outwardly resembling game-birds, agree with the struthious
birds in the structure of their skulls ; and the rheas (Rheida), or
South American ostriches, whose nearest allies are the true
1 Pages 50, 51. In this quotation the scientific names of some of the groups
have been added.
124 THE NEOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
ostriches of the Old World. The hoatzin (Opisthocomus\ the oil-
bird (Steatornis\ and the boat-bill (Cancroma) are likewise
peculiar Neogaeic types. Still more remarkable is the solitary
Andean survival (Ccenolestes] of the diprotodont marsupials of
the Santa Cruz epoch. A curious feature of the Neogaean
forest-mammals whether they belong to the old fauna or the
new is the frequency of prehensile power in the tail. Not only
does this occur in several genera of monkeys, but also in Cerco-
leptes, Synetheres, Chcetomys, Capromys prehensilis, Cydoturus,
Didelphys, and Ccenolestes. A parallel is to be found elsewhere
only in Australia.
After referring to the deficiency of the many types of
mammals alluded to in an earlier paragraph of the present
chapter, the author adds that "Among birds we have to notice the
absence of tits, true flycatchers, shrikes, sun-birds, starlings, larks
(except a solitary species in the Andes), rollers, bee-eaters, and
pheasants, while warblers are very scarce, and the almost cosmo-
politan wagtails are represented by a single species of pipit
Whether, therefore, we consider its richness in peculiar forms of
animal life, its enormous variety of species, its numerous defici-
encies as compared with other parts of the world, or the prevalence
of a low type of organisation among its higher animals, the
Neotropical region stands out as undoubtedly the most remark-
able of the great zoological regions of the earth."
The distinctness is, however, by no means confined to
mammals and birds. Of the land molluscs, Mr A. H. Cooke 1
writes that they present a marked contrast to those of North
America. "Instead of being scanty, they are exceedingly
abundant; instead of being small and obscure, they are among
the largest in size, most brilliant in colour, and most singular
in shape that are known to exist. At the same time they
are, as a whole, isolated in type, and exhibit but little relation
with the Mollusca of any other region."
Having arrived at the conclusion that the original Neogseic
mammalian fauna, exemplified in the Santa Cruz
Origin of the
Santa Cruz beds, has not been derived from North America,
it remains to endeavour to account for its origin.
1 The Cambridge Natural History Mollusca, p. 342 (1895).
III.] ORIGIN OF SANTA CRUZ FAUNA. 125
This, however, is a difficult and perplexing subject which it is
scarcely possible to explain fully in the present imperfect state of
palaeontological knowledge.
With regard to the marsupials of an Australian type, it has
already been stated in the preceding chapter 1 that these appear to
have been derived from Notogaea by means of a southern land-
bridge. The hypothesis there suggested is that the immigration
has taken place via the Antarctic continent, probably across the
southern Pacific 2 . It is known that shallow water extends from
southern Patagonia andTierra del Fuego to South Shetland; while
between Australia and the Antarctic land there are no depths ex-
ceeding 2000 fathoms. On the other hand it is just possible that
the connection may have been by way of Polynesia.
In this place reference may be made to certain very remark-
able resemblances existing between animals of groups other than
mammals respectively inhabiting Neogsea and Notogsea. The first
instance is that of two peculiar families of freshwater fishes, known
as the Haplochitonida and Galaxiidce. Of these the former has
one Australian and a second South American genus, while the
latter is represented by a single genus (Galaxias), common to
New Zealand, Australia, and the extremity of South America.
This, however, is by no means all, since one species of the last-
mentioned genus (G. attenuatus) is found in regions as remote from
one another as New Zealand and Tasmania on the one hand, and the
Falkland Islands and the extremity of Patagonia on the other.
Commenting on this, Dr Wallace remarks 3 , it is impossible to
believe that a land connection between South America and
Notogaea could have existed " within the period of existence of
this one species of fish, not only on account of what we know of
the permanency of continents and deep oceans ; but because such
a connection must have led to much more numerous and im-
portant cases of similarity of natural productions than we actually
find. Rather must we look to the transport of the ova across the
1 Supra, p. 55.
2 Possibly, as suggested below, the connection may have been nearer the
tropics.
3 Geographical Distribution of Animals, Vol. I. pp. 401, 402; see also Vol.
II. pp. 82, 83.
126 THE NEOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
southern seas, aided perhaps by the Antarctic ice, and a former
greater extension of South America towards the pole." After
remarking how such transmission might take place with but little
extension of the present Antarctic lands, Dr Wallace adds that
" there is evidently some means by which ova or young fishes are
carried moderate distances, from the fact that remote Alpine lakes
and distinct river-systems often have the same species. Glaciers
and icebergs generally have pools of fresh water on their surfaces ;
and whatever cause transmits fish to an isolated pond might
occasionally stock these pools, and by this means introduce the
fishes of one southern island into another."
Allowing all due weight to these objections to a land con-
nection between Notogaea and Neogsea, it seems almost im-
possible to believe that the transit has taken place in the manner
suggested by Dr Wallace.
Another piece of evidence is afforded by some observations of
Mr F. E. Beddard l in regard to the intimate relationship existing
between the earth-worms of New Zealand and Eastern Australia
on the one hand, and those of Patagonia on the other. Without
committing himself to any theory as to how the communication
took place, the author is content to say that "the facts seem to
point to a more recent communication between Patagonia and
New Zealand than between either of those countries and the Cape
of Good Hope."
Assuming a land connection, earth-worms would suggest that
it was probably not in very high latitudes. Now I have been
informed on verbal authority that there is a curious similarity
between the slugs of Patagonia and those of Polynesia. And it is
probable that the latter tract indicates a subsiding area which
was formerly connected with Patagonia. Possibly, therefore, there
may have been a land connection between Patagonia and Australia
via Polynesia ; and this may have been the line through
which Neogsea received the Notogseic elements in its fauna.
Whether it could have existed at a date sufficiently late for the
passage of the marsupials, it is impossible to say. If it existed,
it probably allowed only a limited communication between the
1 Appendix, No. 5, pp. 170, 171.
III.] ORIGIN OF SANTA CRUZ FAUNA. I2/
Notogaeic and Neogaeic mammals ; and it is easy to imagine that
the Polynesian mammals (if they existed) were drowned out by
submergence, as has undoubtedly been the case with many of
those of the West Indies. In dismissing this part of the subject,
it may be observed that it appears impossible to adequately
explain the presence of a Notogaeic element in the fauna of
Neogaea without the aid of some form of southern land connection;
although there is not sufficient evidence to show in what latitude
such connection (or connections) existed.
Attention must now be directed to the Santa Crucian mammals
other than marsupials. With the exception of the edentates, which
probably originated in Neogsea, or possibly in some still more
southern land, all the evidence points to the whole of these
being originally of northern derivation ; the ungulates having
affinities with the ancestral types from which the earlier Tertiary
perissodactyles were descended, while the rodents have certain
relationships with the early European members of the order. The
monkeys again were probably descended from lemuroids ; and
the solenodons are evidently related to the Old World insectivores.
It has been shown that this portion of the fauna did not come
from North America; and it is certainly not derived from Notogaea.
Accordingly, the only route by which it could have entered is by
way of Africa. The only marked community between the Ethio-
pian and Neogaeic faunas as regards mammals relates to the hystri-
comorphous rodents ; but this community is a very marked one,
and difficult to explain on any other hypothesis than that of a
connection between the two areas. The possibility of a close
community of origin between the toxodonts and the hyraces has
already been mentioned ; and if it be substantiated, it will be
highly important. Of course, on the supposition of an African
origin for the eutherian mammalian fauna of Tertiary Neogaea,
it must be taken for granted that the ancestral types entered
Africa long before the progenitors of its modern fauna ;
although probably not before the ancestors of the Malagasy
fauna. It may be objected that we ought to find Neogaeic
Tertiary types of ungulates in Africa ; but we are unacquainted
with the Tertiary palaeontology of that country, and it is
quite probable that the peculiar subordinal Neogaeic types of
128 THE NEOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
ungulates were only developed as such in America itself. Even
if they ever existed in Africa there is no more reason why they
should have survived there than in America. As the evidence
for the presence of Insectivora in the Santa Cruz deposits is
not very strong, the case of the West Indian solenodons must
not be pressed too strongly, but their affinity to the tenrecs of
Madagascar, and the absence of allied types in the North American
Tertiaries, both point to their having reached Neogsea with the
other eutherians.
Regarding a possible connection between Africa and South
America by way of the Antarctic continent, Dr Blanford 1 writes
as follows: "Singularly enough, so far as our present information
as to the depths of the southern oceans goes, there would appear
at first sight to be less difficulty in supposing a former extension
of the southern continent to Australia and South America than to
Africa, the depth as shown on the ' Challenger' charts south of the
former continents nowhere exceeding 2000 fathoms, whereas to the
south of Africa there is represented a considerable belt of greater
depth. But on an Admiralty chart on which all the known deep
soundings are marked, none are shown south of the southern
extremity of Africa.... So far as our present information goes,
the ocean south of the Cape of Good Hope may be no deeper
than the Mozambique channel, though probably the depth is
greater in the former case."
Before discussing certain relationships between the Ethiopian
fauna and that of Neogaea, it seems advisable to
"Antarctica" . . . _
and the South refer to some recent views as to the existence of
a S reat southern circumpolar continent in Tertiary-
Ethiopian times, extending into comparatively low latitudes,
and connected, at all events temporarily, with
America, Africa, and Australia. For this continent the name
Antarctica has been suggested by Dr H. O. Forbes 2 , who urges
that many of the types of animal life now confined to the southern
hemisphere have originated there. It is chiefly to show the fallacy
of these latter views that the subject is referred to here ; palaeon-
tological evidence clearly proving that several of the groups of
1 Appendix, No. 8, p. 100.
2 Appendix, No. 15.
III.] NORTHERN ORIGIN OF SOUTHERN FORMS. 1 29
animals assumed to be essentially southern, really had a northern
origin. It may be premised that, according to the view of
Dr Forbes, " Antarctica " followed nearly the 2000 fathom line,
extending northwards from a circumpolar area by broad expan-
sions, one to join an old New Zealand continental island (includ-
ing the Antipodes, Macquarries, New Zealand, and Chatham, Lord
Howe, Norfolk, and the Kermadec and Fiji Islands); a second to
East Australia and Tasmania ; a third to the Mascarene and
adjacent islands ; perhaps one to South Africa ; and finally one
to South America.
As regards the marsupials, which are among those considered
to be southern types, the evidence of the northern Jurassic and
Cretaceous kinds alluded to in the preceding chapter, coupled
with the presence of opossums in the Oligocene of the northern
hemisphere, renders it practically certain that the group did not
originate in the southern hemisphere.
Among other groups cited by Dr Forbes as being mainly or
exclusively southern in their distribution and origin are the parrots
(Psitiaci) and trogons (Trogonidce). But both these are represented
in a fossil state in the Oligocene strata of France, and are thus
shown to have been originally denizens of the temperate regions
of the northern hemisphere. Take, again, the case of the struthious
birds, or Ratitse, which although cited as a southern group, are
represented by an ostrich (Struthio) in the Pliocene of Northern
India and the Crimea, while the former deposits have yielded
remains of a three-toed genus allied probably to the emeus and
cassowaries. Much the same may be said in regard to the giant
land-tortoises (Testudo\ which although now confined to the
Galapagos and Mascarene islands, were abundant in Northern
India, Greece, France, and the United States during the Pliocene,
and also occur in the French Miocene and Oligocene, as well as
in the Plistocene deposits of the Maltese caves. The group was
thus evidently a northern one originally, and as it is unknown in
the southern hemisphere before the Pampean epoch of Argentina
and the superficial deposits of Madagascar, its southern migration
probably did not take place till the Miocene, or even the
Pliocene. Indeed, the separation of North and South America
indicates that, if the Galapagos tortoises came from the former
L. 9
130 THE NEOG^EIC REALM. [CHAP.
country, they could not have reached their present habitat till the
end of the Miocene.
On the question of the southern or northern origin of some of
the above-mentioned birds, Professor Huxley 1 , so far back as 1868,
wrote as follows: "I watch the progress of M. Alphonse Milne-
Edwards's researches with great interest, to know whether parrots,
pigeons, Dromceidce (Casuariidas) and Rhtzidce occur in force, or
at all, among the Miocene birds. If they are absent from the
Miocene fauna of Arctogaea, it will be necessary to suppose that
these groups of birds are of sufficiently ancient origin to have been
separated, even before the Miocene epoch in Austro-Columbia
(Neogaea) and Australasia, whence they have subsequently
colonised part of Arctogsea ; while, on the other hand, their
presence in European Miocene formations will render it possible
that the colonisation has taken place the other way, and that these
birds have attained their wonderful multiplicity and diversity of
forms in Austro-Columbia and Australasia simply in consequence
of the very favourable nature of the conditions to which they have
been exposed in that country.
"I confess I incline to the latter supposition. The distribution
of Psittacula, for instance, is quite unintelligible to me upon any
other supposition than that this genus existed in the Miocene
epoch, or earlier, in Northern Arctogaea, and has thence spread
into Austro-Columbia, South Africa, India, and the Papuan
Islands, where it is now found."
Although the term Psittacula has now been restricted so as to
include only the Neogaeic forms, this passage is almost prophetic ;
both parrots and pigeons having, as already stated, been dis-
covered in the French Oligocene, while the Australian and
probably the South American ratite birds appear to have had an
Indian forerunner. And here it may be mentioned that the
South American ostriches (Rhea] which are primitive types allied
to the ostrich, would seem to have made their way into Neogaea
via Africa, as there are no traces of ancestral forms in the North
American Tertiaries.
On the other hand, there is considerable probability that the
1 Appendix, No. 18, p. 319.
III.] NORTHERN ORIGIN OF SOUTHERN FORMS. 131
penguins (Spheniscidcz), which present a relation to other birds
somewhat analogous to that exhibited by the edentates to other
mammals, having no apparent affinity with any group -may prove
to be an exception to the rule of the northern origin of most of the
existing southern types of terrestrial vertebrates, since they are
quite unknown in the north, and occur fossil both in New Zealand
and Patagonia. ', /
Another marked instance of the northern origin of southern
types is afforded by the side-necked, or pleurodiran Chelonia,
which although now restricted to the more southern parts of the
globe, were abundant during Secondary and early Tertiary times
throughout the northern hemisphere. A striking example of this
is shown in the family Pelomednsida, whose existing representatives
are confined to Africa, Madagascar, and South America. Among
these, two out of three genera, namely Sternothoerus and Pelomedusa
are found in Ethiopian Africa and Madagascar, one of them also
ranging into the Sinai tic peninsula ; while the third (Podocnemis}
has five species in South America and a sixth in Madagascar.
There occurs, however, in the upper Cretaceous of the United
States the allied extinct genus Bothremys, and Podocnemis itself is
represented in the London Clay and the Eocene of the Punjab.
Here the inference would seem to be that the latter genus
originated in the northern half of the Old World, passed by way of
India into Madagascar and Africa, and thence by a southern route
into Neoggea. Even if this particular genus occurred in the early
Eocene of North America, which it does not, it could scarcely have
crossed the sea into South America ; and the migration can hardly
have taken place since the union of the two continents. In
commenting on the distribution of Podocnemis Dr Blanford 1
observes that as the incursion of more modern types into Africa
appears to have driven out many of the older, it is in Madagascar
that traces of the relationship of the modern fauna to that of
Neogaea should be looked for. One such instance is the occur-
rence there of Podocnemis^ and a second that of the Centetidcz in
that island. Perhaps the occurrence of sucker-footed bats only in
Brazil where they are represented by the single species of
1 Appendix, No. 8, p. 101.
92
132 THE NEOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
Thyropoda, and in Madagascar, where there is the sole member of
the allied genus Myxopoda^ may be an analogous instance.
In the second family of the pleurodiran Chelonia, the Chelyidcz,
which are now restricted to South America and Australia (the
genera in the two areas being distinct), there is at present no
evidence of the derivation of the Australian forms, but of the
Neogaeic types Platcmys is represented in the Cretaceous of the
United States, and Hydraspis in the Eocene of Bombay. Although
the northern origin of the family is thus proved, the explanation
of how the existing forms attained their present distribution is
very difficult. Possibly Hydraspis may have reached South
America by way of Africa; but it is difficult to believe, in the
absence of its remains, that Platemys survived in North America
till the late Miocene communication with Neogaea was estab-
lished.
Among snakes, the boas of the genera Corallus and Boa are
confined to South America and Madagascar, and thus have
precisely the same distribution as Podocnemis. Now although true
boas are unknown as fossils, the allied extinct genus Paleryx
occurs in the European Oligocene, thus pointing to the northern
origin of the group, which has probably reached South America by
way of Madagascar and Africa.
Another remarkable case is afforded by the limbless lizards of
the family Amphisbcenidcz, which are now almost equally divided
between South America and South Africa, although one genus
extends into the Mediterranean area, and two are found in North
America ; the two genera Amphisb&na and Anops being common
to South America and Africa, while the northern ones are different.
The northern origin of the family is, however, indicated by the re-
cent discovery of fossil forms 1 in the White River Oligocene of the
United States. Here the evidence strongly points to a southern
connection between Neogaea and Africa; Tertiary forms having
probably existed in Europe or Asia as well as in North America.
A second instance that may be cited among lizards is the family
of the Iguanidcz, which while now mainly Neogaeic, has represen-
tatives in the warmer parts of North America, and also includes
1 Baur, American Naturalist, Vol. xxvii. p. 998 (1893).
III.] CONNECTION WITH AFRICA. 133
two outlying genera in Madagascar, and a third in the Fiji
and Friendly Islands. But fossil iguanas occur in the French
Oligocene, and it may hence be suggested that the group may
have reached Neogaea via Madagascar and Africa; while if
the connection between Patagonia and Polynesia alluded to above
were substantiated, the origin of the Polynesian forms could be
accounted for.
During the middle portion of the Secondary period a very
curious resemblance between the fauna of Ethiopia and Neogaea
is exhibited by the occurrence in both of certain very peculiar
reptiles known as Mesosaurns (Stereosternum), which have been
referred to the Sauropterygia. Remains of these reptiles have
been obtained at San Paolo in Brazil, and in Griqualand West
and other parts of South Africa, but nowhere else ; and, although
the type may be of northern origin, this curious distribution
apparently points strongly to a connection between Africa and
South America as far back as the Secondary epoch. This con-
nection, as pointed out by Neumayr 1 , was, however, probably by
way of the Atlantic.
Somewhat similar relationships to those of living reptiles are
exhibited by fishes, among which the ffaplochitonidce and
Galaxiida have been already mentioned. Very remarkable is the
case of the lung-fishes Lepidosirenidce, where there is a very close
relationship between the West African Protopterus and Lepidosiren
of Brazil and Paraguay ; the Australian Ceratodus being markedly
distinct from both. Although the two former are unknown as
fossils, teeth of the latter are abundant in the Trias and Jurassic of
Europe, India, South Africa, and the United States ; while during
the Palaeozoic era extinct families of the subclass (Dipnoi) were
abundant in the northern hemisphere. Clearly, then, the group was
originally northern in origin; and Ceratodus apparently migrated
south both into Africa and Australia. Taking into account the
Cretaceous separation of North and South America, and the close
alliance between Lepidosiren and Protopterus, it is, however,
difficult to see how the latter reached its present habitat except by
way of Africa. If this be so, and the connection between South
1 Vide supra, p. IT 8, note.
134 THE NEOG^EIC REALM. [CHAP.
Africa and South America in Tertiary times was only in high
latitudes, a warm epoch in the southern hemisphere must have
been necessary for the passage of such tropical forms. It might
be urged that as Ceratodus dates from the Trias, the other two
genera might have reached their present habitats at a very
distant epoch ; but their specialisation is against their antiquity.
Another family which is essentially southern is that of the Osteo-
glossidce, represented by Arapaima of the Brazilian rivers, and
Osteoglossum, with one species from Brazil and the Guianas, a
second from Sumatra, and two others from Australia. But the
northern origin of the family is indicated by the occurrence of the
extinct genus Dapedoglossus in the Eocene of Wyoming. Here
there is a presumption that Osteoglossum originated in Asia, from
which it passed in one direction by way of Malaysia to Australia,
and in another through Africa to South America. Two other
families of freshwater fishes have a somewhat similar distribution ;
the first being the Chromidid<z y which includes spiny fishes mainly
characteristic of tropical America and Africa, but extending
eastwards into Syria, and sparingly represented in Southern India
and Ceylon. In a fossil state they occur in the Cretaceous of
Syria ; and, although none of the genera are common to the two
continents, they are highly suggestive of a connection between
Africa and South America. The second family is that of the
Characiniidce, comprising fish more nearly allied to the carps, and
now exclusively confined to tropical America and Africa. Although
the palaeontological record is a blank, this can scarcely be taken
as a sufficient indication that the family has always been a
southern one.
From the foregoing facts it may be considered that the as-
sumption of an Antarctic continent is unnecessary
to explain the origin of the many forms of vertebrate
life which are now exclusively or mainly southern ; nearly all of
these, with the exception of the edentates and penguins, being of
northern derivation, and thus apparently showing a southern
migration of the older forms of life. The Cretaceous and Tertiary
break between North and South America appears, however, to
have prevented the occurrence of such migration in the western
hemisphere till the close of the Miocene : and it is accordingly
III.] SUB-REGIONS. 135
necessary to look elsewhere for the origin of the Neogaeic fauna.
That Africa has been the great feeder appears the most probable
explanation ; although in the case of the marsupials it seems
necessary to look to Notogaea as the point of origin. Clearly,
however, the presumed connections between Neogaea, Notogsea,
and Africa have not been very continuous or- very extensive
in Tertiary times, or the faunas of these areas would have been
more alike than they are ; and this suggests that the northern
extension of Antarctica has not been so great as has been
supposed. Whether the presumed connection between Notogaea
and Neogaea has taken place by way of Antarctica or Polynesia
may be left an open question. With regard to Africa, the recent
researches of Dr Gregory 1 on the West Indian corals, in the
course of which it is urged that a shallow-water connection "ex-
tended across the Central Atlantic in at latest Miocene times,"
while the southward extension of the Atlantic is a comparatively
recent feature, indicate the possibility that the land-connection
which existed in Jurassic times between Brazil and Western
Africa may have persisted till the Tertiary era.
As already mentioned, the Neogaeic realm includes but a
single region the Neotropical : and in this four
,..,,..,, , Sub-regions.
sub-regions have been defined, and are named as
follows. Firstly we have the Brazilian sub-region, which includes
not only Brazil, but likewise the Guianas, Venezuela, Colombia,
Ecuador, Paraguay, and those portions of Peru and Bolivia lying
on the Brazilian side of the Andes, together with the eastern
slopes of that portion of the great mountain-chain itself. This is
essentially an area of dense tropical forests, locally interspersed
with open pastures, or "campos." The second is the Chilian
sub-region, comprising Chili, Argentina proper, Uruguay, Pata-
gonia, and such portions of Peru and Bolivia as are not included
in the preceding. It is chiefly an area of open plains and
pampas, although including the high Andes. Thirdly, there is
the Mexican sub-region, which embraces the isthmus of Panamk,
Central America, and Southern Mexico, and may be regarded to
a great extent as a transitional tract between the typical Neo-
1 Quart. Journ. GcoL Soc. Vol. LI. pp. 306 307 (1895).
136 THE NEOG^EIC REALM. [CHAP.
tropical and the Sonoran regions. Lastly, the Antillean sub-
region includes the West Indian Islands, exclusive of Trinidad,
which for zoological purposes may be regarded as part and parcel
of the South American continent.
From the survey of the fossil forms it has been shown that
during the Plistocene epoch the mammalian fauna of the Chilian
and Brazilian sub-regions was similar, and it may consequently be
inferred that the present differentiation of the two areas in this
respect is a comparatively modern feature, probably due to
the disappearance of the forests from the Argentine. At the
present time the mammalian fauna of the Brazilian sub-region is
essentially that of the Neotropical region as a whole, nearly all the
characteristic groups being present within its limits, while several
are almost or quite peculiar to it. Among the latter, the great
ant-eater (Myrmecophaga) is practically confined to this sub-region \
while most of the sloths and marmosets are limited to it, although
a few extend northwards into or through the isthmus. The pacas
(Ccelogenys), and the giant armadillo (Priodon} the sole repre-
sentative of its genus are likewise restricted to this tract ; as
is the bush-dog (Icticyon), and also one genus of tree-porcupines
( Chcetomys], while most of the spiny rats (Echinomys and Loncheres)
are confined to it. The carpincho (Ifydroc/icerus) the largest
of living rodents likewise chiefly pertains to the Brazilian
region, although extending southwards into Uruguay. The
American monkeys are also very abundantly represented here ;
the genera Lagothrix, Pithetia, Brachyurus, Brachy teles (Eriodes),
and Callithrix being restricted to it. Among the forms that are
unrepresented, may be mentioned guanacos and vicunas (Lama),
viscachas (Lagostomus), the Patagonian cavy (Dolichotis), and
chinchillas (Eriomys and Lagidium).
The Mexican or Central American sub-region differs chiefly
from the last by the paucity of the essentially Neotropical forms,
and the large mingling of Arctogaeic types ; among the latter,
the shrews (Soriridce), a pouched rat (Heteromys}^ and the caxo-
mistle (Bassariscus) being noticeable. In the Chilian sub-region
marmosets, monkeys, sloths, tapirs, and peccaries are wanting;
1 According to Senor Figueira it just enters Uruguay.
III.] SUB-REGIONS. 137
while the carpincho, as already mentioned, only borders on it in
Uruguay. Among the characteristic types are prominent the
vicunas of the Andes, the guanacos of the Argentine pampas and
Patagonia, the spectacled bear of the Andes, the chinchillas of the
same elevated regions, together with the aquatic coypu (Myopo-
tamus}, the burrowing viscacha, and the cursorial Patagonian
cavy ; all the three latter being plain-dwelling forms. Armadillos
are abundant; and among these the sub-family represented by the
beautiful little pichiciagos, or fairy-armadillos (Chlamydophorus)
is peculiar, one of the two species inhabiting open plains near
Mendoza, in the Argentine, while the second (regarded by some
as a distinct genus) is found in the Bolivian highlands.
The Antillean, or West Indian sub-region, which comprises the
West Indian Islands (exclusive of Trinidad, Tobago, and some of
the adjacent islets, which are zoologically a part of continental
South America), differs widely from the other three by the extreme
poverty of its mammalian fauna; monkeys, marmosets, carnivores,
and edentates being wanting, and the class mainly represented by
bats, insectivores, and rodents, although a species of aguti (Dasy-
procta antilliensis) is found in the islands of St Vincent and Santa
Lucia, in the Lesser Antilles group, as also in Tobago. In
addition to a single species of white-footed mouse (Sitomys) said to
inhabit Hayti and Martinique, and which may also occur in some
of the other islands, the West Indian sub-region is especially
characterised by the large arboreal rodents known as hutias, which,
while belonging to the family Octodontidce, represent two genera
totally unknown elsewhere. Of these, the genus Plagiodon has
but a single species, confined to Hayti and Jamaica; although in
the allied Capromys three existing species are found in Cuba, and
the fourth in Jamaica, the extinct kind occurring in the former
island 1 . The nearest relative of the hutias appears to be the
South American coypu, but the group seems also to show affini-
ties with the porcupines. From caves in the small island of
Anguilla, at the northern extremity of the Lesser Antilles group
have been obtained remains of a large extinct beaver-like rodent
known as Amblyrhiza (Loxomylus), which has also been recorded
1 Chapman, Bull. Amer. Mus. Vol. IV. p. 314 (1892).
138 THE NEOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
from the Pliocene of Argentina a fact of importance as serving
to connect the Antillean fauna with that of the mainland. As
mentioned above, this genus belongs to a family (Castoroididce)
typified by the extinct Castoroides of the Plistocene of Ohio and
Georgia with species which rivalled a bear in point of size. The
other Antillean native mammals (exclusive of the bats, to which it
will be unnecessary to refer) are the two species of the genus
Solenodon respectively inhabiting Cuba and Hayti, and constitut-
ing by themselves a separate family among the Insectivora. It
has been already mentioned that the nearest allies of these strange
creatures are the tenrecs (Centetidce) of Madagascar; and thus both
are probably derived from unknown extinct insectivores formerly
inhabiting the northern hemisphere. As Jamaica and probably
several other of the West Indian islands contain large masses of
sedimentary deposits of Tertiary age, it is probable that they
come under the denomination of continental islands; and there
seems little doubt, from the evidence of their mammals alone, that
they have been connected with the mainland 1 . Dr Wallace is of
opinion that "originally they probably formed part of Central
America, and may have been united with Yucatan and Honduras
in one extensive tropical land. But their separation from the
continent took place at a remote period, and they have since been
broken up into numerous islands, which have probably undergone
much submergence in recent times. This has led to that poverty
of the higher forms of life, combined with the remarkable similarity
which now characterises them ; while their fauna still preserves a
sufficient resemblance to that of Central America to indicate its
origin." Recently, the connection of the West Indies with the
mainland has been worked out more fully by Mr J. W. Spencer 2 ,
who, from observations made on the buried river channels so
numerous in some of the islands, concludes that there have been
several epochs of connection with the continent, one of which was
so late in date as the Plistocene epoch. The extinction in the
islands of the great majority of the mammals of the continent
is attributed to drowning.
1 This is not the opinion of Dr A. Agassiz, who regards them as oceanic
islands.
2 Geological Magazine, 1894, pp. 448 451.
III.] WEST INDIES. 139
Here a presumed connection between North and South
America by way of the West Indies must be referred to, the
evidence in favour of which has been summarised by Dr J. W.
Gregory 1 as follows: "It is not at all certain that when the
isthmus of Panama was submerged there was a free communica-
tion between the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans. The Caribbean
Sea may then have been a gulf from the Pacific, separated from
the Atlantic by the land area of the hypothetical 'Antillia.' That
there was once a connection between North and South America
along the chain of the Windward Islands, Cuba, the Bahamas, and
Florida is not improbable. Evidence for this, either in whole or
in part, has been advanced by De Castro and others. Further
evidence could be adduced from the study of the land-shells, and
also from the remarkable distribution of Peripatus. That Cuba
was once connected with Yucatan and Florida is almost certain ;
that this connection was in existence in the Pliocene, and probably
also in the Plistocene, is shown by the evidence collected by De
Castro. That the area of the Windward Islands was occupied by
land in the lower Tertiary is also most probable. But this was all
submerged at the period when the Oceanic [Miocene] deposits of
Barbados were laid down. There is no adequate evidence to
show that at any time after this was there more land in this region
than there is at present." With regard to the land-shells, Mr
A. H. Cooke 2 writes "that a certain number of the characteristic
North American genera are found in the Antillean sub-region,
indicating a former connection, more or less intimate, between the
West Indies and the mainland.... A small amount of South Ameri-
can influence is perceptible throughout the Antilles, chiefly in the
occurrence of a few species of Bulimulus and Simpulopsis. The
South American element may have strayed into the sub-region by
three distinct routes : (i) by way of Trinidad, Tobago, and the
islands northward ; (2) by a north-westerly extension of Honduras
towards Jamaica, forming a series of islands, of which the Rosalind
and Pedro banks are perhaps the remains; (3) by a similar
approximation of the peninsula of Yucatan and the western
extremity of Cuba." This seems to indicate that such Antillean
1 Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. Vol. LI. p. 305 (1895).
2 Cambridge Natural History Mollusca, pp. 345, 346 (1895).
140 THE NEOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
connection as may have existed between North and South
America was of a very incomplete and transitory nature ; and that
before the end of the Miocene there was never any route in this
direction by which mammals passed from the one continent to the
other.
In this connection it may be mentioned that Dr Hart Merriam l
has proposed to unite Central America with the West Indies to
form a separate zoological region the Tropical of equal rank
with the Sonoran ; but however much may be urged in favour of
this view, the multiplication of regions is much to be deprecated.
The practical or entire absence of non-volant native mammals,
both recent and fossil, from all the other South
Other Islands. . .....,- . .
American islands, with the exception of 1 icrra del
Fuego and the Falklands, properly excludes their consideration
from this volume, although it is almost essential that a few words
should be said with regard to the Galapagos group, more especially
since conflicting views have been expressed concerning their rela-
tions to the mainland. In respect to Tierra del Fuego and some
of the adjacent islets, these may really be regarded as a part of
the continent, since the main dividing channel is extremely
narrow, and species like the guanaco are common both to the
islands and the mainland. And although the Falkland Islands
lie about 350 miles to the eastward of southern Patagonia, yet
they are separated by a comparatively shallow sea (less than a
hundred fathoms in depth), and it is thus evident that they were
connected at no very distant date with the mainland. Of the two
indigenous mammals, the most remarkable is the Falkland Island
wolf (Cam's antarcticus], which differs markedly from all the Canidce
of the mainland, and is apparently closely allied to the North
American coyote (C. latrans). The other is a species of groove-
toothed mouse (Rhithrodon). With regard to Fernando Noronha,
the poverty of its fauna induces Mr Beddard 2 to class it among
oceanic islands, although there is some affinity between its fauna
and flora and those of South America and the West Indies.
Of far more interest are the Galapagos islands, situated on the
equator, at a distance of about five hundred miles westward of the
1 Appendix, No. 19, p. 33.
2 Ibid. No. 5, pp. 190, 207.
III.] GALAPAGOS ISLANDS. 14!
coast of Ecuador. Entirely volcanic in structure, they are sur-
rounded by a sea of great depth ; and according to the view both
of Wallace and Darwin, they have never been connected with the
mainland, while the latter observer is also of opinion that for
countless ages they have been separated from one another. The
known mammals include a bat (Atalapha], a rat (Afus), doubtless
introduced, and a peculiar species of white-footed mouse (Sitomys
bauri). Of reptiles the islands contain two peculiar genera of
iguanoid reptiles, and no less than five species of giant tortoises
belonging to the genus Testudo. The iguanoids are nearly related
to South American types ; but there are no tortoises now living
on the mainland, although a large species flourished in Argentina
during the Pampean epoch, while, as already stated, others are
now found living in the Mascarene islands, and extinct species
occur in the middle and later Tertiary deposits of the United
States, Europe, and Northern India. It may accordingly be
taken for granted that both the iguanoid lizards and the giant
tortoises reached the island from the South American mainland ;
but the question is how did they arrive ? Dr Wallace is of opinion
that both were transported across the sea, although by what means
is unknown. This view is, however, disputed by Dr G. Baur 1 ,
who believes that the Galapagos islands were formerly connected
not only with one another, but likewise with the mainland. He
observes that if the Galapagos be oceanic islands, their inhabitants
could only have been introduced by accident from other regions ;
" but on such a supposition we are absolutely unable to explain
the harmonious distribution, we cannot explain why every, or
nearly every, island has its peculiar race or species, not repre-
sented on any other island. If some animals could be carried
over hundreds of miles to the islands, why are they not carried
from one island to the other? But besides that, how could we
make plain the presence of such peculiar forms as the gigantic
land-tortoises? According to the elevation theory, we can only
think of an accidental importation of these tortoises by some
current, because they are unable to swim. After the islands had
been elevated out of the sea, it happened once, by a peculiar
1 Proceedings American Antiquarian Society, Oct. 1891.
142 THE NEOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
accident, that a land-tortoise was carried over. Alone it could
not propagate. This was only possible after a similar accident
imported another specimen of the same species, of the other sex,
to the same island. Or we could imagine that at the same time
animals of both sexes were thus accidentally introduced. By this
we could at least explain the population of a single island. But
how did all the other islands become populated? To explain
this we should have to invoke a thousand accidents. The most
simple explanation is given by the theory of subsidence. All the
islands were formerly connected with one another, forming a
single large island ; subsidence kept on, and the single island was
divided up into several islands. Every island developed, in the
course of long ages, its peculiar races, because the conditions on
these different islands were not absolutely identical."
Further evidence in favour of the same view is adduced by
Mr W. B. Hemsley 1 , who draws attention to the marked simi-
larity of the flora of the Galapagos Islands to that of the South
American mainland.
The difficulty of accounting for the transport of reptiles like
land-tortoises across five hundred miles of sea is undoubtedly very
great ; yet, in the face of their volcanic nature and the depth of
the surrounding ocean, it is somewhat difficult to accept the view
that the Galapagos Islands were connected with South America.
In the paragraph quoted Dr Baur appears to forget that the first
tortoise carried to these islands may have been a gravid female ;
and also that if an ancestral species were established on one of
the islands, there would be nothing very wonderful in individuals
being carried to some of the others, where they might eventually
differentiate into distinct specific types. Moreover, it seems quite
within the bounds of possibility that the original introduction may
have been effected by means of eggs transported on natural rafts.
That the Galapagos tortoises were derived originally from equally
gigantic continental forms, may be taken for granted ; and the
existence at the present day of such creatures only in these and
the Mascarene islands is one more instance of the survival in the
southern hemisphere of ancient types which were formerly abun-
1 Nature, vol. lii. p. 623 (1895).
III.] CONCLUSION. 143
dant on the opposite side of the equator. The practical absence
of mammals from the Galapagos Islands is of little import one
way or the other, as they might have been drowned out during the
subsidence; but perhaps, on the whole, a suspension of judgment
as to the relation of these islands to the mainland is the wisest
course to adopt at present.
Finally, whether the hypotheses that have been advanced in
the present chapter to explain the origin of the peculiar mammalian
fauna of Neogaea be substantiated or the reverse, there can be
little doubt that Dr Wallace has been misled in his statement
that this area, so " far as we can judge from the remarkable
characteristics of its fauna and the vast depths of the ocean east
and west of it, has not during Tertiary, and probably not even
during Secondary times, been united with any other continent,
except through the intervention of North America."
CHAPTER IV.
THE ARCTOG^EIC REALM.
Features of the Arctogceic Fauna Community of earliest Fauna Evidence of
Secondary Reptiles Puerco Fauna Lemuroids Insectivora Carnivores
Rodents Ungulates Summary of the characteristics of the Mamma-
lian Fauna of Arctogsea.
ARCTOGSEA, or the Arctogaeic realm, includes the whole of the
countries of the globe which do not come within the limits of
either the Neogaeic or Notogseic realms, and thus embraces by far
the greater portion of the land-surface. Nearly the whole of this
vast tract lies to the northward of the equator ; the only portions
lying below that line being the southern half of Africa, together
with Madagascar and some of the Malayan islands. As stated
in the introductory chapter, the term Arctogaea was originally
proposed by Professor Huxley 1 , but, although subsequently used
in one case by Dr Sclater 2 , and at a still later date adopted by
Dr Blanford 3 , has failed to obtain general recognition. There
can, however, be no doubt that, so far as mammals at least
are concerned, the whole of this vast tract is entitled to hold only
the same relative rank as each of the realms treated of in the two
preceding chapters; and that if we regard each of the regions
into which the area under consideration is divided by Sclater and
Wallace as equivalent to each of those two realms, we have an
exceedingly unequal series of divisions. Not only have the
Neogseic and Notogseic realms no species of mammal common to
one another, but if we eliminate the genus Cants, which is of
comparatively recent introduction into these areas, we shall find
1 Appendix, No. 18.
2 Ibid., No. 27, p. 214.
3 Ibid., No. 8, pp. 76, 77.
[CHAP, iv.] ITS UNITY. 145
that all the genera, and likewise most of the families, together
with some of the subordinal or even ordinal groups of mammals
are likewise perfectly different. Were it not also for the compara-
tively recent union between South and North America, to which
allusion has been made in the preceding chapter, we should
likewise find just as well marked a distinction between the
mammalian fauna of these two countries ; and, as a matter of"
fact, when we go back to the middle portion of the Tertiary
epoch, we find such a distinction actually existing. Again, were
it not for the intermediate connecting Austro-Malayan region,
which forms, as we have said, a kind of zoological No-man's-land,
there would be an equally stringent line of division between the
Notogasic realm and Asia. If, on the other hand, we take the
different regions of Arctogsea, we find not only a certain number
of species of mammals common to two or more regions, but
when we pass back into the Tertiary epoch, the whole faunas of
several of such regions merge more or less completely into one
another, instead of becoming more distinct than they are at the
present day. The lion and the leopard, for instance, are common
to India and Ethiopian Africa, and during the Plistocene epoch
ranged over a considerable portion of Europe ; while the range of
the tiger includes not only India and Ceylon, but likewise a
considerable portion of Central Asia and China. The caracal
and the hunting-leopard are also common to India and Africa ;
the British fox ranges not only over Europe and a large portion of
Asia north of the Himalaya, but likewise over a part of North
America; and the common otter is found alike in India and
Europe. Still more numerous are the species of mammals com-
mon to Europe, Northern Asia, and North America.
Recapitulating some of the details given in the introductory
chapter, it may be observed that by Messrs Sclater and Wallace
the area here included in the Arctogaeic realm was divided into
the Nearctic, Palaearctic, and Oriental regions. Professor Newton,
who was subsequently followed by Dr Heilprin, proposed to
brigade the first two of these together under the name of the
Holarctic region. At a still later date Dr Blanford 1 , who as
1 Appendix, No. 8, p. 76.
L. IO
146 THE ARCTOG^EIC REALM. [CHAP.
already stated, takes Arctogaea as one of the three primary
divisions of the globe, proposed to subdivide it as follows, viz.:
1 . Madagascar.
2. Africa, south of the tropic of Cancer.
3. Oriental, South-eastern Asia, and Malayan islands to
Wallace's line.
4. Aquilonian, Europe, Asia north of the Himalaya, Africa
north of the tropic of Cancer, and America north of
about 45.
5. Media-Columbian, America, between about 25 and 45
north latitude.
The importance of this division was, firstly, the recognition of
the right of Madagascar and the adjacent islands to form a region by
themselves ; and, secondly, the separation of the Medio-Columbian
region from the rest of North America. And it will be noted that,
if we take away that area, the Aquilonian region corresponds to
the Holarctic of Newton and Heilprin. A further modification was
proposed in 1892 by Dr C. H. Merriam 1 , who gave the name of
Sonoran region to the area corresponding approximately with the
Medio-Columbian of Dr Blanford, and suggested that the southern
portion of the Eastern Holarctic region should form a region by
itself; the name of Boreal region being adopted for what remained
of the Holarctic after the subtraction of the Sonoran region and
a corresponding area in the Eastern Hemisphere.
Although from many points of view the retention of such
well-known terms as Palsearctic and Nearctic would be a great
convenience, the close resemblance of the existing mammalian
fauna of the whole of northern Arctogaea compels us to adopt
the view that the area forms but a single zoological region. For
this region the name Holarctic may be retained ; while for the
southern portion of the old Nearctic region, the term Sonoran is
the most appropriate. In the Eastern hemisphere the whole of
that portion of Arctogsea not included in either the Malagasy,
Ethiopian, or Oriental regions is provisionally included in the
Holarctic, although when our knowledge of distribution is less
1 Appendix, No. 19.
IV.] FAUNISTIC CHARACTERS. 147
imperfect it may subsequently be found practicable to separate a
distinct Mediterranean region.
In an area of such vast extent as the Arctogseic realm, which
embraces countries from the equator to the most
northern habitable lands, it is, of course, perfectly the Arctogseic
unnecessary to say anything as regards climate
and physical features, and we may accordingly proceed forth-
with to discuss the leading features of the mammalian fauna as a
whole.
From the Notogaeic realm, in its typical form, Arctogaea is
distinguished by the absence of monotremes and diprotodont
marsupials, not only at the present epoch, but so far as we know,
in past times also. From the Neogaeic realm it is equally well
differentiated by the absence at the present day of all the peculiar
Neogaeic types of edentates, and likewise at all epochs of Neo-
tropical monkeys and marmosets. Such of the former as are
found in North America are indeed, as we have seen in the last
chapter, only intruders from the south since the epoch of the
earlier Pliocene; and in the Miocene the Arctogaeic fauna was
further distinguished from that of Neogaea by the absence of the
peculiar subordinal groups of ungulates characteristic of the latter.
The Insectivora, which with the exception of the solenodons are
practically wanting in Neogaea, and are unknown in Notogaea
proper, are abundant in all the regions of this realm.
We might almost go one step further than this, and say that
Arctogaea previous to the Pliocene epoch was characterised by
being the sole habitat of almost all the families of Eutherian
terrestrial mammals, with the exception of those characteristic of
the Santa Crucian epoch of Neogaea. But although this would be
practically true, it would land us in the difficulty that the Ethio-
pian region would probably have to be excluded from Arctogaea,
seeing that the higher mammals of the former region are but
comparatively recent immigrants. Still, it may be stated that
northern Arctogaea is the original habitat of all the modern types
of the higher Eutherian mammals.
Another feature of Arctogaea is the absence at the present day
of all marsupials except opossums, while these are only sparingly
represented in its western half. Moreover, with the exception of
102
148 THE ARCTOG^EIC REALM. [CHAP.
the same family group, which are only known from strata of the
Oligocene and Miocene epochs, marsupials appear to have been
absent from a large part of the realm during the Tertiary period,
although there is reason to believe that during the Eocene they
must have survived in south-eastern Asia 1 . Among volant
mammals, bats of the Neogaeic family PhyllostomatidGR* are now
absent from the whole of the realm, with the exception of a part
of the Pacific side of North America. Again, to revert to the
non-volant forms, the Lemuroid suborder of the Primates seems to
have been absolutely restricted to Arctogaea, at least since the
Miocene epoch, although it may turn out that the monkeys and
marmosets of South America may be descended from ancestral
lemuroids which inhabited that country at an epoch previous
to the deposition of the Santa Crucian beds.
To take a comprehensive survey of the whole Secondary and
Communit Tertiary mammalian faunas of Arctogaea would entail
of earliest such a mass of palaeontological and anatomical
detail that it would only weary the majority of our
readers, and we must accordingly limit ourselves to noticing some
of the most striking features in the earlier faunas, and then pass
on to the consideration of some of the more widely spread modern
groups.
In the chapter devoted to the Notogaeic realm, it has been
already pointed out (p. 51) that during the Jurassic period Europe
and North America were populated with a fauna of polyprotodont
marsupials of small size, some of which appear to have been the
ancestral types from which those now inhabiting the Notogseic
and Neogaeic realms were derived, while others have disappeared
entirely. It will be unnecessary to recapitulate the names of the
more representative of these forms, but it may be stated that while
the fauna of the lower Jurassic Stonesfield Slate has no equivalent
in North America, that of the upper Jurassic Purbeck beds of Dor-
setshire is paralleled in the latter area. Although some difference
of opinion prevails among palaeontologists as to the identity of the
American with the European genera, there can be no doubt that
1 Vide suprd, p. 55.
2 The genus Necromantis, from the French Oligocene, has been assigned
to this family.
IV.] COMMUNITY OF EARLY FAUNA. 149
many of them are very closely allied indeed, while some are
probably inseparable. Contemporary with these early marsupials
were members of the group known as Multituberculata, which are
probably more or less closely related to the existing monotremes,
or egg-laying mammals, and form with them the subclass Proto-
theria. An essential feature of these multituberculates is that
the molar teeth were divided by one or more grooves into longi-
tudinal ridges, covered with numerous blunt tubercles ; such
grooves being very generally two in number in the upper molars,
while the lower teeth have but a single one. Apparently in all
cases the extremities of the jaws were armed with a pair of chisel-
like incisor teeth, behind which in the upper jaw there may have
been a pair of smaller teeth. Very generally the last premolar
tooth, as in the English Purbeck genus Plagiaulax, was com-
pressed and trenchant in shape, with its upper edge regularly
FIG. 28. RIGHT SIDE OF LOWER JAW OF Plagiaulax. Enlarged.
p. premolars, m. molars.
convex, and its sides marked by oblique grooves; but in other
forms (Polymastodoti) this tooth was of a more tubercular type.
Without going into disputed questions, it may be stated that this
group was represented by closely allied forms in the Jurassic of
both Europe and North America; while it is also known, from
the evidence of a single genus (Tritylodon)^ to have extended its
range to South Africa ; this genus also occurring in the European
Trias, and thus affording another instance of the wide range of the
earlier faunas.
Although in Europe the only known traces of mammalian life
during the succeeding Cretaceous period occur in the Wealden
beds (which are the immediate successors of the Jurassic Pur-
becks), in North America a well-developed fauna of polyprotodont
ISO THE ARCTOG^EIC REALM. [CHAP.
marsupials and multituberculates is met with in rocks of Cretaceous
age ; and it is most probable that if suitable freshwater beds were
FIG. 29. UPPER SURFACE OF SKULL OF Tritylodon. Somewhat reduced.
extant, the same fauna would be found in Europe. By the
commencement of the Tertiary epoch, most of this old fauna seems
to have disappeared; but in the Puerco beds of the United States,
FIG. 30. UPPER MOLAR OF A SMALLER SPECIES OF Tritylodon.
Natural size and enlarged.
and the equivalent deposits of Cernays, in the south of France,
which seem to form a transition between the Secondary and
Tertiary, the Multituberculata still persisted, and it is noteworthy
that one genus (Neoplagiaulax] at least was common to the
northern half of the eastern and western hemispheres.
It thus appears, so far as the available evidence permits of our
forming a judgment, that during both the Jurassic and Cretaceous
IV.] REPTILIAN EVIDENCE. 151
epochs a single mammalian fauna was spread over Europe and
North America. This being so, it is a fair inference that a similar
fauna characterised a considerable portion of Asia ; while the
occurrence of the above-mentioned genus Tritylodon points to the
conclusion that it likewise ranged over Africa. Accordingly, it
would appear that not only did the whole of Arctogaea then form
a single zoological realm, but that this realm was indivisible into
regions.
The evidence for this unity is, however, by no means restricted
to mammals, but is supplemented and extended by vid
the extinct reptiles of the Secondary epoch of the Secondary
earth's history. During the Triassic and early
Jurassic periods there flourished an extinct ordinal group of rep-
tiles known as the Anomodontia, remarkable for many structural
resemblances to mammals, and likewise for the peculiarities of
their dentition. As a well-known example of one section of this
group may be cited the dicynodonts, in which the teeth were
reduced, at most, to a single pair of tusks in the upper jaw, the
remainder of the jaws being ensheathed in horn to form a beak ;
whereas Galesaurus represents a second section in which the teeth
simulate those of the carnivorous mammals. These anomodonts
are known to have been spread over Europe, India, Africa, and
North America ; the dicynodont types from the three areas first
named being so alike that there is little question that some of
them were generically identical. The North American forms,
which mostly or exclusively come from beds assigned to the
Permian epoch, do not include dicynodonts, but are allied to
certain other African families, and are also closely related to their
European contemporaries.
If we turn to another order of the same class, namely the
Dinosauria, as represented by the Iguanodon of Europe and the
Atlantosaurus of the United States, we find not less well-
marked similarities in the Jurassic and Cretaceous fauna of the
whole of Arctogaea, this group being represented by closely allied,
and in many cases generically identical forms, not only in Europe,
India, and South Africa, but likewise in Madagascar and South
America. For instance, in that section of the order known as
the Sauropoda, which includes the most gigantic forms, and is
152 THE ARCTOG^EIC REALM. [CHAP.
characterised by the presence of large chambers in the sides of the
vertebrae of the neck and trunk, we find not only that several
genera, such as Morosaurus, are common to the upper Jurassic
and lower Cretaceous strata of Europe and the United States ; but
we also find, one genus (Titanosaurus) in India, Europe, and
Patagonia, while a second (Bothriospondylus) occurs in countries
as far apart as England and Madagascar 1 . Again, in the carni-
vorous or Theropodous section of the order, as typified by the
English Megalosaurns, we find certain closely allied or identical
generic types common to Europe and South Africa. Further
evidence in the same direction is afforded by the discovery in the
Jurassic of Madagascar of a genus of extinct crocodiles (Steneo-
saurus) which were abundantly represented during the same epoch
in Europe. Among the class of fishes we have also the genus
Ceratodus, now living in Queensland, represented in the Secondary
rocks of Europe, India, Africa, and North America.
With regard to the land-fauna of Australia at the same epoch
we have less evidence ; anomodonts, and, we believe, dinosaurs,
being unknown from that country. Among the amphibians, how-
ever, we find in the extinct order of Labyrinthodontia certain
genera, such as Bothriceps and Micropholis, common to Australia
and South Africa, both of these being closely allied to the Indian
Brachyops.
This reptilian evidence thus clearly points to the conclusion
that during the greater part of the Secondary period not only
had Arctogaea a single widely-spread fauna, but that the same
fauna was represented in South America, and at least partially in
Australia. Hence at this date no zoological realms can be distin-
guished, and it was probably not till late in Cretaceous times that
Arctogaea was differentiated from the rest of the world as a realm.
Needless to say, the great continents and islands during the
epochs in question must have had free communication with one
another, and it is highly probable, as Dr Blanford 2 suggests, that
Madagascar then formed a line of connection between Africa and
India. It is possible that even at the early part of the Secondary era,
1 Possibly future discoveries may show differences worthy of generic distinc-
tion between these forms, but this would not affect the general question.
2 Appendix, No. 8, pp. 88, et seq.
IV.] PUERCO FAUNA. 153
"when South Africa was united to India via Madagascar on one
side, and to South America on the other, especially if the Indo-
Malay continent was also connected with the Australian, there
may have been a girdle of land, chiefly in low latitudes, round
nearly three-quarters of the earth's circumference from Peru to
New Zealand and the Fiji Islands." The vertebrate testimony
does not, however, countenance the idea that such southern land
was cut off from Europe and northern Asia by sea. It is true
that the evidence in favour of such an isolation is afforded by the
identity of the Carboniferous (Damuda-Talchir) floras of Australia,
South Africa, Peninsular India, and Central Argentina 1 , and their
total dissimilarity from those of Europe, Northern Asia, and North
America ; and it is suggested that the same conditions may have
prevailed during the Jurassic 2 . This, however, the vertebrate
evidence certainly does not support ; and hence, while admitting
the isolation of a great southern (subtropical) continent during
the Palaeozoic era, it appears probable that since that epoch most
of the southern lands have been from time to time more or less
closely connected with those to the north 3 .
Leaving these difficult problems with the foregoing remarks,
we pass on to notice briefly the Puerco mammalian
Puerco Fauna.
fauna of the United States, which, together with the
approximately equivalent Cernaysian fauna of Europe, is of especial
interest as showing a transition between the Cretaceous and
Tertiary. As we have already said, this fauna includes several
representatives of the multituberculates, which are essentially a
Secondary group, and one of which is common to the Cernaysian
fauna. In addition to these, four orders of eutherian mammals are
represented, namely the Primates, the Carnivora, the Ungulata,
and the extinct group known as the Tillodontia. It is, however,
very noteworthy that in all these orders it is only the lowest
sections that were in existence during the Puerco epoch. Thus
1 See F. Kurtz, Rev. Mus. La Plata, Vol. vi. p. 117, and Rec. Geol. Surv.
India, Vol. xxvni. p. in (1895).
2 Appendix, No. 8, p. 96.
3 Dr Blanford writes to me that he believes the Palaeozoic connection be-
tween South America and South Africa was tropical or subtropical, rather than
antarctic, and hence that "the evidence for an antarctic continent in upper
Mesozoic or Tertiary times is very slight indeed."
154 THE ARCTOGyEIC REALM. [CHAP.
all the Primates belong to the lemuroid section, and include no
monkeys or apes ; and the carnivores are represented solely by
the extinct creodont group, which differs from the existing members
of the order by the simpler and more primitive structure of the
limbs and teeth. The ungulates, again, belong exclusively to two
extinct suborders, respectively termed the Condylarthra and the
Amblypoda, both of which are very primitive types, with five-toed
limbs of simple structure, the former still retaining evidences of
affinity with the early carnivores. The tillodonts are quite unlike
any existing forms, having a pair of incisor teeth similar to those
of rodents in the front of the jaws, while their cheek-teeth recall
those of the ungulates.
All the Puerco mammals are characterised by the lowness of
the crowns of their molar teeth, which carry simple tubercles,
generally arranged in a triangle ; this type of tooth being known
as the tritubercular, and occurring in all the orders found in the
Puerco. It will be unnecessary to mention the names of the
genera occurring in this horizon, and it will suffice to state that
while peculiar to these beds, many of them belong to families '
characteristic of the overlying Tertiaries. Thus we have the
Anaptomorphida among the lemuroids, the Arctocyonida, Mesony-
chidce, Proviverridce, and Miacida in the carnivores, and the
PhenacodontidcR among the condylarthrous ungulates. The Cernay-
sian fauna is mostly represented by such fragmentary specimens
that the determination of the affinities of its members is a matter
of considerable difficulty; but the forms were all more or less
nearly allied to those of the Puerco, and the creodont genus
Dissacus is common to the two formations ; while Arctocyon,
which is met with in the Cernaysian, also occurs in higher horizons
both in Europe and America.
A very remarkable fact connected with the Puerco fauna is
that out of the 39 generic types by which it is represented, only
eight are followed by analogous forms in the overlying Wahsatch
beds, three of which became extinct in the still higher Bridger
deposits. This leads Messrs Osborn and Earle to the conclusion
that this early mammalian fauna was a kind of failure as regards
development, and that only a few of its less specialised members
persisted to give rise to the mammals of later periods.
IV.] LEMUROIDS. 155
With the Puerco and Cernaysian faunas we take leave of the
Secondary multituberculates, and as we ascend in
. . ... . Lemuroids.
the Tertiary series we find a gradual and progressive
modification of the eutherian mammals towards the modern types.
In the ungulates especially the modification displays itself in the
more complex structure of the molar teeth, and in the reduction of
the number of toes ; the culmination of the latter line of develop-
ment being reached in the modern horses among the perissodactyle
section of the order, and in the ruminants among the artiodactyles.
As regards the molar teeth, the chief features are a lengthening of
the crowns in the more specialised later forms, accompanied by
complex infoldings of the surface of the crown and sides, whereby
the short-crowned, or brachydont type, as exemplified in the tapirs,
has developed into the tall, or hypsodont type characteristic of the
horses. Instead, however, of tracing the succession of the various
faunas, it will suit our present purpose better to refer to the
distribution of the more widely spread groups which are either
characteristic of Arctogsea as a whole, or which were common to
that realm together with Neogsea during the Plistocene period.
The lemuroids, which are at present unknown beyond the
limits of this realm, are first met with in the Puerco beds, where
they are represented by Indrodon, and it is probable that the
Cernaysian mammal described as Plesiadapis (of which the upper
cheek-teeth are shown in the annexed figure) belongs to the same
FlG. 31. THE RIGHT UPPER CHEEK-TEETH OF Plesiadapis :
p. premolars, m. molars.
group. It will be observed that in the latter genus the molars are
of the tritubercular type; the same being the case in Anapto-
morphus of the lower or Wahsatch Eocene of America. In other
forms, however, as in Hyopsodus and Pelycodus of the lower Eocene
of North America, and probably also of the European Eocene, as
well as in Microchcerus of the Oligocene of France and England,
the upper molar teeth have squared crowns, and thus approximate
156 THE ARCTOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
to those of modern lemurs. These early forms differ however from
the latter in that the first of the three lower premolar teeth does
not assume the form and functions of a canine. Another well-
FlG. 32. RIGHT UPPER CHEEK-TEETH OF TWO SPECIES OF THE] LEMUROID
GENUS Microchtxrus. Nat. size and enlarged.
known European lemuroid is Adapts, of the European Oligocene,
differing from all living forms in having four pairs of premolar
teeth.
With the Oligocene, lemuroids seem to have disappeared from
western Europe, and they apparently ceased to exist about the
same date in North America, after which the entire order of the
Primates is unrepresented in the latter country. At the present
day, as we shall see, lemuroids are confined to the Malagasy,
Ethiopian, and Oriental regions ; but at what epoch the southern
migration took place cannot yet be determined.
Omitting mention of the bats, we pass on to the Insectivora,
among which we have the mole family (Talpidce)
distributed over the whole of the Holarctic as well as
the Sonoran region, although all the genera but one are distinct
on the two sides of the Atlantic ; the single common type being
the shrew-moles (Urotrichus\ which have one species in Japan
and another in the United States, thus affording an instance of the
near affinity of the fauna of eastern Asia to that of North America.
The earliest known fossil forms which have been assigned to the
typical genus Talpa occur in the upper Oligocene strata of Europe,
while in the middle Oligocene the family is represented by the
allied Amphidozotherium (Protalpa). The shrews (Soriddce)^
which likewise date from the Oligocene of the Continent, range
over the whole realm, and also enter the Austro-Malayan region
IV.] CARNIVORA. 157
as well as the Mexican subregion, although they are represented
in Madagascar only by a single species of the widely spread genus
Crocidura. Unknown in America, the latter genus, which includes
the well-known musk-shrews, is widely spread over Europe, Asia,
and Africa, extending as far east as Amurland ; but the typical
genus Sorex is practically confined to the Holarctic region 1 , while
other genera have a more local distribution.
With the exception of the civet tribe ( Viverridce] and hyaenas
(Hyanidce), which are unknown in the New World,
....... . Carnivora.
the majority of the existing families of the Carnivora
have, if we except Notogaea, a cosmopolitan distribution, while in
many cases this extensive distribution also holds good with regard
to genera. In Europe the Felidce and Canidce, together with the
Mustelida seem to have made their first appearance in the lower
Oligocene, when they were accompanied by the extinct creodonts ;
while in America the two former are known from the John Day
group, corresponding to the European Miocene. The bears
( Ursidce) are, however, a later group, being unknown before the
Pliocene. Although the whole of the families mentioned above
are represented in South America at the present day and during
the Plistocene, they are, as we have seen in the last chapter,
unknown in the presumably Miocene Tertiaries of Patagonia, and
they are therefore originally of Arctogaeic origin. Although most
of the extinct American Tertiary genera of cats are distinct from
those of Europe, the sabre-toothed tigers (Machcerodus) were
common to both areas, and likewise ranged into Notogaea; and
the existing Felis has a similar cosmopolitan distribution. A more
.specialised sabre-toothed genus (Eusmilus) is likewise common
to North America and Europe. As examples of extinct American
cats, we may name Nimravus and Archcelurus ; while the Oligocene
^Elurictis may be cited as an Old World form. The aforesaid
distinction between the Oligocene and Miocene Felidcz of North
America and Europe is, however, an indication that by this date
the mammalian faunas of Western and Eastern Arctogaea had
become differentiated to a certain extent, although, as now, there
were many types common to the two areas.
1 It has one species in the Sonoran.
158 THE ARCTOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
Much the same story is told by the fossil dogs ( Canidce) of the
two areas. In the Miocene of North America we meet with the
genus Temnocyon, characterised by the cutting heel of the lower
carnassial tooth; while the more civet-like Cynodictis appears to be
confined to the Tertiaries of Europe. The bear-like genus Am-
phicyon, differing from modern dogs by its plantigrade feet, is
confined to the European Oligocene and Miocene and lower
Pliocene, but is represented in the Miocene of America by the
nearly allied Daphcemis. Through the intervention of the still
larger Dinocyon of the European Miocene, the foregoing groups are
intimately connected with the bears (Ursidcz) by means of the
genus Hycenarctus, which is common to the Miocene and Pliocene
of Europe and the Pliocene of India; and this suggests that the
bears are originally an Old World group, which have subsequently
migrated into America. As to whether true dogs (Cam's) and cats
(Felis) originated in America or Europe, we have no means of
deciding 1 . The large weasel family (Mustelidce) calls for no special
mention here, although its comparative poverty in South America
proclaims its Arctogaeic origin.
The community between the mammalian faunas of Eastern
and Western Arctogaea is perhaps better exemplified by the ex-
tinct creodont carnivores, since none of the families occurring there
have been definitely recognised in the South American area.
Differing from modern carnivores by the absence of a pair of
differentiated carnassial teeth in each jaw, as well as by the
scaphoid and lunar bones of the wrist generally remaining
separate, and by the nearly flat upper surfaces of the astragalus in
the ankle, these creodonts make their first appearance in the
Puerco, and mostly died out in the Oligocene, although a few seem
to have survived till the Miocene. In the typical family Hyczno-
dontida we find the genus Hycenodon common to the Oligocene of
both sides of the Atlantic, while the European Pterodon seems to
have a transatlantic representative in the so-called Hemipsalodon of
1 Scott, Trans. Amer. Phil. Soc. xvn. p. 75, concludes that the evolution
of Cam's took place in North America, the ancestry being traced through
Cynodesmtts of the John Day Beds to Daphcemis of the White River, and
thence to the creodont Miacis of the Bridger ; Cynodictis forming a lateral
branch.
IV.] RODENTS. 159
Canada. Oxycena, again, is found both in America and Europe,
although in a lower horizon in the former than in the latter. In a
second family (ProviverridcR) the typical genus Proviverra is met
m
FlG. 33. RIGHT UPPER MOLARS OF ArctoCVOH.
with in the Bridger Eocene of America, and the French Oligocene;
while in the Arctocyonidce, in which the upper molar teeth are
bluntly tritubercular, Arctocyon of the lowest Eocene of Europe is
represented by two allied genera in the American Puerco, one of
which has been described as Clcenodon.
In the rodents there are three more or less widely distributed
existing families restricted to Arctogaea. Of these,
the jerboas and their allies (DipodidtzY occur in all
the regions with the exception of the Malagasy, Oriental, and
Sonoran, although the genera from the different areas are more
or less markedly distinct. The other two, namely the picas or
tailless hares (Lagomyida) and the beavers (Castoridce) are now
severally represented by a single genus confined to the Holarctic
region. The picas date from the Oligocene of Europe, and the
family not improbably originated in eastern Arctogaea ; while the
beavers have fossil representatives in both hemispheres, with the
Miocene and Pliocene genus Chalicomys common to the two.
Although members of the typical genus range into the Neogaeic
realm as far south as Paraguay, the squirrel family (Sciuridce) may
be regarded as a typical Arctogaeic one, the ground-squirrels
(Tamias), marmots (Arctomys) and susliks (Spermophilus} being
restricted to the Holarctic region, though others range over the
1 It has been suggested by Dobson that the Dipodidcz are Hystricomorpha.
This, however, is disproved by Dr Scott (P. Ac. Philad. 1895, pp. 269 286),
who finds in the Uinta Oligocene genus Protoptychus an ancestral type of the
family, which thus appears to be of N. American origin. From this family are
probably descended the Geomyidce.
l6o THE ARCTOG^EIC REALM. [CHAP.
whole of the tropical and temperate parts of the realm with the
exception of Madagascar. Remains of Sperm ophilus and Sciurus
are met with in the later Tertiaries of Europe'; and the extinct
Plesiarctomys, which is common to the Oligocene and Miocene of
Europe and North America, seems to be a connecting form
between the squirrels and marmots, having upper molar teeth of
the tritubercular type.
As regards the cosmopolitan family Muridcz, including the
rats, voles, lemmings, etc., it will suffice to say that originally it
was undoubtedly Arctogaeic ; the forms respectively inhabiting the
Neogaeic and Notogaeic realms being comparatively recent immi-
grants. Both the subfamilies of the voles (Microtince) and the
CricetincB are common to the entire Holarctic region ; the latter
being represented in the eastern half by the hamsters (Cricetus)
and in the western by the white-footed mice (Sitomys], while they
are the sole rodents inhabiting Madagascar, and have one species
in Ethiopian Africa, where there is also the closely allied Deomys,
forming a subfamily by itself. The cricetines are indeed evidently a
primitive type, which in the Old World have been largely supplanted
or driven south by the more specialised. Murince (true rats and mice) ;
but as these are represented in the Middle Tertiaries of both
eastern and western Arctogaea, it is difficult to decide which was
their original habitat. Little need be said in regard to the hares
(Leporidce), except that they range over the whole of Arctogasa,
and have two outlying representatives in Neogaea, which are
doubtless comparatively recent immigrants, although one is known
to have inhabited Brazil since the Plistocene.
A not less marked feature of Arctogaea is the absence of most
of the Neogaeic rodent families noticed in the preceding chapter.
The existence of members of one of these (Octodontida) in Africa
is mentioned in the same place 1 , where a reference to the occur-
rence of allied forms (Theridomyidce] in the European Tertiaries
will also be found 2 .
One of the most important features in connection with the
Arctogaeic ungulates is the total absence of the
Ungulates. 5 6
peculiar subordmal groups characteristic of the
1 See also the chapter on the Ethiopian region. 2 Supra, p. 86.
IV.] ARTIODACTYLES. l6l
South American Tertiaries ; although, as stated in the last chapter,
there are indications of a distant affinity between these and some
of the primitive early European perissodactyles. So far as our
present knowledge goes, both the perissodactyle and artiodactyle
suborders made their appearance in North America during the
lower or Wahsatch Eocene ; the former group at least also dating
from the same epoch in Europe, where the genus Hyracotherium,
which is common to the Bridger and Wahsatch Eocene, and is one
of the earliest ancestors of the horses, occurs in the London Clay.
Commencing with the Artiodactyla, or even-toed group
characterised by the toes corresponding to the third and fourth
of the typical pentedactyle limb being symmetrical to a line drawn
between them and taking into consideration only such families as
have a wide distribution, we have first to do with certain extinct
types which serve to connect the pigs with the ruminants. The
most pig-like of these are the animals forming the family Chcero-
potamidce, characterised by their broad upper molar teeth carrying
five blunt tubercles, three of which are on the front half of the
crown. Although the typical genus Chosropotamus appears to have
been confined to the lower Oligocene of Europe, the much larger
animals known as Elotherium (fig. 35) were common to the upper
Oligocene of both hemispheres. Nearly allied is the family of the
Anthracotheriidce, in which the low tubercles of the molars assume
FlG. 34. RIGHT UPPER MOLAR OF AncoduS.
a more or less crescentic, or selenodont structure, thus foreshadow-
ing those of the ruminants. Here, again, the typical genus is
restricted to the Old World, but the nearly allied Ancodus (Hyo-
L II
162
THE ARCTOG^IC REALM.
-C
IV.] ARTIODACTYLES. 163
potamus] has the same approximate distribution as Elotherium,
although it also occurs in the Miocene of northern India, together
with Anthracotherium and a genus (Tetraconodon] closely allied to
Elotherium.
A group of smaller Eocene and Oligocene mammals, con-
stituting the family Ccenotheriidce, differ from the preceding in
that their upper molars have two cusps on the front, and three on
the hinder half of the crown. Here none of the genera are com-
mon to the two sides of the Atlantic, Ccenotherium and Dichobumis
being European, while the latter is represented in the Bridger
Eocene by the closely allied Homacodon. It has been suggested
that this group includes the ancestors of the camel tribe.
The latter group (Camelidce), now represented only by the
camels (Camelus) in the Old World, and the guanacos, vicunas,
and their domesticated allies the llamas in South America, was
formerly widely distributed in Arctogaea, which was doubtless its
original home, since, as we have seen in the preceding chapter,
the llamas and their allies are but comparatively recent immigrants
into Neogaea. Camelus itself is represented in a fossil state in the
Pliocene of northern India and the Plistocene of Algeria ; but no
other Old World representatives of the family are known. Very
different, however, is the case with North America, where, from
the Plistocene downwards, we meet with a host of extinct types,
such as Pliauchenia, Procamelus, Protolabis, etc., gradually con-
necting the existing forms with a small animal from the middle
Oligocene known as Poebrotherium, which exhibits many very
generalised characters. A still earlier representative of the family
in Leptotragulus, of the lower or Uinta Oligocene, which itself may
be sprung from the aforesaid Homacodon of the underlying Bridger
beds. It is thus perfectly evident that the cameloids were ori-
ginally a N. American group. One branch crossed the area now
occupied by Bering Strait to found the camels of the Old World ;
while, probably at a later date, a second branch passed over the
isthmus of Panama to persist in the guanacos, vicunas, and
llamas of South America. The disappearance of the whole group
from the northern half of the New World is a very remarkable fact,
but is paralleled by that of the elephants, rhinoceroses, lemurs, and
several other groups.
II 2
164 THE ARCTOG^EIC REALM. [CHAP.
The Tragulidce, or chevrotains, which form a group distinct
both from the cameloids and the true ruminants, are now confined
to the Oriental and Ethiopian regions, being represented in the
former area by the true chevrotains (Tragulus), and in the latter
by the single existing species of water-chevrotain (Dorcatheriuni).
Representatives of the latter genus occur, however, in the Miocene
and Pliocene strata of Europe ; while in the Oligocene we meet
with the more generalised extinct genera Prodremotherium and
Bachitheriuwi. In North America the group is but poorly repre-
sented, and apparently confined to the White River Oligocene,
where we find two types described under the names of Leptomeryx
and Hypertragulus ; the latter differing from the existing forms by
having both the third and fourth metacarpals and the correspond-
ing metatarsals separate, instead of being fused together to form a
cannon-bone. It is difficult to decide whether the group was
originally an Old or a New World one ; but, on the whole, it is
probable that it originated in the former area.
We now come to the true ruminants, or Pecora, forming the
most specialised group of all the artiodactyle section of the ungu-
lates, and characterised by the completely crescentic, or selenodont
conformation of the columns of their molar teeth, which are
frequently of great height ; and likewise by the fusion of the third
and fourth metacarpals and metatarsals into a cannon-bone, and
by the imperfect development or disappearance of the lateral
metacarpals and metatarsals. In the family of the Cervida the
typical deer, or those included in the genus Cervus, are almost
exclusively Arctogseic 1 , being found in all the regions of the realm,
except the Sonoran, Ethiopian, and Malagasy. The reindeer
(Rangifer] and elk (Alces] are also solely Arctogseic forms, but
have a more restricted range, being confined to the more northern
portions of the Holarctic region. A more striking case is afforded
by the hollow-horned ruminants, or Bovidce, the whole of the
numerous members of which are confined to the realm under con-
sideration, with the sole exception of the anoa (Bos depressicornis]
of Celebes ; and even the latter, as we have seen in an earlier
chapter, is very closely related to certain extinct Indian forms. It
1 The only exception is Cervus timoriensis, which may have been introduced
into its present habitat.
IV.] PERISSODACTYLES. 165
may be noticed, however, that Bovidce are much more numerously
represented in Eastern than in Western Arctogaea ; the latter area
having only the genera Bos, Ovibos, Ovis, and Haploceros, each
with a single species confined to the more northern portions of
the continent ; the last genus being peculiar to this area.
We now pass to the perissodactyle, or odd-toed ungulates,
which while agreeing with the artiodactyle section in the inter-
locking arrangement of the bones of the wrist and ankle joints,
and the pulley-like upper surface of the astragalus bone in the
latter, differ by the third or middle toe and its supporting meta-
carpal or metatarsal bone being symmetrical in itself, and larger
than the lateral ones, when such are retained. In this suborder
the family of the tapirs (Tapiridce), although now mainly Neogaeic,
with one outlying Malayan species, was formerly widely spread in
northern Arctogaea, fossil remains belonging to the single existing
genus Tapirus being abundant in the Pliocene of Europe, although
none appear to have been recorded from North America. In
both Europe and America there occurs, however, the ancestral
genus Protapirus ; its remains having been obtained in the former
area from the upper Oligocene phosphorites of France, and in the
latter from the nearly equivalent Uinta beds. Possibly a doubtful
form {Palceotapirus) from the middle Eocene of France should
also be included in the same family. The Uinta and Bridger
deposits have also yielded a more or less nearly allied form known
as Isectolophus, which apparently also occurs in the European
Eocene, where it has been described as Lophiodon. Indeed, in our
view, both this genus, and the still earlier American Systemodon,
which appears to have been the earliest known representative of
the tapiroid stock, may be included in the family Lophiodontidce,
where we should also place the ancestral types of the horses. In
this family the genus Lophiodon, as now restricted, seems to have
been confined to the Eocene of Europe, where it died out without
giving rise to descendants, the same being the case with the
allied Eocene genus Helaletes^. The well-known Hyracotherium,
which was an animal of the size of a fox first described from
the London Clay but subsequently recorded from the North
1 Recorded from Europe by Osborn and Wortman, Bull. Amer. Mus.
Vol. vii. p. 360 (1895).
1 66 THE ARCTOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
American Eocene, is, however, the proximate ancestor of the
horse-family (Equid<z)\ and we have thus evidence that the fore-
runners of both the horses and tapirs were widely spread over the
whole of northern Arctogaea. Hyracotherium, it may be observed,
had the typical forty-four teeth characteristic of the earlier euther-
ians, and four toes to the front, and three to the hind feet; but in
the still earlier Phenacodus, which seems to be the ultimate
ancestor of the horses, each foot was furnished with five complete
toes. As other instances of the community between the early
Tertiary mammalian fauna of the northern halves of the two
hemispheres, we may cite the genus Pachynolophus of the middle
and upper Eocene of Europe and the Bridger Eocene of the United
States, which connects Hyracotherium with the under-mentioned
horse-like animals ; and also Hyrachyus, typically from the
Bridger, but probably occurring in the French phosphorites ; the
latter being more nearly related to the rhinoceroses.
FlG. 36. LEFT UPPER CHEEK-TEETH OF Palceotheri
Passing by several less important genera confined to one or
the other hemispheres, we come to the family Pal&otheriidce,
which is an ill-defined one including forms connecting the pre-
ceding with the undoubted Equidce. Here the typical Oligocene
genus Pal&otheriuni) which includes large tapir-like animals with
three toes to each foot, is exclusively European. The same is the
case with the contemporary Anchilophus, represented by smaller
forms with more decidedly horse-like affinities; but with the
Miocene and upper Oligocene Anchitherium, used in its wider
sense, we once more come to a genus common to Western and
Eastern Arctogaea. In this genus the jaws are provided with the
typical forty-four teeth; but the last lower molar has generally lost
the third lobe found in the preceding forms ; the fifth metacarpal
bone being still represented by a splint. In the small A.
IV.]
PERISSODACTYLES.
I6 7
(Mesohippus) bairdi of the White River Oligocene of the United
States, the incisor teeth lack the infoldings of the summit of the
crown characteristic of the horses, and the lateral digits are
relatively large ; the whole size of the creature being comparable
FIG. 37. LEFT UPPER CHEEK-TEETH OF Anchitherium.
to that of a Newfoundland dog. On the other hand, in the typical
A. aurelianense, from the European Miocene, the summits of the
incisors were infolded, as in the horses. In spite of this resem-
blance, Professor Scott, from the structure of the limbs, is of
opinion that the latter species was not an ancestor of the modern
horses, but that this position was occupied by A. bairdi.
Restricting the term Equidce to those members of the suborder
in which the crowns of the cheek-teeth are very tall (Jiypsodonf),
with complicated infoldings of their enamel, and the hollows thus
formed completely filled with cement, we have in the lower
Pliocene of North America the three-toed genus Protohippus,
FlG. 38. RIGHT UPPER MOLAR TOOTH OF A HORSE (Equus).
distinguished from the modern horses by the shorter crowns of the
cheek-teeth. The widely-spread genus Hipparion differs in having
the anterior inner column of the upper molars completely
1 68
THE ARCTOG^IC REALM.
[CHAP.
detached 1 ; the feet being generally three-toed, although in one
Indian species the lateral digits are wanting. These three-toed
horses are met with in the Pliocene of Europe, Asia, and North
FlG. 39. UNDER SURFACE OF SKULL OF Hipparion.
America ; and it is suggested by Professor Cope that while in the
Old World the intermediate stage between Anchitherium and the
modern horses was occupied by this genus, in the New World this
gap was filled by Protohippus. The true horses (Equus\ charac-
terised by the one-toed feet and the union of the anterior inner
column of the upper cheek-teeth with the adjacent middle column,,
although now confined to the Old World, where they date from
the Pliocene, were formerly abundant in North America during the
Plistocene, and, as we have seen, were likewise represented during
the same epoch in South America. The oldest forms appear to
be those from the Siwalik Hills of northern India ; and it is thus
evident that the group was originally an Arctogseic one 2 . The
genus is now represented in all the regions of eastern Arctogaea,
with the exception of Madagascar, and its extinction in the New
World cannot be satisfactorily explained.
1 This pillar forms the lowest part of the unshaded area in figure 38.
2 Professor Scott, to whose views we have already alluded, in a paper pub-
lished in Tr. Amer. Phil. Soc. Vol. xvn. pp. in 112 (1894), is of opinion
that the genus Equus was evolved in North America, and that Anchitherium,
in its restricted sense, was off the direct line. He arranges the direct ancestral
forms of the upper Tertiary, from above downwards, in the order Protohipptis ,
Desmatippus, Miohippus, and Mesohippus ; Anchitherium branching off from
Miohippus, and Hipparion from Protohippus.
IV.] PERISSODACTYLES. 169
The rhinoceroses (Rhinocerotidce) originally had a distribution
very similar to that of the horses, with the exception that they
never entered Neogaea; and they also agree with the latter in their
present extinction in North America, where they are unknown
after the Pliocene. On both sides of the Atlantic the true
rhinoceroses appear to have commenced in the lower Oligocene ;
and in both areas the earliest forms were hornless. Early species
with a pair of horns placed transversely on the nose are likewise
met with both in Europe and North America; but the modem
two-horned rhinoceroses appear to be restricted to the Old World,
where one extinct species (Rhinoceros antiquitatis] ranged as far
north as the Arctic circle during the Plistocene period. On the
whole, it seems preferable to include all the living and most of the
extinct species in the typical genus Rhinoceros ; the existing forms
FlG. 40. SECOND RIGHT UPPER MOLAR OF Rhinoceros.
A. median valley ; D. anterior, and E. posterior crests ; F. posterior valley ;
H. crochet.
being confined to the Oriental and Ethiopian regions. Rhino-
ceroses, it may be observed, differ from all the preceding families
of the suborder by the upper cheek-teeth having a continuous
outer wall, instead of being divided by a vertical ridge into two
I/O THE ARCTOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
distinct lobes ; and while all the living forms have but three toes
to each foot, in some of the extinct hornless species the front limb
was four-toed. In the typical genus the number of the front teeth
is more or less reduced, but in the extinct Hyracodon and
Amynodon of the upper Eocene of North America the full forty-
four teeth were developed ; and as allied forms also occur in the
Oligocene, it would seem highly probable that the group originated
in North America, whence it migrated westwards by way of what
is now Bering Strait to attain its most specialised development in
the Old World. It is, however, noteworthy that the genus
Cadurcotherium, from the French Oligocene, which should ap-
parently find a place in this family, and is distinguished by the
narrowness of its upper molars, makes a curious approximation
in the structure of these teeth to the Neogaeic Homalodontothe-
rium 1 . The most specialised representative of the family is the
huge Elasmotherium, of the Siberian Plistocene, whose molars shew
a resemblance to those of the Equidce.
Another family of perissodactyles (Titanotheriidce) is typically
represented by certain huge, somewhat rhinoceros-like, mammals,
generally having a pair of transversely-placed tuberosities on the
nasal region of the skull, and characterised by a peculiar arrange-
ment of the tubercles on their upper molars. These teeth, which
have very short crowns, also differ from those of the rhinoceroses
in having the outer wall divided into two lobes by a vertical ridge;
while the last lower molar is distinguished from the corresponding
tooth of the latter by having a third lobe. The typical genus
Titanotherium is mainly North American, where it ranges from the
lower Oligocene to the upper Eocene, but is also represented in the
Tertiaries of the Balkans, although unknown in those of western
Europe. An allied genus (Brachydiastematotherium) has also been
recorded from eastern Europe, but all the other members of the
family, such as Palceosyops, are North American. This family
accordingly appears to have been mainly an American one, but
was probably represented in Asia as well as in eastern Europe.
The remarkable genus Chalicotherium, whose geological range
in the Old World extends from the Oligocene of France to the
1 Supra, p. 82.
IV.]
PERISSODACTYLES.
171
THE ARCTOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
lower Pliocene of India, while species also occur in the Miocene of
the United States, has molars strikingly like those of the Titano-
theriida, but its feet differ from those of all existing ungulates in
terminating in huge curved claws much resembling those of
the South American edentates. Indeed, one genus of the family
(Macrotheriuni] was long regarded as belonging to the latter
group. Of the two genera which occur in the European Miocene,
Macrotherium has the fore limb much longer than the hinder ;
whereas in Chalicotherium (Ancylotherium) the two are more nearly
equal in length. It is to the former genus that the North American
forms are assigned.
The proboscidean ungulates, which differ markedly from the
two preceding groups in the structure both of their teeth and
limbs, and are now represented only by the Indian and African
elephant, form a comparatively small assemblage, most of whose
members may be included in the family Elephantida. Among
these, the most specialised types constitute the genus Elephas,
characterised by the complexity of the structure of the cheek-teeth,
which generally assume the form of more or less elevated parallel
plates, with the intervals filled with cement. In certain of the
earlier species from the Pliocene of Asia the plates of these teeth
are, however, comparatively low and less numerous, with the
intervening valleys almost devoid of cement; so that these
stegodont elephants, as they are called, form a complete transition
towards the mastodons. Commencing in the Indian Pliocene,
elephants ranged over the whole of Europe and Asia during the
Plistocene, while we have also evidence of their occurrence during
the same epoch in northern Africa; and they were likewise repre-
sented by two species in North America, one of which ranged as far
south as Texas. One of these American species was identical
with the European mammoth (E. primigenius], while the second
(E. columbianus] was nearly allied; both being near relatives of the
existing Indian elephant. The extinct stegodont elephants being
confined to south-eastern Asia, it is interesting to note that the
species of Mastodon making the nearest approximation to Elephas
are met with in this region alone; and from this it may be inferred
that the evolution of the latter genus took place in that part of* the
world. All mastodons, it may be mentioned, have comparatively
IV.]
PROBOSCIDEANS.
173
simple molar teeth, in which the crowns are surmounted by low
transverse ridges, frequently separated into more or less distinct
tubercles, and with the intervening valleys open, such ridges
varying from three to five in number in the majority of the teeth,
FlG. 42. LAST UPPER MOLAR TOOTH OF A MASTODON. (^ nat. size.)
although more numerous in the last of the series. Both in Europe
and North America mastodons make their appearance in the
Miocene, although in the latter area they are unknown before the
Deep River beds forming the upper portion of that stage; and
whereas they disappeared in the Old World with the Pliocene,
they persisted in the New till the succeeding Plistocene age.
During the Pliocene, as we have seen in the last chapter, they
obtained an entrance into South America, so that they cannot be
regarded as absolutely characteristic of Arctogaea. On the whole,
it is probable that the group originated in the Old World, although
we are still in the dark as to its relationship to other ungulates.
The only other Arctogaeic genus of proboscideans is Dino-
therium, which constitutes a family by itself, and is known from the
Miocene and Pliocene of Europe and India, but is unrepresented
in America. In these animals only one of the true molars has
three ridges, the others having but two; and tusks were present in
the lower jaw alone.
A fourth subordinal group of the ungulates, which is more
primitive than any of the foregoing, and has been designated by
Professor Cope the Amblypoda, or short-footed group, has one
THE ARCTOG^IC REALM. [CHAP.
family (Coryphodontidce] common to the lower Eocene of both
hemispheres, while a second family ( Uintatheriid<z), of later age is
strictly North American. All these animals had limbs of an
elephantine type, each foot being furnished with five toes, and the
bones of the wrist and ankle joints arranged on the linear plan.
The genus Coryphodon, which includes species varying in size
from a tapir to a rhinoceros, had forty-four teeth, with the canines
FIG. 43. LEFT UPPER CHEEK-TEETH OF Coryphodon ; reduced.
well developed, and the molars bearing prominent oblique ridges.
First discovered in the London Clay, and subsequently in the
lower Eocene of France, this genus has since been recognised in
the lower Eocene of the United States, where nearly perfect
skeletons have been obtained.
In a still more primitive group known as the Condylarthra,
which apparently contains the ancestral stock of both the artio-
dactyles and perissodactyles, it is believed that the genus Phena-
codus (the ultimate parent of the horses), typically occurring in the
Wahsatch Eocene of the United States, is represented in the Swiss
Eocene; and the same has been stated to be the case with
Protogonia.
Summarising the results of the foregoing survey, it may be
stated that as regards its mammalian fauna Arctogaea
Summary of .
the character- as a whole is characterised by the following features,
mammalian Absence of monotremes and diprotodont marsu-
faunaof Arcto- pials. No existing polyprotodont marsupials except
opossums, and these only in its western half. No
Tertiary marsupials known except opossums, although other types
probably existed in South-eastern Asia. No existing edentates 1 ,
and fossil ones only in North American Plistocene and Pliocene.
No marmosets (Hapalida), and no monkeys of the family Cebidce.
Bats of the family Phyllostomatida wanting, save for a few on the
1 The aard-varks and pangolins are here excluded from the Edentata.
IV.] LIST OF FAMILIES. 1/5
Pacific side of North America. Insectivores abundant. In the
following list of more or less widely distributed families the ma-
jority are for the most part confined to this realm, while the others
contain exclusively Arctogaeic genera. Such groups as are prac-
tically confined to Arctogaea are printed in italics, those which are
extinct having an * prefixed ; while the letter H. denotes such of
the existing ones as are restricted to the Holarctic region :
INSECTIVORA.
Talpida. H.
Soricidce. Enters Austro-Malayan region and Mexican
sub-region.
CARNIVORA.
* Hycenodoriidce.
* Proviverridce.
* ArctocyonidcE.
RODENTIA.
Sciuridae. Mainly Arctogseic, although species of Sciurus
extend in Neogaea as far south as Paraguay.
Dipodidce.
Castorida. H.
* Theridomyida. H.
Lagomyidce. H.
UNGULATA.
* Chceropotamidtz.
* A nthracotheriida.
* Ccenotheriidce.
TraguhdcE. Extinct in N. America.
Cervidae. The genus Cervus exclusively Arctogaeic.
Bovida. Represented by Bos depressicornis in Celebes.
* Lophiodontidce.
* Palaotheriidce.
Rhinocerotida. Extinct in W. Arctogaea.
* Chalicotheriidce.
* Titanotheriida*. Mainly W. Arctogaeic but occurring
in the Balkans.
Elephantidae. Elephas.
* CoryphodontidcK.
THE ARCTOG/EIC REALM.
[CHAP.
f ATUL TITUBERCULA TA.
* Plagiaulacidce.
* Bolodontidce. Only Secondary in Eastern Arctogsea.
The following table exhibits some of the better known Tertiary
mammalian genera common to both halves of Arctogaea, together
with allied types restricted to the western and eastern hemispheres ;
such as are still existing being indicated by a f :
W. HEMISPHERE. BOTH HEMISPHERES. E. HEMISPHERE.
LEMUROIDEA.
Anaptomorphus.
CARNIVORA.
Hyopsodus.
Adapis.
Microchoerus.
(Also
Machasrodus
Neogaea in Plistocene).
Nimravus.
Archaelurus.
Temnocyon.
Hyaenocyon.
Daphaenus.
Eusmilus.
Claenodon.
RODENTIA.
UNGULATA.
Achaenodon.
Homacodon.
Procamelus, etc.
Hyaenodon.
Pterodon.
Oxysena.
Proviverra.
Chalicomys.
Plesiarctomys.
Elotherium.
Ancodus.
^Elurictis.
Amphicyon.
Dinocyon.
Hyaenarctus.
Arctocyon.
Chceropotamus.
Anthracotherium.
Dichobunus.
Caenotherium.
t Camelus.
f Dorcatherium.
IV.]
WESTERN AND EASTERN FAUNAS.
177
UNGULATA (continued).
Leptomeryx.
Hypertragulus.
Colodon.
Systemodon.
Protohippus.
Hyracodon.
Amynodon.
Palaeosyops.
Prodremotherium.
Protapirus.
Helaletes. Lophiodon.
Hyracotherium.
Pachynolophus.
Hyrachyus.
Palaeotherium.
Anchitherium. Anchilophus.
Hipparion.
t Equus (also Neogaeic).
t Rhinoceros.
Cadurcotherium.
Elasmotherium.
Titan otherium.
Brachydiastematotherium.
Chalicotherium. Macrotherium.
t Elephas.
Mastodon (also Neogaeic).
Dinotherium.
Coryphodon.
( Typically N. American,
Phenacodus IV* J ,
i but stated also to
Protogoma i . ^
I occur in Europe.
In the foregoing table, only some of the better known types
have been selected, but these suffice to show that throughout the
Tertiary epoch a certain number of genera were common to
western and eastern Arctogaea. It is true that, with the exception
of those still existing, we have no evidence that any of these ever
reached the Ethiopian region ; and it is quite probable that many
or the whole of them never did so. By its present fauna that
region is, however, so closely connected with the Pliocene and
modern mammals of Asia and Europe, that there can be no ques-
tion of its right to inclusion in the same realm ; and this being so,
L. 12
1/8 THE ARCTOG^EIC REALM. [CHAP. IV.
Madagascar cannot be excluded. Still, it is quite probable that
during the later Tertiary epoch the Ethiopian and Malagasy
regions were almost as distinct from the rest of Arctogaea as are
Neogaea and Notogaea at the present day, and if such conditions
had continued, the former areas would have been entitled to con-
stitute a realm by themselves.
In the sequel we shall discuss the whole number of existing
genera of non-volant terrestrial mammals common to the eastern
and western halves of the Holarctic region, and likewise such
living and extinct types as are respectively peculiar to Eastern and
Western Arctogsea. These, taken in conjunction with the fore-
going tables, will show that, in spite of the forms common to the
two latter areas, there has always been a large number of types
restricted to one side or the other of the Atlantic basin. And
this leads to the conclusion that, although during a considerable
portion, or the whole of the Tertiary period, there was a free land-
communication between North America and Eastern Asia by way
of Bering Strait, yet that this connecting land must have been
comparatively narrow, so that the faunas of the more southern
portions of both areas developed to a great extent independently
of one another.
Not the least curious feature in connection with the com-
munity of types on the two sides of the Atlantic is the precise
parallelism in the development of many of the groups in both
areas. In both, for instance, the phyla of the horses and rhino-
ceroses were practically similar, although it is thought that the
stage occupied in the one area by Hipparion was held in the other
by Protohippus. If this particular suggestion should prove to be
well founded, it will be self-evident that the true horses have been
independently evolved in the two areas ; and it almost seems as
if the same had been the case with the rhinoceroses and certain
other groups. Had the culminating forms been devolved in only
one of the two areas, we should not expect to find the whole of
the ancestral links present in both.
CHAPTER V.
EASTERN ARCTOG^EA.
Mammalian groups peculiar to Eastern Arctogsea Tertiary Mammalian
Faunas of Eastern Arctogaea Oligocene Fauna Miocene Fauna Older
Pliocene Fauna Pikermi and allied Faunas Siwalik Fauna Higher
Pliocene Faunas.
ALTHOUGH northern Europe and Asia forms but one zoological
region with the corresponding part of North America,
yet there are numerous groups of mammals con-
fined respectively to its eastern and western portions, ^u> Eastern
which clearly show that the communication between
the two areas was always more or less limited. In this chapter
attention will be first directed to some of the most striking
peculiarities of the mammalian fauna of Eastern Arctogaea, after
which the whole fossil fauna may be taken into consideration.
In addition to the total absence of existing opossums (Didel-
phyid(E\ and the presence in its warmer portions of fruit-bats
(Pteropodidce), which, however, are common to Notogaea, Eastern
Arctogaea is especially characterised as being the home of all the
higher Primates; namely the family Stmiidce, which includes the
man-like apes and gibbons, and the Cercopithecidcz, embracing all
the other Old World monkeys. From the South American monkeys
(Cebidcz) both these families are broadly distinguished by having
two pairs of premolar and three of molar teeth, whereas in the
former group there are three pairs of both premolar and molar
teeth. Not only are the two families in question confined at the
present day to the Eastern hemisphere, but the same appears to
have been the case at all epochs, since no trace of a fossil monkey
has ever been recorded from North America. This remarkable
isolation of the distributional areas of the Simiidcz and Cercopi-
thecidce on the one hand, and of the Cebidce. (and Hapalidcz) on
12 2
ISO EASTERN ARCTOG^A. [CHAP.
the other, points unmistakeably, in spite of their external similarity,
to the dual origin of the monkeys of the Old and New Worlds.
Both may, however, have originated from different groups of
lemuroids, which, as indicated in an earlier chapter, ranged over
the whole of Northern Arctogaea during the earlier part of the
Tertiary epoch.
At the present day the man -like apes, which are few in
number, have an extremely limited distribution. The chim-
panzees (Anthropopithecus) are restricted to Equatorial Africa, the
gorilla (Gorilla) is found only in the hottest regions of Western
Africa, the orangs (Simla} are confined to the islands of Borneo
and Sumatra, and the smaller gibbons (Hylobates) are inhabitants
of South-eastern Asia, from Assam and Burma to Hainan. Ex-
tinct species of chimpanzees and orangs occur, however, in the
Pliocene of Northern India; while gibbons are met with in the
Miocene of France and Baden, although there is some difference
of opinion whether these are generically identical with the Asiatic
forms, or should be assigned to a genus apart (Pliopithecus}. The
former deposits have also yielded remains of a large extinct ape
(Dryopithecus)) apparently of a somewhat more generalised type
than all the existing forms.
The ordinary monkeys and apes (Cercopithecidce) have a wider
distribution, ranging over most of the warmer parts of Eastern
Arctogaea, and being represented by a single species at Gibraltar,
and by two others in Moupin, in Eastern Tibet, and a fourth in
Japan. This family, by the way, is not exclusively Arctogaeic,
since, as we have seen, one species of a peculiar genus (Cynopi-
thecus) inhabits Celebes. Apart from the latter, the family is
represented by eight living genera, among which the Ethiopian
Papio has extinct representatives in the Pliocene and Plistocene
of India, as have also the Asiatic Macacus and Semnopithecus. The
two latter genera also occur in the Pliocene of France and Italy;
and a tooth of a species of Macacus has been obtained from the
Plistocene brick-earths of Essex. In addition to these, there are
certain extinct genera from the European Tertiaries; among
which Mesopithecus from the lower Pliocene of Greece agrees with
Macacus in its short and stout limbs, but approximates to
Semnopithecus in the character of its skull and dentition. Dolicho-
V.] DISTINCTIVE MAMMALS. l8l
pithecus, from the French Pliocene, has a longer muzzle; while
Oreopithecus, from the Italian Miocene, seems to connect the
CercopitheddcB with the Simiida.
It is thus evident that during the latter portion of the Tertiary
epoch monkeys and apes were spread over the greater part of
Eastern Arctogaea; and their extensive diffusion is a proof that
this half of the realm could only have been connected with North
America by land situated so far north that it formed an impass-
able barrier to these animals. Although the smaller extinct
European monkeys do not necessarily indicate a very high
temperature in the regions they inhabited, there can be little doubt
that at the era when Dryopithecus flourished southern Europe at
least enjoyed a moist tropical climate.
Not less characteristic of Eastern Arctogaea are the existing
lemuroids, of which there are three families ; the largest (Lemurida)
ranging over the Oriental, Ethiopian, and Malagasy regions, the
Tarsiidce, with a single genus, being exclusively Oriental, while
the sole representative of the Ckiromyida is Malagasy. The
numerous existing members of the Lemuridce. are all characterised
by the first of the three lower premolar teeth assuming the form
and functions of a canine; and as this feature is unknown in
any of the Tertiary representatives of the sub-order, this family
appears to be exclusively confined to the area under consideration.
For the most part, the Oligocene lemuroids of Europe seem
likewise to have been markedly distinct from those of North
America. Microchcerus^ , for instance, which is represented both
in France and England, indicates a family characterised, among
other features, by the general presence of only three pairs of
premolar teeth in each jaw ; and Adapts, which is likewise
common to the same two countries, has four such teeth.
Although there are several families of Insectivora peculiar to
the eastern hemisphere, the only one of these with a wide distri-
bution is that of the hedgehogs and their allies (Erinaceida), which
has representatives in the eastern Holarctic, Oriental, and Ethiopian
regions. Although none are known from America, extinct repre-
sentatives of this family are common in the European Oligocene.
1 Teeth figured on p. 156.
1 82 EASTERN ARCTOG^EA. [CHAP.
Of these Pal&oerinaceus appears to be allied to the true hedgehogs
(Erinaceus) ; whereas other genera, such as Necrogymnurus,
connect the former with the existing long-tailed and spineless
Gymnura of the Malayan islands. This group is thus essentially
characteristic of Eastern Arctogaea as a whole.
Turning to the Carnivora, we have, in addition to the Prote-
leidce, of which the sole representative is the African aard-wolf, two
important families practically confined to this half of the realm.
The first of these is the extensive group of the civets, mungooses,
and their allies ( Vtverridce), which has no representatives in the
New World, although a single species in two genera ranges into
the Austro-Malayan region. Out of a total of twenty-three genera
included in this family only one mungoose (Herpestes) and the
common genet (Genetta) range into Europe, most of the other
forms being confined to the Oriental, Ethiopian, and Malagasy
regions. Civets ( Viverra) and ichneumons, together with several
remarkable extinct genera, such as Stenoplesictis, were, however,
common in the European Tertiaries, from the lower Oligocene
upwards. And from the circumstance that the last-named genus
presents characters connecting the Viverridce with the weasel
tribe (Mustelida), it would seem probable that the latter family
was originally evolved in Eastern Arctogaea, although it has now a
considerable number of American representatives.
By means of certain extinct forms from the lower Pliocene of
Southern Europe and Northern India known as Ictitherium, the
civets are very closely connected indeed with the hyaenas
(ffy&nidce) ; the three living representatives of which may be
included in the single genus Hyana. Although the striped hyaena
(H. striata) is now confined to Southern Asia and Northern
Africa, it occurred in the Pliocene epoch in France and England;
while the larger spotted hyaena (ff. crocutd] of Southern Africa
ranged during the Plistocene era over the greater part of temperate
Europe, and likewise extended eastwards as far as India.
Numerous extinct species of the same genus are found in the
Pliocene of Europe and India; and two extinct genera from the
same deposits Hyanictis and Palhyizna connect the living
forms with the aforesaid Ictitherium. Although one extinct
Tertiary North American genus has been tentatively assigned to
V.] RODENTS. 183
it, the family is thus essentially an Eastern Arctogaeic one; and it
may be assumed that, as its living representatives are inhabitants of
hot climates, the extinct forms were unable to exist sufficiently far
north to permit them to cross by the bridge of land via Bering
Strait.
Among the rodents, in addition to the two widely spread
families Myoxidcz and Spaladdce. confined to Eastern Arctogaea,
we find in the Muridce the sub-family of the gerbils (Gerbillina)
similarly restricted, their range including the whole of Eastern
Arctogaea with the exception of the Malagasy region.
The subfamily Murtna, which includes the true rats and mice
(Afus) is likewise restricted to the Old World. These rodents
differ from the hamsters (Cricetus) and the New World white-
footed mice (Sitomys), which, with other forms, constitute the
sub-family Cricetince, by the molar teeth in the upper jaw having
their tubercles arranged in three longitudinal rows ; whereas in the
latter they form only a double series. Distributed over all the
regions of Eastern Arctogaea, with the exception of Madagascar,
this group is also represented in the Australian region. Of the
two extensively distributed families restricted to the area under
consideration, the first is that of the dormice (Myoxidce) whose range
includes the Eastern Holarctic and Ethiopian regions. Distin-
guished from all other rodents by the absence of a caecum or
blind appendage to the intestine, and further characterised by
the complicated infoldings of the enamel on the crowns of their
molar teeth, these beautiful little creatures now attain their
maximum development in Africa. In a fossil state they are first
known from the lower Oligocene of Europe, and are likewise
common in the Miocene. Another family which does not range
beyond the limits of Eastern Arctogaea is that of the Spalacida,
typically represented by the great mole-rat (Spalax typhlus] a
blind creature, ranging over south-eastern Europe, Persia, Meso-
potamia, Syria, and Egypt. The allied genus (Rhizomys), in which
the eyes, although minute, are not covered with skin, includes
several species, whose distributional area embraces the north of
India, Tibet, China, Burma, Malaysia, and Abyssinia ; but the
three remaining genera are restricted to the Ethiopian region.
The whole of the foregoing belong to the mouse-like, or Myo-
1 84 EASTERN ARCTOGvEA. [CHAP.
morphous section of the order, but among the Hystricomorphous
rodents we have the typical porcupines (Hystricince), in which the
tail is never prehensile, practically confined to Eastern Arctogsea,
where they range over south-eastern Europe, and the Ethiopian
and Oriental regions. The Javan species of the typical genus
(Hystrix javanicd] is, however, found in the island of Timor,
in the Austro-Malayan region, although it is doubtless of late
introduction there, and may not improbably have been transported
by human agency. In a fossil state porcupines of this sub-family
are common in the European Tertiary as far down as the lower
Oligocene.
Turning to the ungulates, we have in the artiodactyle section
two closely allied families, which if we except certain pigs from the
Austro-Malayan region and Papua, which may have been originally
introduced by man are restricted to the area under considera-
tion. Both these families, moreover, have representatives, either
living or extinct, in all the regions of Eastern Arctogsea, inclusive
even of Madagascar, so that they may be reckoned among its most
characteristic mammals. The Hippopotamidtz now restricted to
the Ethiopian region, where they are represented by the widely-
spread common Hippopotamus amphibius, and the much smaller
terrestrial H. liberiensis of the West Coast ranged during the
Plistocene and upper Pliocene epochs over the greater part of
Europe as far north as England ; one species from these deposits
being apparently indistinguishable from the common African form.
Extinct species are met with in the Plistocene of Algeria, the
Plistocene and Pliocene of India, the Pliocene of Burma, and the
superficial deposits of Madagascar; some of these differing from
the common hippopotamus by the presence of three, in place of
two, pairs of incisor teeth in each jaw. Whatever may have been
the case with the swine, it is evident that the hippopotami were
never able to exist sufficiently far north to cross by way of Bering
Strait into the New World. In the pigs (Suidez) which among
other features differ from the Hippopotamidce by the nostrils being
perforated in a fleshy disc at the extremity of the muzzle, and like-
wise by the structure of the teeth the typical group of the genus
Sus ranges over most of the Eastern Holarctic and the whole
of the Oriental region, being replaced in the Ethiopian and
V.] UNGULATES. 185
Malagasy regions by the potamochcerine group, frequently reckoned
as a distinct genus. The Ethiopian region is, however, the sole
habitat of the wart-hogs (Phacochoerus}.
Among extinct artiodactyles we have two well-marked families,
distinguished from the foregoing by the crescentic columns of
their short-crowned cheek teeth the Anoplotheriidce and Dicho-
dontidce likewise confined to Eastern Arctogaea, although their
remains have hitherto been obtained only from the eastern section
of the Holarctic region. The first of these includes several genera
from Oligocene strata, characterised by having three columns on
the front half, and two on the hinder half of their upper molars.
In the typical Anoplotherium there were forty-four teeth, arranged
FlG. 44. LAST FIVE RIGHT UPPER CHEEK-TEETH OF AN Anoplotherium.
in a continuous even series, and the feet were provided with either
three or two toes. Dacrytherium differs by the molars being more
like those of Ancodus, and also by the deep cavity for the
reception of a gland on each side of the face in front of the eye ;
while the small and elegantly formed animals described as Xiph-
odon have the crowns of the first three premolar teeth elongated
and trenchant, the feet being two-toed. In the Dichodontida, of
which there are likewise several genera, the cheek-teeth are more
completely selenodont, with only four columns on the crowns of
the upper molars ; and it is not improbable that in this family we
have the ancestral types of both the chevrotains and the deer.
In the Camelidce, as we have already seen, the typical genus
Camelus, which is found living (although not in a wild state) in the
Eastern Holarctic, Oriental, and Ethiopian regions, and fossil in
the Plistocene of Algeria and the Pliocene of India, is likewise
confined to Eastern Arctogsea. And the same is true, both in the
1 86 EASTERN ARCTOG^A. [CHAP.
recent and fossil state, with the genera Tragulus and Dorcatherium,
which at the present day alone represent the Tragnlida.
The family of giraffes (Giraffidce), of which the Ethiopian
Giraffa cameiopardalis is the sole existing survivor, was formerly
extensively distributed over the area under consideration, to which
it appears to have been always restricted, albeit represented by
a considerable number of generic types. True giraffes (Giraffd)
ranged during the Pliocene epoch over Greece, Persia, India,
and China, and allied types are to be found in Visnutherium
of the Pliocene of India and Burma, and Helladotherium from
the corresponding formation of Greece. Still more gigantic than
the latter were the huge Hydaspitherium, Bramatherium, and
Sivatherium, of the Indian Pliocene, in all of which the simple
horns of the giraffes were replaced by large antler-like appendages,
differing considerably in their arrangement in the different genera.
Other members of the family are Samotherium, of the Pliocene of
the Isle of Samos, and Palceotragus from the equivalent deposits
of Attica, in both of which the females appear to have been horn-
less, although the males had a pair of simple, compressed, and
nearly upright horn-cores. The former is represented by a species
rivalling the giraffe in the size of its skull, but the latter was a
much smaller animal. This group likewise extended to Northern
Africa, where a large species from the Algerian Pliocene has been
described under the name of Libytherium.
Although the extensive family of the Bovidce, including the
oxen, sheep, goats, antelopes, etc., is now represented in the
northern part of the western Holarctic region by the American
bison (Bos americanus\ the bighorn (Ovis canadensis], the musk-
ox (Ovibos moschatus], and the so-called Rocky Mountain goat
(Haploceros montanus), together with a few extinct forms from the
superficial deposits, while the anoa (Bos depressicornis) is peculiar
to Celebes, the greater number of its representatives belong to
Eastern Arctogsea. The whole of the numerous genera of ante-
lopes, together with the true goats, as well as the great majority of
the sheep, are, for instance, restricted to this area. Moreover,
whereas the musk-ox is now solely North American, it was common
in Europe during the Plistocene ; while the bighorn is closely
allied to the Kamschatkan wild sheep (O. nivicola), and the
V.] EFFODIENTIA. l8/
American bison not far removed from its Caucasian cousin (Bos
bison], so that all these forms are probably descended from
ancestors inhabiting Eastern Arctogaea.
In the perissodactyle section of the ungulates, if we take fossil
forms into account, there are no families peculiar to this area; but
among extinct forms we have the large Oligocene genus Palceo-
therium 1 , and the Eocene Lophiodon absolutely restricted to it.
Although occurring only in Syria and the Ethiopian region, and
at present unknown in a fossil state, the peculiar subordinal group
of ungulates represented solely by the hyraces (Procaviidce) per-
haps deserves mention among the types characteristic of Eastern
Arctogaea. A nearly similar observation applies to the extinct
proboscidean family Dinotheriidce, in which the single known
genus (Dinotherium) ranges from the Miocene and Pliocene of
Europe to the Pliocene of Northern India.
Of the edentates, with the exception of certain very doubtful
forms from the French phosphorites, which may prove to be
reptilian, we have no evidence of the existence of any representa-
tives in the Old World. There are, however, in Eastern Arcto-
g?ea two very peculiar families commonly assigned to the same
order as the latter, although it seems preferable to regard them as
indicating an ordinal group (Effodientia) by themselves. Of these
the pangolins (Manidce), which are distinguished from all other
mammals by their covering of overlapping horny scales, are now
confined to the Oriental and Ethiopian regions, to which the one
living genus Manis is common ; but they appear to have been
represented in the Oligocene phosphorites of France by smaller
extinct forms, to which the names Necromanis and Leptomanis*
have been given. The second family, Orycteropodidce, of which
the only living members are the Ethiopian aard-varks (Orycteropus),
differ very widely from the last, the body being nearly naked, and
the molar teeth characterised by a peculiarly complex structure
which is unique in the whole mammalian class. A fossil species
of the existing genus has been discovered in the lower Pliocene of
Samos and Maraga, in Persia ; while the extinct genus Pal&orycte-
1 Teeth figured on p. 166.
2 The so-called Palceomanis, from the Pliocene of Samos, turns out to have
been founded on remains of an ungulate.
1 88 EASTERN ARCTOG^EA. [CHAP.
ropus, from the French phosphorites, is believed to have belonged
to the same family, so that both groups appear formerly to have
been widely distributed.
Summarising the results of the foregoing survey, we may put
in a tabular form the leading features of the mammalian fauna of
Eastern as distinct from that of Western Arctogsea. In the sub-
joined table the letters E., M., O., H. respectively indicate the
Ethiopian, Malagasy, Oriental, and Eastern Holarctic regions ;
and when a family is represented in any of such regions only in a
fossil state, a f is added to the denoting letter. The names of such
families or groups as are practically peculiar to the area 'under
consideration are printed in italic type ; while extinct groups have
an * prefixed.
PRIMATES.
Simiidce. O. E. H.f
Cercopithecidcz. O. E. H. ; also extending into the Austro-
Malayan region.
Lemuridtz. O. E. M.
* Microchoeridce. H.
* Adapida. H.
CHIROPTERA.
Pteropodidse. O. E. ; also common to Notogaea.
INSECTIVORA.
Erinaceidce. O. E. H.
CARNIVORA.
Viverridce. O. E. H. M.; two species extending their
range into the Austro- Malayan region.
Hycenidcz. O. E. H.f
RODENTIA.
Muridae ; the sub-family Gerbillince, O. E. H., is restricted
to Eastern Arctogaea, while the Murinae are exclu-
sively confined to the Old World, but range into
Notogaea.
Myoxidce. H. E.
Spalacida. H. O. E.
V.] SUMMARY OF THE FAUNA. 189
Hystricidae ; in this family the Hystricina are practically
restricted to Eastern Arctogaea, although a Javan
species is found in Timor.
UNGULATA.
Hippopotamidce. E. O.f H.f M.f
Suidce. H. O. E. M., also extending into the Austro-
Malayan region.
* Anoplotheriida. H.
* Dichodontidce. H.
Camelidae ; in this group the genus Camelus, H. E. O., is
peculiar to Eastern Arctogaea.
Tragulidae ; the existing genera Tragulus, O., and Dorca-
therium, E. H.t, as well as several extinct ones,
are restricted to this area.
Giraffida. E. O.f H.f
Bovidae; the whole of the true antelopes and goats, as
well as most of the sheep and oxen, are restricted to
Eastern Arctogaea, North America now preserving
only one species of Bos, Ovis, Ovibos, and Haplo-
ceros.
* Palaeotheriidae ; Palceotherium.
* Lophiodontidae ; Lophiodon.
Procaviida. E. H.
* Dinotheriida. H. O.
EFFODIENTIA.
Manida. E. O. H.f
Orycteropodida. E. H.f
To these may be added the absence of living opossums (Didel-
phyida}. It will be observed that in this list such existing families
as are confined to one of the regions of the area considered are
for the most part omitted. Tertiary families which are at present
unknown beyond the Eastern Holarctic region have, however, been
included, since the limitation is probably in great part due to our
want of knowledge of the early Tertiary faunas of the other
regions.
Although the differences indicated between the faunas of
190 EASTERN ARCTOG^A. [CHAP.
Eastern and Western Arctogaea, which will be still more apparent
after the consideration of the mammals of North America, seem at
first sight to indicate that these two areas should form distinct
divisions of the realm, yet the community of the fauna of the
northern portion of the two hemispheres forbids this view. This
question may, however, be more fully discussed in the chapter
devoted to the Holarctic region.
Before entering upon the consideration of the different zoolo-
gical regions into which the realm is divided, it is
Mlmma r Han essential to take a brief survey of the Tertiary mam-
Faunas of malian faunas of Eastern Arctogaea. By this alone
Eastern .
Arctogeea. it is possible to understand the true relations of the
existing faunas to one another ; while such a survey
also serves to demonstrate that the regions in question are but
features of the present epoch of the earth's history ; and that even
as late as the Pliocene portion of the Tertiary epoch the dis-
tinctions now obtaining between the Holarctic, Oriental, and
Ethiopian regions had no existence. In our survey we may omit
the Eocene period, and commence with the lower Oligocene ; and
it will simplify matters to give lists of some of the more important
and better known generic types characterising the faunas of the
different horizons. The leading affinities of many of the genera
mentioned have been already alluded to in the present or preced-
ing chapters ; but it would vastly exceed the limits of our space
to attempt to point out the distinctive features of the others.
Accordingly, the reader must either take them on trust, and treat
them practically as abstract terms, or he must refer to some
palaeontological treatise in order to find the real nature of the
animals indicated by such generic names.
Although it is essential to our purpose to notice the Oligocene
faunas of Eastern Arctogaea, it is important to
FauIS* 06116 observe that our knowledge of these is practically
limited to Western Europe. We are consequently
quite unable to say how far the geographical range of such
faunas extended, although it is probable that this embraced a
large portion of the Eastern Holarctic region. Whether, however,
at this epoch Ethiopian Africa had received a large mammalian
fauna must be left for future discoveries to determine.
V.] OLIGOCENE FAUNA. Ipl
Under the term of lower Oligocene (the upper Eocene of
many writers) are included a large series of strata, such as the
freshwater beds of Bembridge and Hordwell in the south of
England, the gypsum of Montmartre near Paris, and the corre-
sponding black lignite beds of De'bruge in Vaucluse 1 . A consider-
able part of the fauna of the Quercy phosphorites of Central France
likewise comes under the same category, only we have here a
mixture of Middle and Upper Oligocene forms. And in the case
of the siderolites, or bone-earths of Switzerland, this admixture is
carried to a still greater degree, undoubted Eocene types occurring
with those properly characteristic of the Oligocene. In the
following list such genera as are found only in the phosphorites
have the letter P. after them; while after those peculiar to the
siderolites the letter S. is added; both letters being given when
the genera are common to the two formations. As already said,
only some of the better-known forms are selected.
Among the lemuroid Primates, we have the genera Adapts
and Microch&rus, both of which occur in the English beds as well
as in the phosphorites ; these being the last European representa-
tives of the group. The Insectivora include Necrogymnurus (P.S.),
allied to the Malayan Gymnura, Amphidozotherium, together with
the existing genera Sorex and Talpa. More remarkable is the
occurrence in the phosphorites of an insectivore described as
Pseudorhynchocyon, which is believed to be a member of the family
of jumping shrews (Macroscelidida), now confined to the Ethiopian
region.
The true Carnivora are represented by Eusmilus (P.), a
highly specialised ally of the sabre-toothed tigers, as well as by
the more cat-like sElurictis, and the generalised Pseudcelurus.
In addition to species of true civets, referred to the living genus
Viverra, the Viverrida include Amphictis (P.), Stenoplesictis (P.),
and Palaoprionodon (P.); the two latter being generalised forms
closely connecting the family with the Mustelidce, which is
represented by Plesictis (P.). To the Canida may be assigned
the genera Cynodon (P.S.), Cephalogale (P.), and Cynodictis,
together with a species which may be included in Amphicyon
1 See table on p. 117.
192 EASTERN ARCTOG^A. [CHAP.
(P.); while the creodont division of the order is represented by
Hyanodon, Pterodon, Oxycena (P.), and Proviverra. Among the
rodents we may note the squirrel-like Sciuroides (P.S.) and Pseudo-
sciurus (S.), the existing genus Sa'urus, and the extinct Plesiarctomys
and Plesiospermophilus, which likewise belong to the same family.
Among the Muridce, Cricetus includes ancestral types of the
hamsters ; while the dormice are represented by the existing genus
Myoxus., As noticed previously, Theridomys, Nesocerodon, and
Protechinomys seem to be ancestral forms allied to some of the
existing South American rodents.
The ungulates are very strongly represented; the pig-like
group including Cebochoerus, Cheer opotamus and Elotherium (P.)
among the Chcsropotamida^ Acotherulum, and Anthracotherium (P.)
and Ancodus in the Anthracotheriidce. The anoplotheroids com-
prise Anoplotherium, D aery t her ium, and Xiphodon ; Dichobunus
and Ccenotherium (P.) are the characteristic forms among the
Ccenotheriidce; and Dichodon, Gelocus, and Lophiomeryx among the
DichodontidcR\ while the chevrotains are represented by Prodremo-
therium (P.) and Bachitherium (P.). In the perissodactyle section
of the same order, we have Pachynolophus (P.) to represent the
Lophiodontidce, Palceotherium and Anchilophus in the Palceo-
theriida, Protapirus (P.) as an ancestral form of the tapirs, and
Rhinoceros (P.), Cadurcotherium (P.), and Hyrachyus (P.) as
representatives of the rhinoceroses. The aberrant Chalicotherium
has also one species from the phosphorites. The Effodientia in-
clude Leptomanis (P.), Necromanis (P.), and Palceorycteropus (P.);
while the existing genus Didelphys alone represents the mar-
supials.
It will be seen that in this fauna the existing generic types are
very few, and if the whole of the extinct ones had been given, their
relative proportion would have been still less. The ungulates were
abundant, and among these the perissodactyles proportionately
more numerous than at the present day ; while the anoplotheres
are in some respect transitional between the latter and the typi-
cal artiodactyles. All the ungulates had brachydont teeth, and
annectant types between the modern pigs and ruminants were
abundant ; the traguloids being the highest development among
the artiodactyle section of the order. Creodont carnivores still
V.] OLIGOCENE FAUNA. 193
persisted, although more modern types had already made their
appearance on the scene ; and opossums flourished.
The middle stage of the Oligocene is represented in Europe
by the freshwater marls and clays of Hempsted in the Isle of
Wight and the corresponding beds of Ronzon, near Puy-en-Velay,
the lignitiferous strata of Cadibona in Liguria, the deposits of
Fontainebleau and Ferte-Alais in France, and likewise by certain
beds in Hungary and at Monte Promina in Dalmatia. Among
the small fauna of this stage we may notice the following. In the
Insectivora, Tetracus, an ally of the hedgehogs; Cynodon, Amphi-
cynodon, Plesictis, and Hycznodon among the carnivores; Anthra-
cotherium, Ancodus, Elotherium, Ccenotherium, Gelocus, and Rhino-
ceros in the ungulates; and opossums (Didelphys). While this
fauna is closely related to the preceding, it has lost a number of
early ungulate types, such as Anoplotherium and Xiphodon among
the artiodactyles, and Pal&otherium and Anchilophus in the
perissodactyles. On the other hand, the pig-like forms, such as
Ancodus, Anthracotherium, and Elotherium, attained an extra-
ordinary degree of development. Among the creodont carnivores,
we may note the final disappearance of the genera Pterodon and
Proviverra, although Hycenodon still survived.
The upper Oligocene (lower Miocene) fauna is a large and
characteristic one, well represented in the freshwater beds of
St Gerand le Puy, in the Allier, as well as in those of Weisenau
and other localities in the neighbourhood of Mayence. Among
the mammals may be mentioned the following ; existing genera
being denoted by the prefix of a f.
INSECTIVORA. fTalpa. fSorex.
Geotrypus. Dimylus.
t Myogale. Palseoerinaceus.
Plesiosorex. t Erinaceus.
CARNIVORA. Cephalogale. fViverra.
Amphicyon. t Herpestes.
Plesictis. Proaelurus.
Potamotherium. Hyaenodon.
Amphictis.
L. 13
194 EASTERN ARCTOGyEA. [CHAP.
RODENTIA. Theridomys. fSpermophilus.
Archaeomys. f Sciurus.
Issiodoromys. Chalicomys.
t Myoxus. Titanomys.
t Cricetus.
UNGULATA. Anthracotherium. Csenotherium.
Hyotherium. f Tapirus.
Amphitragulus. t Rhinoceros.
Dremotherium.
MARSUPIALIA. f Didelphys.
Of this fauna, Professor von Zittel writes that it seems at first
sight closely akin to those of the middle and lower Oligocene ; the
same ordinal and subordinal groups, and in many instances the
same genera characterising the whole three horizons. In the lack
of lemuroids, the reduced number or final disappearance of
opossums, creodonts, and anoplotherioids, in the greater abundance
of forms like Anthracotherium, Hyotherium, and Dremotherium,
which were but poorly represented in the lower Oligocene, and in
the number of new types, such as Tapirus, Amphitragulus (an
ancestral chevrotain), Chalicomys (an early beaver), Titanomys (an
ally of the picas), Erinaceus, Dimylus (a form connecting the
shrews with the hedgehogs), Potamotherium (a generalised otter),
Herpestes (mungooses), Procelurus (a primitive type of cat), we
notice, however, the marked difference of this fauna from its fore-
runners. Among the incoming genera it is noteworthy that there
is none for which an ancestral type cannot be found in the lower
Oligocene ; the main difference occurring in the more specialised
characters of the members of the later fauna. With the exception
of certain bats, insectivores, rodents, and the opossums (such as
Vespertilio, Erinaceus, Sorex, Myogale, Talpa, Sciurus, Spermo-
philus, Cricetus, Myoxus, and Didelphys], the majority of the
genera are, however, still extinct.
It is probable that the beds in the Balkans which have yielded
remains of the North American Tertiary genus Titanotherium
belong to some portion of the Oligocene epoch.
We now come to the Miocene epoch, which, as at present re-
stricted, forms in Europe but a small section of the Tertiary era.
V.] MIOCENE FAUNA. 195
It includes the well-known freshwater strata of Sansan in Gers (the
middle Miocene of the older geological classifica-
tions), together with the corresponding beds of F ^n a cene
Steinheim in Styria, and likewise the somewhat
newer (upper Miocene) deposits of CEningen, in Baden. Grive-St-
Alban, in the valley of the Rhone, is likewise another well-known
locality where mammaliferous strata of this age are developed;
and, among other places, we may also mention Monte Bamboli
in Italy, San Isidro in Spain, and Oran in Algeria.
For the first time in Europe we meet with remains of true
Primates, of which there are three genera belonging to the Simiidce,
two of which, Dryopithecus and Oreopithecus *, are extinct, but the
third seems scarcely separable from the existing Oriental Hylobates.
In the Insectivora we meet with the existing European genera
Talpa, Myogale (desmans), Erinaceus, Soreoc, and Crocidura ; while
the extinct Lanth another turn seems to be allied to the tree-shrews
( Tupaid] of the Oriental region, and Galerix intermediate between
the latter and the j Limping-shrews (Macroscelidtdce) of Ethiopian
Africa. Among the Carnivora, where the creodonts have disap-
peared, the cats are represented by the sabre-toothed tigers
(Machcerodus] and Pseudcelurus. In addition to the existing
genera Viverra and Herpestes, we have among the civet tribe the
extinct Progemtta. The dogs include the existing Cam's, together
with the extinct Hemicyon and Pseudocyon ; while the larger forms
described as Dinocyon and Hycznarctus connect the former with
the bears. The Mustelidce. are represented by species of the
typical living genus Mustela, together with certain more or less
closely allied extinct types ; and Enhydriodon filled the place
of the modern otters.
From among the rodents the generalised types allied to those
now characteristic of Neogsea have all disappeared, nearly all the
recorded forms apparently pertaining to existing genera. In the
Sciuridce not only have we true squirrels (Sdurus\ but the Ethio-
pian spiny squirrels (Xerus) are likewise represented, as are also
the more widely distributed flying-squirrels of the genus Stiuro-
pterus, which now inhabit both Eastern and Western Arctogaea
1 Some of the characters of these genera have been already mentioned on
pages 1 80, 18 r.
132
196 EASTERN ARCTOG^A. [CHAP.
Chalicomys, Cricetus, and Myoxus are survivors from the Oligocene;
but porcupines (Hystrix] are new comers. Picas of the existing
genus Lagomys are likewise to the fore ; and it is a question
whether those distinguished by the name of Myolagus might not
be included under the same title.
A marked approximation to the modern type is likewise the
characteristic feature of the ungulates of the European Miocene ;
although in this group living genera still remain in the minority.
The pigs (Sutda) include, for instance, the genus Hyotherium, in
which the molar teeth are tuberculated and of the general type of
those of some of the living members of the family ; and also the
more aberrant Listriodon, characterised by the presence of a pair
of transverse ridges on each of the teeth of the same series. A
species of the existing West African genus Dorcatherium alone
represents the chevrotains (Tragulidte) ; while we have forerunners
of the deer (Cervidce) in the extinct Pal&omeryx and Dicroceros,
both characterised by the simple structure of their antlers ; and
Protragoceros a generalised type of antelope marks the first
appearance of the hollow-horned ruminants (Bovida], which now
form such a numerous and characteristic group in the fauna of
Eastern Arctogaea. Perissodactyle ungulates are less numerous.
Anchitheriiim, to some of whose distinctive characters allusion has
been made above, constitutes the representative of the equine line
at this stage ; and tapirs and rhinoceroses belonging to the
existing genera were likewise common. Some of the latter were,
however, still hornless, and in none was more than a single horn
developed. The aberrant ChalicotheriidcB^ forming the last family
of this section of the order, and characterised by the extraordinary
resemblance presented by their claws and toes to those of eden-
tates, are here represented by the gigantic Macrotherium. Finally
the Miocene is notable as being the stage at which proboscideans
first made their appearance on the scene in Europe. In this group
we have species of Mastodon, which, as already explained, includes
the ancestors of the modern elephants ; and likewise one of the
more aberrant Dinotherium.
Compared with the Oligocene, the loss of so many antiquated
types, coupled with the appearance of proboscideans and man-like
apes, and the general modern facies of all the mammals of the:
V.] LOWER PLIOCENE FAUNAS. 197
Miocene, indicates the lapse of a considerable interval of time
between the deposition of the two series of strata. And that this
is really the case, is demonstrated by the fact that there occurs
between the two a considerable thickness of marine deposits which
have not hitherto yielded remains of land mammals. It may be
noticed that while many of the insectivores and rodents from this
horizon belong to genera now inhabiting the Eastern Holarctic
region, among other forms we have marked instances of Oriental
(Lanihanotherium. Hylobates] or Ethiopian ( Galerix, Dorcatherium,
and Xerus) affinities in this assemblage; and it is thus evident that
at the epoch in question there was no trace of the differentiation
of Eastern Arctogaea into regions.
Still more markedly are the same features displayed by the
older Pliocene fauna of Europe and Southern Asia.
This fauna, which was formerly regarded as of upper cen^Faun'a
Miocene age until shewn by Dr Blanford to be
unquestionably referable to the succeeding era of geological his-
tory, had a very wide distribution ; and it is represented at certain
localities, mostly at long distances from one another, by an extra-
ordinary profusion of remains. One of these charnel-holes occurs
at the village of Pikermi, near Athens, a second in the Isle of
Samos, in the Turkish Archipelago, and a third at Mont Leberon,
in Provence. This fauna is also met with locally in the valley of the
Rhone, at the foot of the Pyrenees, in Spain, Asia Minor, and at
Maraga in Persia. It is likewise represented in the regions lying
to the north of the Alps, only here the number of forms is less,
and the antelopes and giraffe-like ruminants, fitted for roaming
over the open plains of the south, are conspicuous for their
absence; their place being taken by forest-haunting deer. The
sand-beds of Eppelsheim in Hessen-Darmstadt, together with
strata in the neighbourhood of Vienna, and others in Hungary
and Rumania, may be cited as localities where the northern
section of this fauna is preserved.
Taking first the European and Western Asiatic portion of this
fauna, and leaving its Oriental members for subse-
quent consideration, we find the Primates represented
solely by an extinct genus of monkey, taking its
name of Mesopithecus on account of presenting certain features
198 EASTERN ARCTOG^A. [CHAP.
intermediate between the existing Semnopithecus and Macacus.
The insectivores are likewise known only by a solitary form, a
shrew (Sorex) ; but this is probably due to the nature of the strata
being unfitted for the preservation of the remains of such small
creatures. The Carnivora, on the other hand, were abundant, the
Felidce being represented not only by the sabre-tooths (Machter-
odus), but true cats (Felis) likewise making their appearance on
the scene. Hyaenas display a great variety of development, there
being one species of the typical genus Ifycena, with certain
resemblances to the existing Cape form, while the more generalised
types known as Lycyana and Hycenictis were likewise present, as
were also species of Ictitherium^ and the allied Palhyana, which,
as already mentioned, formed a connecting link between the
hyaenas and the civets. True dogs seem to have been absent from
this assemblage ; but Amphicyon still survived from the Miocene,
and an aberrant form known as Simocyon made its appearance.
Hycznarctus was likewise another survivor from the Miocene, and
may be regarded as a forerunner of the true bears. Finally, in the
weasel tribe (MustelidcB) we have representatives of the existing
genus Mustela, as well as the extinct Pal&omephitis and Promeles,
the latter being an ancestral type of the badgers.
Rodents make but a poor show, as we have only the extinct
beaver-like Chalicomys, a species of porcupine (ffystrix), and a
representative of the curious little spiny mice (Acomys\ now
characteristic of Syria, Palestine, and north-eastern Africa.
A remarkable advance over their Miocene forerunners is
displayed by the ungulates, especially those from Pikermi and
Maraga. Here, in the artiodactyle section, we meet for the first
time with true pigs of the genus Sus, which at this period ranged
over the greater portion of Europe, and some of which attained
very large dimensions. Water-chevrotains (Dorcatherium) serve
to connect the Miocene representatives of their genus with the
existing West African form; while muntjacs (Cervulus), now
confined to the Oriental region, filled the place of the stags.
Giraffe-like creatures were numerous, for not only have we true
giraffes belonging to the existing Ethiopian genus Giraffa, but the
gigantic hornless Helladotherium stalked over the plains of Greece,
and the allied but horned Samotherium inhabited the area now
LOWER PLIOCENE FAUNAS.
199
occupied by the Turkish Archipelago, and extended eastwards as far
as Persia; Palceotragus being a smaller but allied form. The Bovidce
are represented by antelopes, most of which present a marked
Ethiopian facies, although Tragoceros (probably the direct descen-
dant of the Miocene Protragoceros} is an aberrant form, with
compressed horn-cores like those of the goats. And it may be
remarked that most of the Pikermi antelopes have short-crowned
molar teeth, in which respect they resemble the existing eland,
kudu, and their allies. Of the Pliocene. forms, Palczorias, which is
common to Southern Europe and Algeria, seems to be inter-
FlG. 45. SKULL OF Palczorias.
mediate between the kudus (Strepsiceros) and elands (Orias}\
while the so-called Protragelaphus is so closely allied to the
existing Ethiopian harnessed antelopes (Tragelaphus) as to be
included by some in the same genus. On the other hand,
Palaoryx is nearly related to the gemsbok and its allies (Oryx),
although with certain resemblances to the sable antelope group
(Hippotragus). Gazelles (Gazella}, which are essentially inhabi-
2OO EASTERN ARCTOG^A. [CHAP.
tants of open plains, were likewise abundant ; one being considered
a near relative of the South African springbok. The genus
Helicophora, on the other hand, closely resembles the water-buck
group (Cobus), which is exclusively Ethiopian. In the perisso-
dactyle division, the three-toed horses (Hipparion) seem to have
approximated in general structure to the Ethiopian zebras, and,
like those animals, may have been ornamented with dark and light
stripes. While some of the Pliocene rhinoceroses were hornless,
another was a two-horned species closely allied to the common
African Rhinoceros bicornis, of which it may be regarded as the
parent form. There is also an extinct genus (Leptodon), of some-
what uncertain affinity ; while tapirs are found in the Eppelsheim
beds, although not apparently in the southern area. The Chalico-
theriidft were represented by the typical genus Chalicotherium
(Ancylotheriuni), which, as we have seen, was a near ally of the
Miocene Ma cr other him, and also occurs in the Oligocene phos-
phorites. As in the Miocene, the proboscideans include only
Mastodon and Dinotherium; the one species of the former ranging
from Greece to Persia, but being different from all the Indian forms
of the same epoch. Finally, the occurrence of an aard-vark
(Orycteropus] both in Samos and Persia serves to accentuate the
Ethiopian affinities of the southern section of this fauna.
We have thus evidence that one and the same fauna extended
from Spain and Algeria across Southern Europe to Asia Minor
and Persia; and we may infer from the deposits at Samos, that
what is now the y-Egean sea formed a tract of land connecting
Greece with Turkey. It is further evident that there must have
been free communication across the Mediterranean basin (which
in Cretaceous times is known to have been a mare clausnm, in the
physical, and not the political sense of the term) between Europe
and Africa. This communication may have existed both by way
of Gibraltar, and also between Italy, Sicily, and Malta on the
one hand, and Tunis on the other; since the Plistocene mammals
of the islands in question clearly indicate continental connection.
While the antelopes and hipparions of this fauna prove the exist-
ence of open plains during the lower Pliocene epoch, the host of
individuals of Mesopithecus as unmistakeably point to the presence
of extensive forest-tracts. In the northern section of the fauna, as
V.] SIWALIK FAUNA. 2OI
displayed at Eppelsheim, the Ethiopian affinities are much less
apparent, aard-varks and the whole of the giraffe-group being
absent, while tapirs and deer were abundant. That there was a
more or less marked separation between the two areas thus seems
evident; and the tapirs and muntjac-like deer, both of which
seem wanting in the Siwalik fauna, are indicative, so far as they
go, of Malayan affinities.
Nearly related to that of Pikermi, Samos, and Persia, the
celebrated Siwalik fauna of India and the adjacent
countries presents certain well-marked differences; F a^ hk
this being specially shown by the occurrence of several
essentially modern types quite unknown in the former. More-
over, there are a considerable number of peculiar genera which do
not occur in the western fauna; while we also come across certain
Miocene, and even Oligocene types, which are equally strange to
the latter. Although in some cases these occur in beds which are
not improbably of upper Miocene age, in others they appear
mingled with the later forms ; but, in any case, they indicate a
survival in this area of archaic types which at that time had com-
pletely disappeared from Europe.
Originally discovered in the outer ranges of the typical Hima-
layan area, the Siwalik fauna has been traced towards the
north-west into the Punjab, Kach, Sind, and the north-eastern
frontier of Baluchistan ; the beds from the two latter areas being
lower in the series than those from the typical Siwalik hills, and
containing an older assemblage of forms, although several are
common to all. An outlier of the same fauna occurs in Perim
Island in the gulf of Cambay. Eastwards the Siwalik fauna
ranged through Sylhet and Assam to Burma, whence it has been
traced at intervals, as in Java, Sumatra, and the Philippines, into
China and Japan. In China it extended from Yunnan in the
south-west northwards through Szechuen to Kansu, and thence
eastwards through Shensi to Shansi, its extreme eastern limit being
indicated by the discovery of a Siwalik elephant's tooth at
Shanghai. Northward of Kansu the fauna ranged into Mongolia,
probably by way of the gap formed by the course of the Hwang-ho
through the Ala-shan mountains if such mountains existed at the
time. And it is not a little remarkable that of the few Mongolian
202 EASTERN ARCTOG^A. [CHAP.
forms at present known, two (Hycena macrostoma and Equus
sivalensis) are identical with species from the Siwalik Hills 1 .
As regards the fauna itself, we find, in the first place, the
Primates much more fully represented than at Pikermi, and all by
existing generic types. Of the man-like apes (Simiid&\ there is
a chimpanzee (Anthropopithecus) presenting a more human type
of dentition than its living Ethiopian cousins; while a single tusk
indicates the former existence of an orang (Simla) allied to the living
Bornean and Sumatran species. The other three generic types
belong to the Cercopithecida, and include baboons of the Ethiopian
genus Papio ( Cynocephalus), together with species of Semnopithecus
and Macacus, the former genus being exclusively, and the latter
mainly, Oriental at the present day, although both occur in the
later Pliocene of Europe. Doubtless owing to the unsuitability
of the strata for the preservation of small specimens, no remains
of insectivores have hitherto been obtained. The Carnivora are,
on the other hand, well represented; the Felicia including large
and small species of the typical genus Felis, and apparently one
of the allied Cynahirus (hunting-leopard), now exclusively Oriental
and Ethiopian. Mach&rodus had two species ; and another
form has been identified with the European Oligocene genus
SEhiridis. Civets include species of Viverra larger than any now
existing; this genus being also one now confined to the Ethiopian
and Oriental regions, although more abundant in the latter than in
the former. The CanidcE, in addition to a survivor of the Miocene
Amphicyon, were represented by wolves and jackals (Cam's), as
well as by a species apparently allied to the long-eared fox (Otocyon}
of Africa. While in the Ursidce the generalised Hycenarctus still
survived, true bears (Ursus) make their appearance for the first
time, the single known Siwalik species presenting, however, a
marked approximation in the characters of its skull and dentition
to the Indian sloth-bear (Melursus). Among the few known
representatives of the Mustelida, we have a large marten (Mustela),
probably allied to the living yellow-throated Indian species ; a
ratel, belonging to a genus (Mellivora) now restricted to India
and Africa; and likewise an otter (Lutra) whose nearest affinities
are with an existing Sumatran species. The same family also
1 Lydekker, Rec, Geol. Sw~v. India, Vol. xxiv. pp. 207 211 (1891).
V.] SIWALIK FAUNA. 203
includes a member of the otter-like genus Enhydriodon, the other
species being from the Italian Miocene. Among the most
remarkable features of the Siwalik Carnivora is the survival of
a species of Hycenodon, of which the remains have been discovered
in the Punjab.
The Rodentia are but very imperfectly known. They include
a representative of the bamboo-rats (Rhizomys), which are now
exclusively Oriental, and belong to the family Spalacida; and,
among the Muridce, a species of Nesocia, which genus is likewise
confined to the Oriental region. The other forms are a porcupine
(Hystrix] and a hare (Lepus).
A very long list is presented by the ungulates, which are
numerous not only in generic, but likewise in specific types. The
pig-like artiodactyles include, among the family Suidce. several
representatives of the true pigs (Sus), some of which attained
gigantic dimensions, while others are remarkable for the complex
structure of their molar teeth, which show a marked resemblance
to those of the existing Ethiopian wart-hogs (Phacochczrus). A
still more elaborate structure is displayed by the corresponding
teeth of the allied genus Hippohyus, which is peculiar to this
fauna ; and the family is also represented by species of the
European Miocene genera Hyotherium and Listriodon, the remains
of the two latter being mostly obtained from the Punjab and
districts to the west. The same areas are mainly those which
have yielded remains of Anthracotheriidcz, although some of these
have been discovered in Sylhet. In this family we have species of
the European genera Anthracotherium and Ancodus, the former of
FlG. 46. RIGHT UPPER MOLAR OF A SMALL SPECIES OF Merycopotamns.
which is elsewhere unknown above the Middle Oligocene; and
there are also three peculiar types, respectively known as Meryco-
potamus, Hemimeryx, and Chctromeryx, differing from all the rest
204 EASTERN ARCTOG^A. [CHAP.
in having only four columns on the crowns of the molars, as
shown in the annexed figure, and thus presenting a marked
approximation to the ruminants. The earlier Tertiary Chczropo-
tamidcz likewise had a survivor in the genus Tetraconodon, which
was represented by a large pig-like creature remarkable for the
enormous size of its simple conical premolar teeth. The pig-
like group closes with Hippopotamus, which makes its appearance
on the scene for the first time in this formation, where it is
represented by a generalised species with three pairs of incisor
teeth in each jaw. Turning to the groups with fully-developed
selenodont molars, we have first to notice the occurrence of fossil
camels of the existing genus Camelus, which are unknown else-
where except in the Algerian Plistocene. As we have seen that
the Camelidce. were originally a New World group, it is interesting
to note that these earliest Old World representatives occur in Asia
instead of Europe; and it is further noteworthy that in the
structure of their molar teeth the Siwalik camels retain evidences of
affinity with the South American guanacos and vicunas which are
lost in their living descendants. The Tragulidce contain repre-
sentatives of the true chevrotains ( Tragulus) and water-chevrotains
(Dorcatherium\ now respectively characteristic of the Oriental and
Ethiopian regions, while among the deer ( Cervidce) we have species
of the Oligocene European genus Palaomeryx, together with
others belonging to Cervus, the representatives of the latter being
all closely allied to existing Oriental types. Not improbably also
a musk-deer (Moschus) should be included among the Siwalik
Cervidce. Among the Giraffidce, in addition to true giraffes
(Giro/a), which are common to the Pikermi beds, and extended
eastwards into China, we have the peculiar gigantic antlered types re-
spectively known as Vishnutherium, Sivatherium, Hydaspotherium,
and Bramatherium, of which the first seems common to the Siwaliks
of Burma and the Punjab, while the second is confined to the
more easterly Himalaya, the third to the Punjab, and the fourth to
Perim Island. They include the most gigantic of all ruminants,
Sivatherium almost rivalling an elephant in bulk.
Not one of the least curious features in this marvellous fauna is
that while, as we have seen, deer of Oriental types were abundant,
antelopes closely allied to those now inhabiting the Ethiopian
v.]
SIWALIK FAUNA.
205
206 EASTERN ARCTOG^EA. [CHAP.
region where deer are totally absent were likewise extraordinarily
numerous. Of the African genera we have a species of Bubalis
intermediate between the hartebeests and the blesbok, a member
of the sable antelope group (Hippotragus\ a kudu (Strepsiceros), an
eland (Orias), and probably a representative of the water-buck
group (Cobus). On the other hand, Oriental forms are not
wanting, as proved by the occurrence of a nilgai (Boselaphus), and
probably of a four-horned antelope (Tetraceros] ; while the widely-
spread gazelles (Gazelld) were likewise present. Goats and oxen
for the first time made their appearance ; the former group being
represented not only by species belonging to the typical Capra,
but likewise to the shorter-horned genus Hemitragus, now confined
to India and Arabia. The oxen (Bos) included members of all the
existing groups, that is to say typical oxen, bison, buffalo, and
smaller forms with upright triangular horns nearly allied to the
anoa of Celebes.
The perissodactyle ungulates, so numerous in the earlier
Tertiary formations, have now become proportionately much fewer
as compared with the artiodactyles. While typical forms of
Hipparion were present, one species differs from the rest by the
loss of the lateral toes, and thus resembles the modern horses
(Equus\ which here make their appearance for the first time.
Rhinoceroses include not only hornless forms, but likewise one
species allied to the existing Oriental Rhinoceros unicornis and R.
sondaicus, and a third as closely related to the African Burchell's
rhinoceros (7?. simus]. In the same group Chalicotherium is a
survivor from older formations.
Finally, the proboscideans exhibit a development unparalleled
in any other formation or epoch. Dinotherium appears for the
last time in the Siwaliks of Perim Island, Kach, Sind, and the
Punjab ; while the mastodons include a large number of species,
some of which present such a close approximation to the so-called
stegodont elephants (which, as already mentioned 1 , are peculiar to
this fauna) as to render it impossible to draw any well-defined
demarcation between the genera Mastodon and Elephas. Not
only does the Siwalak fauna include the aforesaid stegodont, or
1 Stipra, p. 172.
V.] S1WALIK FAUNA. 2O;
transitional elephants, but likewise one which may well have been
the ancestor of the species now inhabiting India. Eastwards these
transitional elephants and mastodons have been traced into Java,
Borneo, China, and Japan ; and, as stated in an earlier chapter,
there can be no doubt that the modern elephants were evolved in
this area.
Although, as shown in the foregoing survey, the Siwalik fauna
differs in certain respects from that of Pikermi, Samos, Leberon,
etc., yet there can be no hesitation in regarding the whole lower
Pliocene fauna of Europe, North Africa, Asia Minor, and South
and East Asia as essentially one ; and consequently at this epoch
there was no possibility of distinguishing between the Palaearctic
and Oriental regions. Whence Ethiopian Africa had by this
time received the forerunners of its present higher mammalian
fauna, we have, unfortunately, no decisive evidence. Writing
some years ago, Dr Blanford 1 seems to suggest that the irruption
of the modem African fauna was anterior to the Pliocene. After
referring to certain peculiarities connected with the existing
mammalian fauna of India and the Malayan area, he observes that
" these cases of isolation probably indicate that the animals belong
to an older fauna, now partly replaced by newer types, and that
the older fauna was common to India and Africa. It is very
probable that these animals are descended from the ancient
tropical fauna of the early Tertiary times. But, so far as it is
possible to judge, the process of variation would have caused a
greater distinction between forms so widely separated and exposed
to such different conditions, if the period of isolation were great ;
and it is difficult to suppose that the lands inhabited by the
ancestors of the Simiidce, Lemuridce, Tragulida, and Manidce of
the Oriental and Ethiopian regions can have been separated prior
to the early part of the Miocene period."
This is perfectly true so far as it goes, but since, as we have
seen, genera like Hippopotamus, Bos, Capra, Equus, and Elephas
are unknown previous to the Siwalik epoch, and some of them
at least were evolved at or about that time in the Indian area, it
seems necessary to assume the existence of a free land communi-
1 Manual of Geology of India, ist ed. p. Ixviii. (1879).
208 EASTERN ARCTOG^A. [CHAP.
cation between the Ethiopian and Oriental regions at least as late
as the lower Pliocene epoch. With regard to where this connec-
tion was situated, we may note, in the first place, that Dr Wallace :
was of opinion that even the Pikermi fauna made its way into
Africa chiefly through Syria, although a brief connection of Europe
with Tunis is admitted. When the passage in question was
written, little or nothing was, however, known as to the Pliocene
fauna of Algeria. And although this undoubtedly indicates a
western connection between Europe and Africa, yet even in the
Pliocene the Sahara probably formed, as now, a barrier 2 across
which the fauna of northern Africa could not pass south. Accord-
ingly, even the Pikermi fauna may have come round byway of Egypt.
Be this as it may, it seems clear that the Siwalik fauna entered
Africa by way of Syria or Arabia, or possibly by both. The most
direct line of communication would be via the Gulfs of Oman and
Aden ; and some indication that such a line of connection may
have existed is afforded by the distribution of the goats of the
genus Hemitragus. As already stated, fossil species of this genus
occur in the Siwaliks of Perim Island and the Himalaya, while of
the three existing forms, one is Himalayan, a second confined to
the Nilgiri and certain other South Indian ranges, and the third
inhabits Oman. So far as it goes, the evidence of these goats is
strongly suggestive of the former existence of a land-bridge across
the mouth of the Persian Gulf, as otherwise we should expect to
find living species in Persia and other parts of western Asia. If
the existence of such a bridge be admitted, we only require another
across the narrow strait of Bab-el-Mandeb to give a free line of
communication between India and Africa in this direction.
Whether, however, the migration from India to Africa took
place at the north or south end of the Red Sea, or at both ends,
it is certain that the connecting land must have been of consider-
able width, and suited to the passage of mammals of all kinds.
In referring to the nature of the connection, Dr Wallace 3 remarks
that " we may now perhaps see the reason of the singular absence
1 Geographical D^strib^ttwn of Animals, Vol. I. p. 288.
2 The idea that there was a Tertiary sea in the Sahara is incorrect; see
Blanford, Quart, Journ. GeoL Soc. Vol. XLVI. p. 90 (1890).
3 Op. cii. p. 291.
V.] SIWALIK FAUNA. 209
from tropical Africa of deer and bears ; for these are both groups
which live in fertile or well-wooded countries, whereas the line of
immigration from Europe to Africa was probably always, as now,
to a great extent a dry and desert tract, suited to antelopes and
large felines, but almost impassable to deer and bears." The
Siwalik chimpanzee, however, indicates most unmistakably that
the communication by way of Arabia or Syria between the Ethio-
pian and Oriental regions must have embraced a forest-area, and
accordingly have been of considerable width.
With regard to the question why so many genera which existed
in India and southern Europe during the Pliocene should have
disappeared from those areas to live on in Africa, all we can say is
that it is quite evident that a southern migration of the fauna has
certainly taken place, and that this was probably induced by the
cold heralding the approach of the glacial period. Although we
have few, if any, decisive physical evidences of a cold period in
India, yet the existence of a goat (Hemitragus) nearly allied to a
Himalayan species in the ranges of southern India seems to indi-
cate that such must have occurred, as it would be quite impossible
for the ancestral form to have crossed the intervening plains under
present conditions of temperature. It is further noteworthy that
many of the animals which have disappeared from India, such
as chimpanzees, hippopotami, giraifes, water-chevrotains, and
ostriches, are precisely those which are now restricted to very hot
climates ; whereas the lion, tiger, rhinoceroses, elephants, and
monkeys, which both now or during the Plistocene are known
to be capable of existing in cold climates, have persisted.
Leaving these exceedingly difficult questions, two other points
may be noticed in connection with the Siwalik fauna. In the
first place, since the Siwalik hills themselves form ranges of con-
siderable height on its southern flank, it is evident that the
Himalaya was much lower during the lower Pliocene epoch than
it is at present ; Dr Blanford l stating that the movement which
led to its elevation "has been distributed over the Tertiary and
post-Tertiary period, and a great portion in post-Plistocene."
This will account for the community between the lower Pliocene
1 See Geol. Mag. Decade 3, Vol. ix. p. 166, note (1892).
L. 14
210 EASTERN ARCTOG^EA. [CHAP.
fauna of the Himalayan area and Mongolia, the Himalaya at that
epoch not forming, as now, an impassable barrier to the north of
the Oriental region. The second point relates to the survival in
the Siwalik fauna of archaic forms, which had disappeared at that
date from Europe. This fact, especially since old types such as
lemurs and gymnuras are even now met with in the Oriental
region, lends support to the view advanced in an earlier chapter 1
that marsupials may have lived on in south-eastern Asia long after
they had completely disappeared from Europe.
Our knowledge of the later Pliocene faunas of Eastern
Arctogaea is mainly confined to Europe, where at
cene Kaunas. " this period the general distribution of land and sea
was apparently very much the same as at the
present day. Spain was, however, connected with Africa, as was
probably also Italy by way of Sardinia and Malta. A portion of
Italy was, however, submerged, while in Belgium, Holland, and
the south-east of England the sea intruded upon what is now land ;
but, on the other hand, Britain was joined to the Continent.
Few mammaliferous deposits of this age have been preserved to
us, but among these are the Crags of the east coast of England
(which contain numerous fossils derived from earlier formations),
the fresh-water beds of the Val d' Arno in Italy, as well as others in
the Auvergne, in the Rhone valley, at Roussillon, and in the
neighbourhood of Montpellier. The following genera are in-
cluded in this fauna, those which are extinct having an asterisk
prefixed.
PRIMATES. Semnopithecus.
* Dolichopithecus.
Macacus.
INSECTIVORA. Sorex (Shrews).
CARNIVORA. *Machaerodus (Sabre-tooths).
Felis (Cats).
Viverra (Civets).
Hyaena.
Canis (Wolves and Foxes).
* Hyaenarctus.
1 Supra, p. 57.
v.]
LATER PLIOCENE FAUNAS.
211
CARNIVORA (cont.).
Ursus (Bears).
^Elurus (Cat-bears).
Mustek (Martens and Weasels).
Lutra (Otters).
RODENTIA. Arctomys (Marmots).
* Chalicomys.
Castor (Beaver).
*Trogontherium (Giant Beaver).
Cricetus (Hamsters).
Microtus (Voles).
Mus (Rats and Mice).
Hystrix (Porcupines).
*Pellegrinia,
*Myolagusj
Lagomys J
Lepus (Hares)
Sus (Pigs).
Hippopotamus.
Cervus (Deer).
Alces (Elk).
Cervulus (Muntjacs).
* Palaeoryx.
Gazella (Gazelles).
Bos (Oxen).
Tapirus (Tapirs).
Rhinoceros.
Equus (Horses).
*Hipparion very rare.
* Mastodon!
UNGULATA.
Elephas J
(Elephants).
In this list by far the greater number of the genera are living
ones, and if we removed from it types like Hyana, Hippopotamus,
Rhinoceros and Elephas, which were spread during the Pliocene
and Plistocene epochs over the greater part of Eastern Arctogaea,
its Ethiopian resemblances are by no means strongly marked.
Although the larger forms (as in the succeeding Plistocene epoch)
142
212 EASTERN ARCTOG^A. [CHAP. V.
include a considerable number of genera now mainly confined to
tropical or subtropical countries, the rodent fauna exhibits a
marked Palsearctic facies, thus indicating an approximation to the
existing state of things. Among the extinct rodents, Pellegrinia,
from the Sardinian Pliocene, belongs, however, to the Octodontida,
and is probably allied to the existing African Ctenodactylus. Tro-
gontherium is a gigantic extinct type of beaver, which also persisted
into the Plistocene. The deer include northern types unknown
in the lower Pliocene.
One of the most remarkable features of this fauna is the
occurrence of a large species of sElurus, a genus represented
elsewhere only by the cat-bear or panda (^E. fulgens) of the
eastern Himalaya, which, although formerly regarded as the type
of a family by itself, is now included in the American Procyonidce
(raccoons). The fossil species has been hitherto detected only in
the English Crag ; the genus may, however, be expected to occur
in the Siwaliks, since it is quite clear that it must have been
originally connected with the American representatives of the
family by forms inhabiting Eastern Asia.
With the end of the Pliocene epoch this brief survey of the
Tertiary mammalian faunas of Eastern Arctogaea may be brought
to a close, since the Plistocene mammals can be more con-
veniently considered under the headings of the different regions of
this great province. While throughout the Oligocene, Miocene,
and lower Pliocene epochs no trace of the present zoological
regions of this half of the Arctogseic realm is shown, when the
Upper Pliocene is reached there are faint indications of the
demarcation of the Eastern Holarctic. At the time of the Plisto-
cene, as will be shown in a later chapter, the Eastern Holarctic,
Oriental and Ethiopian regions appear to have assumed a still
more marked distinction, although this is to a great extent
obscured by the wide range even at that epoch of genera like
Hippopotamus, Rhinoceros, Elephas, Macacus, etc. Moreover,
several species which are now confined to one of the three regions
in question had then a more extensive distribution, so that it is
only during the recent epoch that the Holarctic, Oriental, and
Ethiopian regions attained the full faunistic peculiarities by which
they are now characterised.
CHAPTER VI.
THE MALAGASY REGION.
Limits Mammalian Fauna Relations of Madagascar to the Mainland.
INCLUDED by Drs Sclater and Wallace within the Ethiopian
region, Madagascar and the adjacent groups of
islands were referred to a region apart by Dr Blan-
ford 1 ; this separation being justified not only by the mammalian
fauna, but likewise by many other groups of animals. To quote
Dr Wallace, this region "comprises, besides Madagascar, the
islands of Mauritius, Bourbon, and Rodriguez, the Seychelles,
and Comoro Islands. Madagascar itself is an island of the
first class, being a thousand miles long, and about two
hundred and fifty miles in average width. It lies parallel to
the coast of Africa, near the southern tropic, and is separated
by 230 miles of sea from the nearest part of the continent,
although a bank of soundings projecting from its western
coast reduces this distance to about 160 miles. Madagascar is a
mountainous island, and the greater part of the interior consists of
open elevated plateaus ; but between these and the coast there
intervene broad belts of luxuriant tropical forests." It is this
forest-district which forms the home of most of its peculiar fauna.
As regards geological structure, it [appears from the researches of
Messrs Cortese and Baron that, roughly speaking, a line drawn
from north to south so as to divide the island into two longitudinal
halves, gives an area of granitic and volcanic rocks on the right or
eastern side, and on the left or western side one of sedimentary
deposits, containing beds belonging to the Jurassic, Cretaceous,
Eocene and recent epochs. Blown sand occurs in abundance
1 Appendix, No. 8, p. 76.
214 THE MALAGASY REGION. [CHAP.
around the coast, and numerous old lake-basins or marshes, some
of very large dimensions, form receptacles where remains of the
later faunas have been preserved. With the exception of the
Comoro group, which contain a few species, the non-volant mam-
malian fauna is confined to Madagascar, so that the other islands
do not properly come within the province of the present work.
It is, however, important to observe that the Seychelles differ from
almost all oceanic islands in consisting largely of granitic and
other crystalline rocks.
In an island lying so close to the African continent as Mada-
gascar, the natural assumption would be that, if it
fa^ia" 1 " possessed a mammalian fauna at all, such fauna
would be closely allied to that of the mainland. As
a matter of fact, precisely the reverse is the case, and out of a
total of fully 28 genera of non-volant mammals now or recently
inhabiting the island, only three are common to Africa. This,
however, is by no means all, for out of these three genera two
{Hippopotamus and Sus] are such as have probably crossed the
intervening channel, although at a time when it was narrower than
at present, while it is quite possible that the third (Crocidura) may
have been introduced by human agency. Even this, however,
scarcely gives a true idea of the case. In the first place, not only
are the peculiar genera unknown in Africa, but they are equally
strange to all the other regions of the world. In the second place,
these genera belong to groups which form only a very small por-
tion of the existing mammalian fauna of the Ethiopian region.
At the present day, as will be more fully indicated in the following
chapter, Ethiopian Africa is especially characterised by its nume-
rous antelopes, as well by giraffes, zebras, rhinoceroses, elephants,
hippopotami, wart-hogs, bush-pigs, lions, leopards and various
other large cats, baboons, anthropoid apes, aard-varks, and
ostriches. But, with the exception of the aforesaid bush-pig and
extinct hippopotamus, not a single representative of any one of
these groups is found in Madagascar. In place of such animals,
Madagascar is populated by a host of lemurs, so numerous that
the number of their species considerably exceeds that of all the
other non-volant mammalian inhabitants of the island. Civet-
and mungoose-like species, all pertaining to peculiar genera, alone
VI.] THE FAUNA. 21$
represent the numerous Garni vora of the mainland; the Insectivora,
in addition to the aforesaid Crocidura, or musk-shrew, include only
the peculiar family of the tenrecs (Centettdce), which is confined to the
island, and a representative of the Ethiopian family Potamogalida ;
while the rodents comprise five genera of the cosmopolitan
mouse-family (Muridce], more or less closely allied to one another,
but different from any found elsewhere.
The following is a list of the genera of non-volant Malagasy
mammals ; those which are extinct being indicated by an asterisk,
and the names of all the groups peculiar to the island printed in
italics.
PRIMATES. LEMUROIDEA.
LEMURID^E.
Chirogale (Mouse-lemurs) ; 4 species. jieiroAd.le<*s
Microcebus (Dwarf Lemurs) ; 5 species. *
Opolemur (Fat-tailed Lemurs) ; 2 species. ^
Lemur (True Lemurs) ; 8 species.
Mixocebus (Hattock) ; i species. ? ^
Hapalemur (Gentle Lemurs) ; 2 species. ' y ( \
Lepidokmur (Sportive Lemurs) ; 8 species. 7.' $c~*V\
Avahis (Avahi) ; i species. ?
Propithecus (Sifakas) ; 4 species.^ 7 -
/^m'(Endrina) ; i species.
* ME GAL AD A PID^E.
* Megaladapis (Giant Lemur); i species. K^l*<
CHIROMYID&. t\
$JfL
Chiromys (Aye-aye) ; i species.
INSECTIVORA.
SORICID.E.
Crocidura (Musk-shrews) ; i species.
CENTETID^E.
Centetes (Tenrec) ; i species.
Hemicentetes \ 2 species.
Ericulus (Hedgehog-tenrec) ; i species.
Echinops-j i species.
Microgale (Long- tailed tenrecs) ; 3 species.
Oryzorictes (Rice-tenrecs) : 2 species.
2l6 THE MALAGASY REGION. [CHAP.
INSECTIVORA (cent.).
POTAMOGALID^E.
Geogale; i species.
CARNIVORA.
VlVERRID^E.
CryptoproctincR.
Cryptoprocta -, i species.
Viverrinae.
Fossa ; i species.
Herpestinse.
Galidictis (Striped Mungooses) ; 2 species.
Galidia (Ring-tailed Mungoose) ; i species.
Hemigalidia (Brown-tailed Mungoose) ; i species.
Euplerince.
Eupleres (Small-toothed Mungoose) ; i species.
RODENTIA.
MURID/E.
Hypogeomys ; i species.
Nesomys ; 2 species.
Brachytarsomys ; i species.
Hallomys; i species.
Eliurus; 2 species.
UNGULATA.
Sus (Potamochcerus) ; t species.
HIPPOPOTAMID^:.
Hippopotamus ; i species (extinct).
Considering the fauna in more detail, it may be first mentioned
that the lemurs (Lemuroidea) differ from the higher, or Anthropoid
Primates by their generally lower grade of organisation, as well as
by certain features of the skull and internal anatomy which need
not be more fully noticed here. They all have fox-like, expression-
less faces ; and, with the exception of the aye-aye and the Asiatic
tarsiers, they are characterised by the innermost pair of upper
incisor teeth being separated from one another in the middle line.
VI.] LEMUROIDS. 217
At the present day lemuroids are represented elsewhere only
in the Ethiopian and Oriental regions ; the African forms being
more nearly allied to the Malagasy types than are those of Asia.
As stated in an earlier chapter, the group was, however, well
represented in the lower Oligocene of western Europe, where
certain forms (Mtcroc/ioerus) distinctly approximate some of the
living kinds, although differing in the conformation of the first
lower premolar tooth, which in the existing Lemuridce, assumes
FlG. 48. SKULL OF LEMUR.
tic. upper canine ; k. lower canine ; pm. premolars ; m. molars.
the form and function of a canine or tusk. In the latter family (of
which the distribution is coextensive with that of the suborder) the
first three genera in the foregoing list belong to a subfamily
(Galagina) distinguished by the elongation of the bones of the
tarsus, and represented by an allied genus (Galago) on the African
mainland. The next four genera constitute the typical subfamily
(Lemurincz\ which is absolutely confined to Madagascar and some
of the islands of the Comoro group, and of which the ring-tailed
lemur (Lemur cattd) is one of the most familiar examples in
European menageries. All these lemurs, which have long,
although non- prehensile tails, differ from the first subfamily by the
normal structure of the bones of the ankle. The third subfamily
(Indrisin<z\ which is likewise peculiar to this region, includes the
avahi, sifakas, and the endrina, all of which differ from the two
preceding groups by having only thirty, in place of thirty-six teeth ;
while the endrina is peculiar in having the tail rudimentary. The
group includes the largest living lemurs ; the sifakas and endrina
218
THE MALAGASY REGION.
[CHAP.
differing from other members of the suborder by their diurnal
habits. They form a characteristic feature in every wooded Mala-
gasy landscape, there being scarcely a copse in the island which is
not tenanted by one or more of these strange creatures ; and when
FIG. 49. RING-TAILED LEMUR (Lemur catta).
walking from covert to covert, they do so in an erect posture, with
their hands clasped behind their necks.
Whereas the endrina (the largest living lemur) is only two feet
in length exclusive of the rudimentary tail, the extinct Megala-
dapis, whose remains have been obtained from the Ambolisatra
marsh, had a skull three times the size of that of the latter, so that
VI.] LEMUROIDS. 2IQ
the whole animal might be compared in size to a mandrill. The
skull of this species is characterised by the great elongation of
the face, and in several respects shows resemblances to that
of the European Oligocene genus Adapts] although the upper
molar teeth are peculiar in having tritubercular crowns, whereas
those of all modern lemurs are quadrangular. There is consider-
able reason to believe that the giant lemur was actually living in
the middle of the seventeenth century, an otherwise unknown
animal being described by De Flacourt in 1658 under the name of
tretretretre, or tratratratra, which accords fairly well with the fossil
remains. The giant lemur is, however, not the sole extinct
member of the group from Madagascar, since the hinder part of a
FlG. 50. SKULL OF AYE- AYE.
skull indicates another, but at present unnamed genus, apparently
allied to Hapalemur. The last of the Malagasy lemurs is the
singular aye-aye (Chiromys); a creature representing by itself a
separate family, broadly distinguished from all other members of
the suborder by the curious resemblance of the dentition to that of
the rodents, to say nothing of the extreme elongation and slender-
ness of the middle finger of the hand.
Apart from the single musk-shrew, the Malagasy insectivores
all belong to the group with tritubercular upper molar teeth,
which, as already mentioned, is now confined to the more southern
portions of the world, and is evidently a very primitive one. The
small mouse-like creature (Geogale auritd] representing the Pota-
220 THE MALAGASY REGION. [CHAP.
mogalidce differs from its Ethiopian cousin, not only in its inferior
dimensions, but likewise in having but thirty-four in place of forty
teeth ; and it is possible that, when more fully known, it will have
to be assigned to a family by itself. As stated in a previous
chapter 1 , the tenrecs (Centetida) appear to have their nearest allies
in the West Indian solenodons, although the relationship is now
believed to be somewhat less close than was formerly supposed.
The common tenrec ( Centetes), which is the largest member of its
order, measuring from a foot to sixteen inches in length, is a tail-
less creature, remarkable for the possession of four pairs of upper
molar teeth, as in marsupials. Much smaller are the two species
of Hemicentetes , which, in addition to differences in the dentition,
are distinguished by having rows of spines along the back at all
ages, instead of merely in the young condition. The hedgehog-
tenrecs, forming the genera Ericulus and Echinops, are small
forms having the whole of the back and tail covered with close-set
spines. The two other genera are spineless at all ages ; Microgale
being readily distinguished by the inordinate length of the tail
which is equal to twice that of the head and body, while
Oryzorictes has this appendage relatively short.
The largest, and at the same time one of the most peculiar of
the Malagasy carnivores is the fossa ( Cryptoprocta), which, although
usually included in the Viverridce, is so different from all other
members of that group that it has been regarded as constituting a
family by itself, specially characterised by the feline type of denti-
tion. On the other hand, Daubenton's civet (Fossa), although
representing a genus by itself, has its nearest relative in the widely
distributed Oriental rasse ( Viverra malaccensts). The latter species,
although now found both in Madagascar and the Comoro group,
has in all probability been introduced there. Of the four remain-
ing genera, Galidictis, Galidia, and Hemigalidia are more or less
closely allied to the mungooses, although presenting certain
structural differences from other genera ; but the fourth (Eupleres)
is so markedly distinct as to constitute a subfamily by itself.
The five genera of murine rodents call for but little remark,
although it is noteworthy that they are all more or less closely
1 Supra, p. 70.
VI.]
CARNIVORA.
221
allied, and belong to the cricetine section, which contains the
oldest members of the family. Nothing need be said in regard to
the two ungulates, except that they both belong to Ethiopian
types. Although bats are not taken much into account in the
present volume, it is important to notice a peculiar distribution of
the fruit-bats or Pteropodida ; more especially as this coincides with
that of many Malagasy birds. On this point Dr Blanford writes
that " the only African genus belonging to the family is Epomo-
FIG. 51. THE FOSSA ( Cryptoprocta ferox] .
^^ which is confined to the continent, whilst throughout the
Mascarene archipelago, and even in the Comoro islands in the
Mozambique channel, the typically Oriental genus Pteropus occurs,
and is represented in various islands by five species, one or two of
them only distinguished by critical characters from the common
' flying-fox ' of the Indian peninsula."
In groups other than mammals, certain common features
between the reptiles of Madagascar and South America have been
1 A second genus, Scotonycteris, has been described from the Cameruns
since this passage was written ; and the author has omitted mention of
Trygenycferis (Megaloglossus}.
222 THE MALAGASY REGION. [CHAP.
mentioned in an earlier chapter 1 , where it was attempted to show
that although these instances of discontinuous distribution might
be explained by parallel migration from a common northern
centre, yet that the Tertiary mammalian evidence indicated that
the American forms had reached their present habitat by way of
Madagascar and Africa. It will suffice to add here that giant
land-tortoises, which existed in the Mascarenes during the present
epoch, are represented by extinct species from the superficial
deposits of Madagascar; and that the latter have also yielded
remains of gigantic flightless birds (dEpyornis) markedly distinct
from any other known type. And here it may be mentioned that
the chamseleons (Chamaleontida) present a certain similarity in
their distribution to the lemuroids, the Malagasy region including
23 out of the 49 species, while nearly all the others are Ethiopian.
As a whole, the Malagasy reptiles, with the exception of the
snakes, are stated to be more nearly allied to those of the main-
land than are either the mammals or the birds ; but the
amphibians exhibit more decided traces of Oriental affinities.
Concentrating our attention mainly on the mammals alone,
their distinctness from those of all other parts of
Relations of ....
Madagascar to the world are quite sufficient to indicate the right of
the Mainland. _ _ , r -\ r ~\
Madagascar to form the centre of a separate zoologi-
cal region. In the survey of the lower Oligocene fauna of Europe
it has been shown that both lemuroids and civet-like carnivores
were common, one of the latter having been referred to the existing
genus Viverra. Hence it is probable that to this fauna we must
look for the ancestors of the Malagasy mammals. The only
lemuroids closely allied to those of Madagascar are the African
galagos, and as the civet-family ( Viverridcz] is better represented
in Africa than elsewhere, it may be taken for granted that Mada-
gascar received its mammalian fauna from the mainland. Putting
aside the hippopotamus and bush-pig, which doubtless arrived
later, the Malagasy fauna can, however, have been derived from
Africa only at a time anterior to the introduction of the modern
types of ungulates into that continent, when it was chiefly popu-
lated by lemuroids and civet-like carnivores 2 . The question then
1 Supra, p. 131.
' 2 It is of course probable that some of the Oligocene primitive ungulates
VI.] RELATION TO AFRICA. 223
narrows itself as to the probable date of the connection between
the island and the continent. Now, so far as can be determined,
none of the European Oligocene lemuroids are referable to the
family Lemuridce and since both the Ethiopian and Malagasy
representatives of the subfamily Galagince resemble one another in
the peculiar structure of the ankle, or tarsus, it is pretty evident
that not only was the family, but likewise the subfamily differenti-
ated before the separation of Madagascar. Allowing time for the
southward migration of the Oligocene lemuroids and civets, arid
the modification of the former into the Galagince, it seems
impossible to put the separation at an earlier date than the Upper
Oligocene, while it might well be Miocene 1 . Confirmation of
this comparatively late separation of the island is afforded by some
observations of Dr Blanford with regard to the passage of the
bush-pig across the intervening strait, for it is evident that both
that animal and the hippopotamus must have reached Madagascar
by swimming, as otherwise more ungulates would assuredly have
migrated into Africa with the lemuroids and Viverridce ; but if so, all have
died out. The Tertiary palseontological history of Africa or Madagascar can
alone decide this point ; but if ancestors of the South American extinct ungu-
lates reached their home by way of Africa, it is certain that primitive members
of that order must have first passed into that continent.
1 It must be remembered that we are here dealing with the mammalian
evidence alone. In regard to the molluscan Mr A. H. Cooke (Conchologist,
1893, p. 131) states that this region possesses sufficient individuality from that
of the mainland to entitle it to separation. The Helicida are peculiar, not
being found in the Mascarenes, Seychelles, or Comoros. They seem to be
related to certain Cingalese and Australian types. Upwards of fifty-four species
of Cyclostoma are known, distributed over Madagascar, the Comoros, Seychel-
les, Mauritius, and Bourbon. The African Bulimi are represented by two
species, but Achatina (so common there) is scarce; and groups of Bulimi are
peculiar. A single species of the genus Caliella is identified with an Indian
form ; and unmistakable indications of Oriental affinities are afforded by the
freshwater molluscs. There are two species of Paludomus, Bithynia occurs,
and while several of the Melania are of a type common in the Indo- Malayan
countries, the Melanatria, which are peculiar to Madagascar, have their nearest
allies in Ceylon or India. Although not a single African freshwater bivalve
has yet been recorded from Madagascar, yet several Ethiopian genera of
gastropods occur there, and, in common with the land-molluscs, indicate a
former connection between Madagascar and Africa, and this, in Mr Cooke's
opinion, occurred at an immeasurably remote epoch.
224 THE MALAGASY REGION. [CHAP.
been found in the island. After remarking that bush-pigs are
stated to be more aquatic in their habits than ordinary swine, Dr
Blanford 1 asks "how far could Potamochxrus swim? Surely it
is not likely that it could cross the Straits of Dover. I think we
are justified in assuming about ten miles as a probable limit of its
power of crossing the sea, but, to be safe, let us suppose double as
much. Then, in Pliocene or Plistocene times, quite as probably
the latter as the former, when Potamochczmis reached South Africa,
Madagascar was separated by a channel not more than twenty
miles broad. The conclusion is inevitable, that nearly the whole
depression of upwards of a thousand fathoms is of Pliocene or
Post-pliocene date. Of course it must not be assumed that this
date is proved. What we may consider, however, as beyond any
doubt is that the depression cannot be older than the Middle
Tertiary." This view may be taken as practically identical with
the one here advanced, namely that Africa and Madagascar were
united till the period of the upper Oligocene or Miocene.
With the exception of the fruit-bats and Daubenton's civet,
which, as already mentioned, is more nearly allied to the Oriental
rasse than to the Ethiopian Viverridce, the Malagasy mammals do
not exhibit any well-marked alliance with those of India. But the
case is different with the birds, molluscs, and certain other groups ;
while we have no evidence that giant land-tortoises ever inhabited
the African mainland, although an extinct species is known from
the Indian Pliocene.
Basing his conclusion on evidence drawn from several sources,
Dr Blanford, in the communication last cited, is of opinion that
there was formerly a direct land-connection between India and
South Africa, and that this connection "included the Archaean
masses of the Seychelles and Madagascar, that it continued
throughout upper Cretaceous times, and was broken up into
islands at an early Tertiary date. Great depression must have
taken place, and the last remnants of the islands are now doubt-
less marked by the coral atolls of the Laccadives, Maldives, and
Chagos, and by the Saya de Malha bank. It is immaterial
whether Bourbon, Mauritius, and Rodriguez ever formed part of
1 Appendix, No. 8, p. 88.
VI.] RELATION TO AFRICA. 225"
the Mascarene land or not." It is added that if future soundings
should indicate the absence of a bank extending the whole way
from India to Africa, it may be a question whether the whole of
the ocean-bed between those two countries has not sunk to its
present depth since the Cretaceous era 1 .
This presumed connection satisfactorily explains much in
regard to the distribution of the molluscs. It is, however, certain
that fruit-bats did not exist in the early Tertiary, and the Pteropus
must accordingly have made the journey across the sea from
India, aided by what remained of the chain of islands, which may
have been more extensive during the Pliocene. The same
explanation also holds good with regard to most of the Oriental
types of birds. The case of the land-tortoises is, however, more
difficult. Nearly allied forms have been found in Mauritius,
Rodriguez, Madagascar, and Aldabra; and since this group is
unknown, even in Europe, before the Oligocene, it is evident that
they could not have travelled from India by means of the con-
necting land-bridge, which is considered to have been broken up
at the commencement of the Tertiary epoch. This being so, the
probability is that they originally came from Africa ; but whether
they entered Madagascar with the ancestral lemurs, or whether
they, or their eggs, were transported across the channel when
narrower than at present, there is no evidence to show. Be this
as it may, it is probable that they reached Rodriguez and Mauritius
across the intervening sea, since even if these islands ever joined
Madagascar, such union must apparently have been at a date
anterior to the existence of true tortoises. That none of these
tortoises could have been transported by sea from India is proved
by an observation of Dr Blanford to the effect that on this line the
currents invariably set from the Seychelles to India. It may be
added that some writers have considered it probable that the giant
tortoises of the Malagasy region, like those of the Galapagos
Islands, attained their large dimensions after they had reached
the islands they respectively inhabit. The existence of gigantic
1 Neumayr (Erdgeschichte, 2nd ed. vol. n. p. 262, 1895) considers that when
India was connected with Madagascar during the Jurassic era, only the southern
extremity of that island was joined to South Africa.
L. 15
226 THE MALAGASY REGION. [CHAP. VI.
species on nearly all the great continents during the Tertiary
epoch seems, however, an insuperable objection to this view.
In the absence of any evidence as to the Tertiary vertebrate
palaeontology of eastern Africa, I have no suggestion to offer as to
the origin of the gigantic birds of the genus SEpyornis, which
during the late Plistocene or recent epoch formed such a marked
feature in the Malagasy avifauna.
NOTE. The Author has reason to believe that several new
Malagasy mammals have been discovered by Dr C. I. Forsyth-Major;
but as no description of these had appeared when this chapter was
passed for press, they could not be noticed.
CHAPTER VII.
THE ETHIOPIAN REGION.
Extent Characteristics of the Mammalian Fauna Birds Past History of
Ethiopia Subregions.
IT would be difficult to find a much greater contrast to the
mammalian fauna of Madagascar than is presented by that of
Africa south of the tropic of Cancer ; the one area, as shown in the
last chapter, being characterised by the number of lemurs, together
with its peculiar Viverridce. and insectivores, while the other is
distinguished from all other parts of the world by the extraordinary
number (both as regards genera, species, and individuals) of large
ungulates which roamed through its plains and forests until deci-
mated or exterminated by the hand of man. As regards the
number of individuals of large animals inhabiting equal areas, it is
quite probable that at the date when the bison flourished in its
millions on the North American prairies, the balance in this
respect may have been in favour of the New World ; but whereas
the prairies had but a single species, Ethiopian Africa was popu-
lated (for it is unfortunately necessary to write in the past tense)
with a host of species of antelopes, together with buffaloes, giraffes,
hippopotami, zebras, rhinoceroses, and elephants. Such a fauna
has existed during the recent epoch in no other part of the world,
and in past times has only been paralleled by the lower Pliocene
fauna of southern Europe and Asia, although even this, as regards
the number of generic and specific types of antelopes, is by no
means its equal.
Separating Madagascar and the associated islands as a distinct
division, the Ethiopian region may be taken to include such
portions of Africa and Arabia as lie to the south of the tropic of
152
228 THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. [CHAP.
Cancer ; northern Africa, as it did in the Pliocene, clearly forming
a part of the Holarctic region. The greater part of
the Sahara, as well as the northern portion of
the Nubian desert, although included in the Holarctic, will form
a kind of transition zone towards that region, as is also the case
with Syria, where a considerable number of Ethiopian types of
mammals are met with, while western Arabia shows a decided
approximation to the Oriental region, as is well exemplified by
the occurrence there of a species of the short-horned goats con-
stituting the genus Hemitragus. As has been stated in an earlier
chapter, the Sahara and Nubian deserts, although they have
apparently never been submerged since the Cretaceous epoch, seem
always to have formed a more or less complete barrier to the passage
of the mammals of Algeria and the adjacent countries into the
Ethiopian region ; and the main migration from the north and east
has thus taken place along the north-eastern side of the continent.
With the exception of its southern extremity, the whole of this
vast area lies within the tropics. As regards its physical features,
Dr Heilprin writes that " it presents several well-marked physical
peculiarities. In the first place, we have the vast expanse of
desert, which in the north occupies a transverse band varying in
width from about four to nearly ten degrees of latitude. This is
succeeded by what may not improperly be termed the open
pasture-lands, which as a narrow belt bounds the Sahara on the
south, curves southwards at about the position of Kordofan, and
occupies the greater portion of the continent lying east of the
thirtieth parallel of east longitude and south of the fifth parallel of
south latitude. A very considerable portion of this pasture-tract
forms a plateau of from four thousand to five thousand feet eleva-
tion. Included within it, and bounded on the west by the Atlantic
Ocean, is the region of the great equatorial forests, to the present
day a terra incognita in great part both to geographers and
naturalists. That portion of the African continent lying south of the
tropic of Capricorn differs in many respects, both as to its physical
configuration and its vegetable products, from the region to the
northward, and is characterised by a vegetation which is one of
the richest and most remarkable on the globe. With this marked
peculiarity in its vegetable development there is of necessity a
VII.] SUB-REGIONS. 229
certain amount of faunal peculiarity superadded as well, but this is
not sufficiently pronounced to permit of the separation of this
tract from the tract lying immediately to the north. We have thus
on the continent three strictly defined faunal sub-regions : (i) the
pasture-lands already described, constituting the East Central
African sub-region, through whose vast expanse there is manifest
a strong identity in the character of the animal products, the same
or very closely related forms being in many instances found at the
extreme points of this sub-region ; (2) the forest-tract, constituting
the West African sub-region, whose animal products naturally
differ very essentially from those of the last ; and (3) the desert or
Saharan sub-region, containing a comparatively limited fauna,
which, with almost insensible gradations, merges into the fauna of
the Mediterranean tract. To the same division belong in great
measure the desert tracts of Arabia, or that portion of the
peninsula lying to the south of the tropic of Cancer."
Although Dr Wallace had previously divided continental
Ethiopia into an East African, West African, and South African
sub -region, the foregoing arrangement seems, on the whole,
preferable. There are, however, considerable reasons for regard-
ing Somaliland as a sub-region by itself, and South Arabia should
perhaps constitute another. Although the precise determination
of such areas does not come within the province of this work, it is
most important to notice that the West African or Equatorial
forest tract continues right across the continent as far eastwards as
the Congo- Nile watershed, that is to say, close up to Wadelai,
where all traces of the West African fauna are suddenly lost. On
this point Mr O. Thomas 1 writes that "the abruptness with which
the change of fauna occurs on the watershed is, considering the
insignificant nature of the physical barriers, very remarkable, and
almost unequalled in the distribution of the mammals of any part
of the world. The reason of the change is, however, clear enough,
being not the occurrence of such barriers to migration as moun-
tains or rivers, but the abrupt ending of the great West African
forest, which, as we know from the travels of Schweinfurth and
ethers, extends quite into this region, but abruptly ceases before
the slopes of the upper Nile basin are reached."
1 Proc. Zool. Sec. 1888, p. 17.
230 THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. [CHAP.
Before considering the leading characteristics of the Ethiopian
mammal fauna and its relations to that of other
characteris- regions, both in the present and the past, it is
tics of Mam- . & . .
maiian Fauna, desirable to make reference to certain deficiencies,
which are very difficult, if not impossible to explain
adequately with our present knowledge.
Although deer (Cervus), typical pigs (the genus Sus in its
restricted sense), and bears are met with in northern Africa, no
member of any one of these genera with the single exception of
a pig (Sus sennaarensis) from the Sennaar district of Upper Nubia,
inhabits Ethiopia. Even the entire family of the Cervtdce is
unrepresented. These deficiencies form a most marked contrast
between the Ethiopian region on the one hand, and both the
Oriental and the Holarctic on the other. Almost equally con-
spicuous is the absence of goats and sheep ; the only exceptions
being the occurrence of a species of Capra in the highlands of
Abyssinia, and one of Hemitragus in Oman, in south-eastern
Arabia. The absence of sheep and goats is, however, by no means
so remarkable as that of the other groups above mentioned, since
the former are exclusively mountain animals, and probably need
some general lowering of the temperature to enable them to pass
from one chain to another, and of the existence of such cold
period there seems no evidence in Ethiopian Africa. A somewhat
similar explanation will probably apply to the total absence of
marmots (Arctomys\ susliks (Spermophilus], chipmunks (Tamias),
beavers (Castoridce], voles (Microtince), and picas (Lagomys), since
all these are inhabitants of elevated or northern areas. More diffi-
cult to explain is the absence of all shrews (Soricidce), with the
exception of one genus peculiar to the region ; but the deficiency
of moles (TalpidcR) may perhaps be accounted for by the slow
travelling powers of these animals, which did not allow them
time to pass into Ethiopia during the (probably short) period
when its connection with other regions was of such a nature as to
permit their living in the intermediate lands. Possibly also the
absence of moles from peninsular India has something to do with
this deficiency. In this connection it is worth remark that the
place held in the Holarctic region by moles is by no means
unoccupied in the Ethiopian, both the golden moles ( Chrysochloris),
VII.] PRIMATES. 231
and the so-called Cape mole (Bathyergus), with its allies, having
similar subterranean habits.
Together with the Oriental, the Ethiopian region shews a
marked distinction from all others as the sole habitat of the
man-like apes (Simiidce). The Ethiopian forms comprise the
chimpanzees (Anthropopithecus) and gorilla (Gorilla), both of
which are restricted to the equatorial forest-region, where the
former ranges as far east as Uganda, although the latter has a
more circumscribed distribution. The occurrence of a fossil
chimpanzee in the Indian Pliocene affords the most convincing
evidence of the derivation of a large part of the Ethiopian fauna
from what is now the Oriental region. Among the ordinary
monkeys and baboons (Cercopithetida) there are five genera con-
fined to this region. Of these, Colobus differs from the Oriental
langurs (Semnopithecus] by the absence or rudimentary condition of
the thumb, which frequently has lost all trace of a nail. On the
other hand, the large genus Cercopithecus^ which is most fully
represented in the forest region, is as nearly related to the Oriental
Macacus, from which it differs in the less prominent muzzle, and
the absence of a projecting heel, or hinder lobe to the last lower
molar tooth. This heel is, however, present in the mangabeys, or
white-eyelid monkeys (Cercocebus), all of which are exclusively
confined to the forest tract. Although the dog-faced baboons
(Papio 1 ) have a wider distribution, ranging from the Cape to
Arabia, some of the largest and most peculiar forms, such as the
mandrill and drill, are confined to West Africa. This genus is one
of those common to the Ethiopian region and the Indian Pliocene.
The nearly-allied gelada baboons (Theropithecus], of which there
are two representatives, are, on the other hand, exclusively north-
eastern types, one being confined to Abyssinia. Among the
lemuroids, the galagos (Galago*) which, as stated in the last
chapter, belong to a sub-family which attains its maximum develop-
ment in Madagascar extend right across the equatorial portion of
the continent, descending somewhat on the east coast, where they
are very numerously represented. The pottos (Perodicticus], which
are nearly related to the lorises of the Oriental region, are, how-
1 Syn. Cynocephahis. * Including Otogale.
232
THE ETHIOPIAN REGION.
[CHAP.
ever, exclusively confined to West Africa, where they are known
by two species, regarded by some as representing as many genera.
It will be unnecessary to say more with regard to the Chiro-
ptera than that the fruit-bats (Pteropodidce) are represented solely by
three peculiar genera in the Ethiopian region, of which Epomo-
phorus has the greater number and the most peculiar of its species
confined to the western forest tract, while the single species of
Scotonycteris is solely found in this part of this continent, as is
also the case with that of Trygenycteris.
Of great importance from a distributional point of view are the
Ethiopian Insectivora, since of the five families found within the
FIG. 52. AFRICAN JUMPING-SHREW (Macroscelides tetradactyhis].
area under consideration, two are almost or exclusively confined
to it, while the third has only one aberrant representative in Mada-
gascar, and even this may prove entitled to constitute a family by
itself when its structure is more fully known than is at present the
VII.] INSECTIVORA. 233
case. It is further noticeable that two of the families belong to
the primitive group characterised by their tritubercular upper molar
teeth, and were accordingly in all probability very early immigrants
into the country. The first family almost peculiar to the region is
that of the jumping-shrews (Macroscelididce), the members of which
are easily recognised by their elongated hind limbs, long snout,
and leaping habits. While the typical genus Macroscelides has
representatives throughout the region and also extends into
Holarctic Africa, the four species of Rhynchocyon, in which the
legs are shorter and the snout longer, are restricted to East Africa.
To the latter is closely allied the European Oligocene genus
Pseudorhynchocyon, and it would thus seem that the family,
although unrepresented in Madagascar, arrived at a relatively
early date in Ethiopia. On the other hand, since the hedgehogs
are represented only by the widely-spread typical genus Erinaceus,
together with a West African species which has been separated as
FIG. 53. WEST AFRICAN POTAMOGALE (Potamogale velox].
Proechinus, it is probable that they did not make their appearance
on the scene till a later epoch. The Soricidce, or shrews, are
represented in Ethiopia only by three species belonging to the
peculiar genus Myosorex, differing from all the other genera in
234 THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. [CHAP.
which the teeth are white by the absence of long hairs on the tail 1 .
With the West African genus Potamogale, we come to the first of
the two families with tritubercular upper molars ; the present one
(Potamogalidce] being represented elsewhere only by the Malagasy
Microgale, of which, as already said, the systematic position is
doubtful. The potamogales, which attain a couple of feet in
length, are thoroughly aquatic in their habits, swimming by the aid
of the highly compressed tail. It has generally been considered
that there is only a single species, but it has recently been
suggested that there may be two. The family is probably an
ancient one, although we have no fossil evidence to this effect,
Microgale, even if it belong to another family, indicating that the
group was among the earlier mammalian colonists of Ethiopia.
The golden moles (Chrysochloridcz], which take their name from
the brilliant metallic lustre of the fur in the majority of the species,
are blind, earless, fossorial insectivores, having the middle toe of
the fore foot furnished with an enormously powerful claw. As the
moles (Talpida] form a group nearly related to the shrews, so the
golden moles are equally nearly related to the tenrecs ( Centetidcz)
of Madagascar, from which they may be regarded as a highly
specialised offshoot. Accordingly, it may be taken for granted
that their ancestors obtained an entry into Ethiopia with the
ancestral lemurs. It is not improbable that the prevalence of
higher types of mammalian life has been the cause of the assump-
tion of mole-like habits in the Chrysochloridce ; the tenrecs, which
live in an island where the competition is much less severe, having
retained the original primitive type. The golden moles, which
may all be included in the single genus Chrysochloris, are mainly
confined to South Africa, although one species extends on the
east coast as far north as Ugogo.
Turning to the Carnivora, it is unnecessary to say anything
with regard to the Felida, except that three species of felts are
common to Ethiopia and India; while the single species of
hunting-leopard (Cyncelurus] is likewise found in both countries,
the genus being apparently also represented in the Indian Pliocene.
In the civet family ( Viverridce) the true civets ( Viverra] and
1 See Dobson, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1887, p. 575.
VII.] CARNIVORA. 235
mungooses (Herpestes] are common to the Ethiopian and Oriental
regions ; but the whole group attains a far greater development
within the former area than elsewhere. Although the common
genet is an inhabitant of the southern portion of the eastern
Holarctic region, all the other species of Genetta are Ethiopian.
The West African linsang (Poland] is the Ethiopian representative
of the beautiful linsangs (Linsangd) of the eastern portion of the
Oriental region ; the distribution of this group being a well-marked
instance of the close alliance of the fauna of the Malayan
countries to that of West Africa, to which reference will again be
made. The Oriental palm-civets (Paradoxurus) are represented
by the nearly-allied Ethiopian genus Nandinia, of which one
species is West African, while the other comes from Nyasaland.
The small-toothed mungoose (Helogale] is common to West and
East Africa ; and the allied genus Bdeogale has representatives
on both sides of the continent. Two other peculiar Ethiopian
genera, Cynictis and Rhynchogale, have each but a single species : the
former being South African and the latter East African. The
cusimanses (Crossarchus), although mainly characteristic of the
forest tract, have one representative in Abyssinia. Lastly, the
meerkat, the sole representative of the genus Suricata, is an
exclusively South African form. A peculiar family (Proteleidce) is
constituted by the aard-wolf (Proteles], ranging from the Cape to
Somaliland, and a near ally of the hyaenas, from which it is
distinguished by the extremely feeble development of the denti-
tion. Both the spotted hyaena (Hyczna crocuta) and the brown
hyaena (H. fused) are now confined to Ethiopia, but the former
ranged over a large portion of Europe as well as southern India
during the Plistocene epoch ; and as all the three living species
are included in the same genus, there is no generic type in this
family restricted to the Ethiopian region.
In the Canidcz wolves are absent, but the jackals are repre-
sented by species allied to Cam's aureus, which occurs in North
Africa; wild dogs (sub-genus Cyon) are, however, wanting.
Although the long-eared foxes or fennecs, such as Cants chama,
are common in Ethiopia, they are by no means characteristic,
since they range into North Africa, Syria, Persia, and Afghanistan ;
being, in fact, like the gazelles, desert-haunting forms. There are,
2 3 6
THE ETHIOPIAN REGION.
[CHAP.
however, two genera of the family, each with a single species, now
confined to this region ; the first being represented by the Cape
hunting-dog {Lycaon pictus], which is a large, somewhat hy?ena-like
animal, easily recognised by its spotted coloration and long bushy
tail, and distinguished from the other genera by having only four
toes on both the fore and hind feet. That the genus is of northern
FIG. 54. CAPE HUNTING-DOG (Lycaon pictits).
origin is proved by the occurrence of remains of an extinct species
in the Glamorganshire caves. The small Lalande's fox (Otocyon
megalotis) of South Africa, in addition to the enormous size of its
ears, is peculiar in having four pairs of molar teeth in the lower
jaw, and either three or four in the upper. Possibly a fossil species
from the Indian Pliocene may be an allied type.
Passing by the Ursidce. and Procyonidce as unrepresented in
this region, we find the Mustelida very poorly developed, martens
(Mustela) being absent, and true weasels very scarce. The striped
Gape weasel (Poedlogale] constitutes, however, a genus by itself;
while the similarly coloured Cape polecat (fctonyx), is one of two
representatives of a small genus, the second of which ranges from
VII.]
RODENTIA.
237
Sennaar to Egypt, and is also stated to occur in Asia Minor. A
fossil species from the European Miocene may perhaps belong to
this genus. The ratels (Mellivora) which are now represented by
one Ethiopian and a second Indian species, are proved to be com-
paratively late immigrants from the north into this region by the
occurrence of a fossil species in the lower Pliocene of Northern
India. As the animal described under the name of Galeriscus is
at present known only by a skin, it is not even certain that it
belongs to the Mustelidce. at all.
Among the squirrel-like rodents, the most striking feature is
the absence of the true flying-squirrels and their replacement by a
FIG. 55. FULGENT AFRICAN FLYING-SQUIRREL (Anomalurus fulgens).
distinct family (Anomaluridce.}, characterised, among other features,
by the presence of scales on the under surface of the root of the
tail. Mainly characteristic of the forest area, the typical genus
Anomalurus has, nevertheless, representatives on the eastern side
238 THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. [CHAP.
of the continent; although the mouse-like long-tailed flying- squirrel
(Idiurus) is exclusively West African. While true squirrels (Sci-
urus] are common to this and the other regions of Arctogaea, the
pigmy squirrels constituting the genus Nannosciurus are repre-
sented by one species (N. minutus) in West Africa, while all the
others are Malayan. The spiny squirrels of the genus Xerus are
now, on the other hand, exclusively Ethiopian, although their
northern origin is proclaimed by the occurrence of an extinct
species in the French Miocene. Dormice (Myoxidce) are exceed-
ingly abundant in Ethiopia, and if it is considered desirable to
split up the family into more than two genera, the genus Graphi-
urus, characterised by the short, cylindrical, and tufted tail, and
the simple structure of the molar teeth, will be peculiar to this
region, as will also be the single West African form described as
Claviglis. Dormice, as mentioned earlier, date in Europe from
the lower Oligocene, and therefore they might well have entered
Ethiopia with the ancestral lemuroids, although, so far as it goes,
their absence from Madagascar is against this view. In the
mouse-family (Muridce) five sub-families are met with in Ethiopia,
two of which are peculiar to the region. Curiously enough, the
cricetine sub-family, which is the oldest of all, and the only one
met with in Madagascar, is represented only by a single highly
specialised genus (Trilophomys). The inference from this would
seem to be that the ancestral cricetines and lemuroids entered
Ethiopia together, whence some migrated to Madagascar ; the
former group, with the exception of the one peculiar genus, having
completely died out on the continent, where the remaining
murines are more recent immigrants from the north. In this
family the Eastern Arctogaeic group of the gerbils (Gerbillince)
includes six genera, out of which no less than five, namely
Pachyuromys, Mystromys, Otomys, Dasymys, and Malacomys, are
exclusively Ethiopian, the last being West African. The elongated
hind limbs and the transverse laminae of the molars readily serve
to distinguish the gerbils from the exclusively Ethiopian sub-
family Dendromyin&i in which the molars are rooted and tuber-
culated and the ears remarkably hairy. The typical genus
Dendromys includes two dormouse-like forms, one from South,
and the other from East Africa; the other genera being Lima-
VII.] RODENTIA. 239
comys, Steatomys, and Lophuromys, the last having the fur replaced
by fine flattened bristles. Although there is no palaeontological
history of either of the preceding sub-families, the Cricetince have
already been shown to date from the lower Oligocene of Europe.
Their sole Ethiopian representative is the single species of the
genus Trilophomys^, from Upper Nubia and the Red Sea littoral
in the neighbourhood of Suakin, and perhaps ranging into southern
Arabia. The crested rat, as the creature is called, takes its name
from the prominent crest of stiff hair running down the back ;
while it is specially characterised by the roofing over of the whole
upper surface of the skull with bone, on which account it has
(quite unnecessarily) been made the type of a family by itself.
Perhaps, however, the most interesting member of the family
inhabiting Ethiopia is a species of mouse known as Deomys, repre-
senting both a genus and sub-family by itself, and characterised by
having its upper molars intermediate between those of the crice-
tines and murines. Doubtless, therefore, this rodent is a somewhat
modified descendant of the true cricetines which entered Africa
while it was still united to Madagascar; its habitat being that
refuge for ancient types, the lower Congo valley. The two other
generic representatives of the family, Cricetomys and Saccostomus,
although resembling the hamsters in the presence of cheek-
pouches, have molars like other Murina, and are accordingly
referred to that sub-family. While there are two species of the
second genus, there is but one of the first. By some zoologists
the striped mice, as typically represented by the Barbary mouse,
are separated from Mus to form a genus Arvicanthis* , which is
mainly Ethiopian.
The small family of the Spalacidce, or burrowing-rats, has four
genera out of six exclusively Ethiopian, while a fifth (Rhizomys\
which is mainly Oriental, enters Abyssinia. Of the four Ethiopian
genera, which constitute a sub-family by themselves, Bathyergus
includes only the great Cape mole-rat of South Africa; and
Myoscalops has also but a single species, although there are several
of Georhychus. Closely allied to the latter are two tiny little
burrowing and nearly naked creatures (Heterocephalus) from
1 Syn. Lophiomys. '* Syn. Isomys.
240 THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. [CHAP.
Somaliland, which may be regarded as degraded descendants from
that type. The family is unknown either in Madagascar or in a
fossil state in Europe, although an extinct species of Rhizomys
occurs in the Indian Pliocene, and it is, therefore, in all proba-
bility a comparatively late immigrant into Ethiopia. In addition
to one genus ranging from Nubia to Siberia, the jerboa-family
(DipodidcE) has one peculiar Ethiopian genus, represented solely
by the Cape jumping-hare (Pedetes) ; a form so different from all
the others that it must constitute a sub-family apart. With this
genus we leave the mouse-like, and come to the porcupine-like
group of the rodent order, in which the family Octodontidce. has
nearly all of its representatives which are not Neogaeic confined to
this region, although the gundi (Ctenodactylus) of North Africa, in
the neighbourhood of Tripoli, is south Holarctic. This genus and
an allied type (Pectinator) from Somaliland, together with the next
form, alone represent a sub-family typically characterised by the
presence of a horny comb-like appendage and stiff bristles on each
of the hind feet ; Pectinator thus being Ethiopian. The South
African rock-rat (Petromys), although now included in the same
group, approximates to a sub-family of which all the members are
South American ; the resemblance between one of the latter and
the Ethiopian species being curiously close. The two species of
cane-rat (Triaulacodus 1 ) constitute the sole African representatives
of a sub-family containing a large number of Neogseic genera:
Probably, as there has already been occasion to remark, both the
Neogaeic and Ethiopian representatives of this family trace their
origin to the extinct Theridomyidce of the Oligocene of the Hoi-
arctic region or some nearly allied forms ; and as certain forms
occur in the Santa Cruz beds of Patagonia, it is probable that the
migration into Ethiopia was at least as early as that of the early
lemuroids, the extinct Pellegrinia of the Sicilian Pliocene being
the last survivor of the group in the northern half of the Old
World 2 . Although there is no generic type of porcupine (Hystri-
1 This name is proposed to replace Aulacodus, Temm. (1827), which was
preoccupied in 1822 by Eschscholtz for a genus of Coleoptera.
2 There is difficulty in this respect on account of the absence of hystrico-
morphous rodents from Madagascar; but perhaps the early forms entered the
west side of the continent, while the lemurs travelled in along the east.
VII.] UNGULATES. 241
cidai) peculiar to Ethiopia, it is not improbable from the wide dis-
tribution and antiquity of the group, that these rodents also entered
tropical Africa at a comparatively early epoch. The deductions
drawn from these rodents as to a connection between Africa and
South America have been mentioned in Chapter III.
Among all the striking features of the mammalian fauna of
Ethiopian Africa, none is more remarkable than the enormous
preponderance of ungulates, many of which are of great corporeal
bulk. Of these a large number of genera and two families are
absolutely peculiar to this region. As may be gathered both from
their absence at the present day in Madagascar, and the late
epoch at which their remains are found in the Tertiaries of the
Holarctic and Oriental regions, all these creatures have reached
the Ethiopian region but recently. The Hippopotamida is one
of the two families now practically peculiar to the region, the
common species {Hippopotamus amphibius) having ranged over a
considerable portion of Europe during the Plistocene and upper
Pliocene ages, while even in the beginning of this century it
FIG. 56. HEAD OF WART HOG {Phacochtxrus cethiopicus).
frequented lower Egypt. The pigmy hippopotamus (H. liberi-
ensis) of western Africa, which is referred by many writers to a
genus apart, and more resembles the pigs in its mode of life,
I, 1 6
242 THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. [CHAP.
appears to be more nearly allied to a small species from the
Sicilian and Maltese Pliocene. As already mentioned, with the
exception of a single species (Sus sennaariensis], true pigs are
unknown in Ethiopia, their place being taken by the two species
of bush-pigs, forming the potamochoerine group of the same genus,
and distinguished by the simpler structure of the molar teeth, as
well as by the tendency of the front premolars to fall out in the
adult. The reason for the occurrence of a third species of the
group in Madagascar has been already sufficiently discussed 1 .
Still more distinctive of the region are the hideous wart-hogs
(Phacocharus\ specially characterised by the facial warts from
which they take their name, the huge tusks, and the great com-
plexity of the last molar tooth in each jaw ; the tusks and these
molars being frequently the only teeth remaining in aged animals.
It is, however, very noteworthy that certain extinct species of Sus
from the Pliocene of India and Algeria have their last molars of a
type which could easily be developed into those of the wart-hogs ;
and it would accordingly seem that the latter are comparatively
recent descendants of ordinary pigs. Although wild camels are
unknown in the region, the Tragulida are represented in West
Africa by the water-chevrotain, which is now the only existing
species of the genus Dorcatherium, although fossil forms occur in
the Pliocene of India and the European Miocene ; the ancestral
forms having probably entered the region from India. The second
ungulate family now confined to Ethiopia is the Giraffidce, of
which there appears to be only a single living species, although the
North African form shows a decided difference in coloration from
its southern brother. The occurrence of species belonging to the
existing genus Giraffa in the lower Pliocene of Greece, Persia,
India, and China, shows that giraffes came into Africa with the
other ruminants ; the African species being very probably the
direct descendant of the extinct Indian one.
Abounding as it does in ungulates in general, Ethiopian Africa
is the especial home of the antelope group, which here takes
the place of the sheep and goats so characteristic of the elevated
districts of the eastern half of the Holarctic region. Regarding
1 Supra, p. 223.
VII.]
UNGULATES.
243
their distribution in the Ethiopian region, Dr Sclater writes 1 that
although " antelopes are to be met with in every part of Africa,
they are most numerous where the country is comparatively open,
and where there are grassy plains interspersed with sheltering
bushes. South of the tropic of Capricorn this condition generally
prevails, and throughout the Cape Colony and its adjoining terri-
tory they are or, at all events, before the advent of a European
FIG. 57. WATER-CHEVROTAIN (Dorcatherium aqiiaticum}.
population were, everywhere abundant. The early settlers at the
Cape describe antelopes as to be met with in herds of thousands
on the veldt, and in parts of Africa where the white man and his
destructive firearms have not yet penetrated a similar condition
prevails even at the present day. When we advance further north
and meet with the dense forests of the Niger and Congo basins,
we find the mass of antelopes holding rather to the more open
lands on the eastern coast, throughout which they are to be met
Natural Science, vol. I. p. -255 (1892).
1 6 2
244 THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. [CHAP.
with in great abundance up to Cape Guardafui. The vast plains
traversed by the Upper Nile and its tributaries are likewise well
stocked with antelope life ; but in the great Sahara only some of
the more desert-loving forms are to be found. In Senegambia
again, and in the more open districts on the West Coast, many
forms of antelopes occur, but they cannot rival the numbers and
varieties of those of Eastern and Southern Africa." Although
most of the genera of Ethiopian antelopes are peculiar to the
continent, a few desert-haunting types range into southern Arabia,
and hence northwards into Syria, where they enter the Holarctic
region. Many of the groups have extinct representatives in the
lower Pliocene of southern Europe and India, and since existing
Ethiopian genera are more common in the latter than in the
former area, it seems probable that the great migration into
Ethiopian Africa has taken place from the east, by way of Syria or
Arabia. As such extinct genera or species have been already
noticed 1 , it will suffice to take a very brief survey of the genera
now mainly or exclusively confined to Ethiopian Africa.
The first section includes the hartebeests and their allies the
bontebok and blesbok, all of which may well be included in the
genus Bubalis, although the two latter are often separated as
Damaliscus. One species of the typical group ranges into Syria,
while a second is an inhabitant of Tunis. To the same section
also belong the wildebeests, or gnus ( Connochcetes). On the other
hand the numerous species of duikerboks (Cephalophus) consti-
tute, so far as Africa is concerned, a section to themselves. They
are, however, allied to the Indian four-horned antelope (Tetraceros\
and it is not improbable that they are represented in the Pliocene
of the Siwalik Hills. While many species of the genus are found
in East and South Africa, the largest kinds are confined to the
forest-districts of the West Coast. The small African antelopes
classed by Sir V. Brooke in the Ceruicaprince and included in
the genera Neotragus and Nanotragus are now referred by Messrs
Sclater and Thomas to a section apart, under the name of
Nanotragin<z, and are classed in six genera. Of these, Madoqua ~,
with six species, includes Salt's antelope (M. saltiand)\ Nanotragus
1 Supra, pp. 197 206. 2 Syn. Neotragtis.
VII.] UNGULATES. 245
is represented only by the minute royal antelope (JV. pygmaus}
of Guinea; Nesotragus is typified by the Zanzibar steinbok
(JV. moschatus] ; the true steinbok (Raphiceros campestris'} forms
the fourth genus ; the oribi of South Africa ( Oribia scoparia) is
still more distinct; while the well-known klipspringer (Oreotragus
saltator}, which ranges from the Cape to Abyssinia, differs from
all the rest by its coarse brittle fur.
The Cervicaprince, include larger forms. Foremost among
these is the South African rheebok (Pelea) ; while the water-buck
and its allies (Cobtts) are some of the largest of all antelopes.
The last representative of this section (Cervicaprd) is typified by
the South African rietbok, but there are also other species in West
and East Africa. The fine South African antelope known as the
pala (sEpyceros], together with an allied species from the West
Coast, form the first representatives of another section. Here
belong the true gazelles (Gazella), more characteristic of the desert
tracts of the eastern half of the Holarctic region, although repre-
sented in South Africa by the somewhat aberrant springbok, as
well as by several more typical species on the East Coast. Clarke's
gazelle (Ammodorcas) of Somaliland is, however, the sole species
of an exclusively Ethiopian genus ; and the same is the case with
Waller's gazelle (Lithocranius\ of which the range extends on the
East Coast from Somaliland to Kilimanjaro. The single species
of the East African genus Dorcatragus seems to be an aberrant
gazelle, with the trunk-like muzzle of Madoqua, but retaining
the small gland-pits of the type. Yet another section of
antelopes is typified by the beautiful sable antelope and its
allies (Hippotragus), in which the horns sweep backwards in a
graceful curve, and are ringed nearly to their tips. This genus is
exclusively Ethiopian, but in the one typified by the gemsbok
(Oryx), and characterised by the long and slender horns being
either straight or but slightly curved, and ringed only at the base,
the range includes all the desert regions of Africa, Arabia, and
Syria, although the majority of the species are Ethiopian. To the
same section belongs the addax antelope (Addax), but although
this animal occurs as far south as latitude 18 N., it is mainly an
inhabitant of the deserts of North Africa, Arabia, and Syria. The
last section includes some of the largest and at the same time the
246
THE ETHIOPIAN REGION.
[CHAP.
most beautiful of all antelopes, the three Ethiopian genera being
all characterised by the more or less strongly-marked spiral twisting
of their horns, and the short crowns of their molar teeth ; the last
feature distinguishing them sharply from the sable antelope and
gemsbok group. The first of the genera in question includes the
FIG. 58. HEAD OF GEMSBOK ( Oryx gazdla) .
harnessed antelopes (Tragelaphus), in which the spiral twisting of
the horns is less marked than in the other two ; these antelopes
frequenting forest or jungle, and being most numerous in western
Africa. The kudus (Strepsiceros] agree with the last in that the
females are hornless, but the horns of the males form a more
corkscrew-like spiral than is generally the case with the harnessed
VII.] UNGULATES. 247
antelopes; while in the elands (Orias) 1 the horns are present in
both sexes and form a close spiral.
Turning to the perissodactyle section of the order, we find
Ethiopian Africa the home of several species differing markedly
from any now living in other parts of the world, although, accord-
ing to the system here adopted, these do not constitute generic
groups by themselves. There are two, or possibly three species of
Rhinoceros, both of which are two-horned, and differ from those of
the Oriental region in the absence of canine and incisor teeth. Of
these the common African rhinoceros (R. bicornis) is closely allied to
an extinct species from the Pikermi beds of Attica; while Burchell's
rhinoceros (R. simus), which is now nearly exterminated, has its
nearest allies in the extinct R. platyrhinus of the Siwalik Hills, and
the woolly rhinoceros (R. antiquitatis) of the Plistocene of Europe
and northern Asia. In addition to being the habitat of the parent
form of the domestic ass, which is confined to Somaliland and the
adjacent regions, Ethiopian Africa is also characterised by contain-
ing all the striped horses, or zebras, separated by some authorities
as a distinct genus, under the name of Hippotigris. The best
known representatives of this group are the true or mountain
zebra (Equus zebra], Burchell's zebra (E. burcheili\ Grevy's zebra
(E. grevyi] of the Galla country, and the quagga (E. quagga). The
latter, although formerly abundant in the southern extremity of the
continent, is now fast verging on extinction, and serves to connect
the more typical members of the group with the true asses. In
spite of the difference in their coloration, the zebras are indeed
indistinguishable in their osteology and dentition from the latter,
and it is quite possible that they are represented in a fossil state in
the later Tertiaries of Europe, while they are not improbably the
direct descendants of the ancestral genus Hipparion. The absence
of tapirs from the Ethiopian region is as remarkable as the want
of deer ; but it is noteworthy that the former are unknown among
both the Pikermi and Siwalik faunas.
Although the African elephant (Elephas africanus) is markedly
distinct from the Oriental species, yet the two are so closely con-
nected by intermediate extinct forms that it is impossible to regard
1 The name is usually spelt Oreas, but as it is derived from <5/>etds, the
proper orthography is Orias.
248
THE ETHIOPIAN REGION.
[CHAP.
them as the representatives of separate genera. The existing
species is now confined to the Ethiopian region, but since its
fossilised remains occur in deposits of Plistocene age in Algeria,
Spain, and Sicily, it is evident that, like the spotted hyaena and
lion, it formerly enjoyed a much more extensive range.
With the exception that a single species is found in Syria, the
small rodent-like ungulates, known as hyraces, which constitute
not only a family (Procavtidce) but likewise a sub-order (Hyracoidea)
by themselves, are especially characteristic of the Ethiopian region,
where they are represented by a large number of species, more
FIG. 59. CAPE HYRAX (Procavia capensis].
particularly in the southern portion of the continent. Although
these animals closely resemble the rhinoceroses in the structure of
their molar teeth, they differ markedly from all the perissodactyles
in having the carpus constructed on the linear type 1 , and
from all other living forms of the order in that their single pair
of upper incisor teeth grow continuously throughout life, as in
the rodents. They were formerly divided into at least two
generic groups, but both the terrestrial and arboreal forms are now
included in the single genus Procavia. Nothing definite is
1 See figure 12 on p. 78.
VII.] UNGULATES. 249
known as to the past history of the group 1 ; but it has been
suggested (p. 85) that they may be allied to certain extinct South
American ungulates.
The list of peculiar Ethiopian mammals is brought to a close
by the aard-varks (Orycteropodida), which although generally in-
cluded in the Edentata have nothing to do with the typical South
American representatives of that order, and are here, together with
the pangolins, regarded as forming an ordinal group Effodientia
by themselves. Only a single genus (Orycteropus] now exists, of
which there are two living Ethiopian species, and there are
extinct species in the Pliocene of Persia and Samos. A skull
from the Plistocene of Madagascar has been described as Plesi-
orycteropus, and another genus occurs in the French Oligocene.
Not improbably some members of the family entered Africa and
Madagascar with the ancestral lemuroids and civets, but the dis-
covery of the Pliocene forms renders it probable that the existing
genus is a later immigrant.
Finally, it may be mentioned that among the more widely-
spread genera a few species of mammals are either now common
to the Ethiopian region and India, or were so during the Plistocene
age. In the Felida the lion (Felts leo), leopard (F. pardus), jungle-
cat (F. chaus], caracal (F. caracal), and hunting-leopard (Cynce-
lurus jubatus] still range over the two areas ; fossilised remains of
the first three of these also occurring in the European Plistocene
deposits. On the other hand, the spotted hyaena (Hycena crocutd),
which lived in Southern India (as well as in Europe) during the
Plistocene era, is now restricted to Ethiopian Africa; and the
same is the case with the giant pangolin (Mains gigantea) of West
Africa, fossilised remains of which have been discovered, in
company with those of the spotted hyaena, in a cavern in
Madras.
The following table shows the genera and family of mammals
now more or less exclusively restricted to the Ethiopian region ;
the names of such as are practically peculiar to this area being
printed in italic type.
1 I am informed that a skull belonging to an extinct member of this group
has been discovered in the Pliocene of Samos, but no description has been
published.
250 THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. [CHAP.
I. Primates.
1. ANTHROPOIDEA.
SlMIID/E.
Anthropopithecus. Equatorial Africa. Fossil in
Indian Pliocene.
Gorilla. W. African.
CERCOPITHECID^E.
Co lob us.
Cercopithecus. Largely W. African.
Cercocebus. W. African.
Theropithecus. N. E. African.
Papio. Fossil in Indian Plistocene and Pliocene.
2. LEMUROIDEA.
LEMURID^E.
Galago. Equatorial and E. African.
Perodicticiis. W. African.
II Insectivora.
MACROSCELIDID&. Fossil in European Oligocene.
Macroscelides (including Petrodromus}. One N.
African species.
Rhynchocyon. E. African.
ERINACEID^:.
Proechinus. W. African.
Myosorex.
POTAMOGALID^:. Elsewhere only in Madagascar.
Potamogale. W. African.
CHR YSOCHLORID&.
Chrysochloris (including Chalcochloris). S. and
E. African.
III. Carnivora.
FELID^E.
Cynaelurus. Elsewhere only in India, the same species
being common to the two regions.
VII.] LIST OF THE FAUNA. 251
III. Carnivora (cont.}.
VlVERRID^.
Genetta. One species in South Holarctic region.
Poiana. W. African.
Nandinia. W. and E. African.
Helogale. W. and E. African.
Bdeogale. W. and E. African.
Cynictis. S. African.
Rhynchogale. E. African.
. Crossarchus.
Suricata. S. Africa.
Proteles. S. and E. African.
Lycaon. S. and E. African. Fossil in European
Plistocene. f
Otocyon. S. African.
MUSTELID^E.
Mellivora. One African and one Indian species ; and
another from the Indian Pliocene.
Ictonyx. Ranges into Egypt, and perhaps Asia
Minor.
Pcecilogale. S. African.
Galeriscus. E. African.
IV. Rodentia.
ANOMALURIDM.
Anomalurus. W. and E. African.
Idinrus. W. African.
SCIURID/E.
Nannosciurus. Elsewhere in Malaysia.
Xerus. Fossil in European Miocene.
MYOXID/E.
Graphiurus.
Claviglis. W. African. The right of the one species
to generic distinction is doubtful.
252 THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. [CHAP.
IV. Rodentia (cont.\
Pachyuromys.
Mystromys. S. African.
Otomys. S. E. and W. African.
Dasymys. S. African.
Malacomys. W. African.
Dendromys. \
Limacomys. These represent a peculiar Ethiopian
Steatomys. sub-family the Dendromyina.
Lophuromys. j
Trilophomys. N. E. African, and (?) S. Arabian.
Deomys. W. African. Alone represents a sub-family.
Cricetomys.
Saccostomns. W. African 1 .
SPALACID.E.
Bathyergus. \ Constitute a sub-family the Ba-
Georychus. thyergina ; the last of the four
Myoscalops. being confined to Somaliland,
Heterocephalus. ) while the first is S. African.
Pedetes. The sole representative of a sub-family.
OCTODONTID^:. Elsewhere at the present time only in
the Neogaeic realm and N. Africa.
Pectinator. N. E. African.
Petromys. S. African.
Triaulacodus. W., S. and E. African.
V. Ungulata.
n Eur P ean and Asiatic
ARTIODACTYLA
AK1. UACiYLA. Plistocene and Pliocene, and
HIPPOPOTAMI DAI. 4 . ,, , -r. ,
also in Madagascar. Formerly
Hippopotamus. in lower Egypt.
Sus ; the Potamochczrine group, frequently regarded as
a distinct genus, is peculiar to the Ethiopian and
Malagasy regions.
Phacochcerus.
1 If Arvicanthis be accepted as a genus it should come here.
VII.] LIST OF THE FAUNA. 253
V. Ungulata (cont.\
TRAGULID^E.
Dor cat her ium. W. African ; fossil in European Miocene,
and also in the Pliocene of India.
GIRAFFID/E. ( Fossil in lower Pliocene of Europe and
GiraffaA Asia.
Bubalis (including Damaliscus}. Ranges into Syria
and Tunis ; fossil in Indian Pliocene.
Connochcztes.
Cephalophus.
Madoqua. N. E. and E. African.
Nanotragus. W. African.
Nesotragus.
Rhapiceros.
Oribia. S. African.
Oreotragus. S. and E. African.
Dorcatragus. Somaliland.
Pelea. S. African.
Cobus. Fossil in Indian Pliocene.
Cervicapra. S. W. and E. African.
sEpyceros. S. and W. African.
Ammodorcas. Somaliland.
Lithocranius. E. African.
Hippotragus. Fossil in Indian Pliocene.
Oryx. Ranges into Syria.
Tragelaphus. Perhaps fossil in European Pliocene.
Strepsiceros. )
-, . f Fossil in Indian Pliocene.
Onas. I
PERISSODACTYLA.
RHINOCEROTID^E.
Rhinoceros ; the species without front teeth are now
peculiar to the Ethiopian region, although allied
forms occurred in the European and Asiatic
Pliocene and Plistocene.
EQUID/E.
Equus ; all the striped species confined to this region.
254 THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. [CHAP.
V. Ungulata (cont.).
3. HYRACOIDEA\
PROCAVIID/E. I Range into Syria.
Procavia.
VL Effbdientia. Ethiopian and Oriental.
ORYCTEROPODIDJS. Fossil in French Oligocene.
Orycteropus. Fossil in Pliocene of Samos and Persia.
Among groups other than mammals, attention may be directed
to the remarkable difference between the birds of
Ethiopia and those of Madagascar. On this point
Dr Blanford 1 writes that "the most characteristic African families,
such as plantain-eaters (Musophagidce), colies (Collidce), and wood-
hoopoes (Irrisoridce), barbets, hornbills, secretary-birds (Serpen-
tarius], and a number of genera, such as Lamprotornis (glossy
starlings), Buphaga (ox-peckers), Laniarius, and Telephonus, that
are the common and familiar birds of every part of Africa south of
the Sahara, are entirely wanting in the Mascarene Islands, in-
cluding the Seychelles, Mauritius, etc., while no fewer than four
peculiar families and a number of genera confined to the archi-
pelago replace them. Amongst the Mascarene birds, too, are
found several representatives of Oriental genera, or genera closely
allied to Oriental types, and without any near Ethiopian relations.
Foremost among these are certain bulbuls, forming the genera
Ixocincla and Tylas, the former composed of species which have
been usually referred to the typically Oriental genus Hypsipetes,
and the latter nearly affined. In fact, as was shown by Geoffrey
St Hilaire, and as Hartlaub has since pointed out, there is in the
Mascarene avifauna a more marked connexion with Indian than
with Ethiopian types. In the Seychelles, especially, out of the
seven Passerine genera represented by peculiar species, three,
Nectarinia, Zosterops, and Tchitrea, are Indian and African, one,
Foudia, is Ethiopian, but not Indian, and two, Copsychns and
Hypsipetes, or Ixocincla, are Indian but not African."
All this is confirmatory, not only of the right of Madagascar
and the Mascarenes to form a region by themselves, but likewise
1 Appendix, No. 8, p. 89. In this quotation the English or Latin names
have in some cases been added to the original.
VII.] PAST HISTORY. 255
of -the distinction between the Ethiopian and Oriental regions,
which some have proposed to unite. It is, however, somewhat
remarkable that secretary-birds (Serpentarius) are unknown in
Madagascar, seeing that they are represented in the upper Oligo-
cene of France, and may therefore be presumed to have entered
Ethiopia with the ancestral lemuroids and civets. Finally, the
ostriches (Struthio), which are now mainly confined to Africa and
Syria, are evidently recent immigrants into the region, the genus
being represented in a fossil state in the Indian Pliocene.
With the exception of the occurrence of remains of certain
existing species, such as Rhinoceros simus, Phaco-
charus, etc., in the superficial deposits of southern
Africa, nothing is known of the mammalian Tertiary
palaeontology of the Ethiopian region. Fortunately, however, the
clue given by the existing fauna of Madagascar and the Tertiary
faunas of Europe and southern Asia enables a considerable portion
of the past history of the population of the region to be given with
a fair degree of completeness. And here, with one important
exception, Dr Wallace's explanation, as given in the Geographical
Distribution of Animals 1 > may be accepted almost in its
entirety; the one exception being, as mentioned in an earlier
chapter, that the Sahara was never a sea during Tertiary times ;
although it appears always to have formed a barrier between
northern Africa and Ethiopia. As already mentioned, the an-
cestral types of the existing mammalian fauna of Madagascar ob-
tained an entrance into Ethiopia some time during the Oligocene
period, and soon after ranged over the whole of what are now the
Ethiopian and Malagasy regions, which were then united and
possessed a common fauna. During the Pliocene age, when
Madagascar had become isolated, came the great irruption into
Ethiopia, of the higher and larger mammals, such as apes, monkeys,
ungulates, etc., which were then flourishing all along southern
Europe and Asia. Finding the country unoccupied and eminently
suited to their existence, these rapidly attained a development now
unequalled in any other part of the world ; many new genera being
apparently evolved within the Ethiopian area, although a large
1 Vol. i. p. 285 292.
256 THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. [CHAP.
number were already in existence at the time of the southern
migration. Several of these existing genera are met with in the
Pikermi deposits of Greece, but more were confined, at this epoch,
to the Pliocene of Persia, Samos, and India ; and it may there-
fore be assumed that the great migration was by way of Syria or
Arabia. Dr Wallace has indeed expressed the opinion that a
certain number of types among them the elephants and rhinoce-
roses obtained an entrance to the westward of Tunis ; but there
are no true elephants in the Pikermi deposits, and apparently
none in those of Persia, whereas their remains abound in the
Siwalik Hills. As to the rhinoceroses, although the Pikermi
species is closely allied to the African Rhinoceros bicornis, the
Siwalik R. platyrhinus is equally close to R. simus ; and in the
Siwaliks we meet with chimpanzees (Anthropopithecus), baboons
(Papio), ratels (Mellivora), hippopotami, water-chevrotains (Dorca-
therium\ and several genera of Ethiopian antelopes, all of which
are totally unknown in the Pikermi beds. Ostriches, too, are
first known in the Siwaliks ; while aard-varks occur in the Persian
and Samos beds. All the evidence accordingly points to the
great immigration having taken place along the eastern side of the
continent ; and the existence of certain species of mammals which
are either still common to India and Africa, or which were so
during the Plistocene epoch, lends support to this view. Further
testimony in this direction is aiforded by the occurrence of closely-
allied generic types in the Ethiopian and Oriental regions.
Among the lemuroids, for instance, the Oriental lorises (Nycti-
cebus and Loris) are replaced in Western Africa by the potto and
awantibo (Perodicticus) ; while in the Viverrida the true linsangs
(Linsanga) of the eastern half of the Oriental region are repre-
sented in Fernando Po by the allied Poiana, and the Oriental
palm-civets (Paradoxurus} have very close allies in the two species
of the Ethiopian genus Nandinia. A less marked instance is
afforded by the occurrence of the water-chevrotain (Dorcatheriuni}
in West Africa and of the true chevrotains in southern India and
the eastern half of the Oriental region.
And here it may be remarked that especial stress has been laid
upon the much greater resemblance that exists between the fauna
of the eastern, or Malayan, division of the Oriental region and
VII.] ETHIOPIAN AND MALAYAN FAUNAS. 257
Western Africa, than between that of peninsular India and
Eastern and South Africa ; large man-like apes and linsangs being
confined in the Oriental region to its eastern half, while palm-
civets, lorises, and chevrotains are more abundant there than in
other parts of the same region. This, however, appears to be
mainly or entirely due to similarity of climatic conditions, and
not to original distributional distinctions. And, it may be re-
marked, increased acquaintance with the fauna of Ethiopia tends
to show that types formerly thought to be confined to the western
half of Africa really extend far to the eastward ; chimpanzees, for
instance, being now known to range as far east as Ugogo, while
the genus Nandinia, which was originally known solely by a West
African species, is now proved to have an eastern representative in
Nyasaland.
The similarity between the fauna of the Malayan sub-region
and that of Western Africa naturally leads on to the consideration
of the former land-connection between India and Africa. Writing
on this subject, Dr Wallace 1 observes that "we may now perhaps
see the reason of the singular absence from tropical Africa of deer
and bears ; for these are both groups which live in fertile and well-
wooded countries, whereas the line of immigration from Europe to
Africa was probably always, as now, to a great extent a dry and
desert tract, suited to antelopes and large felines, but almost
impassable to deer and bears. We find, too, that whereas remains
of antelopes and giraffes abound in the Miocene 2 deposits of
Greece, there were no deer (which are perhaps a somewhat later
development), neither were there any bears, but numerous forms
of Felidce, Viverrida, Mustdida, and ancestral forms of Hyczna,
exactly suited to be the progenitors of the most prevalent types of
modern African zoology."
As mentioned in an earlier chapter, since this passage was
written the discovery of the remains of a species of chimpanzee
in the Indian Siwaliks has shown quite clearly that the line
of communication between India and Africa must have included
a wooded tract comparable to the existing equatorial African
forest region ; and this would be true even if the migration
1 Op. dt. p. 291.
2 The Pikermi beds were formerly universally held to be of Miocene age.
L. I
258 THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. [CHAP.
had taken place from Africa to India, which was not the
case. Evidence of such a tract is, I believe, afforded by the
occurrence of fossilised tree-stems in many districts which are now
desert. And along this tract there can be little doubt that the
ancestors of the mammalian types now common to the West
African and Malayan sub-regions originally wandered from their
common Indian home. Subsequently the whole of the countries
lying between eastern Africa and India have become deforested,
while in Africa itself the forest-area has shrunk away from the
eastern side of the continent.
This leaves the question of the absence of bears and deer from
Africa without any adequate explanation. Bears are, however, in
the main, mountain animals, some of which, like the isabelline
bear of the Himalaya, inhabit districts where there is but little
forest ; and it is noteworthy that, with the exception of the sloth-
bear, which forms a genus apart (Melursus)^ there are no bears in
India proper, although a fossil species allied to the sloth-bear
occurs in the Siwaliks. This being so, when we take into account
the absence of ursine remains from the Pikermi and Persian beds,
there is nothing very wonderful in the fact that none of these
animals entered Ethiopia during the great Pliocene migration.
The absence of all Cervidce is more difficult to explain, seeing
that deer of an Oriental type are abundant in the Siwaliks, while
they are also sparingly represented in the Pikerrni beds. Typical
deer of the red-deer group are, however, totally wanting in the
Siwaliks, as they are in the Oriental region at the present day ;
and we are, therefore, perfectly able to account for their absence
from the Ethiopian region, although they occur in Africa north of
the Sahara. With regard to the absence of Oriental types of deer
in Ethiopia, it can only be said that it is as difficult to see any
reason why these should have continued to flourish since the
Pliocene in the Oriental region without ever having entered Africa,
as it is to explain why giraffes, hippopotami, and ostriches should
have disappeared from the former area to survive in the latter.
Another difficulty is presented by the case of the pigs, bat here
it may be suggested that the absence of the typical group of the
genus Sus from the whole of Ethiopia, with the exception of
Sennaar, may perhaps be accounted for by all the other species of
VII.] LEADING CHARACTERISTICS. 259
that genus which originally entered the country having been
developed into the more specialised Phacochxrus. Attention has
already been called to the fact that the molars of some of the
Indian Tertiary species of Sus show a distinct approximation to
those of Phacochairus, and further evolution might easily lead to
the development of the latter. Since this genus is unknown in a
fossil state from other regions, is it improbable that it has originated
from Sus within the limits of its present habitat ?
Summarising the results of the foregoing survey of the mam-
malian fauna of Ethiopia, it would appear that the Sahara has for
a very long period formed a barrier between Ethiopian Africa and
the northern part of the continent. When first populated by
Tertiary mammals, Ethiopia and Madagascar were in union, and
formed but a single zoological province, which would seem to
have been to a great extent isolated from the rest of the Old
World during the Miocene epoch. Had such conditions persisted
|his province would have been entitled to form a primary
zoological realm by itself. During the Pliocene epoch, however,
Madagascar became separated, while a more complete union of
the continent with Asia by way of Syria or Arabia permitted the
influx of larger and higher mammals from the eastward. Hence
there is a most intimate relationship between the Pliocene fauna
of India and the one now inhabiting Ethiopia ; but the distinc-
tion between the two areas at the present day is fully sufficient
to justify the separation of the Ethiopian from the Oriental region.
Of all the zoological regions of the world, the Ethiopian may be
regarded as the one which has been most recently evolved ; and
it may be shortly characterised by the sole possession of the
gorilla and chimpanzees ; the absence of bears and deer ; and the
presence of the African elephant, hyraces, rhinoceroses devoid of
front teeth, zebras, hippopotami, wart-hogs, giraffes, numerous
genera of antelopes, and aard-varks, as well as by the great de-
velopment of its large ungulates in general. It shares with the
Oriental region the distinction of being the sole habitat at the
present day of man-like apes, true civets ( Viverra), linsangs, palm-
civets 1 , ratels (Mellivora), elephants, rhinoceroses, and pangolins
1 Also in the Austro-Malayan region.
172
260 THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. [CHAP.
(Mam's), together with the rodent genera Nannosciurus, Golunda
and Atherura. The probable relationship between Ethiopia and
Neogaea has been sufficiently discussed in the third chapter.
Although, from the mammalian point of view, Ethiopia is a
very modern region, as a continent it is one of the oldest, the
greater portion of its area having been land since the Palaeozoic
epoch. As has been shown in an earlier chapter, in Palaeozoic
times southern Africa formed a portion of the great southern or
equatorial continent distinguished from more northern lands by
the peculiar characteristics of its flora; and it is probable that
it remained connected with India until late in the Secondary
epoch 1 ; as is proved by the identity of the flora and reptiles of the
two areas. Early, however, in this epoch there must also have
been free communication with Europe, as shewn by the close
alliance of the anomodont reptiles of the two continents, and
likewise by the occurrence in both of the mammalian genus
Tritylodon. In the Cretaceous, so far as vertebrates are conf
cerned, our knowledge of the Ethiopian region is practically a
blank.
In conformity with the plan adopted in other cases, the sub-
regions into which Ethiopian Africa may be divided
Sub-regions. . .
will be treated very briefly.
Writing of the desert-tracts of the Saharan sub-region, where
the necessary conditions for existence are largely wanting, Dr
Heilprin observes that " there is a marked impoverishment of the
fauna. The more formidable carnivores, such as the lion and the
leopard, are absent from most districts, leaving their places to be
filled by some minor cats, the hyaena, jackal, fox, and fennec.
The hoofed animals are represented (in some parts) by the buffalo,
and a limited number of antelopes (Gazella, Oryx, and Addax).
Among rodents the families of rats (Muridce) and jumping-mice
(Dipodidcd) are fairly represented, in addition to which we have
the porcupine and hare (Lepus mediterraneus}. The ostrich is
sufficiently abundant throughout most of the sub-region."
In marked contrast to the poverty of the Saharan districts,
is the remarkable richness of the great equatorial forest-tract,
1 Vide siipra, p. 224.
VII.] SUB-REGIONS. 26l
which is the exclusive home of all the man-like apes and of the
lemurs of the genus Perodicticus. To this sub-region also belong
PotamogaUi the African linsang (Poiana), as well as several other
genera of Viverridcz, such as Nandinia and Helogale. Among the
rodents the flying-squirrels of the family Anomalurida are very
characteristic of the forest tract, and the peculiar murine genus
Deomys, as also Saccostomus, is restricted to it. The water-chevro-
tain (Dorcatheriuni) is solely West African, as is the small Liberian
hippopotamus ; while certain genera of antelopes, such as the
duikers (Cephalophus), harnessed antelopes (Tragelaphns\ and
elands (Orias), have larger and finer representatives here than
elsewhere. The giant pangolin (Manis gigantea), the largest
member of its genus, is likewise a West African form.
Although South Africa has a certain number of mammalian
genera, such as Cynictis, Suricata, Otocyon, Pcecilogale, Bathyergus,
Pedetes, Petromys, and Pelea, peculiar to it, others, such as the
golden moles (Chrysochloris) and aard-wolf (Proteles], have been
proved to extend far up the east coast, the latter occurring in
Somaliland. Hence it seems advisable to unite Dr Wallace's
South African sub-region with that portion of his East Central
sub-region which is not included in the equatorial forest-tract. Of
this East Central sub-region, as it may be collectively called, it
will suffice to say that it is the home of the greater number of the
characteristic Ethiopian mammals exclusive of those restricted to
the forest-tract. Here antelopes attain their greatest numerical
development, both as regards genera and species; and here is
also the true home of the lion and the spotted hyaena ; while to
this sub-region are confined the Cape hunting-dog (Lycaon) and
the aard-wolf (Proteles). The distribution of other genera is
sufficiently indicated in the table already given.
The light which has recently been thrown upon the mammals
of northern Somaliland has shown that, as regards antelopes at
least, these are so peculiar that it may be questioned whether this
tract is not entitled to be separated as a sub-region by itself.
According to the lists given by Dr Sclater 1 and Capt. Swayne 2 ,
1 Natural Science, vol. I. p. 264 (1892).
2 Seventeen Trips to Somaliland, London (1895).
262
THE ETHIOPIAN REGION.
[CHAP.
there are no less than sixteen
northern Somaliland, of which the
1. Bubalis swaynei.
2. Madoqua swaynei.
3. phillipsi.
4. ,, guentheri.
5. Oreotragus saltator.
6. Dorcatragus megalotis.
7. Cobus ellipsiprymnus.
8. Gazella pelzelni.
species of antelopes found in
names are as follows, viz. :
9. Gazella spekei.
10. ,, soemmerringi.
11. Ammodorcas clarkei.
12. Lithocranius walleri.
13. Oryx beisa.
14. Tragelaphus decula.
15. Strepsiceros kudu.
1 6. imbubis.
Among these Nos. i, 2, 3, 4, 6, 9, n are quite peculiar to this
district, while No. 12, which, like Nos. 6 and n, is the sole repre-
sentative of its genus, is only found elsewhere along the east coast
as far south as the Tana river. Another generic form peculiar to
Somaliland is Heterocephalus, including two small naked rodents
with burrowing habits ; while in the same order the single species
of Pectinator is restricted to this district. Among species may be
mentioned two musk-shrews (Crocidura smithi and C. somalica), a
hedgehog (Erinaceus sclateri), as well as a banded mungoose
(Crossarchus somalicus). The Somali ostrich seems likewise to
represent a species by itself. On the other hand, in addition to
those mentioned in the foregoing list of antelopes, there are
several East or South African mammals, such as the aard-wolf,
which range into Somaliland, and further evidence is perhaps
desirable before the right of that country to form a separate sub-
region can be admitted.
The case is more clear with regard to south-eastern Arabia,
whence Mr O. Thomas 1 records the following fifteen species of
land-mammals, viz. : Xantharpyia amplexicaitdata, Taphozous nudi-
ventriS) Rhinopoma microphyllum, Erinaceus niger, Crocidura
murina, Herpestes albicauda, Cants pallipes, C. leucopus, Gerbillus
dasyurus, Mus rattus, Lepus omanensis, Gazella muscatensis, Oryx
beatrix, Hemitragus jayakari, and Procavia syriaca. Of these Mr
Thomas remarks that their geographical relationships " are, as
might be expected, about equally with Africa and India, three of
1 Proc. Zool. Soc. 1894, p. 449. In one case the generic title has been
altered, in order to bring it into harmony with the system followed in this work.
VII.] SUB-REGIONS. 263
the species being distinctly African in affinities, three Indian, and
the remainder either peculiar or widely-spread, and of no special
significance." The association of a goat belonging to the Oriental
genus Hemitragus with such an essentially Ethiopian animal as a
hyrax {Procavia}, shows that we are here truly on the border-land
between the two regions in question.
In conclusion, from whatever aspect it be regarded, Ethiopia
is one of the most interesting of the regions of Arctogaea; and if,
as is suggested in an earlier chapter, it has been the feeder by
means of which South America received its earliest mammalian
Tertiary fauna, it is entitled to an importance above all the other
zoological regions of the realm to which it pertains.
CHAPTER VIII.
THE ORIENTAL REGION.
Sub-regions Characteristics of the Mammalian Fauna Past History of the
Region Malayan sub-region Nicobars, Mentawi, and Christmas Islands
Philippine sub-region.
FAR inferior in extent to the Ethiopian, the Oriental region is
taken to include those portions of the continent of Asia lying
south of the Holarctic region (with the exception of southern
Arabia, which is Ethiopian), together with the islands of Ceylon,
Formosa, the Philippines, Sumatra, Java, Borneo, and numerous
smaller ones. In India the northern limits of the region are
formed by the higher ranges of the Himalaya, while " Wallace's
line" constitutes the eastern boundary denning it from the Austro-
Malayan region of the Notogaeic realm. In a region so diversified
as the Oriental, it would not be natural to expect a homogeneous
fauna; and, as a matter of fact, there are in this respect great
diversities between the different portions of the region, many of
the peculiar genera having a very restricted distribution. Never-
theless, the positive and negative features of the mammalian fauna
of the region as a whole are sufficient to indicate its zoological
unity, and also to differentiate it from the Ethiopian region, to
which it is now most closely allied. In the Himalaya there is a
gradual transition towards the Holarctic fauna ; and it is probable
that in this portion of the area the differentiation between the
Oriental and Holarctic faunas has been largely due to the eleva-
tion of the Himalaya itself, which has taken place entirely since
the early part of the Tertiary period, and is to a considerable
extent of Post-tertiary date. It has already been shown that the
older Pliocene fauna of northern India and Burma contained a
CHAP. VIII.] PHYSICAL FEATURES. 265
remarkable admixture of mammalian genera now respectively
confined to the Ethiopian and Oriental regions, together with
some of a Holarctic facies ; and the completion of the elevation
of the Himalayan chain was probably an important factor in the
dispersal and differentiation of this common fauna. Holarctic
types are again met with in force in the open desert regions on
the north-western frontier of India. On the other hand, the
fauna of the Philippines exhibits an approximation to that of the
Austro-Malayan region, and thus shows a blending between the
Arctogaeic and Notogaeic realms. In physical features the Oriental
region displays great variation, a large portion of peninsular India
consisting of open dry grassy plains, whereas the slopes of the
eastern Himalaya, together with the greater part of Assam, Burma,
and the Malayan countries are clad with luxuriant forests ; these
tropical or sub-tropical forest-regions being those where the fauna
attains its fullest and richest development.
The poorest part of the region is, as Dr Wallace 1 observes, the
great triangular plateau forming the Indian peninsula; this area
differing remarkably from the Himalaya in its geological features,
and having been land since an extremely ancient date, whereas
the Himalayan area consists very largely of marine formations.
Since it is stated in the passage cited that peninsular India
during the Tertiary period existed as an island entirely discon-
nected from the Himalaya and Burma, it may be well to quote
the later and more authentic views of the authors of the Manual
of the Geology of India 2 on this subject. After reference to the
extent of Eocene rocks in northern India, it is there stated that
" the Peninsula of India in Eocene times was part of a tract
of land, perhaps of a great continent united to Africa ; that there
was a sea to the eastward, extending far to the north-east, in the
region now occupied by the Assam hills, and another sea to the
north-west, covering great part, if not the whole, of Persia, Baluch-
istan, the Indus plain, and a portion of the upper Ganges plain.
An arm of this sea extended from the north-west up the Indus
valley in Ladak. The Himalaya, and perhaps Tibet, wholly or
in part, were raised above the sea ; but formed in all probability
1 Geographical Distribution of Animals, vol. I. p. 314.
2 First edition, pt. I. p. liii.
266 THE ORIENTAL REGION. [CHAP.
land of moderate elevation. Whether the Himalayan land was
united to the Peninsula is, of course, uncertain but very pro-
bably it was ; for there is no evidence of marine conditions having
existed in the Ganges plain to the east of the Dehra Dun ; and if
the ferruginous bands of the Subathu group be laterite, as they
appear to be, the trappean detritus composing them must have
been derived, in all probability, from the peninsular area; and the
latter must consequently have extended northward to the base of
the Himalayas, in the neighbourhood of Umballa.... In Miocene
times, although marine conditions prevailed throughout western
Sind, the area of the sea was very much smaller than in the Eocene
period ; for all the marine beds of the Punjab and Sub-Himalayas
are destitute of marine fossils, and are probably fluviatile de-
posits."
From this it would appear probable that during the whole of
later Tertiary times, at least, there has been no isolation of
peninsular India from the eastern Himalaya and the Burmese
countries ; and consequently that the differences between the
faunas of these areas are mainly or solely due to their differences
of physical features and climate.
By Dr Wallace the Oriental region is divided into four sub-
reerions ; namely (i) the Indian, comprising the whole
Sub-regions. J ^ '
of upper India, (2) the Ceylonese, including southern
India and Ceylon, (3) the Indo-Chinese, embracing Assam, Burma,
and such portion of China as lies within the limits of the region,
and (4) the Indo-Malayan, which includes not only the Malayan
archipelago and islands, but likewise the Philippines.
So far as India and its dependencies are concerned, the follow-
ing amended scheme has been proposed by Dr Blanford l , viz. :
i. Himalayan. The southern slopes of the Himalaya, from the
base to about the limit of trees.
ii. Indian. India from the base of the Himalaya to Cape
Comorin, with the exception of the Malabar coast, but with
the addition of northern Ceylon.
iii. Malabar or Ceylonese. The Malabar coast and the neigh-
bouring hills as far north as the Tapti river, together with
southern Ceylon.
1 Fatina of British India Mammalia, p. v.
VIII.] SUB-REGIONS. 267
iv. Burmese. All Burma except south Tenasserim, and with the
addition of Assam and the intervening countries,
v. Malayan. South Tenasserim, the Malay Peninsula, and the
Malayan Islands as far as Wallace's line.
Whether the Philippine Islands should be included in this
sub-region, or should form one by themselves, may be
doubtful,
vi. Indo-Chinese. Although not free from objection, this term
may be employed for the sub-region indicated by that
portion of China coming within the limits of the Oriental
region.
Regarding these sub-regions in general, Dr Blanford observes
that some " may require further subdivision. Thus the fauna of
the North-west Provinces and Punjab differs considerably from
that of southern India, and both areas exhibit zoological dis-
tinctions from the forest-clad tracts of south-western Bengal.
There is also much difference between the animals of Pegu and
Arakan, on the one hand, and those of the drier regions of upper
Burma on the other ; and even greater distinctions may be traced
between those found in the sub-tropical and those inhabiting the
temperate regions of the Himalaya. On the other hand, the sub-
tropical Himalayas were united with the Burmese sub-region by
Wallace, and the two are, perhaps, zoologically more allied to
each other than to any other sub-region."
Recent discoveries clearly indicate that the Philippine Islands,
exclusive of Palawan and the Calamianes, should form a sub-region
by themselves.
Taking the Oriental region as a whole, it may be stated that
the number of peculiar generic types of mammals is
less than in the case of the Ethiopian; and that
there are but two families absolutely confined to it,
although a third is very nearly so. While sharing
with the Ethiopian region the want of several groups of insectivores
and rodents, such as the typical shrews (Sorex), marmots (Arcto-
mys), and voles (Microtus), it lacks some of the other deficiencies
of that region, true pigs (Sus) and deer being abundant, although
the latter belong to groups distinct from those of the Holarctic
region, while bears, belonging to two genera, are likewise met
268 THE ORIENTAL REGION. [CHAP.
with. Wart-hogs (Phacochcerus), aard-varks (Orycteropus\ hyraces
(Procaviid(B\ and jumping-shrews (Macroscelididce) are among
some of the more characteristic Ethiopian animals which are
wanting in the Oriental region at the present day, and have not
hitherto been obtained there in a fossil state. Giraffes, a number
of genera of antelopes, and hippopotami, are equally conspicuous
by their absence, although this, as we have seen, is but a com-
paratively recent feature of the region, since most of these forms
are represented in the Pliocene of India and Burma. A notable
feature of the Oriental as distinct from the Ethiopian region is the
circumstance that the great majority of its fruit-bats (like those of
Madagascar) belong to the typical genus Pteropus, which is
wanting in Ethiopia, while the three genera of the family found in
the latter area are absent from the present region. Indeed there
is a very curious dissimilarity between the flying-mammals of the
two areas, Ethiopia possessing the flying-squirrels of the family
Anomaluridce, while the Oriental flying-squirrels all belong to the
SriuridiE, the genus Pteromys being peculiar to the region. Among
the Insectivora, the so-called flying -lemur (Galeopithecus) is a
peculiar Oriental type which has no Ethiopian representative. A
somewhat similar instance to that of the flying-squirrels is afforded
by the tree-shrews (Tupaiid&) of the Oriental region, which are
represented in Ethiopia by the jumping-shrews (Macroscelidida).
From the Holarctic region, the Oriental is distinctly differentiated
by the presence of apes and lemurs and the abundance of
monkeys, together with the presence of the groups mentioned
above as being now restricted to this and the Ethiopian region,
and likewise by the absence of the typical elaphine deer,
marmots, susliks, voles, etc., and the scarcity of sheep and true
goats, which, indeed, enter the region only in the north-western
frontier of India.
Commencing with the man-like apes of the family Simiidce, we
find the Oriental region destitute of chimpanzees and gorillas,
whose place is taken by the orangs (Simla] of Borneo and
Sumatra, characterised by the reddish, instead of blackish, colora-
tion of their hair, and their more wide departure from the human
type. Orangs appear, however, to have inhabited northern India
during the Pliocene, and as chimpanzees were then also in exist-
VIII.]
PRIMATES.
269
ence there, it would seem that the region must be regarded as the
original home of the larger man-like apes. The smaller long-
armed apes known as gibbons (Hylobates) are likewise characteristic
of the Oriental region, where they range from Assam through the
Burmese and Malayan countries to Hainan and Cambodia. In
the upper Miocene these apes occurred in Central Europe, but
perhaps on account of their small size their remains have not
hitherto been obtained from the Indian Pliocene. Among the
Cercopithecidcz the Oriental genera of monkeys are now entirely
distinct from those of Ethiopia, although, as we have seen, the
FIG. 60. SLOW LORIS (Nycticebus tardigradus).
African genus Papio occurs in the Indian Pliocene and in Madras
survived till the Plistocene. And here it may be noticed that this
is the only one of the Ethiopian genera of monkeys that is found
in Arabia. Of the other genera, Macacus is mainly Oriental,
although with representatives in northern Africa, Kashmir, Tibet,
and Japan ; while the langurs (Semnopithecus] are likewise almost
wholly confined to this region, although they range into Kashmir
and eastern Tibet. As both these genera are found in the
European and Indian Pliocene, they are evidently ancient types
which were formerly widely spread in the eastern half of the Old
2/0 THE ORIENTAL REGION. [CHAP.
World. Each represents a sub-family by itself; and as both these
sub-families have Ethiopian genera, which are unknown in a fossil
state, it may be suggested that the latter (like the wart-hogs) have
been evolved within the limits of the Ethiopian region from the
Oriental types. To the same sub-family as the langurs belongs the
singular proboscis monkey (Nasalis) of Borneo. Among the
lemuroid Primates there are Oriental representatives of two
families. Of these the Lemurida include the lorises of the genera
Nycticebus and Loris, the former ranging over the Burmese,
Malayan and Indo-Chinese sub-regions, while the latter is con-
fined to southern India and Ceylon. Although these animals are
nearly allied to the pottos (Perodicticus) of western Africa, nothing
is known as to their past history. The tarsiers (Tarsiidce\ of
which there is but a single genus (Tarsius\ although several
specific forms have been recognised, are almost confined to the
Malayan sub-region, but are represented in Celebes, as they are in
the Philippines.
Of the Insectivora, the most aberrant and remarkable forms are
the flying-lemurs (Galeopithecus), constituting a sub-order by them-
selves, and ranging from south Tenasserim through the Malay
peninsula and islands to the Philippines. As with the tarsiers, we
have no palaeontological history of these creatures, which are
probably comparatively modern types. The most characteristic
Oriental family of this group is that of the tree-shrews (Tupaiidce],
whose members have the form and habits of squirrels, with the
structure of shrews. The typical genus Tupaia ' ranges from India
throughout the Burmese and Malayan regions, but is unknown in
Ceylon ; while the single representative of the pen-tailed tree-
shrews (Ptilocercus], characterised by the pen-like extremity of the
exceedingly long tail, is confined to Borneo and some of the adja-
cent islands. As mentioned in an earlier chapter, the European
Miocene genera Lanthanotherium and Galerix appear to be an-
cestral types of this family ; and this distribution of the family is a
well-marked instance of the curious affinity existing between
certain mammalian genera of the middle Tertiaries of Europe and
1 Two species (T. murina and 7". frenata) are often separated as Dendro-
gale, but as there is an annectent form (see Thomas, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1892, p.
-225), this appears unnecessary.
VIII.]
INSECTIVORA.
2/1
those of the Malayan sub-region, the absence of Tupaia from
Ceylon probably indicating that the genus is essentially a Malayan
one which has immigrated but recently into India. The hedgehog
family (JErwaceidce), which, as already shown is an ancient one,
has a very remarkable distribution in the Oriental region ; true
hedgehogs (Erinaceus] ranging into India, but apparently not oc-
curring in Ceylon, and being unknown to the west of the Bay of
Bengal. In the latter districts their place is taken by the spineless
and more rat-like animals forming the genus Gymnura and the
FIG. 61. TREE-SHREW {Tupaia tana).
allied Hylomys ; and here, again, we have to note the occurrence
of an allied type in the European Oligocene, which has been
described under the name of Necrogymnurus. In passing, it may
be remarked that the survival of these early Tertiary insectivorous
types in the Malayan sub-region serves to lend support to the
suggestion made in a previous chapter 1 that opossums may also
have survived in the same area long after they had ceased to exist
in western Europe.
Passing over the moles (Talpida), of which the typical genus
Talpa only just impinges on the region in the frontiers of India>
1 Supra, pp. 51, 57-
2/2 THE ORIENTAL REGION. [CHAP.
we come to the Soricidce or shrews. Here the typical shrews
(Sorex) are wanting, while the section of the family to which that
genus belongs (characterised by the reddish-brown tips to the
teeth) is represented only by the genus Soriculus, ranging from the
southern slopes of the Himalaya to China. Of the widely-spread
musk-shrews (Croddura) it is unnecessary to speak; but it may
be mentioned that of the two almost tailless and scaly-footed
species forming the genus Annrosorex one is from Assam and the
other from eastern Tibet and Pekin. Chimarrogale includes two
aquatic shrews, one of which is found in the eastern Himalaya,
the hills north of Burma, and M 4 Kina Balu in Borneo, while
the second is Japanese.
Among the Carnivora the region is especially rich in Felidce,
containing more species than any other part of the world. The
tiger (Felis tigris) is usually regarded as one of the most character-
istic mammals of India, but as its range extends northwards to
Siberia, while its fossilised remains have been found within the
Arctic circle, and it is unknown in Ceylon, there is a great proba-
bility that this feline is a comparatively recent immigrant into
India from the north-east. The range of the lion (F. leo) in this
region is limited to India, not extending to the eastward of the
Bay of Bengal, and as this animal was widely distributed during
the Plistocene in Europe, while it ranges all over Africa, it may
be regarded as essentially a western type, or exactly the opposite
of the tiger. Possibly certain remains from the Indian Plistocene
which have been assigned to the latter animal may really belong to
the former. As noticed on p. 234, there are other species of
Felis, as well as the hunting-leopard (CynteJurus), which are com-
mon to India and Africa, some of these occurring in the European
Plistocene, while only the jungle-cat (F. chaus) is found to the
eastward of the Bay of Bengal, and there not further east than
Burma. On the other hand, there are certain species, like the
clouded leopard (F. nebulosa) and the marbled cat (F. marmorata),
which are essentially eastern forms, their range including the
Malayan sub-region and India, but not Ceylon. The rusty-
spotted cat (F. rubiginosa) and the Indian desert-cat (F. ornatd]
are species whose range is limited in one case to India and
Ceylon, and in the other to India alone.
VIII.] CARNIVORA. 2/3
In the civets and their allies ( Viverridtz] the Oriental region
approaches the Ethiopian in richness, and thereby stands in
marked contrast to the Holarctic, which contains only a single
species of Genetta and another of Herpestes in southern Europe,
although the latter genus ranges into Kashmir. Of the true civets
( Viverrd] the whole of the species, with the exception of one from
the Ethiopian region, are Oriental, and some are confined to the
countries to the east of the Bay of Bengal; one small species being
separated by many zoologists as Viverricula. The beautifully-
coloured linsangs (Linsangd) are exclusively Oriental, and are con-
fined to the eastern Himalayan and Malayan sub-regions, although
represented in West Africa by the nearly allied Poiana. Equally
characteristic of the region are the two species of Hemigale, which
are, however, exclusively Malayan, H. hosei being limited to the
mountains of North Borneo. The palm-civets of the genus Para-
doxurus range throughout the region, and have also representatives
in Celebes : their place being taken in the Ethiopian region by
the allied genus Nandinia. On the other hand, the two species
of small-toothed palm-civets constituting the genus Arctogale are
restricted to the Burmese and Malayan sub-regions ; the same
being also the case with the binturong, which is the sole repre-
sentative of the genus Arctitis, distinguished by its pencilled ears
and prehensile tail. Still more circumscribed is the range of the
peculiar genus Cynogale, of which the single species is confined to
the Malayan sub-region. All the foregoing forms belong to the
sub-family Viverrina \ the Herpestincz, which are so numerous in
the Ethiopian region, being represented only by species of the
large and widely-spread genus Herpestes. Both this genus and
Viverra date from the European Oligocene, the latter also
occurring in the Pliocene of France and India ; but none of the
others are known in a fossil state. It is, however, probable that
most of the other genera are comparatively modern derivatives
from the original stock ; and the high development in the Malayan
sub-region of a group first known from the Oligocene of Europe
is another instance of the relationship of the faunas of these
countries.
Although the striped hyaena (Hycena striata) is by no means
confined to India, its range extending through south-western Asia
L. 18
274 THE ORIENTAL REGION. [CHAP.
to northern Africa, it is unknown in Ceylon or in the countries on
the eastern side of the Bay of Bengal, which forms, indeed, the
present limits of the range of the genus in this direction. As
remains of the existing African spotted hyaena (H. crocutd) have
been met with in a cave in Madras, while they are common in the
Plistocene of southern and central Europe, it is manifest that both
these animals are as essentially western types as is the lion. And
it is a curious circumstance that nearly all these western types of
mammals ranging into India (of which a list is given in the sequel)
belong to genera which date only from the Miocene or Pliocene,
whereas very many of the Malayan or eastern types date from the
Oligocene. During the Pliocene a single species of hyaena ranged
as far eastwards as China, and species were exceedingly abundant
in India at the same epoch.
As regards its Canidcz, the Oriental region is inferior to
the Ethiopian in lacking any peculiar generic type, although it
possesses a true wolf (Cants pallipes), and three species of wild
dog (C. rutilans, etc.), the latter, on account of the absence of the
last tooth in the lower jaw and other differences, being frequently
referred to a distinct genus, under the title of Cyan. Whereas,
however, the Indian wolf, which ranges into southern Arabia, is
unknown either in Ceylon or in the countries to the east of the
Bay of Bengal, the wild dogs are found throughout the region, and
have also a representative beyond it in the mountains of Central
Asia, and they are likewise known by fossil species from the
European Plistocene. The wolf, which is very closely allied to
the European species, may be the descendant of a fossil form
found in the Siwaliks, but its absence from Ceylon would seem to
indicate that it has only reached southern India at a comparatively
modern date. No foxes are known to the east of the Bay of
Bengal, and the jackal does not range east of Burma.
The Oriental region is the home of three well-marked species
of bears, and thereby presents a decided contrast to the Ethiopian.
Of these the Himalayan black bear (Ursus torquatus) ranges from
the forest districts of the Himalaya to Burma, and thence to the
Indo-Chinese sub-region. The small Malayan bear (U. malay-
anus] is restricted to the Burmese and Malayan sub-regions ; and
the great Indian sloth bear (Melursus ursinus], which is the sole
VIII.]
CARNIVORA.
275
representative of a separate genus, is confined to India and
Ceylon, and is known to have been an inhabitant of Madras since
the Plistocene era. Not improbably it may be the descendant of
a Siwalik species ( U. theobaldi), which is the earliest known repre-
sentative of the true bears; and the Malayan species may be
FIG. 62. INDIAN SLOTH-BEAR (Melursus ursinus).
derived from a small extinct bear whose remains occur in the
Plistocene of the Narbada valley.
One of the most remarkable of Oriental carnivores is the
panda, or cat-bear (sElurus fulgens), which ranges from the East-
ern Himalaya to Yunnan, and is the single existing Old World
representative of the Procyonida. Curiously enough, the remains
of a much larger species of the same genus have been discovered
in the English Pliocene ; and it is thus evident that sElurus
formerly enjoyed a wide range. From the restriction of all the
other known members of the family to the New World, fossil
types may be looked for in eastern Asia, as it is quite clear that
the distributional area of the group must once have been con-
tinuous.
In the Mustelidce there are four generic types very character-
18 2
2 7 6
THE ORIENTAL REGION.
[CHAP.
istic of the region, although two of them are not confined to it.
The first of these comprises the three species of sand-badger
(Arctonyx), two of which are found in the Himalayan and Burmese
sub-regions, while the third is Tibetan. The single Oriental
species of ratel (Mellivora) is restricted to India, exclusive of
Ceylon ; a fossil species occurring in the Siwaliks. The only other
living form is Ethiopian. Its distribution would thus seem to
indicate that the genus originated in northern India, whence it
FIG. 63. INDIAN RATEL (Mellivora ratel).
migrated into Africa while there was a free communication between
the two continents, and that it only reached southern India (where
it is unknown on the Malabar coast) at a comparatively recent
epoch. The third genus, Helictis, comprising badger-like animals
with long bushy tails, is represented by four species, ranging from
India to China, but unknown in Ceylon. Lastly, the teledu, or
small burrowing badger (Mydaus meliceps) of the Malayan sub-
region, is the sole representative of its genus, and is found at con-
VIII.] RODENTIA. 277
siderable elevations in Java, as well as in Sumatra and Borneo.
No fossil representatives of either of these two genera are at
present known.
Among the rodents, the grooved-toothed squirrel (Rhithro-
scturus) is a peculiar type confined to the island of Borneo;
and the pigmy squirrels (Nannosciurus) are represented by four
Malayan species, the only other member of the genus being West
African. The true squirrels (Sciurus), as mentioned above, attain
their maximum development in the Malayan sub-region. The
flying - squirrels are represented by the genera Pteromys and
Sciuropterus, the former being exclusively Oriental, and the latter
having one species in the eastern, and a second in the western
half of the Holarctic region, in addition to being represented in a
fossil state in the French Miocene. In the Muridcz there are no
less than eleven genera in most cases respectively represented
by only a single species peculiar to this region, while another is
Oriental and Ethiopian only. Of the peculiar types, one of the
most remarkable is Chrotomys, from the mountains of Luzon, in
the Philippines, belonging to the sub-family Hydromyince, of which
the typical forms are Australian 1 . From other members of the
sub-family the single species of this genus differs in having three
(in place of only two) pairs of molar teeth, thereby forming a
link with ordinary murines. This animal, which is about the
size of a rat, is easily recognised by the presence of an orange or
buff line running down the middle of the back. Luzon has also
yielded another rat, provisionally referred to the Australian genus
Xeromys*. Another unique Oriental type is found in the long-
tailed dormouse-like form from the Malabar coast known as
Platacanthomys, which constitutes a sub-family by itself. Phlao-
mys, likewise representing a separate group of the same rank, is
restricted to the Philippines, and is characterised by the molar
teeth being divided into three transverse lobes. The one species
is of very large size. Nearly allied is a huge, rough-haired, grey
or blackish rat, from the mountains of Luzon, which may be
compared in size to a small marmot, and for which the name
Crateromys has been suggested. This differs from Phlceomys by
1 Vide suprh, p. 40.
2 Appendix, No. 31
2/8 THE ORIENTAL REGION. [CHAP.
the smaller claws and more bushy tail, and also by the completely
tuberculate molars. The single species of the Burmese rat-like
Hapalomys differs from all other members of the sub-family
Murincz in possessing three longitudinal rows of tubercles on
the lower as well as on the upper molar teeth. The one repre-
sentative of the allied genus Vandeleuria ranges from India and
Ceylon to Yunnan. The pencil-tailed tree-mice (Chiropodomys),
of which there are three species, are restricted to the Burmese and
Malayan sub-regions; and the small red rat representing the genus
Pithechirus is known only from Sumatra and Java. With the
shrew-rat (Rhynchomys] we revert to several peculiar forms from
the mountains of Luzon, in the Philippines. This rodent, which
is about the size of an ordinary rat, has the muzzle extraordinarily
slender and elongated, with very feeble incisors, and it is pro-
bable that it lives on animal substances, possibly caterpillars.
The two other Philippine types form the genera Carpomys and
Batomys ; the former with two, and the latter with a single
species. They are more or less dormouse-like forms, with blunt
muzzles, thick woolly fur. and long and well-haired tails. Lastly,
the bush-rats (Golunda) have one Indian and another Ethiopian
representative.
An interesting instance of how the present distribution of a
genus is explained by palaeontological discoveries is afforded by
the brush-tailed porcupines (Atherura], now represented by one
species from the Malayan, and a second from the West African
sub-region ; the connecting form being one of which fossil teeth
have been found in the Karnul district of Madras. From this
it may be inferred that the genus was probably also represented
in the Siwaliks. To the same family (Hystricida) belongs a
peculiar porcupine from Borneo, constituting the genus Trichys.
Passing on to the ungulates, we have first to notice a peculiar
group of oxen forming a section of the genus Bos, which is con-
fined to this region, and characterised, in addition to certain features
of the skull and horns, by the dark colour of the males, or of
both males and females. Of these, the gaur (B. gaurus) inhabits
both India and the Malayan countries, but appears never to have
reached Ceylon ; while the banteng (B. sondaicus) is confined to
the countries on the east of the Bay of Bengal. Fossil representa-
VIIL]
UNGULATA.
2/9
tives of this group occur in the Indian Plistocene ; and certain
generalised oxen from the Siwalik Hills and the Pliocene of
southern Europe, in which the females were generally or always
hornless, may have been the ancestral type. The Indian buffalo
(B. bubalus] is markedly distinct from the Ethiopian forms, and
has ancestral representatives in the Indian Pliocene and Plisto-
cene. While abundant in Ceylon, it is probably unknown in a
truly wild state to the east of the Bay of Bengal. The Philippine
buffalo, or tamarao (B. mindorensis) is regarded by some as a
FIG. 64. JAPANESE SEROW (Nemorhadiis crispus}.
cross between the last and the anoa of Celebes ; ancestral types of
the latter occurring, as already mentioned, in the Siwaliks. In the
same family the short-horned goats of the genus Hemitragus are
represented by two Indian species, one inhabiting the Himalaya
and the other the Nilgiris ; the third living species being south
Arabian. One extinct species occurs in the Siwaliks and a second
one in Perim Island, so that the group is essentially an Indian
one ; and, as already mentioned, its present distribution can only
280 THE ORIENTAL REGION. [CHAP.
be accounted for by a lowering of the temperature during a past
epoch. Of the goat-like genera Nemorhcedtis and Cemas, the
former has a wide range in the region and also extends into
northern China and Japan, while the latter is represented solely
by the Himalayan goral ; no fossil types of either being known.
In its poverty of antelopes (exclusive of the widely-spread gazelles)
the Oriental presents a most remarkable contrast to the Ethiopian
region, although this poverty is largely a feature of the present
epoch, African types being common in the Siwaliks. The sole
existing forms are the four-horned antelope (Tetraceros quadri-
cornis], the black-buck (Antilope cervicapra)^ and the nilgai (Bos-
elaphus tragocamelus], each of which forms a genus by itself, and
all of which are restricted to India, exclusive of Ceylon. Indeed,
it is a remarkable feature that true antelopes and gazelles are
unknown to the eastward of the Bay of Bengal ; although this may
be chiefly or entirely due to the countries to the eastward being
unsuited to their habits. The nilgai, which has fossil representa-
tives in the Indian Plistocene and Pliocene, is allied to the kudu
group of Africa, while the four-horned antelope is a near relative
of the duikers. It will be unnecessary to say anything with regard
to the true goats (Caprd) and sheep (Ovis) inhabiting the region,
since these are found only on the north-western frontier of India,
and are obviously intruders from the Holarctic region. It is,
however, important to mention that extinct representatives of one,
if not of both groups, occur in the Siwalik Hills.
The abundance of Cervidce is one of the most noticeable
features distinguishing the Oriental from the Ethiopian region ;
there being an equally marked difference in this respect between
the former and the Holarctic area. Although the majority of the
Oriental deer are now included in the genus Cervus, the typical,
or elaphine group, as represented by the red deer and the wapiti,
is entirely wanting, its place being taken by the sambur and its
allies (C. unicolor), forming the rusine group; the swamp-deer
(C. duvaucelt), which with another species constitutes the rucervine
group, and the Indian spotted deer (C. axis), alone representing
the axine group. Rusine deer are abundant in the Indian
Siwaliks, but appear to be unknown in the Pikermi beds.
Although they have one Tibetan representative, the smaller deer
VIII.] UNGULATA. 28 1
known as muntjacs (Cervulus) which are characterised by the
length of the pedicles of the antlers and the shortness of the antlers
themselves form a very characteristic Oriental group, ranging over
the entire region. Not improbably they are represented in the
Pliocene of Europe.
The chevrotains, or TragulidcK^ which have already been shown
to be abundant in the European Oligocene and Miocene remains
of the West African genus occurring in the latter deposits and
the Indian Pliocene are represented in the Oriental region by
Tragulus, which dates from the Siwalik epoch, and ranges from
India and Ceylon to the Philippines. Although wild camels are
now everywhere unknown, it is probable that India and the
Holarctic region was their original home, remains of the genus
Camelus being found in the Pliocene of the Siwalik Hills.
The large number of species of true pigs (Sus} characterising
the Oriental region is a notable feature, India itself being in-
habited by a species (Sus cristatus] nearly allied to the European
wild boar, while the Malayan sub-region is the home of a consider-
able number of species differing more or less markedly from the
latter. The genus is well represented both in the Pliocene and
Plistocene of India, but in neither of these formations are there
any of the Ethiopian types of the family.
With the exception of the Ethiopian, the Oriental region is now
the sole one where the family Rhino cerotida still exists ; but there
is a remarkable difference between the species inhabiting the two
areas, all the three living Asiatic forms being furnished with teeth
in the front of the jaws, which, as we have seen in the last chapter,
are wanting in the African species. While one of the Oriental
rhinoceroses (R. sondaicus} ranges from eastern Bengal to the
Malayan islands, and a second (R. sumatrensis) from Assam to
the same, the great Indian species (R. unicornis) is unknown to
the eastward of Assam, as it is in Ceylon. Fossil remains of the
latter are found in the Plistocene of the Narbada valley, while
ancestral types both of this species and of R. sondaicus are met
with in the Pliocene of the Siwalik Hills. It is, however, very
remarkable that Ethiopian types of the genus occur not only in
the last-named deposits, but likewise in the Plistocene of Madras ;
the total extinction of this group in India being, as in the case of
282 THE ORIENTAL REGION. [CHAP.
other Ethiopian types, almost impossible to account for. One of
the two-horned extinct Indian rhinoceroses (R. platyrhinus] ap-
pears to have been the ancestor both of the existing R. simus of
Africa and R. antiquitatis of the Plistocene of northern Asia and
Europe ; the evolution of the latter species having not improbably
taken place in the countries lying between India and China,
whence the creature wandered northwards and westwards with the
mammoth to the Arctic tundras. With regard to the Equidce, it
will suffice to mention that species of Equus occur in the Plisto-
cene of Central India and Madras, and that wild asses (of a type
markedly different from the African wild ass) occur in Sind and
Kach. The genus, like the antelopes, is, however, totally un-
known in the countries to the east of the Bay of Bengal, as it is in
Ceylon. In the Tapiridcz, the Malayan tapir (Tapirus indicus)
inhabits the Malay Peninsula as far north as Mergui, and also the
islands of Sumatra and Borneo. It is important to notice that
although fossil remains of tapirs are unknown from the Pliocene of
the Siwaliks, they are met with in caverns in China.
Distinguished, among other features, from its African cousin by
the thinner and more numerous enamel-plates of its molar teeth,
the Indian elephant (Elephas indicus) ranges over the greater part
of the region, being found in suitable districts in India, Ceylon,
Burma, the Malay Peninsula, Cochin China, and Sumatra. This
species is a near ally of the mammoth (E. primigenius) ; and it
may prove that both are descendants of a Siwalik species (E.
hysudricus], which has molar teeth of the type we should expect to
find in such an ancestral form. If this view be correct, the
mammoth has probably wandered to northern Europe and Siberia
from the countries lying just to the east of India. It has been
mentioned in an earlier chapter that the extinct so-called stego-
dont elephants (such as E. clifti and E. insignis] are mainly
confined to this region, although some of the species are found in
north China and Japan. As these elephants form the transition
between Elephas and Mastodon, and also since the species of the
latter genus which may be regarded as the original stock of the
elephants is confined to the Indian and Malayan Pliocene, it may
be taken for granted that the elephants have been developed from
the mastodons within the limits of the Oriental region. In the
VIII.] PANGOLINS. 283
Plistocene of the Narbada Valley in central India there occurs a
species (E. namadicus] closely allied to the contemporary Euro-
pean E. antiqims, in both of which the molars are intermediate in
structure between those of the living Indian and African species.
Elephas planifrons of the Siwaliks, which has molars of a still more
generalised type, is equally closely allied to E. meridionalis of the
upper Pliocene of Europe; and it is quite probable that the
former may be the original ancestral stock of the African elephant.
It is worth mentioning that the stegodont elephants survived till
the Plistocene ; and also that some of the species of this group
inhabiting India, as well as certain mastodons, ranged as far east-
wards as Java, Borneo, China, and Japan.
FlG. 65. WHITE-BELLIED PANGOLIN (Manis tricuspis).
The last mammals that we have to mention are the pangolins
(Mamdcz), which are now common to the Oriental and Ethiopian
regions, and appear to be represented by an extinct genus in the
European upper Oligocene. The presence of horny scales in-
vesting the whole of the body and tail serves to distinguish the
284 THE ORIENTAL REGION. [CHAP.
pangolins from all other mammals whatsoever ; and the Oriental
species are further characterised by having the median series of
scales on the body continued to the tip of the tail, and likewise by
the presence of numerous isolated hairs between the scales of the
back, as well as by the presence of small ears. Of the three
Oriental species, Manis javanica ranges from Burma through the
Malay Peninsula to Java and Borneo ; M. aurita extends from
Nipal to the Indo-Chinese sub-region ; while M. pentedactyla is
restricted to India and Ceylon. The most remarkable feature
connected with the distribution of the group is, however, the
circumstance that claw-bones indistinguishable from those of the
giant pangolin (M. giganted] of West Africa have been discovered
in a cavern in the Karnul district of Madras.
In the following list the leading results of the foregoing survey
are put in tabular form, the italics indicating groups or species
peculiar to the region.
I. Primates.
Simia. Borneo and Sumatra ; fossil in India.
Hylobates. Burmese and Malayan ; fossil in European
Miocene.
CERCOPITHECID^E.
Macacus. Now mainly Oriental, but occurring on
the southern borders of the Holarctic region ;
fossil in the European and Indian Pliocene.
Semnopithecus. An outlying species in Eastern Tibet
and one in Kashmir ; fossil in Pliocene of Europe
and India.
Nasalis. Borneo.
Nycticebus. Burmese, Malayan, and Indo-Chinese.
Loris. S. India and Ceylon.
Elsewhere only in Celebes.
Tarsius. Malayan, extending into Celebes.
VIII.] LIST OF THE FAUNA. 285
II. Insectivora.
GALEOPITHECID&.
Galeopithecus. Malayan.
TUPAIIDsE.
Tupaia. Indian and Malayan.
Ptilocercus. Borneo and some adjacent islands.
ERINACEID^E.
Gymnura. Burmese and Malayan.
Hylomys. Burmese and Malayan.
SORICID/E.
Soriculus. Himalayan and Indo-Chinese.
Anurosorex. Known by one species from Assam and
a second from Tibet and Pekin.
Chimarrogale. Represented by one species from the
eastern Himalaya, hills north of Burma, and Mt
Kina Balu, Borneo, and a second from Japan.
III. Carnivora.
FELID^:. Very numerous in the region.
Cynaelurus. Indian and Ethiopian ; the one species
being common to the two areas ; fossil in Indian
Pliocene.
VlVERRID/E.
Viverra. All the species, except a single Ethiopian
one, are Oriental, one of these being frequently
regarded as the representative of a distinct genus
( Viverricula) ; fossil in European Oligocene and
European and Indian Pliocene.
Hemigale. Malayan.
Linsanga. Malayan and E. Himalayan.
Paradoxurus. An outlying species in Celebes.
Arctogale. Burmese and Malayan.
Arctictis. Burmese and Malayan.
Cynogale. Malayan.
URSID^E.
Melursus. India and Ceylon.
286 THE ORIENTAL REGION. [CHAP.
III. Carnivora. (Cont.)
PROCYONID^E.
sElurus. Eastern Himalayan and Burmese ; fossil in
English Pliocene.
MUSTELID^E.
Arctonyx. Two E. Himalayan and Burmese species,
and probably a third from Tibet.
Mellivora. One Indian and another Ethiopian
species ; fossil in Indian Pliocene.
Helictis. India to China.
Mydaus. Malayan.
IV. Rodentia.
SCIURID^E.
Rhithrosciurus. Borneo.
Nannosciurus. Represented elsewhere by a single
West African species.
Sciurus. This almost cosmopolitan genus appears to
attain its maximum development in the Malayan
sub-region.
Pteromys.
MURID^E.
Chrotomys. Philippines (Luzon).
Xeromys. Philippines (Luzon), and Australia.
Phlceomys. Philippines.
Crateromys. Philippines (Luzon).
Hapalomys. Burma.
Vandeleuria. India and Burma.
Chiropodomys. Burmese and Malayan.
Pithechirus. Sumatra and Java.
Rhynchomys. \
Carpomys. > Philippines (Luzon).
Batomys. /
Golunda. One Indian and one Ethiopian species.
HYSTRICID^E.
Atherura. One Malayan and one West African
species ; fossil in Indian Plistocene.
Trichys. Borneo.
VIII.] LIST OF THE FAUNA. 287
V. Ungulata.
Bos. The Bibovine group exclusively Oriental.
Hemitragus. Two Indian species, and a third in the
South Arabian sub-region of Ethiopia; fossil in
Indian Pliocene.
Nemorhaedus. Largely Oriental (Himalayan, Bur-
mese, and Malayan), but extending into northern
China and Japan.
Cemas. Himalayan.
Tetraceros. Indian.
Antilope. Indian ; fossil in Plistocene.
Boselaphus. Indian ; fossil in Plistocene and Pliocene.
Cervus. The Rusine, Ruce.rvine, and Axine groups
of this genus are characteristic of the" region,
although the first is also represented in the Austro-
Malayan.
Cervulus. Mainly Oriental, but with one Tibetan
species.
TRAGULID^E.
Tragulus. India, Ceylon, and Malayan sub-region ;
fossil in Indian Pliocene.
Sus. Attains its maximum specific development in
the Malayan sub-region.
RHINOCEROTID^E.
Rhinoceros. The three existing Oriental species
differ from the Ethiopian forms in having front
teeth.
TAPIRID^E.
Tapirus. Malayan : elsewhere living only in the
Neogaeic realm, but widely distributed in a fossil
state, although absent from the Siwaliks.
288 THE ORIENTAL REGION. [CHAP.
V. Ungulata (cont.).
ELEPHANTID^E.
Elephas. The existing Oriental elephant is widely
different from the Ethiopian, although nearly
allied to the Holarctic mammoth ; the extinct
Stegodont group is mainly Oriental, although
extending into north China and Japan.
VI. Effbdientia.
MANID^E.
Manis. Elsewhere only in Ethiopian region ; fossil
in Indian Plistocene.
The relations of peninsular India to the Himalayan area have
been already discussed at the commencement of
of^hV Region y this cna P ter \ wm ' le tne land-connection which
appears to have existed between India and Mada-
gascar, and thus with Africa, has been alluded to in an earlier
one. The latter connection must have ceased to exist before
the Pliocene era ; and, as we have seen, the descendants of the
Siwalik mammals would appear to have made their way into
Ethiopia across Syria or Arabia. During the Pliocene, India, at
least, could not have been distinguished as a region from Ethiopia
as it exists at the present day ; and even in the Plistocene the
connection between the faunas of the two areas was much more
intimate than it is now. The full reason for this gradual dis-
appearance of the modern Ethiopian types from the Indian area
will probably never be known ; but there can be little doubt that
the gradual refrigeration of the northern hemisphere with the
advent of the glacial period has been largely instrumental ; the
present distribution of Hemitragus being only explicable on the
hypothesis of a marked lowering of the temperature over India.
The more peculiar mammals now inhabiting the Oriental
region may be roughly arranged under five headings. The first
will include those that are common to India and some of the
countries to the west or south-west, but are, for the most part,
unknown in either Ceylon or the countries to the eastward of the
Bay of Bengal. Under this category may be included the follow-
ing, viz. :
VIII.]
LIST OF THE FAUNA.
289
INSECTIVORA. Erinaceus.
CARNIVORA. Felis leo. Ethiopian, and European Plisto-
cene.
Felis chaus. Ethiopian, and European Plistocene ;
ranges eastward into Burma.
Felis caracal. Ethiopian.
Cynaelurus jubatus. Ethiopian.
Hyaena striata. Western Asia and North Africa.
Hyaena crocuta. Ethiopian ; occurs both in India
and Europe during the Plistocene. No
representative of the genus known in the
Burmese or Malayan countries.
Canis aureus. S. W. Asia ; also ranges into
Burma.
Canis pallipes. South Arabian.
Mellivora. The Indian and Ethiopian species
very closely allied.
RODENTIA. Golunda. Ethiopian ; the Indian species ranges
into Ceylon.
UNGULATA. Hemitragus. South Arabian.
Antelopes. ) None known east of the Bay of
Equus. j Bengal.
The second group includes such genera and species as are
common to India and Ceylon, but are unknown elsewhere. Here
we have :
PRIMATES.
CARNIVORA.
RODENTIA.
UNGULATA.
Loris.
Felis rubiginosa.
Melursus.
Golunda ellioti.
Bos bubalus.
Cervus axis.
Tragulus memimna.
EFFODIENTIA. Manis pentedactyla.
L.
290
THE ORIENTAL REGION.
[CHAP.
The third group, which is a small one, comprises types which
are confined to India ; it includes
Felis ornata.
Boselaphus.
Tetraceros.
Antilope.
Rhinoceros unicornis.
In the fourth group we have generic or specific forms common
to India and the countries to the eastward of the Bay of Bengal,
but unknown in Ceylon or in the countries to the west or south-
west. This list comprises the following, viz. :
PRIMATES. Hylobates.
INSECTIVORA. Tupaia.
CARNIVORA. Felis tigris.
Felis nebulosa.
Felis marmorata.
^Elurus.
Helictis.
Arctonyx.
UNGULATA. Bos gaums.
Bos frontalis.
Nemorhaedus.
Cervus porcinus.
Finally, we have (among others) the following group of genera
and species confined to the countries lying immediately to the
eastward of the Bay of Bengal, viz. :
PRIMATES. Simia.
Nasalis.
Nycticebus.
Tarsius.
INSECTIVORA. Galeopithecus.
Gymnura.
Hylomys.
CARNIVORA. Mydaus.
RODENTIA. Rhithrosciurus.
Trichys.
VIII.] AFFINITIES OF THE FAUNA. 2QI
UNGULATA. Bos sondaicus.
Tragulus javanicus.
Tapirus.
EFFODIENTIA. Manis javanica.
Other forms might be added to several of these lists, but
those included are sufficient for the purpose of showing that the
present mammalian fauna of India is a complex formed by an
admixture of western and eastern types.
The first group is an essentially modern one, all the generic
types contained in it, with the exception of Erinaceus (which dates
from the Miocene), being unknown before the lower Pliocene ;
while, if we except Erinaceus and Golunda, all occur in the
Siwaliks. In the Carnivora, there is evidence of all the species
except the first three being descended from Siwalik ancestors ;
and it is quite probable that the three species of Felis may
trace their origin to felines which lived either in the Siwaliks or
Persia during the Pliocene, in which event the lion, and not
the tiger, should be regarded as the characteristic large Indian
feline.
With the probable exception of Loris, the second group is
also a modern one ; all the forms save Loris and Golunda having
ancestral types in either the Pliocene or Plistocene of India, and
none of the genera being known before the former epoch. And it
may be mentioned here that the absence of so many of the smaller
types of Oriental mammals from the Siwaliks is no indication
that the genera did not flourish in India during the Pliocene age,
but is due to the strata being unsuited to the preservation of their
remains. The remarks applicable to the second group will like-
wise befit the third.
On the other hand, the fourth and fifth groups appear to have
less connection with the Siwaliks, while several of the types are
older ones. For instance, we have no proof of the existence of
oxen nearly allied to Bos gaurus in the Siwaliks, although such
are found in the Indian Plistocene ; neither is there any evidence
of a Siwalik tapir. Tupaia is a near relative of the European
Miocene Galerix and the Oligocene Lanthanotherium ; as is
Gymnura of the Oligocene Necrogymnura ; while Hylobates is
192
THE ORIENTAL REGION. [CHAP.
represented in the European Miocene 1 . The reasons for regard-
ing the tiger as a comparatively modern immigrant into southern
India have already been stated. A Siwalik origin is, however,
indicated for Simla ; but concerning the other genera the palaeon-
tological history is unfortunately a blank.
The affinity between the faunas of West Africa and the Malayan
sub-region has been already alluded to ; but there are also indica-
tions of a connection between that of the latter area on the one
hand and that of southern India and Ceylon on the other, as
exemplified by the occurrence of Nycticebus in the Malayan sub-
region and of Loris in south India and Ceylon. To explain the
latter connection, Dr Blanford 2 has discussed the possible exist-
ence of a direct land-communication between the two areas ; but
this connection, as he admits, scarcely seems necessary, since in
such cases the true explanation would seem to be the survival of
old types in the tropical forest-regions. And here it may be
noticed that the Malayan types common to, or represented by
allied forms in West Africa, are such as either have representatives
in the Indian Pliocene or Plistocene, or such as we might naturally
expect to meet with there if small forms were commonly preserved.
For instance, Simia and Anthropopithecus, and Dorcatherium and
Tragulus, are all represented in the Siwaliks, and Atherura
occurs in the Madras Plistocene. This being so, what is more
likely than that lorises, linsangs, and palm-civets, of types more or
less intermediate between the existing Malayan and West African
representatives of those groups, should have flourished in India
during the Pliocene era ? Nannostiurus, again, should certainly
be expected to occur in the Indian Pliocene. On this point I
think Dr Wallace 3 was on the right track when, in writing of the
Malayan sub -region, he observed that "Here alone, in the
Oriental region, are found the most typical equatorial forms of
life-organisms adapted to a climate characterised by uniform but
not excessive heat, abundant moisture, and no marked departure
from the average meteorological state throughout the year. These
1 If my memory serves me right, I have been shown teeth from the upper
Oligocene Phosphorites of France closely resembling those of Hylobates.
2 Manual of Geology of India, rst Ed. pt. 1. p. Ixviii.
3 Geographical Distribution of Animals, vol. I. p. 335.
VIII.] AFFINITIES OF THE FAUNA. 293
favourable conditions of life only occur in three widely separated
districts of the globe the Malay Archipelago, Western Africa, and
equatorial South America. Hence, perhaps, it is that the tapir and
trogons of Malacca should so closely resemble those of South
America ; and that the great anthropoid apes and crested horn-
bills of Western Africa should find their nearest allies in Borneo
and Sumatra."
In addition to the resemblances between the mammalian fauna
of the Malayan sub-region and that of West Africa, there are,
however, equally well-marked differences between the former and
that of Ethiopia in general. Among Burmese and Malayan types
wanting in Africa, we have especially to note Tapirus, Gymnura,
Tupaia, Hylobates, and sElurus. From the small size of their
representatives it would be unfair to argue anything from the
absence of the last four of these from the Siwaliks, but the case is
very different with regard to Tapirus, which ought surely to have
been found did it exist there. As this genus is equally wanting
in the Pikermi and Persian Pliocene, while it occurs in that of
France, Germany, England and China, it is a fair inference that it
has reached the Malayan countries by a route lying north of India.
And the occurrence of sElurus in the English Pliocene suggests
that the same may be the case with that genus. If this be so,
it is not an improbable hypothesis that the other genera men-
tioned, all of which have representative types in the European
Tertiaries, may have migrated eastwards by a similar route ; and
in this connection it is especially noteworthy that such of the
genera in question as enter India at all, occur only in the eastern
or southern districts.
With regard to the date of the separation of Ceylon from
India, the numerous species of mammals common to the two
areas show that this must have taken place at a very recent date,
comparatively speaking ; although, as aforesaid, at a period when
several of the mammals now inhabiting southern India had not yet
occupied that portion of their distributional area.
When discussing the possibility of a former land-connection
across the Bay of Bengal between Ceylon and southern India on
the one hand, and the Malayan countries on the other, Dr Blanford
was careful to point out that the ocean-bed afforded no evidence
294 THE ORIENTAL REGION. [CHAP.
in favour of such a line of communication. This feature, together
with certain marked differences between the mammals of the two
areas, appears to afford a conclusive argument that these countries
have never been much more closely connected than they are at
present. Had any more extensive connection existed, we should
surely expect to find antelopes, gazelles, and perhaps asses, in the
more open districts of upper Burma ; while the Bay of Bengal
would scarcely have formed such a sharp line limiting the eastward
range of wolves, foxes, hyaenas, and the other mammals mentioned
in the list on page 289, as it actually does. That list is confined
to existing types, but if fossil forms had been included, Hippo-
potamus might have been added, since the extinct Oriental
representatives of that genus do not range further east than Burma
(whither they evidently migrated down the river-valleys from
northern India), no species being known from the Tertiaries of
China, Japan, or the Malayan islands. These circumstances,
together with the depth of the sea in the Bay of Bengal, seem to
disprove the suggestion of Dr Wallace 1 that a continuous tract of
land formerly connected Borneo and the rest of Malaysia with
the central peak of Ceylon, and extended eastwards to Hainan.
Within the limits of the present volume it would be quite
impossible to give a detailed description of the
SuWegion mammalian faunas of the Malay Peninsula and
Islands ; and I have accordingly selected that of
the Bornean group, as an example of what may be called the
typical Malayan sub-region, as distinct from Java, which differs
markedly in its fauna from Borneo and Sumatra. The chief
reason for selecting Borneo is that its fauna has been carefully
worked out by Mr A. H. Everett 2 and Mr C. Hose 3 , from whose
papers the following list of mammals (exclusive of bats), with some
emendations and additions, has been compiled ; species, like the
rat, mouse, and buffalo, which have obviously been introduced,
being omitted. Mr Everett includes within the Bornean group
the island of Palawan, and states that the group may be defined
" by a line which starts from a point immediately to the west of
1 Op. dt. p. 359. 2 Appendix, No. 14.
3 Descriptive Account of the Mammals of Borneo, Diss, Norfolk, 1893.
VIII.] SUB-REGIONS. 295
St Julian Island in the Tambelan Archipelago, and being drawn
south of the Great Natuna (Bungoran Island), passes northward of
Labuan and thence follows the loo-fathom line, so as to embrace
Balabac, Palawan (Paragua), the Calamianes, and the Cuyo
Islands, and, returning along the same line of soundings on the
southern side of Palawan, is drawn immediately to the islands of
Cagayan Sulu, and Sibutu, whence it is continued through the
Makassar Straits south of the Paternoster, Lauriot (Laset Ketjil),
and Solombo islets, and in a north-westerly direction through the
Karimata Strait back to the island of St Julian." In the following
list the genera and species peculiar to the group are printed in
italics, those which are confined to the Palawan sub-group having
that name placed after them in brackets. The distribution of the
other forms has been indicated as far as practicable.
PRIMATES. Simia satyrus. Sumatra.
Hylobates leuciscus. Java to Philippines.
,, muelleri.
Semnopithecus maurus. Malay Peninsula and Java.
,, chrysomelas.
crudger.
hosei.
,, everetti.
,, rubicundus.
,, frontatus.
Nasalis larvatus.
Macacus arctoides. Burma, China, E. Tibet, etc.
nemestrinus. Burma, Malay Peninsula,
Sumatra, and Java.
cynomolgus. Burma to Philippines.
Nycticebus tardigradus. Burma to Philippines.
Tarsius spectrum. Sumatra, Java, and Banka.
INSECTIVORA. Chimarrogale himalayica. E. Himalaya and hills
north of Burma.
Crocidura fuliginosa. E. Himalaya.
faitida.
dor ice.
indica.
hosei.
296 THE ORIENTAL REGION. [CHAP.
INSECTIVORA (cont.).
Gymnura rafflesi 1 . S. Tenasserim, Malay Penin-
sula, and Sumatra.
Hylomys suilla. Burma, Malay Peninsula, and
Sumatra.
Ptilocercus lowi. Also in some neighbouring islands.
Tupaia murina.
,, javanica. Java and Malay Peninsula.
minor.
gracilis.
,, melanura.
,, ferruginea. Burma, Malay Peninsula, Suma-
tra, and Java.
,, splendidula.
tana. Sumatra, Natuna Islands.
,, dor satis.
picta.
,, montana.
Galeopithecus volans. Malay Peninsula, S. Tenas-
serim, Siam, Sumatra, and Java.
CARNIVORA. Felis planiceps. Malay Peninsula and Sumatra.
,, badia.
temmincki. E. Himalaya, Burma, Malay
Peninsula, and (?) Sumatra.
,, bengalensis. India to Philippines.
,, marmorata. E. Himalaya to Sumatra.
,, nebulosa. E. Himalaya to Formosa.
Viverra tangalunga. Malay Peninsula, Sumatra,
Philippines, and Celebes.
Linsanga gracilis. Java and (?) Sumatra.
Paradoxurus leucomystax. Malay Peninsula and
Sumatra.
,, hermaphroditus. India to Java and
Sumatra.
,, philippinensis. Philippines.
Arctogale leucotis. Sikhim, Burma, Malay Penin-
sula, and Sumatra.
1 Mr Jentink regards the Bornean form as a distinct species (G. alba].
VIII.] SUB-REGIONS. 2Q/
CARNIVORA (cent.}.
Hemigale hardwickei. Malay Peninsula and Su-
matra.
,, hosei.
Arctictis binturong. E. Himalaya, Burma, Siam,
Malay Peninsula, Sumatra, and Java.
Helictis everetti.
Cynogale bennetti. Malay Peninsula and Su-
matra.
Herpestes brachyurus. Malay Peninsula.
,, semitorquatus. Sumatra 1 .
(?) Canis rutilans. Malay Peninsula, Sumatra, and
Java.
Ursus malayanus. Arakan, Tenasserim, Malay
Peninsula, Java, and Sumatra.
Mydaus meliceps 2 . Java and Sumatra.
Mustela flavigula. India to China.
,, nudipes. Malay Peninsula and Sumatra.
Lutra sumatrana. Malay Peninsula, Sumatra, and
Java.
,, cinerea. India to Java and China.
RODENTIA. Sciuropterus pulverulentus. Malay Peninsula.
,, horsfieldi. Malay Peninsula and Java.
setosus. Sumatra.
,, genibarbis. Java.
,, nigripts (Palawan).
Pteromys nitidus. Malay Peninsula and islands.
phceomelas.
Rhithrosriums macrotis.
Sciurus bicolor. E. Himalaya to Siam and
(?) Celebes.
prevosti. Malay Peninsula, Sumatra, and
Celebes.
,, hippurus. Malay Peninsula and islands.
pryeri.
1 Jentink, Notes Leyden Museum, vol. XVI. p. 210 (1894).
2 The form from Calamianes has been separated as M. marc Jut.
298 THE ORIENTAL REGION. [CHAP.
RODENTIA (cOHt.).
Sciurus brookei.
tenuis. Malay Peninsula and islands, to
Siam.
,, lowi.
jentinki.
,, notatus. Malay Peninsula, Sumatra,
Java, etc.
,, insignis. Malay Peninsula, Sumatra, and
Java.
,, ho set.
,, everetti.
,, steerei (Palawan).
,, laticaudatus. Malay Peninsula.
,, soricinus, Java and Sumatra.
Nannosciurus exilis. Malay Peninsula and Su-
matra.
,, whiteheadi,
,, melanotis.
Mus infralnteus. Sumatra.
,, muelleri. Sumatra.
,, sabanus.
,, neglectus. Philippines.
,, jerdoni. E. Himalaya, Tenasserim, Java.
,, alticola.
,, ephippium. Sumatra, Philippines.
,, margaretta.
,, raja.
,, ochraceiventer.
,, whiteheadi,
,, bxodon.
,, baluensis.
Chiropodomys major.
,, pusillus.
Hystrix crassispinis .
,, pumila (Palawan sub-group).
,, muelleri. Sumatra.
Trichys gnentheri.
VIII.] SUB-REGIONS. 299
UNGULATA. Bos sondaicus. Burma, Malay Peninsula, Java,
and Bali.
moellendorffi ' (Palawan sub-group).
Cervus unicolor 2 , var. Probably introduced.
Cervulus muntjac.
Tragulus napu. S. Tenasserim to Java and Sumatra.
,, nigricans (Palawan sub-group).
,, javanicus. Malay Peninsula to Cochin
China.
Sus vittatus. Java, Sumatra, Amboyna, Batjian.
,, verrucosus. Java, Ceram.
,, barbatus*.
longirostris. Java.
Rhinoceros sumatrensis. Assam to Siam, Malay
Peninsula, and Sumatra.
Tapirus indicus. S. Tenasserim, Malay Peninsula,
and Sumatra.
Elephas indicus. Probably introduced.
EFFODIENTIA. Manis javanica (Palawan sub-group).
In this list the genera Nasalis, Trichys, and Rhithrosciurus are
peculiar to the group, while Ptilocercus is almost so ; and, includ-
ing the latter, there are no less than fifty-one species peculiar to
Malaysia. Of these a very large number are common to Sumatra
or the Malay Peninsula, or both together, while a smaller number
occur in Java. There are but six species common to peninsular
India, among which the Indian elephant and the sambar may have
been introduced ; but there are ten which are found in the Eastern
Himalaya or Assam. The most remarkable among these is the
Himalayan water-shrew (Chimarrogale himalayica), which is only
1 Founded on a skull from the island of Busuanga, in the Calamianes,
which probably indicates only a race (? introduced) of the buffalo.
2 The so-called C. equinus is regarded by Dr Blanford as not specifically
distinct from C. tinicolor. This being so, it is probable that the Bornean
form described by Mr C. Hose (Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 6, vol. xn. p. -206)
as C. brookei is also a variety.
3 Sits ahanobarbus, Huet, from Palawan, and S. calamianensis, Heude,
from the Calamianes, are identified by Dr Nehring (Sb. Ges. Nattirf. Berlin,
1894, pp. 190, 191) with this species.
300 THE ORIENTAL REGION. [CHAP.
found in the Eastern Himalaya, the mountains north of Burma,
and Mount Kina Balu, in North Borneo ; a musk-shrew ( Croridura
fuliginosa\ common to the Eastern Himalaya and Borneo, being
likewise unknown elsewhere. These two instances alone are
sufficient to prove that Borneo must have been in immediate
connection with the lands to the north-west within the period
during which the living species of mammals have come into exist-
ence; while the restriction of the water-shrew to the mountains
seems likewise to imply a former lowering of the temperature of
the whole region sufficient to enable the creature to pass from the
one area to the other, or perhaps rather to have allowed of its
existence in the intermediate lowlands, whence it migrated to its
present isolated haunts. That Borneo was connected with the
mainland during the Pliocene epoch is proved by the occurrence
in that island of the Siwalik Mastodon latidens, the tooth figured
on page 173 being of Bornean origin.
The large number of species common to Borneo, Sumatra, and
the Malay Peninsula also shows that these three areas must have
been very recently in connection ; but the excessive number of
peculiar Bornean forms seems to indicate that the former island,
with the adjacent islets, was the first to be isolated. Even so.
however, the extraordinarily large percentage of distinctive types
is most remarkable. Regarding the relationship of the Palawan
sub-group to Borneo, Mr Everett writes that "although the general
facies of the mammalian fauna of the sub-group is clearly Bornean,
it is to be noted that no species appears to be peculiar to the
group as a whole, a fact which suggests the inference that closely
connected as Borneo has undoubtedly been with Balabac and
Palawan, and isolated as they have been together from the main-
land of Asia, there has also been much isolation of Borneo and
Palawan inter se"
From Sumatra and Borneo, which have so much in common,
and in a somewhat less degree from the Malay Peninsula, Java
differs very remarkably as regards its mammalian fauna ; a large
number of typically Malayan forms being absent, while others as
characteristically Indian are present. In the first place, the
orangs (Simia), common to Borneo and Sumatra, are absent :
and the elephant and tapir are likewise wanting, the former
VIII.] SUB-REGIONS. 30 1
certainly existing in a wild state in Sumatra, although it has been
considered that its occurrence in Borneo is due to human intro-
duction 1 . Although the Javan rhinoceros (J?. sondaicus}, as we
have seen, is common to eastern Bengal, Burma, and Java, its
reputed occurrence in either Borneo or Sumatra does not appear
to rest upon any solid basis of fact 2 ; while the Sumatran species
(R. sumatrensis], which is common to Borneo, is wanting from
Java. It has, indeed, been stated 3 that certain teeth from the
Plistocene of Borneo are referable to the last-named species, but
the molars of both kinds are so alike that it is almost, if not
quite, impossible to distinguish between them. A noteworthy
circumstance is that whereas there is no Siwalik species allied
to R. sumatrensis, yet R. sondaicus is almost indistinguishable
from the Siwalik R. sivalensis, and is thus proved to be a very
ancient Indian type. As another instance of the distinctness of
the mammalian fauna of Java from that of Borneo and Sumatra,
we may take the case of the banteng (Bos banteng}, which is
wanting 4 from both those islands, but is present in Java, the
Malay Peninsula, and Burma. Again, the genus Hemigale, of
which the type species is common to the Malay Peninsula,
Sumatra, and Borneo, is quite unknown in Java. That the latter
island was directly connected with the mainland is, of course,
proved by such species of existing mammals as are common to
the two areas ; but if further evidence be needed, it is to hand in
the fossil mammals which have been obtained from Pati-Ajam, in
Java 5 . These comprise Elephas trigonocephalus, E. bombifrons,
E. clifti, E. namadicus, E. hysudricus, Sus hysudricus, Bos siva-
lensis, and Cervus lydekkeri. With the exception of the first and
last (which may prove not to be distinct likewise), all these are
Indian forms, E. namadicus belonging to the Plistocene, while the
others pertain to the Siwalik fauna; and it may be added that
1 Dr Wallace states that Ursus malayanus is absent from Java, but accord-
ing to Dr Blanford this is incorrect.
2 See Jentink, Notes Leyden Museum, vol. xvi. p. 231 (1894).
3 Busk, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1869, p. 409.
4 In the Fauna of British India Mammalia, p. 490, Dr Blanford gives
Borneo, and perhaps Sumatra, as part of the habitat of the banteng, but the
animal is omitted from fauna of the former by Mr Everett.
5 K. Martin, Sammlungen Geol. Reichsmusetuns in Leiden, vol. IV (1887).
302 THE ORIENTAL REGION. [CHAP.
the first three belong to the group of stegodont, or intermediate
elephants.
In endeavouring to explain the relationship of the Javan fauna
to that of the rest of the Malayan sub-region, Dr Wallace 1 was
first of opinion that Java, which was evidently isolated before
Sumatra and Borneo, had a brief land-connection with the Siamese
peninsula, independently of those two islands. This view, how-
ever, was subsequently abandoned 2 , and the following hypothesis
proposed. From the evidence of certain Tertiary rocks in Java
believed to be of Miocene age, it is considered probable that at
the epoch in question that island "would have been at least three
thousand feet lower than it is now, and such a depression would
probably extend to considerable parts of Sumatra and Borneo, so
as to reduce them all to a few small islands. At some later
period a gradual elevation occurred, which ultimately united the
whole of the islands with the continent. This may have continued
till the glacial period of the northern hemisphere, during the
severest part of which a few Himalayan species of birds and
mammals may have been driven southward, and ranged over suit-
able portions of the whole area. Java was then separated by
subsidence, and these species became imprisoned there ; while
those in the remaining part of the Malayan area again migrated
northward when the cold had passed away from their former
home, the equatorial forests of Borneo, Sumatra, and the Malay
Peninsula being more especially adapted to the typical Malayan
fauna which is there developed in rich profusion. A little later
the subsidence may have extended further north, isolating Borneo
and Sumatra, but probably leaving the Malay Peninsula as a ridge
between them as far as the islands of Banka and Billiton. Other
slight changes of climate followed, when a further subsidence
separated these last-named islands from the Malay Peninsula, and
left them with two or three species which have since become
slightly modified. We may thus explain how it is that a species
is sometimes common to Sumatra and Borneo, while the inter-
vening island (Banka) possesses a distinct form 3 ."
1 Geographical Distribution of Animals, vol. I. p. 359.
2 Island Life, p. 360.
3 As exemplified in the case of the birds of the genus Pitta.
VIII.] SUB-REGIONS. 303
Although not taking into account the relationship between the
fauna of Borneo and that of the Palawan sub-group, this may
be accepted as, on the whole, a very probable explanation of
the facts of the case. It may be added that while the Javan
rhinoceros (. sondaicus] is, as already stated, closely allied to the
Siwalik R. sivalensis, the nearest ally of R. sumatrensis appears to
be the extinct R. schleiermacheri of the European Miocene, thus
affording one more instance of affinity between the typical Ma-
layan fauna and that of the middle Tertiaries of Europe.
Recent investigations on the mammals from some of the small
chain of islands lying to the south-west of Sumatra,
such as Nias and Sipora in the Mentawi group, to-
gether with Christmas Island 1 , lying still further to Christmas
Islands.
the south, have shown that they differ very markedly
from those of the larger islands. From Sipora, in addition to
bats, Mr O. Thomas 2 records the following species, of which those
peculiar to the island are printed in italics :
Semnopithecus potenziani.
Macacus nemestrinus. Widely spread.
Tupaia ferruginea, var. hypochrysa. Java.
Paradoxurus, sp.
Pteromys nitidus. Widely distributed.
Sciuropterus lugens.
,, aurantiacus. Banka.
Sciurus melanogaster.
,, fraterculus.
Mus siporanus.
raja. N. Borneo.
From Christmas Island the same writer 3 records a peculiar
species of fruit-bat (Pteropus natalis], a variety of a widely-spread
musk-shrew (Croddura fuliginosa), and two peculiar rats (Mus
macleari, and M. nativitatis], remarkable for their large size.
Regarding the bearings of the faunas of these islands on the
general problem of distribution, Mr Thomas writes that the collec-
1 This must not be confounded with the island of the same name in
Polynesia.
2 Ann. Mus. Civ. Genova, Ser. 2, vol. xiv. pp. 660 672 (1895).
3 Proc. Zool. Soc. 1887, pp. 511514, and 1888, pp. 532 534.
304 THE ORIENTAL REGION. [CHAP.
tion from Sipora "does not show the very slightest special
relationship to Sumatra, and therefore lends weight to the view
that the Mentawi chain is the remnant of a long peninsula or
island, similar in shape to, but separate from the Malay Peninsula
or Sumatra. Further than this I cannot at present go, mainly
because we know so little of the small terrestrial mammals of the
other islands of the chain, those of the Nicobars being almost
unknown, and those of Simalu, Sibiru, and Pagi entirely, while
in Nias-and Engafio the collections consist mainly of bats. Still
the few indications there are, such as the relations to each other of
Pteropus nicobaricus, modiglianii, and natalis, and of Mus siporamis
and macleari, show that the mammals, like the other animals, pre-
sent a general similarity throughout the chain the whole way from
the Nicobars to Christmas Island."
Hitherto the Philippine Islands (exclusive of Palawan, Cala-
mianes, etc., which are classed with the Bornean
sub-re^on. 6 group ') have been regarded as forming a portion of
the Malayan sub-region ; but the discovery of a very
peculiar mammalian fauna in the mountains of Luzon 2 clearly
proves their right to form a sub-region apart. This mountain
fauna, which it is highly probable may also prove to be existent in
Mindanao, is evidently a very ancient one, showing certain indi-
cations of affinity with that of Australia; while the plain fauna
is of a more modern and generally Oriental type. Curiously
enough, the indications of affinity with the fauna of Celebes are
by no means strongly marked. Unfortunately, there is at present
no knowledge of the palseontological history of the mammalian
fauna of the group. The following species of mammals, exclusive
of bats, have been recorded from this sub-region 3 ; the names of
such genera and species as are peculiar being printed in italic type.
PRIMATES. Hylobates leuciscus.
Macacus cynomolgus. A distinct race 4 .
Tarsius philippinensis 1 '.
Nycticebus tardigradus.
1 Vide supra, p. 294. 2 See Thomas, Appendix, No. 31.
3 In addition to the paper cited above, see Bourns and Dear, Appendix,
No. n. 4 Often separated as M. philippinensis.
5 Meyer, Abh. Mtts. Dresden, 1894, Art. i, p. i.
VIII.]
SUB-REGIONS.
305
INSECTIVORA. Galeopithecus volans 1 .
Tupaia everetti.
CARNIVORA. Viverra tangalunga. Ranges to Celebes.
Paradoxurus philippinensis. Also Bornean.
Felis bengalensis.
RODENTIA. Sciurus philippinensis.
mindanensis.
,, samarensis.
cagsi.
Nannosciurus concinnus.
Chrotomys whiteheadi.
Xeromys silaceus. ' j
Phlaomys cumingi.
,, pallidus*.
Crateromys schatenbergi.
Rhynchomys soricoides.
Carpomys melanurus.
,, phczurus.
Mountains of Luzon.
UNGULATA.
Batomys granti.
Mus luzonicus. \
,, chrysocomus. \
neglectus.
,, ephippium. >
Bos mindorensis.
Cervus philippinus.
,, alfredi.
Sus celebensis, var. !
Mountains of Luzon.
Mountains of Luzon.
Elsewhere only in Celebes.
With the exception of the Tarsius, which is now regarded as a
peculiar species, the Primates are all wide-ranging forms, as is also
the case with Galeopithecus volans, Viverra tangalunga, and Felis
bengalensis. A relationship with Borneo is indicated by the Para-
doxurus and two species of Mus ; while the pig is typically a
Celebean form. The tamarao (J3os mindorensis] has its nearest ally
in the anoa of Celebes, but, as mentioned in an earlier chapter,
\ilippinensis.
1 The Philippine race has been separated as G.
2 Doubtfully distinct.
3 Equal S. marchei, Huet.
20
306 THE ORIENTAL REGION. [CHAP.
it is suggested that the animal in question is really a hybrid
between the latter and the Indian buffalo. The two species of
deer are small forms allied to the race of the sambar inhabiting
Java and Borneo ; the first in the list being uniformly coloured,
while the second is spotted with white at all ages. The so-called
Cervus marianus of Luzon appears to be inseparable from C.
philippinus.
It is remarkable that the six genera peculiar to the group all
belong to the Muridce, and that five of these are known only from
the mountains of Luzon. Moreover it is quite probable that the
species from the latter locality referred to the Australian genus
Xeromys ought really to be generically distinguished. It is among
the Murtdce that evidences of Australian affinities are alone ex-
hibited. As these murines have already been noticed on page 277
it will be unnecessary to allude to them further in this place.
Next to the peculiar rodents of the mountains, the most remark-
able feature about the fauna of the typical Philippines is the
absence of such a number of the most characteristic Malayan
genera of mammals. Among the Primates the deficiency of orangs
(Simia) is perhaps not very remarkable, but the total lack of
langurs (Semnopitkecus) and the presence of only a single species
of Macacus and Hylobates are most noteworthy. The macaque is,
however, distributed over all the islands of the group, and differs
from other forms of its species in its extremely light coloration, so
that it is scarcely likely to have been introduced by human agency.
Of Malayan genera which are absent, special note may be taken of
Linsanga, Arctogale, Arctictis, Cynogale, Herpestes, the wild dogs of
the sub-genus Cyon, Ursus, Tragulus 1 , and Elephas. Almost
equally well-marked peculiarities are exhibited by the bird fauna.
Apart from the tamarao, which has yet to be proved entitled
to rank as a valid species, the lowland mammalian fauna of the
Philippines is such as might have well reached the group by means
of a narrow connection of limited duration with some portion of
the Malay countries ; say, for instance, with Borneo by way of
Palawan. That such a connection must have been comparatively
recent is indicated by the identity of several of the Philippine
1 Represented by T. nigricans in Palawan.
VIII.] SUB-REGIONS. 307
species with Malayan forms and the absence of any peculiar
genera save Phlceomys. The absence of such a number of
Malayan types indicates, however, either that the connection must
have been exceedingly brief, or that a large number of species
formerly inhabiting the islands have been destroyed by sub-
mergence. On the other hand, the presence in the group of a
considerable proportion of widely spread continental genera of
birds suggests a more free communication with China than at
present exists ; such communication having not improbably taken
place by way of Formosa. The mountain fauna of Luzon doubt-
less indicates an earlier type of colonisation.
Note. Since the foregoing was written two papers have appeared on the
Fauna of the Natuna Islands; viz. O. Thomas, Novitates Zool. Vol. n. pp.
2628, and Thomas and Hartert, I.e. pp. 409 429.
2O 2
CHAPTER IX.
THE HOLARCTIC REGION.
Characteristics of the Mammalian Fauna Mammals of the Eastern Holarctic
Region Plistocene Fauna of the Holarctic Region Geographical Changes
since the Plistocene Western Division of the Region Arctic Sub -region
European Sub-region Central Asian Sub-region Tibetan Sub-region
Mantchurian Sub-region Mediterranean Sub-region Kashmir Ca-
nadian Sub-region Transition Zone.
BY far the most extensive of all the zoological regions of the
globe is that which is equivalent to the whole of the Palsearctic
and the greater portion of the Nearctic region of Messrs Sclater
and Wallace, the one to which Dr Heilprin (after a suggestion
of Professor A. Newton) applied the name Holarctic. In defining
this region, Dr Heilprin separated from it a Sonoran "transitional
region " in the Western Hemisphere, and a similar Mediterranean
or Tyrrhenian tract in the Eastern. Of these the former is
now accepted as a definite region ; but our knowledge of the
distribution of species in the Eastern Hemisphere is either too
imperfect, or the interdigitation of the two faunas is too complete
to admit of the full definition of a Mediterranean region. Accord-
ingly, without prejudice as to what it may be possible to ac-
complish in this direction in the future, the Mediterranean area
is provisionally included in the Holarctic region. It is, however,
important to observe that the reservation by Dr Heilprin of the
two transitional tracts already named justifies the use of the term
Holarctic even if both such tracts be raised to the rank of separate
regions ; and there is accordingly no necessity for the adoption of
Dr Blanford's term Aquilonian as equivalent to the restricted
Holarctic. Used in the sense here indicated, the Holarctic region
will comprise all that portion of Arctogasa lying north of the
CHAP. IX.] LIMITS AND FEATURES. 309
Sonoran region in America, and of the Ethiopian and Oriental
regions in the Old World. The whole area is extra-tropical ; and,
as Dr Heilprin remarks, " no other region can compare with the
Holarctic in the manifold variety of its physical characteristics.
Every form of terrestrial configuration, or condition of soil and
climate that may be represented in any other region, is also repre-
sented here, and on an imposing scale. From the ice-bound fields
of the far north to the burning desert-wastes of Turkestan on the
south, and from the deep forest-grown lowlands to mountain-
summits soaring thousands of feet above the level of perpetual
snow, we pass through all those various gradations of climate
which respectively characterise the Frigid, Temperate, and Torrid
zones. Densely covered forest-tracts, supporting, as in the north,
a sombre growth of pine and other coniferous trees, or, as in the
south, a vegetation of almost tropical luxuriance, alternate with
broadly open grass or pasture lands (tundras of Siberia, American
prairies and plains), which in some cases support over enormous
areas only a very scanty vegetation, and in others display a profuse
variety of vegetable productions. It is in this region that, in
addition to a most bountiful development of desert tracts, we meet
with the most elevated table-land (the Central Asian), and, at the
same time, with the greatest expanse of lowland on the surface of
the globe, the great plain of Siberia and north-eastern Europe."
Although the essential unity of the greater portion of the
Nearctic and Palaearctic regions has long been fully recognised by
the American zoologists, several attempts to bolster up the alleged
distinctness of these artificial divisions have recently been made in
England 1 , one proposal being to recognise an Arctic or Boreal
circumpolar province cut off from both areas, although this is
practically begging the whole question.
If I rightly understand his view, Dr C. H. Merriam 2 , who is
an ardent advocate for the zoological unity of the more northern
portions of both hemispheres, would distinguish a Boreal circum-
polar region common to both hemispheres ; while in America he
recognises south of this a Transition region, followed still more to
the south by the Sonoran. In the Old World he would have an
1 Appendix, Nos. 28 and 35.
2 Ibid. No. 19, pp. 24, 63.
310 THE HOLARCTIC REGION. [CHAP.
analogue of the Sonoran practically equivalent to the Mediter-
ranean sub-region of European writers but says nothing about
an analogue of the Transition; from which I infer that he
would use the term Boreal really as practically equivalent to the
Holarctic, if the Sonoran and Mediterranean areas were subtracted.
In the New World the Boreal, exclusive of the Transitional, is
divided into an Arctic and a Coniferous Forest Boreal zone, the
latter being frequently spoken of as the Boreal " zone," in contra-
distinction to the Boreal circumpolar "region"; the Arctic zone
including the tract beyond the limit of trees. The distinction
between the Boreal and Transition areas is certainly not of
regional value ; and as the term Boreal is used in several senses,
it had better give place to the earlier Holarctic.
As has been partially indicated in earlier chapters, and as will
be more fully noticed in the sequel, there is undoubtedly a marked
distinction between the mammals of North America as a whole
and those of Europe and northern Asia, but this has been con-
siderably exaggerated by including the Sonoran region in the old
Nearctic, and is overshadowed by the number of genera and
species common to the two areas and unknown elsewhere. Could
a Mediterranean region be satisfactorily denned, the homogeneity
of the mammalian Holarctic fauna would be still more apparent ;
but this, from the great mingling of northern and southern types
which has taken place in the Old World, is, I think, impracticable,
As has been already mentioned, it is probable that the western
and eastern halves of the Holarctic region have never had more
than a comparatively small area of communication by way of
Bering Strait, and, therefore, the further south we travel in the
two areas the more distinct do the faunas become; while only
such forms as are capable of withstanding a certain degree of cold
have ever been able to cross at all. It may be added that the
evidence for the unity of the Holarctic region is by no means
solely dependent upon the mammalian fauna, but is supported by
many other groups of animals. To take an instance from the
insects, I may quote from Mr W. F. Kirby l , who writes as follows :
" Had I been dealing with Lepidoptera only, I would certainly
1 Joitrn. Linn. Soc. Zool. 1873, p. 432.
IX.] CHARACTERISTICS OF THE FAUNA. 311
have united Dr Sclater's Palaearctic region and Nearctic region ;
for although the species of North American Rhopalocera are
seldom identical with those of northern Asia and Europe, still the
genera are the same with scarcely an exception, except a few
representatives of South American genera, which have no more
right to be considered Nearctic species than the similar chance
representatives of African 1 forms in North Africa or south-west
Europe, or of Indian forms in south-east Europe, have to be con-
sidered Palaearctic species."
On the other hand, North America differs remarkably from the
eastern half of the Holarctic region as regards its land molluscs.
Thus the Rev. A. H. Cooke 2 writes, that " no district in the world
of equal extent is so poor in genera, while those which occur are
generally of small size, with scarcely anything remarkable either in
colouring or form. The elongated land-shells (Clausilia, Bull-
minus] so characteristic of Europe are entirely wanting, but a few
Bulimulus, of Neotropical origin, penetrate Texas, and from the
same sources come a few species of Glandina (as far north as
South Carolina), Holospira (Texas), and Helicina" Probably this
poverty is largely due to the unsuitableness of the greater part of
North America to molluscan life ; aided by the circumstance that
land-molluscs are just the creatures that would have been unable
to pass over from Asia by way of Bering Strait. The batrachians,
again, which differ most remarkably in their distribution from
mammals, are not indicative of the unity of the Holarctic region,
the American types being very different from those of the Eastern
Hemisphere.
According, however, to Mr F. E. Beddard 3 , " the earth-worms
offer the best evidence of any group in favour of the Holarctic
region."
Although during the Plistocene era even subsequently to the
passing away of the glacial period elephants, rhino-
ceroses, and hippopotami abounded over the greater tics ^he
part of Europe, while species of the two former
groups ranged as far north as Siberia, and macaques
1 The author obviously means Ethiopian.
2 Cambridge Natural History Mollusca, p. 339 (1895).
3 Appendix, No. 5, p. 80.
312 THE HOLARCTIC REGION. [CHAP.
were found in France and England, yet the Holarctic region is
now characterised by the absence of all these animals, save a few
species of Macacus on its southern borders ; and if a Mediterranean
region could be satisfactorily defined, even these, as well as hyaenas
and certain other southern types, would likewise be excluded.
The fruit-bats constituting the family Pteropodidce. are likewise
practically wanting in this region; and Effodientia are quite
unknown. On the other hand, carnivores, such as wolves, foxes,
bears, martens, weasels, and the glutton, are abundant ; while the
rodents are specially represented by such types as the marmots,
beavers, voles, and picas ; and the ungulates comprise the bisons,
nearly all the sheep, the true goats (absent in the western half of
the region), and all the typical deer.
Referring in more detail to the peculiar generic types common
to the region as a whole, we have, first of all, among the Insecti-
vora the typical or true shrews (Sorex] which belong to that
section of the Soricidcz characterised by having the tips of the teeth
stained brownish-red in the main characteristic of this region,
although in America they extend southwards into the Sonoran.
In the allied family of the Talpida, the mole-shrews ( Urotrichus],
which are near relatives of the European desmans, are represented
solely by one Japanese, and a second North American species,
although the latter is frequently separated generically as Neuro-
trichus.
The peculiar genera of Carnivora are but few, although certain
groups are either confined to, or very strongly represented in, the
region. For instance, among the Felidce the true lynxes which
although generally included in the genus Felts, are by some
regarded as entitled to form a genus by themselves are absolutely
confined to this region, where they range as far south as Spain.
The bears (Ursus], also, are very strongly represented; brown-
coloured species being peculiar to the Holarctic area, as is the
very distinct polar species to its Arctic portions. The peculiar
sea-otter, the sole representative of the genus Latax, has a distri-
bution very similar to that of the mole-shrews ; this animal occur-
ring on the coasts of Kamschatka and the Kurile Islands, as well
as on those of the Aleutians. The wolverene (Gulo}, which is like-
wise the only member of its genus, has a more extended range,
IX.] RODENTS. 313
being found throughout the forest regions of northern Europe,
Asia, and North America, while in the Plistocene era it ranged as
far south as England. Although marine mammals are for the
most part omitted in this work, the walruses (Trichechidcz), which
now have a circumpolar distinction, can scarcely be omitted, since
these animals never wander far from land. Remains of the
existing forms have been disinterred from the peat of the English
fens, while tusks of fossil species have been discovered in the
Pliocene Crag of the east of England, and also in the corre-
sponding deposits of Belgium.
Passing on to the rodents, we have in the Sciuridce the ground-
squirrels or chipmunks ( Tamias] practically confined to the region.
Although in America they also extend into the Sonoran, in Europe
they are unknown in the Mediterranean area. The pouches in
the cheeks for storing food and the alternate dark and light longi-
tudinal bands down the back serve to distinguish the chipmunks
from other squirrels. Fossil remains of the genus, probably
belonging to existing species, occur in the Plistocene of Europe
and North America. The family of the beavers (Castoridcz) seems
always to have been mainly confined to the Holarctic region, one
of the two existing species ( Castor fiber] being European, and
dating from the English Plistocene, while the other (C. canadensis]
is North American. Whereas, however, the latter ranges south-
wards into the Sonoran region, the former is unknown in the
Mediterranean sub-region. Fossil species of this genus occur in
the upper Tertiaries of Europe and North America, where the
extinct Chalicomys is likewise met with ; but no beavers are known
from either the Siwaliks or the Pikermi beds. Although there are
few generic types of Muridce peculiar to the whole region, such as
there are are important. Foremost of these are the great tribe of
the voles (Microtus 1 }, constituting the typical representatives of a
sub-family nearly allied to the cricetines, but distinguished by the
two longitudinal rows of tubercles on the crowns of the molar teeth
being modified into alternating triangular prisms, and likewise by
these teeth being generally of the hypsodont type. In the Old
World they are found from the Arctic zone to Asia Minor, while
1 Commonly known by the later name of Arvicola.
3 H THE HOLARCTIC REGION. [CHAP.
in America they enter the Sonoran region. As fossils, they appear
to be first known from the upper Pliocene Crag of England ; and
were thus probably evolved within the Holarctic region from the
more generalised cricetines at a comparatively late epoch. Nearly
allied are the lemmings (My odes), which are, however, a more
northern type, unknown in the Mediterranean sub-region, and
likewise in the Sonoran. Still more northern, and indeed circum-
polar in its range, is the banded lemming, which alone represents
a genus (Cuniculus) distinguished from the last by the absence of
external ears, the short and thick fur on the feet, the rudimentary
first toe of the fore feet, and the elongation of the two middle
claws of the same. The second of the two families peculiar
to the region is that of the picas, or tailless hares (Lagomyidce),
comprising small hare -like animals with short ears, of which
all the living forms are included in the single genus Lagomys.
While the majority of the picas are confined to the highlands
of Central Asia, some are found on the first snowy range of the
Himalaya, and both south-east Europe and the Rocky Mountains
severally possess a representative. Fossil forms are common in
the middle and upper Tertiaries of Europe, as far south as Sardinia.
Although the hare-tribe (Leporidcz) have an almost cosmopolitan
distribution, the majority of species of Lepus are inhabitants of the
Holarctic region, Central Asia being especially rich in representa-
tives of the genus.
Among the Bovidtz, the bisons, which form a well-marked
group of the genus Bos, may be regarded as now characteristic of
the region, although the American Bos americanus ranges into the
Sonoran. In addition to the European B. bison, which was for-
merly spread over the greater part of Europe and during the
Plistocene extended into Arctic America, there is also the some-
what aberrant yak (B. grunniens) of Tibet, In the Plistocene the
range of the group was somewhat more extensive, remains of an
extinct species having been found in deposits of that age in
Texas ; and there is likewise another from the Pliocene of northern
India. The sheep constitute a group mainly characteristic of the
Holarctic region ; their headquarters being the Central Asian
plateau, where they are more numerous than anywhere else in
the world, although one species (Ovis vignei) impinges on the
IX.] LIST OF THE FAUNA. 315
north-western frontier of the Oriental region, while the single
North American form also enters the Sonoran. In a fossil state
it is possible that sheep occur in the Indian Siwaliks, but else-
where they are first known from the Forest-bed of the Norfolk
coast, belonging to the early part of the Plistocene epoch. More
nearly allied to the sheep than to the goats, the musk-ox (Ovibos)
of Arctic America is now extinct in the Old World, but as it is
abundant in the Plistocene of Europe and Asia, where it ranged as
far south as England, it is surely entitled to rank among the forms
common to the western and eastern halves of the Holarctic region.
Nearly allied extinct species occur in the Plistocene formations of
the United States. Among the Cervidce. there are three types
common to the entire region. The first, or Elaphine group,
includes the typical members of the genus Cervus, as represented
by the red deer (C. elaphus) of the Old World and the wapiti (C.
canadensis) of North America; this group being characterised,
among other features, by the general presence of both a brow-
and a bez-tine to the antlers, although the latter is wanting in
the North African variety of the red deer, and also in the Tibetan
C. thoroldi. The alliance between the wapiti and some of the
forms inhabiting Central Asia is so close as to render it doubtful
whether they are really anything more than varieties of a single
species. The single species of elk (Alces) is common to both
halves of the region ; and the same is also the case with the
reindeer (jRangtfer), which although now not found to the south
of Europe, ranged during the Plistocene era into the south of
France. The genera or groups which may be regarded as charac-
teristic of the entire Holarctic region may be tabulated as follows,
those which are practically peculiar being printed in italics :
Insectivora.
SORICID^E. Sorex. In America ranges into Sonoran.
TALPID^E. Urotrichus. Japan and N. America.
Carnivora.
FELID^E. Felis, the true lynxes solely Holarctic.
MUSTELID.E. Latax. \ One species common to both
Gulo. J hemispheres.
TRICHECHW&. Trichechus.
THE HOLARCTIC REGION.
[CHAP.
Rodentia.
Tamtas. Ranges into Sonoran.
Arctomys.
Spermophilus.
CASTORID^E. Castor. *) ..
,, ,,-. \ Also Sonoran.
MURID^E. Microtus. }
Myodes.
Cuniculus.
LA COM YIDSE. Lagomys.
LEPORID^:. Lepus, the greater number of species Hol-
arctic.
Ungulata.
Bos, the bison group chiefly Holarctic, al-
though the American species reaches
the Sonoran.
Ovis, just touches Oriental, and also reaches
Sonoran.
Ovibos, now extinct in the Old World, where
it was common in the Plistocene.
The arguments for the unity of the Holarctic region are, how-
ever, by no means confined to the case of genera, for there are a
number of species which either have a circumpolar range, or
which are represented by closely allied forms in the opposite
hemisphere. It is true, indeed, that many of these are now more
or less exclusively Arctic in their distribution, but some range a
long distance to the south ; while during the Plistocene epoch this
was the case with the majority. The following list includes the
more important species which are either common to the eastern
and western halves of the region or have representative forms
in the two hemispheres ; those which are strictly Arctic having
the letter P appended :
1. Common lynx (Felis lynx). Canadian lynx (F. cana-
densis). P.
2. Wolf (Cants lupus).
3. Fox (Cants vulpes).
4. Arctic fox (Cants lagopus). P.
5. Brown bear ( Ursus arctus).
IX.] LIST OF THE FAUNA. 317
6. Polar bear ( Ursus maritimus). P.
7. Sea-otter (Latax lutris).
8. Pine-marten (Mustela martes). American marten (M.
ameHcana).
9. Weasel (Mustela vulgaris).
10. Wolverene (Gulo luscus).
11. Walrus (Trichechus rosmarus).
12. Arctic vole (Microtus rutilus). P.
13. Common lemming (Myodes lemmus). American lemming
(M. obensis).
14. Banded lemming (Cuniculus torquatus). P.
15. European beaver (Castor fiber}. American beaver (C.
canadensis].
1 6. Mountain hare (Lepus timidus^}.
17. Bison (Bos bison). American bison (B. americanus).
1 8. Kamschatkan sheep (Ovis nivicola). Bighorn (O. cana-
densis}.
19. Musk-ox (Ovibos moschatus).
20. Central Asian deer (Cervus eustephanus). Wapiti (C.
canadensis}.
2 1 . Elk (Alces machlis}.
22. Reindeer (Rangifer tarandus}.
If the Plistocene be taken into consideration there may be
added the mammoth (Elephas primigenius) and the horse (Equus
caballus), remains of both of which have been discovered in
Eschscholtz Bay, where those of the European bison also occur.
In this list it may be noticed that the North American lynx is
so closely allied to the European form that it has been a question
whether it is really more than a local variety. Although the
American wolf has been separated as a distinct species, it is now
generally identified with the European form ; the same being also
the case with the so-called cross-fox of North America, which,
together with another form from the Himalaya, and a third from
North Africa, may be considered a mere variety of the ordinary
1 This name is commonly applied to the English hare, although it properly
belongs to the more northern species. The so-called Polar hare (Z. glacialis)
of Arctic America appears to be only a variety.
3l8 THE HOLARCTIC REGION. [CHAP.
fox. Much discussion has taken place with regard to whether any
of the bears of North America are distinct from the common brown
bear ( Ursus arctus), with its many Asiatic varieties. According,
however, to one of the latest memoirs on this subject 1 , all these
forms appear mere varieties of the latter, the so-called cinnamon
and black bears presenting more distinctly marked differences
than does the grizzly. The American marten is so nearly related
to the European marten and the Asiatic sable that it is almost
impossible to point out valid characters by which the three forms
can be specifically distinguished. In the case of the walrus, the
Pacific form is distinguished by certain external features from the
one inhabiting the Atlantic coasts, although these are scarcely of
sufficient importance to be ranked as specific. In regard to the
Arctic vole, it may be mentioned that although it is typically a
polar form, yet it is represented in southern Europe by the bank-
vole (Microtus glareolus) and in the United States by Gapper's
vole (M. gapperi\ both of which may be regarded as southern
climatic offshoots from the northern stock. Among the other
species of rodents it will suffice to mention that the European
and American beavers are merely distinguished from each other
by the relative lengths of the nasal bones of the skull. And it
may be added that the Kamschatkan wild sheep is so closely
related to one race of the bighorn, or Rocky Mountain sheep, that
it is very questionable whether the two are really entitled to
specific distinction. The same is also the case with the two deer
mentioned in the list. Reference has already been made to the
circumstance that the musk-ox is extinct in the eastern division
of the region. A few of the American forms, such as the bear,
beaver, bison, and bighorn, enter the limits of the Sonoran region.
Although, as will be shown immediately, there are a large
number of generic types respectively confined to its eastern and
western divisions, the lists given above, especially the one relating
to the species, are amply sufficient to demonstrate the essential
unity of the Holarctic region. None of the other zoological
regions have anything like the number of common or representa-
1 A. E. Brown, Proc. Ac. Philad. 1894, pp. 119, 129. Merriam, P. BioL
Soc. Washington, vol. x. pp. 65 83 (1896), regards the N. American bears as
forming several distinct species.
IX.] EASTERN DIVISION. 319
tive species which characterise the two divisions of the present
one. It must, moreover, be remembered that in the case of the
other regions we have taken the whole of the peculiar generic
types into consideration, although many of them are confined to
small portions of such regions, whereas in the present instance
only those which range over nearly the whole area have been
mentioned. If, for instance, we were to take the genera respec-
tively confined to the Indian and Malayan areas of the Oriental
region, it would be found that the distinction between the two
areas would be nearly or quite as marked as are the two great
divisions of the Holarctic, while in the matter of species the
differences between the two would be far greater. There would
accordingly be stronger grounds for making an Indian and a
Malayan region than there are for the separation of a Palsearctic
and a Nearctic.
Having now discussed the leading mammalian types character-
istic of the Holarctic region as a whole, it remains
to notice those confined to its eastern division, t f
after which such as are restricted to its western half Holarctic
will be taken into consideration. And here it is
advisable to repeat that since the communication between eastern
Asia and North America by way of Bering Strait appears always
to have been of very limited extent, as we proceed south in the
two great continental areas the difference between their faunas
appears more and more strongly marked. Accordingly, if it were
possible definitely to establish a Mediterranean region, the dis-
tinction between the faunas of the eastern and western divisions
of the Holarctic would be much less than is the case under the
arrangement here followed.
Passing by the bats entirely, no notice will be taken of groups
which, like the hedgehogs (Erinaceus), are spread over several of
the regions of Eastern Arctogaea, since these are not in any way
characteristic of the eastern division of the Holarctic region 1 .
The first mammal that presents itself for notice is accordingly the
water-shrew, which is the sole representative of the genus Crosso-
pus, and belongs to that division of the Soricidce in which the
1 Such types have been discussed when considering the fauna of Eastern
Arctogaea, supra, p. 181.
320 THE HOLARCTIC REGION. [CHAP.
teeth are stained red ; the especial characteristic of the genus being
the thickly-fringed feet and tail. The water-shrew is a typical
Holarctic mammal, ranging as far east as the Altai mountains and
unknown in the Mediterranean sub-region. In the second division
of the same family, or that in which the teeth are white, there is a
peculiar shrew from the Kirghiz steppes nearly allied to the
FIG. 66. RUSSIAN DESMAN (Myogale moschata}.
widely-spread musk-shrews (Croridura), but constituting a genus
(Diplomesodon) by itself. To the same sub-family belongs the
Tibetan water-shrew (Nectogale], which is likewise the solitary
representative of its genus, and is closely allied to Chimarrogale,
which has, as elsewhere stated, one Oriental and one Japanese
species. Both these types are accordingly closely connected with
the Oriental region, although nothing is known of their past
history. Far more characteristic of the eastern half of the region
IX.] EASTERN DIVISION. 321
under consideration are the two species of desman (Myogale),
which are aquatic insectivores, with long trunk-like snouts, some-
what intermediate between the shrews and the moles. Of the two
living species, the smaller is confined to the region of the Pyrenees,
extending as far north as the Department of the Landes, while
the other is now restricted to south-eastern Russia, although its
fossilised remains have been discovered in the Plistocene Forest-
bed of the east of England. Extinct species occur in the Mio-
cene and upper Oligocene of the Continent. A slate-coloured
insectivore, with the external form of a shrew but the skull of a
mole, inhabiting Eastern Tibet, constitutes the genus Uropsilus ;
and the more mole-like creature known as Scaptonyx is likewise
from the same locality. In any case, these two animals only just
enter the border of the region, so that they cannot be regarded as
characteristic Holarctic types ; and, indeed, the Moupin district
of Eastern Tibet is included by Dr Wallace in the Oriental region,
although it is assigned by others to the Holarctic. Although two
species occur to the south of the Himalaya, the true moles (Talpa)
are very characteristic of the eastern Holarctic region, the common
species ranging from England to Japan, and dating from the epoch
of the Norfolk Forest-bed; while fossil species, some of which
have been separated as Protalpa, range through the Tertiaries of
Europe to the epoch of the upper Oligocene. By some writers
Talpa moschata of Eastern Tibet is distinguished as Scaptochirns.
Among the Carnivora the widely spread Old World genera
Genetta, Herpestes, and Hyczna enter the Mediterranean sub-region,
but are unknown elsewhere in the Holarctic area at the present
day. The Ursidce include a most remarkable generic type known
as ALluropus, represented by the parti-coloured bear of Tibet, in
which the cheek-teeth present a decided approximation to the
extinct Hytznarctus and also resemble those of the panda
(jElurus). This genus is another of the border-forms between the
Holarctic and Oriental regions. On the other hand, the badgers
(Meles) are very characteristic of the area under consideration,
ranging from England through the rest of Europe to Japan and
China, where one species enters the Oriental region, being found
as far south as Hongkong. Remains of extinct badgers occur
in the lower Pliocene of Persia.
L. 21
322 THE HOLARCTIC REGION. [CHAP.
The list of more or less peculiar generic types among the
rodents is relatively large. Foremost among these stands a very
large flying-squirrel {Eupetaurus}, inhabiting the regions north of
Kashmir and Tibet, and distinguished from all other members
of the family to which it belongs by its tall-crowned (Jiypsodonf]
cheek-teeth. In the dormouse family (Myoxida) the squirrel-
tailed species, which is the sole representative of the genus
~Myoxus in its restricted sense, and the common dormouse, alone
constituting Muscardinus, are exclusively European ; fossil forms
occurring through the upper and middle Tertiaries.
In the Muridce. the hamsters (Crtcetus), if regarded as generi-
cally distinct from their allies the white-footed mice (Sitomys] of the
New World, are absolutely characteristic of the eastern division of
the Holarctic region, where they range over a large portion of
Europe and northern Asia. Extinct species are abundant in the
European Tertiaries. Two genera of the mole-like rodents,
having the dentition of voles, but approximating in the form of
their body and limbs to the moles, constitute a sub-family which is
also restricted to this area. Of these mole-voles, the first genus
(Ellobius] is represented by one species from Russia and another
from Afghanistan, while the second (Siphneus) includes several
forms from North and Central Asia; fossil species of the latter
having been described from the Plistocene of the Altai and the
Pliocene of northern China. The great mole-rat (Spalax typhlus)
of southern Europe, Persia, Mesopotamia, Syria and Egypt, repre-
sents the only genus among the Spalacidce. which is confined to
the present area. The Dipodidce, on the other hand, contain
several characteristic eastern Holarctic generic types. The most
aberrant of these are the rat-like animals constituting the genus
Sminthus, of which one species inhabits eastern and northern
Europe and Central Asia, while a second is found in Kashmir,
and a third in the Kansu district of China. Of the more typical
forms, the true jerboas (Dipus), characterised by having only three
toes, are exclusively Holarctic, ranging from Egypt into Central
Asia, where they always frequent desert districts. Of the genera
with five toes, Euchoretes is represented by a single long-snouted
and long-eared species from the neighbourhood of Yarkund ; and
Platycer corny s, which differs by its flattened and lancet-shaped
IX.]
EASTERN DIVISION.
323
tail, includes several species, extending from Siberia to Nubia,
so that the genus just enters the Ethiopian region. It is repre-
sented in the Plistocene of northern Asia. Lastly, there is the
genus Alactaga, of which there are several species, mostly inhabit-
ants of Northern and Central Asia. The typical A. jaculus
extends, however, into Persia and southern Russia, while in the
Plistocene it ranged as far west as Germany ; and another species
is an inhabitant of Afghanistan. Although mainly an Ethiopian
FIG. 67. HEAD OF SPANISH IBEX (Capra pyrenaica).
and Neotropical family, the Octodontidce. have an Holarctic repre-
sentative in the gundi (Ctenodactylus\ which inhabits the borders
of the Sahara in the neighbourhood of Tripoli. The extinct
Pellegrinia, of the Sardinian Pliocene, also belongs to the same
family.
21 2
324 THE HOLARCTIC REGION. [CHAP.
Among the artiodactyle ungulates there are six genera, either
entirely or mainly confined to the eastern Holarctic region. Of
these, the true goats that is to say, the members of the genus
Capra, as distinct from the Oriental and Arabian Hemitragus are
almost exclusively Holarctic, although C. walie inhabits the
Abyssinian highlands, and C. siniatica, of Palestine and upper
Egypt, may also enter the confines of the Ethiopian region. All
the goats, it may be observed, are essentially mountain-dwelling
animals, and the occurrence of the same species of ibex (C.
sibiricd) in both the Altai and Himalaya is a clear proof of the
former prevalence of colder conditions, as without these the ani-
mal could not have passed from the one range to the other. The
sheep also in spite of the existence of outlying North American
species, and a variety of one Central Asian form (Ovis vignei]
which enters the north-western confines of India are mainly cha-
racteristic of the area under consideration, attaining their great-
est numerical development, and also their maximum size, in the
highlands of Central Asia. The range of the genus includes almost
the whole of the eastern Holarctic region, the mouflon (O. musimon)
inhabiting the Corsican islands, and the aberrant arui (O. tragela-
phus] being found in northern Africa. It is possible that fossil
sheep occur in the Indian Siwaliks (where remains of a goat allied
to the Himalayan markhor are also met with), and a large species
is definitely known from the Norfolk Forest-bed. The next on
our list is the remarkable goat-like antelope from the hills to the
north of the Assam known as the takin (Budorcas], which is allied
to the Oriental Nemorhczdus, and is therefore probably an immi-
grant into the region from the southward. Allied to this group is
the chamois, or gemse (Rupicapra), now confined to the higher
mountain-ranges of Europe from the Pyrenees to the Caucasus,
but which during the Plistocene epoch ranged over many of the
lowlands. Among the true antelopes, the addax (Addax], an ally
of the oryx group, is an exclusively Mediterranean type, inhabiting
North Africa and Syria, where there are also representatives of
other genera which are typically Ethiopian. More thoroughly
Holarctic are the two peculiar but allied genera Saiga and Panthol-
ops, each represented by a single living species. The saiga is now
confined to the steppes of western Asia and Eastern Europe, but
IX.]
EASTERN DIVISION.
325
during the Plistocene epoch extended as far westwards as Germany,
France, and England. The chiru, as the representative of the
second genus is called, is, on the other hand, an exclusively
Tibetan form ; and it is believed that a fossil species occurs in the
later Tertiary formations of the same area, where, curiously enough,
a rhinoceros also existed. Although gazelles (Gazella) have repre-
sentatives in both the Oriental and Ethiopian regions, they are
mainly characteristic of the desert districts of the eastern Holarctic
region, being especially numerous in North Africa, Syria, and parts
FIG. 68. MUSK-DEER (Moschus moschiferus).
of Central Asia. An inhabitant of the cooler regions of Asia,
where it extends from the south of Siberia to Kashmir and Cochin
China, the musk-deer (Moschus) represents a peculiar sub-family
of the Cervidoe, confined to the region under consideration. A
second species has been described from Kansu, in north-western
China, and it is not improbable that the genus is also represented
in the Indian Siwaliks. Although agreeing with the musk-deer in
the absence of antlers and the presence of long tusks in the upper
326 THE HOLARCTIC REGION. [CHAP.
jaw of the males, the Chinese water-deer (Hydropotes), from the
valley of the Yang-tsi-kiang, belongs to the more typical Cervidce.
Another genus (Elaphodus) more nearly allied to the muntjacs is
also Asiatic, being represented by one species from near Ningpo,
in China, and by a second from Moupin, in eastern Tibet. Of
the true deer (Cervus) there are two groups confined to the area
under consideration. Firstly, there is the elaphurine group, repre-
sented solely by the aberrant David's deer (C. davidianus\ of
northern China; and, secondly, we have the damine group, of
which the fallow deer (C. dama) of the Mediterranean countries
and the Persian fallow deer (C. mesopotamicus] are the living
forms. Allied types occur in the East Anglian Forest-bed, and
the gigantic extinct Irish deer (C. gigantens] must likewise be
included in the group, all the members of which have the antlers
more or less palmated.
As regards the camels (Camelus), there is some difficulty in
arriving at a satisfactory conclusion, since although a feral race of
the Asiatic C. bactrianus is met with in the deserts bordering Kash-
gar, it is now pretty well ascertained that really wild camels exist
nowhere in the world. Still, however, as fossil species of the
genus are met with in the Pliocene of the Siwalik Hills (on the
borders of the Oriental and Holarctic regions) and in the Plisto-
cene of Algeria, it is probable that the group is of Holarctic origin 1 .
The foregoing survey may be summarised as follows : the
names of such genera or groups as are mainly or exclusively con-
fined to the eastern division of the Holarctic region being printed
in italic type.
Insect! vora.
SORICID^:. Crossopus.
Diplomesodon. C. Asia.
Nectogale. Tibet.
TALPID/E. Uropsilus. \ _..
_, -V \ E. Tibet.
Scaptonyx. )
Talpa. Also enters Oriental.
URSID^E. sEluropus. Tibet.
MUSTELID^E. Meles. Enters E. Oriental.
1 See page 281.
IX.]
EASTERN DIVISION.
327
Rodentia.
MURID/E.
SPALA CID&.
OCTODONTID^E.
Ungulata.
CERVID^E.
Eupetaurus. Tibetan.
Myoxus.
Muscardinus.
Cricetus.
Ellobius.
Sip /incus.
Spalax.
Sminthus.
Dipus.
Euchoretes. Central Asian.
Platycer corny s. Enters Ethiopia.
Alactaga,
Ctenodactylus. North African.
CAMELID/E.
Capra. An outlying Ethiopian species.
Ovis. One N. American species, and one
from Central Asia entering Oriental.
Budorcas. Tibetan.
Rupicapra. European.
Addax. Mediterranean.
Saiga. Central Asian.
Pantholops. Tibetan.
Gazella. A large proportion of the species
E. Holarctic.
Cervus. The Elaphurine and Damine
groups exclusively E. Holarctic; the
former Central Asian, and the latter
Mediterranean.
Elaphodus. E. Tibet and China.
Hydropotes. Chinese.
Moschus. Asiatic.
(?) Camelus.
With the possible exception of the Camelidce, none of the
families in the foregoing list are peculiar to the area in question
a feature presenting a marked contrast to the lists of the character-
328 THE HOLARCTIC REGION. [CHAP.
istic mammalian genera of the Ethiopian and Oriental regions
given above. The total number of genera which can in any sense
be considered as peculiar to the eastern half of the Holarctic
region does not exceed thirty ; and among these Uropsilus, Scapt-
onyx, Elaphodus, and Hydropotes can only be regarded as intruders
from the Oriental region ; while Ctenodactylus and Addax are
manifestly Ethiopian types. Indeed, if a Mediterranean region
were established, the whole of these, and probably also the true
Tibetan forms, would have to be removed from the lists. Apart
from the absence of peculiar families, the list bears no comparison
as regards numbers with that of the mammalian genera distinctive
of the Ethiopian region ; while, with the aforesaid deductions, it
is also considerably inferior to that of the Oriental region. All
this confirms the conclusions already drawn as to the inad-
visability of regarding the area under consideration as a separate
zoological region.
The Pliocene and earlier Tertiary faunas of this area having
already been considered in connection with Eastern
Arctogsea in general in an earlier chapter, we may
Eastern Hoi- p ass O n to a brief review of the Plistocene mammals
arctic Region.
of the eastern division of the Holarctic region, pre-
paratory to the consideration of the sub-regions into which the
latter is divided. The Plistocene period may be taken in England
to commence with the Forest-bed of the Norfolk coast, which
overlies the topmost of the Pliocene Crag series, and is itself
overlain by the glacial deposits. To a later epoch of the same
period belong the brick-earths and gravels of our river valleys, as
well as the cavern-deposits ; many of these being either of post-
or inter-glacial age.
During the Plistocene period two very remarkable differences
from the existing state of things have to be noticed. In the first
place, the eastern Holarctic region was at that time very much
less distinctly differentiated from either the Ethiopian or the
Oriental than is the case at the present day ; macaques, hyaenas,
the lion, rhinoceroses, hippopotami, and elephants abounding in
Europe even as far north as England. The second point is the
curious mixture of remains of existing species of mammals respec-
tively characteristic of hot and cold climates met with in many
IX.] EASTERN PLISTOCENE FAUNA. 329
parts of England and France. For instance, the glutton, rein-
deer, Arctic fox, and musk-ox are animals whose presence seems
indicative of a more or less decidedly Arctic climate ; many of the
voles, picas, jerboas, and susliks, together with the saiga antelope,
appear to point with equal force to the prevalence of steppe-like
conditions ; while the hippopotamus and spotted hyaena seem as
strongly in favour of a subtropical state of things. Nevertheless,
remains of several of these groups have been found in such close
association as to leave no doubt that the animals lived and died
hard by where they are now buried. Much evidence on this point
has been collected by Sir H. H. Howorth 1 , who writes as follows :
" Cuvier, whose prejudices were the other way, was long ago con-
strained to write of the remains of reindeer found with those of
the mammoth and rhinoceros in the cave at Breugue : ' II ne faut
pas douter qu'il [the rhinoceros] n'ait dte enseveli avec lui [the
reindeer] a Breugue. Ses os y e'taient pele-mele avec ceux de ce
grand quadrupede, enveloppes dans la meme terre rouge, et
revetus en partie de la meme stalactite.' In the high-level
gravels of the Thames valley the mammoth and woolly rhinoceros
occurred with the Elephas antiquus ^ while in the low-level gravels
the Rhinoceros leptorhinus and the hippopotamus occurred with
the bison and the musk-ox 2 , together with a worked flint.
The lemming and the reindeer occurred with the lion and
hyaena at Bleadon, the lemming with the lion and hyaena
at Wookey-Hole. The reindeer and the grizzly bear were
associated with the hippopotamus at Cefn, and the E. antiquus
with the mammoth at Durdham Down. The hippopotamus and
the E. antiquus have been found with the reindeer and bison in
Kirk dale Cave ; the hippopotamus with the wild boar, the rein-
deer, the mammoth, and the E. antiquus at Brentford. Lartet
says that in France remains of the hippopotamus have been found
in one cave, that of Arcy, in which the reindeer has also occurred,
accompanied by a worked flint. At St Acheul and in the Somme
valley the same two animals have occurred together, and also at
Levallos, in the Seine valley. At Viry Noureuil, near Chauny
1 The Mammoth and the Flood (London, 1887), pp. 114, 115.
2 The author uses the term musk-sheep for this animal ; a few other verbal
alterations have been made in the quotation.
33 THE HOLARCriC REGION. [CHAP.
(Aisne), the mammoth and Rhinoceros antiquitatis have occurred
with the hippopotamus, the reindeer, and the musk-ox. At
Bicetre, close to Paris, the lion is associated with northern voles,
a marmot, a lizard, and a snake. At Montmorency the mole and
the hedgehog have occurred with the hamster, the suslik, and the
pica. In Auvergne, M. Pomel has found an elephant and the
woolly rhinoceros with a cat, a suslik, and a hamster, together with
snakes, lizards, frogs, and with shells such as are still found in the
district. In Germany it is the same. At Westeregeln the lion
and the spotted hyaena, the mammoth and rhinoceros were found
with the marmot, the suslik, the lemming, the pica, and the rein-
deer. At Thiede, the mammoth, woolly rhinoceros, the horse, the
ox, the reindeer, the Arctic fox, the lemming, and the pica; and
so we might continue throughout the majority of the German
caverns."
Many attempts have been made to reconcile these apparently
contradictory facts ; one of the older views being that while the
tropical types of mammals lived during warm interludes, they
migrated southwards with the incoming of colder conditions to
give place to the more Arctic fauna. The associations mentioned
above render it, however, perfectly certain that such an explanation
is not the right one. On the other hand, it must be remembered
that there is yet much to be learnt about the effects of climate on
mammals ; and the mammalian fauna of the Tibetan plateau shews
that many types of animals formerly regarded as more or less
essentially tropical or sub-tropical are capable of withstanding a
winter climate of extreme severity. Thus in parts of Tibet, as
well as in Kashmir, langurs and macaques may be seen leaping
among the snow-clad branches of pines. Still it is perhaps diffi-
cult to understand how two such animals as the hippopotamus
and the reindeer could have inhabited the same locality contem-
poraneously 1 .
In spite of this association of Arctic and sub-tropical forms,
there appears, however, to be evidence of a northern and southern
1 The present writer is not prepared to accept the view of Mr A. H. Keane
(Mthnology, Cambridge Geographical Series, p. 65, 1896) that the reindeer has
only recently become adapted to a northern habitat. Among other circum-
stances, its remains are unknown from the Forest-bed.
IX.] EASTERN PLISTOCENE FAUNA. 331
type of Plistocene fauna, England being apparently somewhere
near the border-line where the two met, and, at times at least,
overlapped each other. Probably all or nearly all of the living
European mammals were in existence at the same time ; but most
of these need not be referred to here, attention being concentrated
on those which are either extinct, or are now inhabitants of other
regions or districts. The following list includes the more im-
portant of these forms ; those which are decidedly northern types
being indicated by a *, and those which appear essentially southern
with a f. The scientific names of extinct species and genera are
printed in italic, and of those still living in ordinary type.
Primates.
t Barbary Ape. Macacus inuus.
f ,, ,, pliocenus. England.
f ,, suevicus. Switzerland.
f ,, ,, tolosanus. France.
Carnivora.
fLion. Felis leo.
f Kafir Cat. Felis caffra.
t Sabre-tooth. Machcerodus latidens.
f Spotted Hyaena. Hyaena crocuta.
t Striped Hyaena. ,, striata.
Cave Bear. Ursus spelceus.
* Arctic Fox. Canis lagopus.
European Wild Dog. ,, (Cyon) europ&us.
Hunting Dog. Lycaon anglicus. England.
* Wolverene. Gulo luscus.
Rodentia.
t Maltese Squirrel. Leithia melitensis\
* Giant Beaver. Trogontherium cuvieri,
* Northern Vole. Microtus rutilus.
Sardinian Pica. Lagomys sardus.
1 Originally described as a gigantic dormouse, but shown by the writer in a
communication to the Proceedings of the Zoological Society, 1895, p. 860, to be
allied to the Sciurida.
332 THE HOLARCTIC REGION. [CHAP.
Ungulata.
Aurochs. Bos taurus, var. primigenius.
*Musk-Ox. Ovibos moschatus.
t Barbary Sheep. Ovis tragelaphus.
f Spanish Ibex. Capra pyrenaica.
English Gazelle. Gazella anglica.
t Saiga Antelope. Saiga tartarica.
Irish Deer. Cervus giganttus.
f Hippopotamus. Hippopotamus amphibius.
fPentland's Hippopotamus. ,, pentlandi.
* Woolly Rhinoceros. Rhinoceros antiquitatis.
Megarhine ,, ,, megarhinus.
fLeptorhine ,, ,, leptorhinus.
t Etruscan ,, ,, etruscus.
* Elasmothere. Elastnotherium sibiricum.
* Mammoth. Elephas primigenius.
t Straight-tusked Elephant. antiquus.
t Southern Elephant. meridionalis.
( ,, melitensis. \ Maltese
T Dwarf Elephants. ._ . . \ , . ,
( mnaidnensts. I Islands.
t African Elephant. ,, africanus.
In this list the Barbary ape is now confined to North Africa
and Gibraltar. The lion, although now restricted to Africa, India,
Persia, and Mesopotamia, ranged during the historic period into
Thessaly ; while the Kafir cat is solely African. The sabre-
toothed tiger of the caves was the last survivor of a genus common
in the Pliocene, which in the Plistocene is unknown further north
than Cromer. The spotted hyaena, whose remains are so abundant
in the English caves, is, as we have seen in an earlier chapter, now
restricted to southern Africa ; while the striped species, which
dates from the upper Pliocene, now ranges from north Africa to
India. The cave-bear, a gigantic extinct species, was distinguished
from the brown bear by the more complex structure of its molar
teeth. Of the Canidce, the European wild dog has its nearest living
ally in the Altai, the other species of the group being Oriental ;
while the European hunting-dog, which is known only by a single
jaw from the Glamorganshire caves, appears to have been closely
IX.] EASTERN PLISTOCENE FAUNA. 333
related to the living Cape species. Among the rodents, it is
only necessary to mention that the giant beaver (Trogontheriuni)
represents a distinct genus ranging from the Norfolk Forest-bed to
Siberia; and also that the Maltese squirrel (Leithia) was restricted
to the islands from which it takes its name. In the ungulates,
the aurochs l was the gigantic ancestor of the domestic cattle of
the present day, but is unknown living in a wild state. The arui,
or Barbary sheep, is now restricted to north Africa; while the
Spanish ibex is confined to the mountains of the Iberian penin-
sula, its fossil remains occurring in the Gibraltar caves. The Irish
deer, distinguished by its great size and widely-spreading antlers,
was an ally of the fallow-deer, with which it is connected by
means of another extinct species or variety (C. ntffi); and it may
be mentioned that there are species of extinct deer from the
Forest-bed, which it is unnecessary to name in this place. The
latter deposits are the source of the known remains of the English
gazelle. The common hippopotamus, which dates from the upper
Pliocene of Italy, is now exclusively confined to Ethiopian Africa,
but in the Plistocene is known to have wandered as far north as
Yorkshire. Pentland's hippopotamus is a smaller species from
Italy and the Mediterranean islands, where there may be a second
still smaller form. Of the rhinoceroses, R. antiqiiitatis, which is
exclusively Plistocene, ranged from Central Europe to Siberia ; its
remains being dredged abundantly, in common with those of the
mammoth, from the Dogger Bank, in the North Sea. The relation-
ship of this species to the extinct Indian Rhinoceros platyrhinus
and the living African R. simus has been alluded to in a previous
chapter. The other three European species of the genus, which,
like the last, were two-horned and devoid of front teeth, date from
the Pliocene, and form a group differing remarkably in dental
characters from R. antiquitatis. While two of these species were
southern types, the third accompanied the mammoth and woolly
rhinoceros in Siberia. A near ally of the rhinoceroses, the huge
Siberian Elasmotherium, differed remarkably in the structure of its
cheek-teeth, which are tall-crowned, and shew some approximation
to those of the horses.
1 The European bison is frequently miscalled the aurochs.
334 THE HOLARCTIC REGION. [CHAP.
From a distributional point of view, the European Plistocene
elephants are of especial interest. Foremost and best-known of
these is the mammoth (Elephas primigeniiis], which, as stated in
an earlier chapter, was a very near ally of the existing Indian
species, although distinguished as we know from the evidence of
specimens preserved in the frozen soil of Siberia by its coat of
woolly red hair, among which were intermingled long bristly black
hairs. Curiously enough, traces of this woolly coat have been
detected in the Indian elephant, so that it is probable that this
species originated in some part of Asia where the climate is colder
than is that of India. Regarding the range of this species,
Professor Boyd Dawkins 1 remarks that "the mammoth is very
abundant in the caverns and river-deposits of Britain and of France,
and is known to have ranged over the Pyrenees into Spain,
from the discovery of specimens in the zinc-mines of Santander.
It has been proved by Prof. E. Lartet and Dr Falconer to have
lived in the neighbourhood of Rome when the volcanoes of central
Italy were active, and poured currents of lava and clouds of ashes
over the [site of the] imperial city. It is common in northern and
southern Germany, but it has not been found in Europe north of
a line passing through Hamburg, or in any part of Scandinavia or
Finland. It occurs in the auriferous gravels of the Urals ; and in
Siberia, as is well known, it formerly existed in countless herds,
being buried in the morasses in large numbers, in the same manner
as the Irish elks at the bottom of the Irish peat-bogs. The
admirable preservation of some of the carcases is undoubtedly due
to their having been entombed directly after death, and then
quickly frozen up, a process which need not necessarily imply
climatal conditions unlike those of the present time in Siberia."
That the mammoth ranged across Bering Strait into Arctic
America, is proved by the discovery of its remains in the frozen
soil of Eschscholtz Bay; but in the greater part of North America
it was replaced by the closely-allied E. columbianus. In eastern
Europe there existed a variety or species known as E. armeniaais,
of which the molar teeth still more closely resemble those of the
Indian elephant than do those of the typical form. The straight-
1 Early Man in Britain (London, 1880), p. 106.
IX.] EASTERN PLISTOCENE FAUNA. 335
tusked elephant (E. antiquus) is a more southern Plistocene
type, of which the molars are to a certain extent intermediate
between those of the living Indian and African species. Still
more southerly in its distribution is the gigantic southern elephant
(E. meridionalis), of which the remains are found in the upper
Pliocene of Italy, as well as in the Plistocene Forest-bed of
Norfolk, and equivalent strata at Dewlish, in Dorsetshire. The
Maltese Islands were the habitat during the Plistocene epoch of
the two or three species of dwarf elephants, which appear to have
been nearly allied to the existing African species, but whose size
was diminished by the smallness of the areas where they flourished.
Lastly, the African elephant, which is now restricted to Ethiopian
Africa, has left evidence of its existence during the Plistocene
epoch in Algeria, Spain, and Sardinia.
The fauna of the Forest-bed period, among which the mam-
moth, megarhine rhinoceros, and Irish deer are wanting, is, as
already stated, of pre-glacial age, and, on the whole, indicative of a
fairly warm climate, although there is some evidence that the
musk-ox then ranged as far south as England. At the close of
this epoch, the southern elephant, together with a small bear
known as Ursus arvernensis, appear to have become extinct. Soon
after, glacial conditions made their appearance, causing much dis-
turbance and migratory movements among the original southern
pre-glacial fauna, and bringing an incursion of northern forms like
the reindeer, Arctic fox, wolverene, and musk-ox, as well as of
species from the eastern steppes such as the Saiga antelope and
the Kirghiz jerboa (Alactagd), together with mountain animals like
the chamois, the ibex, and the marmot, into the lowlands of south-
western Europe. Among the northern forms that then spread
themselves southward were the mammoth and the woolly rhino-
ceros, which at this epoch appear to have attained their maximum
development.
Unfortunately, there is much uncertainty as to the part played
by the glacial epoch in the extermination of the large mammals
characterising Plistocene Europe. By most English geologists the
brick-earths of the Thames valley, which contain remains of rhino-
ceroses and elephants in abundance, as well as those of monkeys
more sparingly, are regarded as of post-glacial age ; but Prof, von
336 THE HOLARCTIC REGION. [CHAP.
Zittel 1 considers them pre-glacial, or more probably inter-glacial.
If they are either inter- or post-glacial, it is clear that the cold was
not the exterminating cause ; and it is quite possible that many
or all were killed off by man, although this could scarcely be the
case with the Siberian fauna.
Be this as it may, there is good evidence that when northern
forms, such as the reindeer, wolverene, and banded lemming, had
once obtained an entrance into central and southern Europe, they
remained there for a considerable time, since they were present
during the latter portion of what is known as the palaeolithic
epoch. With the advent of the present climatic conditions came
in the present woodland fauna of central Europe, constituting
what has been termed the squirrel- or bison-epoch ; and from that
date, when animals became domesticated, man has exercised a
large influence on the fauna.
It is important to notice that, in spite of the mingling of
northern and southern types in England, France, and Germany, to
which allusion has already been made, there seems to have been
a distinction between the northern and the Mediterranean fauna
throughout the whole of the later Plistocene epoch, such forms as
the Barbary sheep and the fallow-deer being essentially southern,
although the hippopotamus, as we have seen, extended as far
north as Yorkshire.
Although the later Plistocene fauna was spread not only over
Europe, but also through North and Central Asia, a number of
the characteristic European types, such as the hippopotamus, ibex,
chamois, fallow-deer, cave-bear, and wild cat, were wanting in
Asia. In that area forms are met with which are still character-
istic of the same districts. As examples may be noticed : the
Mongolian gazelle (Gazella gutturosd], the Himalayan ibex (Capra
sibirica), the Persian wild goat (Capra cegagrus), the argali (Ovis
argali), the musk-deer (Moschus moschiferus], the tiger (Felts
tigris] of which the remains have been found even within the
Arctic Circle together with a number of smaller forms, such as
Siphneus aspalax, Ellobius talpinus, Spalax typhlus, Sminthus
vagans, Tamias asiaticus, and Mustela zibellina. Here, then,
1 Appendix, No. 36, p. 189.
IX.] LAND CHANGES. 337
are clear indications of a Central Asiatic sub-region as far back
as the Plistocene epoch.
The foregoing brief survey of the Plistocene mammals of the
eastern division of the Holarctic region enables
certain deductions to be drawn as to geographical
changes which have taken place in the area since the Plistocene -
that epoch.
In the first place, the occurrence of remains of the tiger in the
New Siberian, or Liakov Islands, lying far within the Arctic
Circle, indicates the union of those islands with the Siberian main-
land ; and this greater extension of the land at the north-eastern
extremity of Asia would naturally lead to the conclusion that there
was also a land-connection with Alaska across Bering Strait.
That such was really the case is proved by the discovery during
the voyage of H. M. S. " Blossom," in the years 1825-28, of
remains of the horse, mammoth, and bison, in the frozen soil of
Eschscholtz Bay, Kotzebue Sound, Alaska 1 ; this evidence being
confirmed by the occurrence of the musk-ox in the European
Plistocene, as it is also by the number of species of mammals still
common to the more northern parts of the two hemispheres. And
here it may be mentioned that, according to the researches of the
Russian geologists, Siberia, instead of being covered like northern
Europe with a continuous ice -sheet during the glacial epoch,
had only a number of comparatively small glaciers, so that the pre-
glacial fauna was able to exist here at a time that it could not live
in Europe. Still the frozen condition of the subsoil, and the
formation of ground-ice in the rivers, rendered the preservation of
the carcases of mammoths, rhinoceroses, bison, and musk-oxen an
easy matter.
Passing to south-western Europe, the occurrence of remains of
the African elephant in Sicily and Spain, together with the
presence of small allied species in the Plistocene of Malta, and
likewise of remains of the Barbary sheep and Barbary ape in
southern Europe, indicates a free land-communication between
Europe and Africa, both by way of the Straits of Gibraltar, and
likewise between Italy, Sicily, and Tunis; Malta being then also in
1 Beechey's Voyage to the Pacific and Behring's Straits in H.M.S.
"Blossom," Vol. II.
L. 22
THE HOLARCTIC REGION. [CHAP.
connection with the mainland. Probably also it was by one or
both of these routes that the hippopotamus and spotted hyaena
passed between Europe and Africa, as it is scarcely likely that the
former animal, at least, travelled round by way of Turkey and
Syria. Writing of the Maltese islands, Leith-Adams 1 observes
that "although from their smallness the islands furnish only scant
evidences of the complicated and extensive oscillations of level
to which the original area has been subjected from first to last,
nevertheless the data I have furnished are at the least suggestive,
and, in conjunction with the fossilised remains, seem to lead to
the belief, that in the first place there was an upheaval of a large
tract of land in this portion of the Mediterranean at some period
towards or after the close of the Miocene epoch. In the second
place, that during the Quaternary [Plistocene] period, the whole,
or at least all excepting perhaps the tops of the Benjemma heights
and Gozo hills, were again submerged ; and, thirdly, that a re-
elevation of the land took place, ending in the present insular
fragments. Perhaps in the first case there was a connection or
contemporaneity in the upheaval of the Miocene beds of Malta,
Sicily, Italy, Candia, the Red Sea, Egypt, Arabia, Cerigo, Azores,
Algeria, Southern France, and Spain. Thus the islands of the
inland sea may represent portions of a land area now occupied
more or less by water. When this area began to sink is not
apparent, but the fact that the same elephant and hyaena now
living in Africa existed in Sicily, shews that there was a land-
connection between the two at a very recent epoch."
Regarding the nature of the former connection between Italy,
Sicily, and Malta, Dr Wallace 2 writes that a comparatively shallow
sea or submerged bank incloses Malta and Sicily, and " that on
the opposite coast a similar bank stretches out from the coast of
Tripoli, leaving a narrow channel, the greatest depth of which is
240 fathoms. Here, therefore, is a broad plateau, which an eleva-
tion of about 1,500 feet would convert into a wide extent of land
connecting Italy with Africa ; while the same elevation would also
connect Morocco with Spain, leaving two extensive lakes to repre-
1 The Nile Valley and Malta (London, 1870), p. 211.
2 Geographical Distribution of Animals, Vol. I. p. 201.
IX.] LAND CHANGES. 339
sent what is now the Mediterranean Sea, and affording free com-
munication for land animals between Europe and North Africa."
Probably the dwarf elephants of Malta were developed from a
larger form, closely allied to or identical with the African elephant,
after the separation of the island itself from the mainland. With
regard to Leith-Adams' idea of the subsequent submergence of
Malta, it is pretty certain that this could not have been complete,
since that island is inhabited by a large species of weasel (Mustela
africand) common to Egypt, and perhaps the south of Italy 1 ;
this animal being doubtless a survivor from the old fauna of the
Plistocene land connecting Italy, Sicily and Malta with northern
Africa.
In north-western Europe there are equally conclusive evidences
of the connection of the British Islands with the Continent during
the Plistocene epoch. On many parts of the English coasts there
occur, for instance, submerged forests dating from a comparatively
recent epoch, which, when exposed during exceptionally low tides,
are seen to contain the stumps of trees in their original upright
position,. and with their roots still implanted in the soil. Forests
of this kind are found near Torquay and Falmouth, as well as on
several parts of the Welsh coasts and in Holyhead harbour ; the
submergence which has taken place in the case of the one at
Falmouth being estimated at upwards of 70 feet. Again, the pre-
glacial Norfolk Forest-bed, so often alluded to in the foregoing
pages, affords evidence of an extensive submergence on the east
coast of England ; this being supplemented by the Dogger Bank
in the North Sea, from which, as already mentioned, such numbers
of remains of the mammoth, as well as those of the woolly rhino-
ceros and other mammals, have been dredged. Additional evidence
in favour of the same subsidence is afforded by the numerous
ancient river-channels and valleys found in many parts of Britain,
which are situated at depths of from one to two hundred feet
below the present level of the land, and frequently cut right across
the existing drainage lines, so as to connect valleys now com-
pletely distinct. These ancient channels, which are now completely
choked with sand, mud, or gravel, have only been revealed by the
1 See Thomas, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1895, pp. 128 131.
222
340 THE HOLARCTIC REGION. [CHAP.
aid of the borer, but their evidence is, nevertheless, unimpeach-
able.
From these and other lines of evidence, we learn that during
the Plistocene epoch not only was England connected with France
across the English Channel, but that the land extended up the
North Sea at least as far as the Dogger Bank ; the Ouse, the
Thames, the Rhine, and perhaps the Elbe originally uniting to
form one mighty river, discharging far up in the North Sea.
During a portion of this period Ireland was in connection with
the British Islands; and it has been suggested by Leith- Adams 1
that the connection was with Scotland, owing to the circumstance
that, with the exception of the cave-bear, all the living and extinct
Irish mammals have been recorded from Scotland, while a number
of the English Plistocene mammals appear never to have reached
the latter country. On the other hand, Dr R. F. Scharff 2 , from a
study of the freshwater fishes and molluscs, is of opinion that
" Ireland was in later Tertiary times connected with Wales in the
south and Scotland in the north ; whilst a freshwater lake occupied
the present central area of the Irish Sea. The southern connec-
tion broke down at the beginning of the Plistocene period, the
northern connection following soon after. There is no evidence
of any subsequent land-connection between Great Britain and
Ireland." Since the above was written Dr Scharff (Mem. Soc.
ZooL France, vol. vin. pp. 436-474, 1895) has further developed
his views on the origin of the Irish fauna. He concludes that
all the Irish mammals reached the island in the early Plistocene
(Forest-bed); such British forms as are unknown in Ireland being
considered to have reached Britain later, when Ireland was
isolated.
Further reference to the former connection or connections
between Britain and the Continent will come more conveniently
later.
The generic and specific mammalian types common to the
eastern and western divisions of the Holarctic region
Western
Division of the having been already referred to, we may at once
proceed to the consideration of those characteristic
1 Proc. Roy. Irish Acad. Ser. 2, Vol. III. (1883).
2 Appendix, No. 25.
IX.] WESTERN DIVISION. 34!
of the western division. And here it may be mentioned in respect
to the two areas, that whereas many generic types of animals were
unable to pass from the one to the other owing to the high
latitude of the strip of connecting land, yet in other cases the
geographical limits of the range of certain genera in the Old World
form also an important factor in the case. As stated a few para-
graphs back, many of the characteristic European Plistocene
mammals, such as the hippopotamus, the fallow-deer, and the
cave-hyaena, never extended into the Asiatic portion of the Hoi-
arctic region, so that these and many other forms never could
have had an opportunity of crossing Bering Strait, even had
they been capable of existing in such a high latitude.
Excluding bats and seals, the following genera of mammals
will be found confined to the western half of the Holarctic region,
although some of these range southwards into the Sonoran. There
are also certain genera which appear to be typically Sonoran,
whose range includes part of the western Holarctic region, but
these are best considered in the light of intruders from the
south l .
Among the shrews of the western Holarctic there are two
species, viz. Sorex palustris, of the Rocky Mountains, and*S. hydro-
dromus, of Unalaska Island, which differ from all their allies in the
presence of long fringes of hair to the feet, although they resemble
ordinary species of the genus in the characters of their dentition
and tail. In consequence of these differences these aquatic shrews
have been referred by some writers to a separate genus, under the
name of Neosorex ; although such distinction is considered by Dr
Merriam unnecessary. There is, however, one genus of Insectivora
(Condylura), represented by the star-nosed mole, absolutely charac-
teristic of this area. Allied in structure and habits to the Old
World moles, which are totally wanting in America, this animal
takes its name from the presence of a star-like ring of fleshy
appendages at the extremity of the muzzle.
The Carnivora include no peculiar genera 2 ; but the Rodentia,
1 It may be well to mention here that the majority of American zoologists
regard as genera a number of groups to which the present writer would not be
disposed to grant more than sub-generic rank.
2 Mephitis, Taxidea, etc., appear to be of Sonoran origin.
342 THE HOLARCTIC REGION. [CHAP.
which, as in the eastern division, are very numerous, comprise one
family, as well as several genera, restricted to this area. In the
Sciuridce the marmot- like genus Cynomys ranges into the Hoi-
arctic, but is considered by Dr Merriam as chiefly characteristic of
the Sonoran region; and the same is the case with the white-
footed mice (Sitomys) of which there is but a single Holarctic
representative, while the Sonoran species are very numerous and
also with the wood-rats (Neotoma), of which a sub-genus is
restricted to the Holarctic. The family peculiar to the region is
that of the Haplodontidtz, or sewellels, represented by two species
of the genus Haplodon, from the districts west of the Rocky
Mountains. Closely allied to the squirrels, these rodents are
distinguished from the latter by the absence of postorbital pro-
cesses to the frontal bones of the skull, the depressed skull, and
the rootless, or hypsodont, cheek-teeth ; all these characters indi-
cating a more specialised type. In the Muridce, the voles of the
genus Phenacomys connect the more typical members of the
group with cricetines like the wood-rats (Neotoma). Several
species have been described. A more southern type is the single
representative of the allied genus Synaptomys, distinguished by its
grooved upper incisors \ its molar teeth resembling those of the
lemmings, while its skull is of the same structure as in the true
voles. According to Dr Merriam, this animal is restricted to the
southern part of the Holarctic area, or what he terms the Transi-
tion region. In the same great family the well-known aquatic
musk-rat, or musquash (Fiber), may be considered an Holarctic
type, since it is found in the " barren-grounds " on the borders of
the Arctic sea, although it ranges southwards into the Sonoran.
Closely allied to the voles, with which it agrees in the characters
of the skull and teeth, this animal differs by the long, compressed,
nearly naked, and reticulate tail ; the naked-soled feet being partly
webbed, and the whole body adapted to an aquatic mode of life.
Its fossil remains occur in the Plistocene of the United States. It
is noteworthy, as a negative characteristic of the Holarctic area,
that no members of the exclusively New World family Geomyidce
are found within its limits. On the other hand, in the family
Dipodida, the j urn ping-mice of the genus Zapus, of which several
species are recognised by North American zoologists, are solely
IX.]
WESTERN DIVISION.
343
Holarctic, the typical Z. hudsonianus dating from the Plistocene
epoch. A distinctive feature of the western Holarctic region is
the absence of true porcupines (Hystrix), their place being taken
by the Canadian porcupine (Erethizon], which belongs to the same
sub-family as the South American porcupines, although distin-
guished, among other characters, by its short and non-prehensile
tail. It is a native of the wooded portions of Canada and the
United States, and its remains have been discovered in a cave in
Pennsylvania.
FIG. 69. ROCKY MOUNTAIN GOAT (Haploceros montamis]
Among the ungulates, the remarkable animal known as the
Rocky Mountain goat, which alone represents the genus Haplo-
ceros, and differs from all other ruminants by the extreme shortness
of the cannon-bone in both the front and hind limbs, is exclusively
an inhabitant of the western Holarctic region. The same is now
344 THE HOLARCTIC REGION. [CHAP.
the case with the musk-ox (Ovibos), but as this animal ranged over
Europe and northern Asia during the Plistocene, it can scarcely be
regarded as distinctive of the western area. Of other peculiar
New World ungulates, the prong-buck (Antilocapra) and certain
deer of the genus Cariacus are found within the Holarctic region,
but the former seems to be essentially a Sonoran type, while the
latter, although probably also of Sonoran origin, occurs through
Central and South America.
The Tertiary genera of mammals peculiar to North America
may be best considered in the chapter devoted to the Sonoran
region, to which they for the most part belong ; and this portion
of the subject may be accordingly concluded by tabulating the
existing genera or groups peculiar to the area under consideration.
These will stand as follows, viz. :
Insectivora.
SORICID.E. Sorex. The sub-genus or genus Neosorex.
TALPID^E. Condylura.
Rodentia.
HAPLODONTIDJE. Haplodon.
MURID^:. Phenacomys.
Synaptomys. Confined to the southern
portion of the area.
Fiber. Enters Sonoran.
DIPODID^E. Zapus.
HYSTRICID.E. Erethizon.
Ungulata.
BOVID^E. Haploceros.
Even if we add to the above certain other sub-generic types,
such as the spruce-squirrels (Tamiasdurus) and the bushy-tailed
wood-rats (Teonoma), and likewise take into account the number
of Old World types (in many cases widely-distributed ones) that
are absent, it can scarcely be urged that such an assemblage is
sufficient to constitute a zoological region by itself. Those of my
readers desirous of consulting lists of the species inhabiting the
Arctic and Boreal zones of Dr Merriam, will find them in his
memoir 1 .
1 Appendix, No. 19, pp. 24, 25.
IX.] WESTERN DIVISION. 345
In America, probably owing to the north and south trend of
the mountain-ranges, the glacial period has had an even more
marked effect than in the Old World. On this subject Dr
Merriam 1 writes that "not only are the pre-Plistocene animals and
plants now represented imperfectly and in greatly reduced num-
bers, but the areas at present inhabited by their descendants,
except in the case of the Boreal forms, are insignificant in com-
parison with their former extent. It should be remembered that
the refrigeration of the glacial epoch has only in part disappeared.
In earlier Pliocene times, characteristic representatives of sub-
tropical faunas and floras existed northwards over much of the
United States and Canada, and in still earlier times reached the
Arctic circle. During the advance of cold in the glacial epoch
these forms were either exterminated or driven southward into the
narrow tropical parts of Mexico and Central America. The retreat
of cold at the termination of this period was not complete, and
our continent has never regained its former warmth. Hence the
expelled species were not permitted to advance more than a short
distance into the region formerly occupied by them, and the
tropical species have been held back, and at the present day are
not found except along the extreme southern confines of our
territory [the United States]. For example, peccaries in early
Plistocene times ranged northward over a large part of western
North America, while at present they are restricted to parts of
Texas and Louisiana below the Red River of the south ; and
capivaras, tapirs and other tropical forms whose fossil remains
have been found in many parts of the United States have not been
able to return. The same is true of plants, for the palms, tree-
ferns, and numerous other tropical types that formerly ranged over
much of our country are now either altogether extinct or exist
only in the tropics.
"The llama and many plants now inhabiting the Andes may
be looked upon as representing a class of cases in which Boreal
forms were driven so far south that they actually reached the great
mountain-system of South America and spread southward over its
elevated plateaus and declivities to the extreme end of the conti-
nent in Patagonia and Tierra del Fuego."
1 Appendix, No. 19, p. 44.
346
THE HOLARCTIC REGION.
[CHAP.
Coming to the consideration of sub-regions, we have first of
all the Arctic sub-region, which corresponds to the
Boreal sub-region of Dr Heilprin, and the Arctic
zone of the Boreal region of Dr Merriam, and is of
circumpolar extent. According to the former writer, in the Old
World it may be defined as the tract lying to the north of a line
starting from about the 66th parallel of latitude on the Norwegian
coast, and passing south-eastwards to the coast of eastern Asia
in about the 5oth parallel, thus including the greater part of
Kamschatka, and Amurland. In America, according to Dr
Merriam's map, after running just inside the shores of Newfound-
FIG. 70. MUSK-OX (Ovibos moschatus).
land and Labrador, the boundary line bends southwards after
passing Cape Chudleigh to coincide with the southern shore of
Hudson Bay, and then takes a north-westerly direction so as
to include within the sub-region only a narrow strip on the north-
eastern coast of Alaska, and a somewhat broader one on the
north-western shore of the same. In the Old World the boundary
line coincides approximately with the northern limit of the cultiva-
tion of cereals, and also with that of the southern migrations of
the reindeer; but in America certain reindeer (which are regarded
IX.] ARCTIC SUB-REGION. 347
by the American zoologists as specifically distinct from thecircum-
polar "barren-ground" variety) extend considerably further to the
south. For the most part of its extent, the mammals inhabiting
this sub-region are few in number, a large proportion of them
having a circumpolar range. Among them may be included the
Arctic fox, polar bear, wolverene, the ermine or stoat, the eastern
and western species of lemming (Myodes), the banded lemming
(Cuniculus torquatus), the Arctic vole (Microtus nitilus}, Parry's
suslik (Spermophilus empetra], the musk-ox, and the reindeer ;
several of these being restricted to the sub-region. The sea-otter
(Latax) frequents the shores of Alaska and Kamschatka, but also
ranges as far south as the Kurile Islands and California, so that it
is not confined to the sub-region. During the Plistocene epoch,
as we have seen, such animals as the mammoth, horse, bison, and
tiger were inhabitants of this tract ; the latter animal being still
found in eastern Siberia. Towards Amurland and the Kams-
chatkan peninsula, the fauna becomes somewhat less scanty ; the
large Kamschatkan sheep (Ovis nivicola) being here met with, as
well as a true deer, and the brown bear.
Of other groups of animals inhabiting the more typical portions
of this region, there may be noticed among the birds the ptarmigan
(Lagopus], the snowy owl (Nyctea scandiaca), the Greenland falcon
(Falco candicans), the eider-duck (Somatcria mollissima), as well as
various species of divers (Colymbus] and guillemots (Uria and
Lomvia}, together with the little auk (Mergulus alle\ Dr Heilprin
writes that " Captain Markham observed the footpiints of the
polar hare in the snow-bound ice in latitude 83 10', and the
antlers of a reindeer were picked up by the officers under Sir
George Nares, in latitude 82 45' (Grinnell Land). A skeleton of
the latter animal, recently picked by wolves, was also obtained in
latitude 80 27'. Traces of the rock-ptarmigan (Lagopus rupestris]
have been met with as far north as latitude 83 6', and the snow-
bunting (Pkctrophanes nivalis) in latitude 82 33'. The reptile-
fauna is very limited, no serpent, apparently, passing beyond the
sixty-seventh parallel of latitude, and no lizard above the seventieth.
The fishes, which include the common perch and pike, are mainly
salmonoids. Insects are fairly numerous, and even in the far
north the number of species is considerable."
348 THE HOLARCTIC REGION. [CHAP.
During the Plistocene the region within the Arctic circle en-
joyed a decidedly less rigorous climate than it at present pos-
sesses. In Baron von Toll's recent expedition to the New Siberian
Islands 1 , where, as previously stated, remains of the tiger have been
obtained, it was discovered " that under the perpetual ice, in a
freshwater deposit, which contained pieces of willow and bones of
post-tertiary mammals (the mammoth-layer) were complete trees
of Alnus fruticosa, fifteen feet long, with leaves and fruit. It was
thus evident that during the mammoth-period tree-vegetation
reached the seventy-fourth degree of latitude, and that its northern
limit was at least three degrees further north than it is now."
The next sub-region is the European, which may be taken to
include all that part of Europe lying between the
Arctic sub-region in the north, and the line of the
Pyrenees and Alps, continuing eastwards along the
northern shore of the Black Sea to the Caucasus and the Caspian
Steppes. This area includes the typical fauna of the eastern
Holarctic region, among its more or less characteristic mammals
being (in the north) the elk also ranging into America , the red
deer (unknown in America, but represented by a variety in North
Africa), the roe, the bison, the chamois, the Alpine ibex, the
typical variety of the brown bear, the badger, the wolverene (in the
north), the Alpine marmot (Arctomys marmotta), the dormouse,
hamster, mole, and hedgehog \ several of these being, however,
common to the Arctic and Central Asian sub-regions. The des-
mans (Myogale) are restricted to this sub-region ; and the same
was probably the case with the aurochs (Bos taurus, var. primi-
genius], the ancestral stock of our domestic cattle. Finally, the
Caucasus is the home of two or three peculiar species of goats
(Capra cylindricornis and C. caucasica] known as ture.
It will be unnecessary, even if this could be accomplished, to
give a complete list of the mammalian fauna of this sub-region,
but it is essential to refer to the comparative poverty of the fauna
of the British Islands as compared with that of the Continent.
The following list includes all the mammals (exclusive of bats)
known to have inhabited the British Islands within the historic
1 See Knowledge, 1895, p. 106.
IX.] EUROPEAN SUB-REGION. 349
period ; those which are now extinct having an asterisk prefixed
to them, while such as occur in Ireland have the letter I added.
Those that have been introduced by man have a t before them.
The list stands as follows, viz. :
Hedgehog. Erinaceus europaeus. I.
Mole. Talpa europsea.
Common Shrew. Sorex araneus.
Lesser ,, ,, minutus. I.
Water-Shrew. Crossopus fodiens.
Wild Cat. Felis catus.
*Wolf. Canis lupus. I.
Fox. vulpes. I.
Pine-Marten. Mustela martes. I.
Polecat. ,, putorius.
Stoat. erminea. I.
Assogue. ,, hibernica. I.
Weasel. ,, vulgaris.
Badger. Meles taxus. I.
Otter. Lutra vulgaris. I.
^Brown bear. Ursus arctus. I.
Squirrel. Sciurus vulgaris. I (? introduced),
* Beaver. Castor fiber.
Dormouse. Muscardinus avellanarius.
Harvest-Mouse. Mus minutus.
Wood-Mouse. ,, sylvaticus. I.
Yellow-necked Mouse. ,, flavicollis.
Common Mouse. ,, musculus. I.
f Black Rat. rattus. I.
t Brown Rat. ,, decumanus. I..
Common Field : Vole. Microtus agrestis.
Bank-Vole. glareolus.
Water-Vole amphibius.
Common Hare. Lepus europaeus.
Mountain Hare. ,, timidus. I.
t Rabbit. ,, cuniculus. I.
*? Wild Cattle. Bos taurus.
Red Deer. Cervus elaphus. I.
350 THE HOLARCTIC REGION. [CHAP.
t Fallow Deer. Cervus dama. I.
Roe Deer. Capreolus caprea.
*Wild Boar. Sus scrofa. I.
The total number in this list is only 28, out of which at least
four are introduced. With the exception of the recently-described
assogue 1 , which is intermediate between the stoat and the weasel,
and is peculiar to Ireland, the whole of these mammals are com-
mon to the Continent. As shown in an earlier portion of the
present chapter, during the Plistocene epoch Britain possessed a
fauna apparently identical with that of the Continent ; and there
must accordingly be some good reason for its present poverty in
mammalian life as compared to the latter area. The difference is
accounted for by Dr Wallace, through the occurrence of one or
more periods of subsidence, which took place during the close of,
or subsequent to, the Glacial epoch ; after which England again
became united to the Continent, when its present fauna entered,
the period of connection being, however, of comparatively short
duration, and thus permitting of the passage of only a moiety of
the continental forms, or those which happened at the time in
question to be inhabiting the districts nearest to the connecting
line. Only a certain number of the mammals which thus crossed
into Britain have ever succeeded in reaching Scotland ; and it is
from this country, if we accept the views of Dr Scharff, referred to
above, that Ireland appears to have received its still more im-
poverished mammalian fauna.
It will be seen that the foregoing hypothesis attributes the
clean sweep supposed to have been made of the original British
fauna to the effects of submergence, and not to the ice-sheet. On
the other hand, Mr G. W. Bulman 2 , who doubts whether the sub-
mergence has been sufficient for this, attributes such extermination
as he believes to have taken place solely to the effects of an ice-
sheet. And he further believes that a number of the original
British mammals survived in the southern and south-western
counties of England, whence they re-populated Britain on the
disappearance of the ice-sheet, without there having been any
1 See Thomas, Natural Science, Vol. vi. p. 377 (1895).
- Appendix, No. 12.
IX.] CENTRAL ASIAN SUB-REGION. 351
subsequent connection with the Continent. The difficulty con-
nected with this explanation is that it apparently necessitates a
pre-glacial or early glacial age for the mammaliferous deposits of
the Thames valley, which are almost certainly inter-glacial or
post-glacial. The whole subject of glaciation is, however, so
complicated and involved, that it is almost impossible to form
workable theories as to the exact mode of the repopulation of
Britain after the changes which took place during the glacial
epoch.
In contrast to the British Isles, which are eminently of the
continental type, may be cited Iceland, lying near the border-line
between the Arctic and European sub-regions, which is as
markedly oceanic in its character. Beyond an occasional ice-
borne polar bear, Iceland possesses only the Arctic fox, and a
mouse, which has been stated to be a peculiar species ; the fox
having doubtless been originally introduced from the north on
floating ice.
According to the scheme of Dr Heilprin, the next sub-region
on the list is that of Central Asia, which includes
the countries bounded on the west by the European, sSb-regi* 1 * 11
and on the north by the Arctic sub-region, and
extends eastwards as far as Mantchuria and China proper, being
bordered on the south by the Kuenlun and Nanshan mountains 1 .
A large portion of the western districts of this tract are open
steppes or deserts ; and in such tracts several peculiar types of
rodents, such as the Kirghiz jerboa (Alactaga) and the Yarkand
jerboa (Euchoretes\ are met with, while the saiga antelope (Saiga),
and the Mongolian gazelle ( Gazella guttu rosd) are likewise charac-
teristic types. Susliks (Spermophilus), marmots (Arctomys), and
picas are very abundant ; and the place of the European wild cat
is occupied by Pallas's cat (Felis manul), the tiger being also
sparingly found in the western districts, where the ounce is like-
wise met with. In part of this sub-region the red deer is replaced
by a variety or species known as Cervus xanthopygus, while
Yarkand is the home of a variety of the Kashmir stag (C. cash-
mirianus], and the Thian-Shan possesses the very fine and wapiti-
1 Dr Heilprin included the Tibetan plateau in this sub-region.
352 THE HOLARCTIC REGION. [CHAP.
like form described under the name of C. eustephanus ; all these
deer being mostly inhabitants of forest-districts. The Tatarian
roe (Capreolus pygargus), inhabiting suitable localities in the moun-
tains forming the watershed between the Russian and Chinese
empires and Turkestan, is also generally regarded as specifically
distinct from its western ally. The sub- region is also the chief
home of the magnificent sheep known as argali, among which
the splendid Pamir sheep (Ovis poll) ranges from the Pamirs to
the Altai, while the true argali (O. ammon) if the Tibetan O. hodg-
soni be really distinct is also restricted to this sub-region, where
it is now confined to northern Mongolia, although it formerly
inhabited the Altai. The ibex of the Altai is, however, identical
with the Himalayan and Tibetan Capra sibirica.
Although included by Dr Heilprin in the preceding, the area
typified by the Tibetan plateau is regarded by Dr
Blanford ' as constituting a sub-region by itself.
Typically this region is bounded on the north by
the ranges of the Kuenlun, Altyn Tag, and Nanshan, and extends
eastwards to China proper, while to the west it must be taken to
include Ladak and the upper Indus valley as far as Gilgit 2 . To
the south it extends to the main chain of the Himalaya. The
following list of mammals is given by Dr Blanford as distinctive of
this sub-region ; the names of such species and genera as are
entirely or mainly confined to the area being printed in italics.
Insect! vora.
Crocidura aranea.
Nectogale elegans.
Carnivora.
Paradoxurus laniger.
Canis lupus, var. laniger.
,, vulpes, var. flavescens.
,, ferrilatus.
,, deccanensis, var.
Mustek foina, var.
,, larva ta,
1 Proc. Zool. Soc. 1893, p. 449.
2 See Blanford, Fauna of British India, Mammalia, p. v.
IX.] TIBETAN SUB-REGION. 353
Carnivora (cont.\
Mustela canignla.
alpina, var. temon.
erminea.
Meles leucura.
albogularis.
sEluropus melanoleuctts.
Ursus pruinosus.
Rodentia.
Eupetaurus rinereus.
Arctomys himalayanus.
robustus.
Mus sublimis.
Microtus blythi.
,, strauchi.
przevalskii.
Siphneus fontanieri.
Lagomys curzonice.
,, rutilus.
,, erythrotis.
melanostomus .
,, ladacensis.
Lepus oiostolus.
,, hypsibius.
Ungulata.
Equus hemionus, var. kiang.
Bos grunniens.
Ovis hodgsoni.
vignei, var.
,, nahura.
Capra sibirica.
Pantholops hodgsoni,
Budorcas taxicolor.
Gazella picticaudata.
Cervus affinis.
,, thoroldi.
Moschus moschiferus.
L. 23
354 THE HOLARCTIC REGION. [CHAP.
This list includes all the species inhabiting the plateau at
elevations exceeding 12,000 feet. Dr Blanford writes that "many
of the forms named only inhabit small portions of the area, and
whilst Bos grunniens, Pantholops hodgsoni, and Gazella picti-
caudata, with several rodents, appear to be peculiar to the high
plateaus above 14,000 feet, the two species of Cervus are pro-
bably found in brushwood at a rather lower elevation in the more
broken region of Eastern Tibet, where the rainfall is heavier and
the vegetation more abundant.
"As was printed in the paper in the Geological Magazine 1 ,
there is, so far as I am aware, no equally peculiar mammalian
fauna to be found in any continental area of equal extent, and for
a parallel it is necessary to turn to some island like Celebes, that
has long been isolated from all surrounding lands."
This, however, is not all, for there occur at Hundes, on the
Tibetan plateau, mammaliferous strata yielding, among other
remains, bones of a rhinoceros, and of an antelope which is
apparently generically identical with the chiru (Pantholops), now
inhabiting the same area. The isolation and development of this
most peculiar fauna is intimately connected with the date of
elevation of the Himalaya. After pointing out that both the fossil
chiru and the fossil rhinoceros appear to have inhabited the area
when it had attained something approaching its present enormous
elevation, Dr Blanford 2 writes as follows : " Bearing in mind that
the isolation of the Tibetan plateau is far less perfect as regards
mammals than that of any island, and that some of the forms
the Carnivora especially found in Tibet are evidently very recent
immigrants, it is a reasonable conclusion that the peculiar fauna
of the Tibetan plateau has been distinct from that of neighbouring
countries since middle Tertiary times.
" But what has caused the isolation of the Tibetan fauna ?
Why in this one continental tract is there a generic and specific
differentiation of the mammalia, of which no other example
exists ? There is only one character in which Tibet is different
from other continental areas, its great height. This alone renders
the climate of Tibet so different from that of other parts of
1 Decade 3, Vol. ix. p. 161 (1892).
2 Geol. Mag. op. cit. p. 165.
IX.] MANTCHURIAN SUB-REGION. 355
Central Asia, which are equally cold and barren. It seems a
reasonable inference that the elevation of the Tibetan plateau
dates back to middle Tertiary times.
" It is of course probable that the elevation was gradual ; and
although the area may have been sufficiently high at the close of
the Miocene period to produce a difference in climatal conditions,
the greater part of the upward movement may have been post-
Miocene, and a great part post-Pliocene."
Bordering as it does upon the tropics, where it abuts against the
Oriental region, the Mantchurian sub-region is not
easy to define, since the intermingling of Holarctic
and Oriental types is very strongly marked on its
southern confines. Starting somewhere about the Amur river, it
may, however, be taken to include the Japanese islands, Mant-
churia, Corea, and northern China ; its southern limit being placed
approximately in the latitude of Fuchau. Westwards it may be
taken to include Moupin, in Eastern Tibet, although this district
is referred by Dr Wallace to the Oriental region.
From all the other sub-regions, with the exception of the
Mediterranean, the Mantchurian is distinguished by the presence
of monkeys belonging to the genera Macacus and Semnopithecus,
some of these occurring in Japan and others in Eastern Tibet.
Of the latter, one (Semnopithecus roxellance) is peculiar, and the
other is identified by Mr H. O. Forbes with the widely-spread
Oriental Macacus arctoides. Among the Carnivora, the Oriental
genus Helictis enters this sub-region, one species occurring in the
neighbourhood of Shanghai ; while Japan is the home of a peculiar
long-haired dog ( Cants procyonides), which is frequently separated
generically under the name of Nyctereutes, although it unquestion-
ably pertains to the typical genus. Perhaps, however, the most
characteristic mammals are the deer. Foremost among these are
a group of small deer belonging to the genus Cenms, and distin-
guished from the red deer group by the invariable absence of a
bez-tine to the antlers, each of which has but four points. These
deer are further characterised by the coat of the adult being
spotted in summer with white, but uniformly brown in winter, and
also by the black lateral margins to the white blaze on the hind-
quarters. The species include the Japanese deer (C. sica),
232
356 THE HOLARCTIC REGION. [CHAP.
common to Japan and North China, the larger Mantchurian deer
(C. mantchuricus\ and Dybowski's deer (C. dybowskii) from the
upper Ussuri district of Mantchuria, in the neighbourhood of
Vladivostock. Elsewhere the group is represented in Formosa,
and also in the Caspian provinces of Persia. In addition to
these, there are the hornless Chinese water-deer (Hydropoles), and
the two species of tufted deer (Elaphodus)\ the latter being closely
allied to the Oriental muntjacs. What is known of the palseonto-
logical history of the southern portion of this area indicates that
during the Pliocene epoch its mammalian fauna was closely allied
to that of the Siwalik Hills, thus showing that at this time there
was no distinction between the Oriental and Holarctic regions,
which even now grade imperceptibly into one another in this
district.
The remains of fossil elephants from Japan 1 are referable to
Elephas clifti, insignis, and namadicus, of which the two first are
common to the Siwaliks, while the third occurs typically in the
Plistocene Narbada beds of India. From the known distribution
of these elephants, it is probable that Japan was connected with
the mainland during the Pliocene epoch by way of the Corean
peninsula, although Dr Wallace is of opinion that its latest con-
nection was to the north. Of existing animals common to Japan
and the mainland, allusion has already been made to Cervus sica :
and another common type is the giant salamander Megalobatra
chus. The latter genus is represented in a fossil state in the
Miocene of Baden, and as it is closely allied to the North American
CryptobranchuS) there is clear evidence of the eastern migration of
this ancient type, of which the two survivors are respectively con-
fined to China and Japan on the one hand, and North America
on the other. Further evidences of affinity between the fauna of
Japan and North America are afforded by the circumstance that
one species of the mole-like genus Urotrichus is confined to the
former islands, while the other is an inhabitant of the north-
western districts of the latter continent. The sea-otter (Latax] is
likewise common to the coasts of Japan, the Kurile Islands, and
Kamschatka, and the Pacific shores of North America. More
remarkable, however, is the fact that a North American scincoid
1 See Naumann, Palceontographica, Vol. xxvm. Art. r (1881).
IX.] MEDITERRANEAN SUB-REGION. 357
lizard (Eumeces quinquelineatus] is represented in Japan by a form
(E, marginatus] so closely allied that the two were long considered
inseparable, although they are now regarded as distinct 1 . All
these facts are indicative that Japan was formerly joined to both
Corea and Kamschatka, whence land was continued across Bering
Strait to unite the Old World with Alaska.
Although, as already stated, the Mediterranean or Tyrrhenian
sub-region has strong claims to be regarded as Mediterra
representing a region by itself, it may be more con- nean Sub-
veniently considered here than later on in the
chapter. In addition to such parts of Africa and Arabia as lie
to the north of the Ethiopian region, this sub-region includes
Spain, those parts of Europe situated south of the Alps, together
with Turkey, Asia Minor, Persia, Baluchistan, and Afghanistan.
Whether Kashmir should be regarded as an aberrant outlier of
this region, I am not yet satisfied. Although gerbils (Gerbillus*)
are also found in the Oriental and Ethiopian regions, their
distribution in the Holarctic is very nearly coincident with the
limits of the present sub-region.
Whereas to the north of the Mediterranean Sea a large pro-
portion of the mammals are more or less typically Holarctic, in
North Africa and Syria those with an Ethiopian facies are met
with, and an Oriental element makes its appearance in the eastern
districts of the sub-region. Even in Africa, however, some of the
forms have an Oriental facies, the Barbary ape (Macacus inuus)
belonging to a genus whose home is now in the Oriental region,
and which is totally unknown in the Ethiopian. As a wanderer
from the Ethiopian region, mention may first be made of a species
of jumping -shrew (Macroscelides) met with in Barbary, while
among the octodont family of the rodents, the gundi, forming
the sole representative of the genus Ctenodactylus, has its nearest
allies in Ethiopia, although it is confined to North Africa. The
Barbary ape, although occurring on the rock of Gibraltar, where it
may have been introduced, is otherwise confined to North Africa.
1 See Boulenger, Cat. Lizards, Brit. Mtis. Vol. III. p. 369.
2 Many writers separate certain species as Meriones, but as the two groups
are connected by G. indicus (see Lataste, Proc. ZooL Soc. 1884, p. 88), such
distinction seems superfluous.
358 THE HOLARCTIC REGION. [CHAP.
In the Carnivora, the striped hyaena, which is also an inhabitant
of India, is widely spread in this sub-region, ranging through
western Asia to northern Africa. The common genet (Genetta
vulgaris\ which belongs to a genus otherwise exclusively Ethio-
pian, is mainly confined to this region, inhabiting southern France,
Spain, Turkey, North Africa, and Palestine. A nearly similar
distribution characterises the common mungoose, or ichneumon
(Herpestes ichneumon], which frequents southern Spain, Asia
Minor, North Africa, and Palestine. The large weasel (Mustela
africanus) common to Egypt, Malta, and perhaps the south of
Italy has been already referred to in an earlier part of this chapter.
In addition to Ctenodactylus, the rodents possess another and more
widely-spread generic type confined to this sub-region in the form
of the great mole-rat (Spalax typhlus), whose range includes south-
eastern Europe, Persia, Mesopotamia, Syria, and Egypt. In the
same order the common porcupine (ffystrix cristata], although
ranging into West Africa, is found but little, if at all, to the north
of the present sub-region, where it is common to northern Africa
and southern Europe.
Among the ungulates the addax antelope (Addax nasomacu-
lata\ although allied to Ethiopian types, is solely Mediterranean,
its home being North Africa and Syria. More closely allied to
the Ethiopian fauna are certain hartebeests of the genus Bubalis,
the smaller of which (B. mauritanica] is common to North Africa,
Syria, and Arabia, while the second {B, major] inhabits Tunis.
The same is the case with the Beatrix antelope (Oryx beatrix]
of Western Arabia and Bushire. In gazelles, this sub-region is
remarkably rich, doubtless from the number of sandy or desert
tracts it contains. Algeria is the habitat of the three species
known as Gazella loderi, G. kevella, and G. rufina, while G.
dorcas ranges through Egypt, Algeria, Syria, Palestine, and a part
of Asia Minor, and G. subgutturosa roams from Persia through
Afghanistan and Turkestan. The aberrant sheep known as the
arui (Ovis tragelaphus] is now restricted to North Africa; and the
mouflon (O. musimon), although its fossil remains have been found
on the Continent, appears to be now restricted to Corsica. An-
other species peculiar to the sub-region is the Armenian sheep
(O. gmelini) of eastern Persia and Asia Minor, represented by a
IX.] KASHMIR. 359
closely-allied form in Cyprus. Of the goats, the Spanish ibex
(Capra pyrenaica) is restricted to the mountains of Spain; while
the Sinaitic ibex (C. sinaitica) represents the group in Palestine
and upper Egypt. Among the Cervidcz, the two species of fallow-
deer were originally confined to this area, the common Cervus
dama being a native of the Mediterranean countries, while the
Persian C. mesopotamicus is found in the mountains of Luristan, in
Mesopotamian Persia. In North Africa the ordinary red deer is
represented by a variety distinguished by the invariable absence of
a bez-tine to the antlers. A connection with the Tibetan sub-
region is afforded by the wild asses inhabiting the desert-plains
between the Red Sea and the Indus, since both these and the
Tibetan form are but varieties of a single species (Equus hemi-
onus). Lastly, Ethiopian affinities are exhibited by the occurrence
of a species of hyrax (Procavid] in Syria. In the early part of the
present century the hippopotamus still inhabited lower Egypt,
while, as we have seen, the lion, which is now common in parts of
Persia, was found within the historic period in Thrace. At a still
earlier date, both these animals, as well as the spotted hyaena,
extended as far north as England.
On the whole, therefore, the fauna of this sub-region is a very
mixed one ; and this fact, together with the difficulty in defining
its boundaries, suggests the need of further deliberation before the
area is raised to the rank of a separate region. The former con-
nections between southern Europe and Africa having been alluded
to in an earlier part of the chapter, require no further notice in
this place.
Very difficult to determine is the position which should be
given to the valley of Kashmir, since its fauna
exhibits such a mingling of Oriental and Holarctic
types that it might almost be as well assigned to one region as the
other. Holarctic affinities are, however, exhibited by the occur-
rence of a species of the red deer group, Cervus cashmirianus, and
likewise by one of the rodent genus Sminthus, of which the
second species inhabits northern and eastern Europe, and the
third Kansu, in western China. A variety of the brown bear is
also indicative of Holarctic affinities, and this is still more
markedly the case with the spiral-horned goat known as the
360 THE HOLARCTIC REGION. [CHAP.
markhor (Capra falconeri], of which one variety inhabits the Pir
Panjal range, on the south side of the valley, while the others are
found in the districts to the north and west of Kashmir. The
musk-deer, again, is another essentially Holarctic type. On the
other hand, the occurrence of a langur -(Semnopithecus) and a ma-
caque (Macacus) points to a connection with the Oriental fauna ;
and a Kashmir mungoose (Herpestes auropunctatus] is identical
with one from India. There are, however, none of the exclusively
Oriental genera in Kashmir ; and this fact, coupled with the
absence of all deer of the sambar-group, leaves little doubt that
the valley really belongs to the Holarctic. Whether it should
be regarded as pertaining to the Mediterranean sub-region, or as
forming a distinct sub-region by itself, must be reserved for future
consideration.
Passing to the western division of the Holarctic region, the
tract lying to the southward of the circumpolar Arctic
sub-region, designated by Dr Merriam the Boreal
zone of his Boreal region, may be conveniently
termed the Canadian sub-region. Its northern boundary is, of
course, identical with the southern limits of the Arctic sub-region,
and the area includes the greater part of the Dominion of Canada,
although a long strip runs down the line of the Rocky Mountains,
and another along the Pacific coast, into the United States. Indeed,
Dr Merriam includes in this sub-region all the higher plateaus of
Wyoming and Colorado, so that the sub-region embraces a
number of small disconnected areas on its south-western ex-
tremity, and it is consequently impossible to define its limits by
description. It may be stated, however, that on the eastern side
of the continent the sub-region extends from Hudson Bay to the
middle of Lake Michigan, while on the western coast it stretches
from near the extremity of Alaska to San Francisco ; a big loop
extending northwards of Montana nearly to latitude 55.
The mammalian fauna of the Canadian sub-region is that of
the western division of the Holarctic region generally, and includes
those forms mentioned on page 344. According to Dr Merriam,
the following genera from this sub-region do not range further
south than the undermentioned Transition zone ; namely, Condy-
lura, Urotrichus, Gulo, Latax, Arctomys, Haplodon, Phenacomys,
IX.] TRANSITION ZONE. 361
Myodes, Cuniculus, Zapus, Erethizon, Lagomys, Cervus, Alces,
Rangifer, and Haploceros. On the other hand, the following,
which are as clearly of northern origin, penetrate as far south
as the Sonoran region, which some of them enter. These are
Sorex, Mustela (only the members of the sub-genus Putorius),
Ursus, Fiber, Microtus, Castor, Tamias, Bos, and Ovis.
Between the Canadian sub-region of the Holarctic and the
Sonoran region is interposed a tract whose fauna
contains a mixture of Canadian and Sonoran forms, Transition
Zone.
and it is consequently termed by Dr Merriam the
Transition zone. Under this somewhat indefinite title the area
may best be left. It is described by the author just cited as
follows 1 : "The humid division of this zone, known as the
Alleghanian fauna, covers the greater part of New England (except
Maine and the mountains of Vermont and New Hampshire), and
extends westerly over the greater part of New York, southern
Ontario, and Pennsylvania, and sends an arm south along the
Alleghanies, all the way across the Virginias, Carolinas, and
eastern Tennessee, to northern Georgia and Alabama. In the
Great Lake region this zone continues westerly across southern
Michigan and Wisconsin, and then curves northward over the
prairie-region of Minnesota, covering the greater parts of North
Dakota, Manitoba, and the plains of the Saskatchewan ; thence
bending abruptly south, it crosses eastern Montana and Wyoming,
including parts of western South Dakota, and Nebraska, and forms
a belt along the eastern base of the Rocky Mountains in Colorado
and northern New Mexico, here as elsewhere occupying the
interval between the Upper Sonoran and Canadian zones.
" In Wyoming the Transition zone passes broadly over the
well-known low divide of the Rocky Mountains, which affords the
route of the Union Pacific railway, and is directly continuous with
the same zone in parts of Colorado, Uta, and Idaho, skirting the
Canadian boundaries of the Great Basin all the way around the
plains of the Columbia, sending an arm northward over the dry
interior of British Columbia, descending along the eastern base of
the Cascade Range and the High Sierra to the southern extremity
1 Appendix, No. 19, p. 30. In this extract the word Canadian has been
substituted for Boreal.
362 THE HOLARCTIC REGION. [CHAP. IX.
of the latter, and occupying the summits of the Coast Ranges in
California and of many of the desert ranges of the Great Basin.
"The Transition zone, as its name indicates, is a zone of
overlapping of Canadian and Sonoran types. Many Canadian
genera and species here reach the southern limits of their distribu-
tion, and many Sonoran genera and species their northern limits.
But a single mammalian genus (Synaptomys) is restricted to the
Transition zone, and future research may show that it inhabits the
Canadian region also."
FIG. 71. MUSQUASH (Fiber zibet hi cus).
The writer adds, however, that there are a considerable number
of species mostly rodents restricted to this zone. The follow-
ing Canadian genera, namely, Condylura, Urotrichus, Ursus,
Arctomys, Tamias, Fiber 1 , Zapus, Erethizon, Cervus, and Ovis,
almost or completely disappear in this zone ; while the following
intruders from the Sonoran, namely Scalops, Bassariscus, Spilo-
gale, Perognathus, Thomomys, Geoitiys, Cynomys and Antilocapra
do not range further north, several of them, indeed, only intruding
into the zone in a small area in the west.
1 Penetrates the Sonoran along the lines of streams where cool currents of
air are carried down.
CHAPTER X.
THE SONORAN REGION.
Limits Characteristics of Mammalian Fauna Extinct Groups of Mammals
characteristic of Western Arctogaea Distinctness of the Region Dual
Origin of Groups.
As stated in the introductory chapter, wherever one zoological
region of the globe has no definite physical barrier by which
it is separated from the next well-marked region, there must
always occur an intermediate tract where the characteristic types
of the faunas of the two regions inosculate and intermingle. That
this is the case with that area of North America denominated the
Sonoran region has been indicated at the close of the preceding
chapter, and the existence of the Transition zone, which seems,
on the whole, to pertain to the Holarctic region, unfortunately
prevents the Sonoran from being defined with the precision which
would be possible had this area a high mountain-barrier on its
northern frontier.
In a map of the small dimensions of the one accompanying
this volume it is impossible to show with any
Limits.
attempt at accuracy the complex nature of the
northern boundary of this region, which will, however, be found
accurately laid down in the map illustrating Dr Merriam's memoir 1 .
According to the latter writer, " the Sonoran region as a whole
stretches across the continent from the Atlantic to the Pacific,
covering nearly the whole country south of latitude 43, and
reaching northward on the Great Plains and Great Basin to about
latitude 48. It is invaded from the north by three principal
intrusions of Canadian 2 forms along the three great mountain-
1 Appendix, No. 19.
2 Boreal in the original.
364 THE SONORAN REGION. [CHAP.
systems already mentioned [Alleghanies, Rocky Mountains, and
Cascade and Sierra Nevada ranges] ; while to the southward it
occupies the great interior basin of Mexico, and extends into the
tropics along the highlands of the interior. It covers also the
peninsula of lower California, the southern part of which seems
entitled to rank as an independent subdivision."
Later it is stated that the region "may be divided by tempe-
rature into two principal transcontinental zones, Upper Sonoran
and Lower Sonoran ; and each of these in turn may be subdivided
into arid and humid divisions."
The proposal to form a separate region for such an insignifi-
cant area as the southern extremity of California seems unnecessary,
although its fauna may differ considerably from that of the typical
Sonoran.
Omitting mention of the bats, the mammalian genera charac-
Characteris teristic of the Sonoran region may now be taken into
tics of Mam- consideration. Commencing with the Insectivora,
tnalian Fauna. , , ..
the Sonadcz are represented by the peculiar genus
Notiosorex, which is closely allied to the Oriental Soriculus,
but has only 28 in place of 30 teeth. Of this genus the two
species do not range north of this region, although they also
enter Central America 1 . The short -tailed, or earless shrews
(Blarina), with either 32 or 30 teeth, are also mainly Sonoran,
although ranging northwards into the Holarctic, and southwards
into Guatemala. In the Talpida the three species of the mole-like
genus Scalops, characterised by having 36 teeth, webbed hind feet,
and a short and nearly naked tail, are mainly Sonoran, although
passing into the Transition zone. On the other hand, the two
species of Scapanus, distinguished by the possession of 40 teeth,
and the hairy tail, have a distribution very similar to Blarina,
although they do not enter Central America.
In the Carnivora the raccoon-family (Procyonidce) is very
strongly represented, although none of the genera are absolutely
peculiar to the region. The genus Bassariscus a near ally of the
true raccoons, and possessing two species is nevertheless mainly
Sonoran, although it ranges into the Transition zone of the
1 Teste Dobson.
X.] ITS FAUNA. 365
Holarctic and also into Central America. The true raccoons, on
the other hand, cannot be regarded as distinctive of the region,
since they range from South America into the Canadian sub-
region of the Holarctic ; and the coatis (Nasua) are now highly
characteristic of the Neogaeic realm. Indeed Dr Merriam con-
siders both genera as intruders from the latter realm, but this can
scarcely be regarded as the correct view. The family is repre-
sented in the two halves of the northern hemisphere (in the eastern
by sElurus], in both of which it dates from the Pliocene, and,
as it is unknown in South America till the Plistocene or late
Pliocene, it is evidently one of northern origin ; the American
forms having probably attained their maximum development in
the Sonoran region. Much the same is the case with regard to
the skunks among the Mustelidcz ; these being probably an original
Sonoran type which has spread northwards into the Holarctic
region and southwards into the Neogaeic realm. Of these, the
single species of climbing skunk (Sptlogale) is mainly Sonoran,
although it also enters the Transition zone of the Holarctic, and
likewise Central America. Of the other members of the group,
the typical skunks (Mephitis) range from Hudson Bay to Guate-
mala ; while the allied genus Conepatus is found from Texas to
Patagonia. In the same family the American badgers (Taxided),
although ranging well into the Holarctic, are regarded by Dr
Merriam as of Sonoran origin. These badgers, it may be ob-
served, differ from the true badgers of the Old World by the form
and characters of their cheek-teeth, the last upper molar being
proportionately much smaller.
Turning to the rodents, the well-known prairie -marmots
( Cynomys], which occupy a position intermediate between the true
marmots and susliks, are regarded by Dr Merriam as of Sonoran
origin, although they extend into the Holarctic. In the Muridce
the peculiar cricetine genus Rhithrodontomys which, together with
the allied South American Rhithrodon, differs from the other
members of the sub-family to which it belongs by its grooved
upper incisors appears to be restricted to the region under con-
sideration. The white-footed mice (Sitomys), although distributed
over the whole of the New World, seem to attain their maximum
specific development in the Sonoran, to which the two sub-genera
366 THE SONORAN REGION. [CHAP.
Onychomys and Oryzomys are restricted. Yet their near alliance
to the Old World hamsters indicates that the group must have
had a northern origin, although the genus may have attained
its present distinctive features within the Sonoran area. The
genus Sigmodon, which differs from the last in the pattern of the
molar teeth, and is represented solely by the rice-rat, does not
range north of the Sonoran region, although extending into South
America as far as Ecuador. The wood-rats (Neotoma), in which
the molars simulate the prismatic appearance of those of the voles,
.are also largely Sonoran, although they extend into the Canadian
FIG. 72. FACE OF Geomys bursarius, SHOWING GROOVED UPPER INCISORS
AND OPENINGS OF CHEEK-POUCHES.
FIG. 73. FACE OF 7"komomys talpoides, SHOWING SMOOTH UPPER INCISORS
AND OPENINGS OF CHEEK-POUCHES.
sub-region of the Holarctic, where they are represented by a
distinct sub-genus (Teonoma). The round-tailed musk-rat of
Florida (Neofiber) is an exclusively Sonoran type, although it is
regarded by Dr Merriam merely as a sub-genus of Microtus.
Highly characteristic of the region are the pouched rats, consti-
tuting the genera GeomyidcR. Of these, the typical genus Geomys *
extends northwards into the Transition zone and southwards into
Central America ; while the nearly-allied Thomomys> in which the
upper incisor teeth are smooth instead of grooved, penetrates
into the Canadian sub-region of the Holarctic, although unknown
1 Subdivided into eight genera by Merriam, North American Fauna, Part
viii., Washington (1895).
X.] ITS FAUNA. 367
in Central America. Both these genera are represented in the
Pliocene of the Sonoran area. In the same family the three
genera of kangaroo-rats known as Dipodomys, Perodipus, and
Microdipodops appear to be confined to the region ; and the same
is the case with the allied genus Hderomys, although Perognathus
passes northwards into the Transition zone.
FlG. 74. UNDER SURFACE OF LEFT FORE-FOOT OF Geomys.
In the Ungulata, the deer belonging to the peculiar American
genus Cariacus are very abundant in the Sonoran region (where
those of the typical genus Cervus are entirely wanting), although
they also range into the Canadian sub-region of the Holarctic, and
extend right through South America. Since, however, they are
wanting in the earlier Tertiary deposits of the latter area, as they
are at all epochs in the Old World, there can be little hesitation in
regarding them as essentially Sonoran types. Even more decidedly
is this the case with the prongbuck (Antilocapra), the sole type of
the family Antilocapridce, which is distinguished from the Bovidce.
by the horn-sheaths of the males being branched and periodically
shed from their bony supports. Although the prongbuck pene-
trates a considerable distance into the Canadian sub-region of the
Holarctic, its true home is the prairie-district of the Sonoran lying
3 68
THE SONORAN REGION.
[CHAP.
to the westward of the Mississippi. Possibly a small deer-like
animal from the Tertiaries of the same area known as Cosoryx,
may have been the ancestral stock of the prongbuck. Lastly, the
peccaries (Dicotyles), which are now chiefly South American, appear
to have been originally Sonoran types which have migrated south-
wards ; their fossil remains being common in the Tertiaries of the
United States, whereas they are unknown in South America before
FlG. 75. HEAD OF MALE MULE-DEER (Cariacus macrotis).
the Plistocene. Their near affinity to the earlier Tertiary pigs of
the Old World indicates that at a more remote date they spread
from a more northerly starting-point.
With regard to the armadillo (Tatusia) found in the Sonoran,
this is clearly a very recent immigrant from the Neogseic realm ;
and although opossums (Didelphys) were abundant in North
America during the early portion of the Tertiary epoch, it is not
improbable that the same explanation will hold good for their
existing Sonoran representatives.
X.]
ITS FAUNA.
369
The following list includes such exclusively New World genera
of mammals (apart from bats) which are represented in the
Sonoran area; those which may be regarded as more or less
nearly confined to this region being printed in italics. To appre-
ciate fully the significance of this list, reference must, however, be
made to the series of Holarctic genera given on p. 360, which
FIG. 76. HEAD OF MALE PRONGBUCK (Antilocapra americana).
are more or less completely restricted to the Canadian sub-region
of that great region, and the intervening Transition zone. The
Sonoran list is as follows, viz. :
Insectivora.
SORICID^E.
Notiosorex. Also Central America.
Blarina. Enters Canadian sub-region of Holarctic.
L. 24
370 THE SONORAN REGION. [CHAP.
Insectivora (cont.).
TALPID^E.
Scalops. Enters Transition zone.
Scapanus. Enters Canadian sub-region of Holarctic.
Carnivora.
PROCYONID^E.
Bassariscus. Enters Transition and Central America.
Procyon. N. to S. America.
Nasua. Also South American.
MUSTELID^E.
Spilogale. Enters Transition and Central America.
Conepatus. Texas to Patagonia.
Mephitis. Extends into Canadian sub-region and
Central America.
Taxidea. Enters Holarctic.
Rodentia.
Cynomys. Extends into Holarctic.
MURID^E.
Rhithrodontomys.
Sitomys. The whole of America.
Sigmodon. Southwards to Ecuador.
Neotoma. Ranges into Holarctic.
Neofiber.
GEOMYID^E.
Geomys. Extends into Transition zone and Central
America.
Thomomys. Ranges into Canadian sub-region.
Dipodomys.
Perodipus.
Microdipodops.
Perognathus. Ranges into Transition zone.
Heteromys.
Ungulata.
A NTIL OCA PRIDJE.
Antilocapra. Ranges into Canadian sub-region.
X.] EXTINCT MAMMALS. 37!
Ungulata (cont.).
Cariacus. Greater part of America.
DlCOTYLID^E.
Dicotyles. Also South American.
Edentata.
DASYPODID^E.
Tatusia. South American.
Marsupialia.
DlDELPHYID^E.
Didelphys. South American.
Although the Transition zone undoubtedly forms an unsatis-
factory item in regard to the distinctness of the Sonoran region,
yet when we look at the difference of its mammalian fauna as a
whole from that of the Canadian sub-region of the Holarctic, and
the close similarity between the latter and the fauna of northern
Europe and Asia, there can be but little hesitation in regard to
the acceptance of Dr Merriam's view that the Sonoran is a valid
zoological region of the Arctogaeic realm.
In a previous chapter the groups of mammals, both living and
extinct, confined to the eastern division of the
Arctogaeic realm have been already noticed, while oraupa of
in the present one reference has been made to such
existing types as are restricted to the western half of Western
, 6 /F . ., Arctogaea.
of the same realm. It now remains to consider
briefly some of the leading extinct groups which are found only in
the latter area ; and the consideration of these comes most appro-
priately here, seeing that the majority of these peculiarly American
types are of Sonoran origin, a large number of their remains
having been obtained from the States of New Mexico, Kansas,
Nebraska, and Dakota, which lie within that region, or from
Colorado, Wyoming, and Montana, which are situated within the
Transition zone.
Although, in common with the higher Primates, lemuroids are
now quite unknown in North America, they were well represented
there during the Puerco epoch of the lower Eocene by three
families. The first of these the Chriacida includes animals
242
372
THE SONORAN REGION.
[CHAP.
X.] EXTINCT MAMMALS. 373
having the same number of teeth as the allied Tertiary European
family Adapidce, but all characterised by their more primitive
structural features. Indeed these early lemuroids appear to
present considerable resemblances to the creodont Carnivora,
and differ from all the other members of the sub-order to which
they belong by the great elongation of the bony symphysis con-
necting the two branches of the lower jaw at the chin. Several
other genera, in addition to the typical Chrtacis, are assigned
to this family. The second group is that of the Anaptomorphidce,
which is represented in the Puerco Eocene by a genus known as
Indrodon, and in somewhat higher beds by the typical Anapto-
morphus. Although in other respects coming closer to existing
types than is the case with the Chriacidcz, the present family is
broadly distinguished by the tritubercular structure of the upper
molar teeth. The third peculiar North American family of the
lemuroids is that of the Mixodectidcz, typically represented by
Mixodectes of the Puerco Eocene.
Among the extinct creodont Carnivora there are two families
apparently restricted to the Tertiaries of North America, namely,
the Miacidce, and the Mesonychidcz, the former of which presents
such strongly marked affinities to the modern Carnivora that it
is frequently assigned to that group. The second family, on the
other hand, as represented typically by the genus Mesonyx of the
Uinta or lowest Oligocene, is characterised by the very simple
structure of the whole series of cheek-teeth, which are not unlike
the pre-molars of some of the higher carnivores. One of the
species of the typical genus attained dimensions as large as those
of a bear. In the widely distributed family Hyanodontida, an
exclusively North American genus is Patriofelis, which is regarded
as a specialised offshoot from Oxyana.
Among the ungulates there are several extinct families con-
fined to North America. In the group forming a transition
between the pigs and the ruminants there is first of all the family
of the oreodonts (Cotylopida), which make their appearance in
the middle Oligocene, and continue to the Miocene and lower
Pliocene 1 . These ungulates, which were allied to the genus
1 By American geologists the term Oligocene is not generally used, so that
the whole of the Tertiary strata are classed as Plistocene, Pliocene, Miocene,
374
THE SONORAN REGION.
[CHAP.
1
X.] EXTINCT MAMMALS. 375
Ancodus, common to the Tertiaries of both hemispheres 1 , and
were represented by a large number of generic types, have
crescentic columns to the short-crowned cheek-teeth, the upper
molars usually carrying four such columns ; while the lower canine
is approximated to the incisors, its usual form and function being
assumed by the first pre-molar. The last upper pre-molar is
simpler than the molars ; and while the feet have usually four toes
each, in the typical genus Cotylops a rudiment of the thumb is
retained in the front pair, as in Ancodus. In Cotylops and most
of the other genera the molars of the upper jaw have but four
columns, but in Protoreodon there are five ; a feature serving to
connect the family with the Anthracotheriida, from which group
the oreodonts are probably descended. A nearly-allied but more
specialised family is that of the Agriochceridce, as represented by
the genus Agriochcerus* , of the upper and middle Oligocene, in
which the toes were developed into claws, instead of being
incased in hoofs. Here it may be mentioned that while the
peccaries (Dicotylida) are now exclusively New World types, and
the pigs (Sutdce) restricted to the Old World, the Tertiaries of both
and Eocene. Introducing the former term, the series may be approximately
classified as follows, viz. :
PLISTOCENE. Equus Beds. Eqtius^ Elephas primigenius.
PLIOCENE (Upper). Blanco Series. Pliauchenia.
(Lower). Loup-Fork. Protohippus, Hipparion.
MIOCENE. Deep River. Anchitherium^ First Mastodons.
OLIGOCENE (Upper). John Day. Miohippus, Ancodus.
(Middle). White River. Agrwchcerus, Titanotherium.
(Lower). Uinta. Amynodon, Mesonyx.
EOCENE (Up. and Mid.). Bridger. Pachynolophus, Paltzosyops.
(Lower). Wahsatch. Hyracotheritim, Coryphodon.
(Lowest). Puerco. Neoplagiaulax , Poly mastodon.
In this series the Deep River beds are identified with the European
Miocene (supra^ p. 117) by the presence of Anchitheritim, and the first appear-
ance of Mastodon ; while the existence of Ancodus in the John Day and Upper
White River beds correlates them with the Upper and Middle Oligocene,
Hyracotherium and Coryphodon serving to identify the Wahsatch beds with the
Lower Eocene.
1 Supra, p. 161.
2 Equal Artionyx.
376
THE SONORAN REGION.
[CHAP.
hemispheres contain intermediate types such as Hyotherium and
Chcerohyus which are apparently the ancestral stock of both
families.
FIG. 79. FRONT VIEW OF RIGHT HIND FOOT OF Agriochcerus.
Another very peculiar type of North American Tertiary ungu-
lates is represented by Protoceras, from the upper division of the
White River Oligocene, which forms a family (Protoceratidce} by
itself. In these creatures the feet approximate to the ruminant
type; but the skull, as shown in the accompanying illustration,
FIG. 80. SKULL OF Protoceras, WITHOUT THE LOWER JAW.
has at least two pairs of large bony processes, probably covered in
life with horns, and a pair of large upper tusks, in both of which
respects it exhibits a curious parallelism with the perissodactyle
X.] EXTINCT MAMMALS. 377
ungulates. No trace of these singular artiodactyles has hitherto
been detected in the Old World.
The Camelidce. seem to have been primarily a North American
family, which originated in the Sonoran region, and of which one
branch (Lama) subsequently migrated south, while the other
(Camelus) crossed Bering Strait into the Old World. In the
upper Pliocene there occurs Pliauchenia, with only three lower
pre-molars, and in the lower Pliocene Loup-Fork beds Procamelus
with four of these teeth ; while the earliest representative of the
family is Leptotragulus of the Uinta Oligocene.
In the perissodactyle section of the same order the family
Titanotheriidce is mainly North American, although, as stated on
page 107, a representative of the typical genus Titanotherium has
been discovered in the Tertiaries of the Balkans. Titanotherium
includes huge rhinoceros-like animals, with low-crowned molar
FIG. 8r. RIGHT UPPER MOLAR TOOTH OF Palaosyops,
teeth of the type of those of Chalicotherium, and frequently having
the nasal region of the skull surmounted by large bony protuber-
ances. The genus is characteristic of the Uinta and the lower
division of the White River Oligocene. An earlier type of the
same family is typified by the smaller and less specialised hornless
animals from the Bridger Eocene, known as Palaosyops, which,
together with certain allied forms, constitute a peculiar sub-family
confined to America. This family, like the camels, appears there-
fore to have originated in the Sonoran region, whence a few
representatives wandered eastwards into the Old World.
In the generalised ungulate sub-order termed Amblypoda,
of which the lower Eocene coryphodons were the earliest
representatives, North America possesses an absolutely peculiar
THE SONORAN REGION. [CHAP.
family in the UintatheriidcR. These were huge, somewhat ele-
phantine ungulates, with five short toes to each foot, long tusk-
like canine-teeth in the upper jaw, and the skull surmounted with
three pairs of large bony protuberances ; their molar teeth being a
specialised form of the Coryphodon type. They occur in the
middle division of the Bridger, or the one above the zone yielding
Coryphodon, and may accordingly have been the descendants of
that genus. These uintatheres appear to have been restricted to
the " Bad Lands " of the Sonoran region and adjacent districts of
the Transition zone.
FlG. 82. EXTREMITY OF SKULL OF UintCltherium , TO SHOW UPPER TUSKS.
Passing by certain other forms of less interest, attention may
be directed to a peculiar group of aberrant mammals forming
the Tillodontia, which appear to be mainly North American, and of
which the serial position cannot be precisely determined. They
are restricted to the Eocene, and seem to combine the characters
of the modern Ungulata, Rodentia, and Carnivora. In the genus
Anchippodus, forming the type of the family AnchippodontidcB, the
skull approximates to that of a bear, the cheek-teeth are of an
ungulate type, and there is a pair of large chisel-like incisors
(preceded by a small functionless upper pair) in each jaw, very
similar to those of the rodents and hyraces. A second family,
X.I LIST OF THE FAUNA. 379
Psittacotheriida, is represented by the genera Psittacotherium and
Calamodon, in which the cheek-teeth grew permanently, instead of
developing roots.
The following list exhibits the chief families or minor groups
of characteristically North American mammals, which are either
entirely wanting or but sparingly represented in the Old World ;
those that are extinct being indicated by a t, and the absolutely
characteristic forms being printed in italics.
Primates.
t Anaptomorphidce. Anaptomorphus.
t Mixodectida. Mixodectes.
t Chriacidce. Chriads.
Carnivora.
Procyonidae. Represented in the Old World only by
^Elurus.
t Miaridce. Miacis, Didynrictis.
t Mesonychidcz. Mesonyx.
fHyaenodontidse. Patriofelis.
Rodentia.
Haplodon tidce.
Geomyidce.
Ungulata.
Dicotylidce. Represented by ancestral types in Tertiaries
of E. Hemisphere.
t Cotylopida. Cotylops, Mesoreodon, Protoreodon.
t Agriochceridce. Agrioch&rus.
t Protoceratida. Protoceras.
Camelidae. t Pliauchenia, \Procamelus, M^eptotraguius.
Antilocaprida. Antilocapra, t Cosoryx.
t Titanotheriidae. Palceosyops, Limnohyops, Telmatotherium.
t Uintatheriidce. Uintatherium.
Tillodontia.
t Psittacotheriida. Psittacotherium, Calamodon.
t A nchippodontidce. A nchippodus.
380 THE SONORAN REGION. [CHAP.
In an earlier chapter 1 a list has been given of the leading
Distinctness mammalian families common to the two divisions
of the Region. o f Arctogaea, and since in the foregoing chapter it
has been shown that many of the peculiar American families
are more or less intimately related to some of those common to
the two areas, it is manifest that throughout the Tertiary period
eastern and western Arctogaea must have had a land-connection
towards the north, so that there was an interchange of the fauna
of the more northern districts. Those American types which
penetrated as far south as what is now the Sonoran area would,
however, naturally tend to become isolated, and thus develop
into the families which may be regarded as characteristic of that
region. So far, therefore, from this area being merely a part of a
so-called Nearctic region, there are indications that it was differ-
entiated from the Holarctic at a time when the existing zoological
regions of the eastern half of the Arctogaeic realm were still unde-
fined. Indeed from the community of the Pliocene fauna of
southern Europe, Asia Minor, Persia, northern India, and south
China, it seems probable that the only divisions of the Arctogaeic
realm that could have been attempted would have been into (i) a
Sonoran region, (2) a Holarctic region, comprising the northern
districts of America, Asia, and Europe, (3) what may be termed a
Mediterraneo-Oriental region, including southern Europe, north
Africa, and the whole of southern Asia ; and (4) a Malagasy
region, which would then, or perhaps somewhat earlier, have
included Ethiopian Africa.
As to the amount of interchange which took place during
Dual Origin Tertiary times between the mammals of the eastern
of Groups. and western divisions of Arctogaea, and as to whether
similar generic types may have been developed independently in
the two areas, it is almost impossible to arrive at any satisfactory
conclusion. The suggestion that Equus has thus been independ-
ently evolved in the two areas, has been already mentioned 2 , and
this idea receives support from some very remarkable observations
recently made on the invertebrates inhabiting certain European
and North American caves.
1 Sttpra, p. 176. 2 Supra, p. 168.
X.] DUAL ORIGIN OF GROUPS. 381
With a quotation from Mr G. H. Carpenter's interesting
paper 1 on this subject, the present volume may be fitly closed.
After describing the inhabitants of the Mitchelstown Cave, in
Ireland, the author writes that the spring-tail (Lipurd] "is hardly
to be separated from a species found in the caves of Carniola, and
the Sinella is almost identical with one inhabiting the caves of
North' America ; while the spider is apparently the same as a cave-
dweller from the Mediterranean district of southern France, which
probably occurs in the North American caverns also. Had we to
do with animals of the upper fauna, these results, though highly
interesting, would not be without parallel in species already
known.... But the occurrence of cave-dwelling species with so
wide a range is a truly remarkable phenomenon. The caves
cannot be of any great geological age. Any possible geographical
connection which would permit the migration of subterranean
animals between southern Europe and Ireland, or between Ireland
and North America, seems altogether out of the question within
any period during which the fauna can have been specifically
identical with that of the present day. The only conclusion is
that from ancestors, presumably of the same genus, which took to
an underground life in such widely-separated localities, the similar
conditions of the caves have evolved descendants so similar that,
when compared, they cannot or can hardly be specifically distin-
guished from each other. Should the identifications stand the
test of a comparison of types, we shall have proof that the inde-
pendent development of the same species, under similar conditions,
but in widely-distant localities, has taken place. It must be
granted, however, that cave-conditions are so marked and excep-
tional, that it might not be safe to argue from them as to what
may have occurred in the upper world."
Although the author of this passage is perfectly correct in his
statement that there is a vast difference between cave-life and
open-air life, yet if animals which appear to belong to one and the
same species can be proved to have had a dual origin in the one
case, it can scarcely be considered impossible that similar instances
may occur in the other. And if such dual origins exist among
1 Irish Naturalist, Vol. IV. pp. 25 35 (1895).
382 THE SONORAN REGION. [CHAP. X.
species, there is surely no reason why they should not occasionally
occur in the case of genera. It would, therefore, seem by no
means improbable that the species of the genus Equus which
inhabited the eastern and western halves of the northern hemi-
sphere during the close of the Tertiary period may have been
evolved from the closely-allied but separate ancestral equine
stocks.
The matter does not, however, by any means end here. In
an earlier chapter 1 it has been shown that the same species of a
genus of fish (Galaxias) occurs in countries so remote from one
another as New Zealand and Australia on the one hand, and
Patagonia on the other. With the evidence of the cave-animals
before us, is it absolutely impossible that these apparently iden-
tical fishes can have been evolved independently of each other ?
Should this be so, it will engender increased caution in drawing
any inferences as to former land-connection from the evidence
of single animals. But such instances of independent evolution,
if they do occur, must be of extreme rarity, and will in no case
interfere with deductions drawn from the presence of a number
of allied species or genera of animals in distant countries.
1 Suprh, p. 125. Recently another species has been described from South
Africa. See Steindachner, SB. Ac. Wien, vol. ciii. p. 460 (1894).
APPENDIX.
LIST OF WORKS AND PAPERS MOST FREQUENTLY REFERRED TO
IN THIS VOLUME.
1. ALLEN, J. A. The Geographical Distribution of Mammals. Bull.
U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. IV. nos. 2 and 4, pp. 313376, (1878).
2. The Geographical Distribution of North American
Mammals. Bull. Amer. Mus., vol. IV. pp. 199243, (1892).
3. ANONYMOUS. Antarctica; a Supposed Former Southern Conti-
nent. Natural Science, vol. III., pp. 5457, (1893).
4. The Nearctic Region and its Mammals. T. c. pp. 288
292.
5. BEDDARD, F. E. A Text-Book of Zoogeography. (Cambridge
Natural Science Manuals}. Cambridge, 1895.
6. BLANFORD, W. T. The African Element in the Fauna of
India. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. XVIII., pp. 277 294,
(1876).
7. Note on the "Africa- 1 ndien" of A. von Pelzeln, and on
the Mammalian Fauna of Tibet. Proc. Zool. Soc. 1876, pp.
631634.
8. Anniversary Address to the Geological Society. Proc.
Geol. Soc. 1890, pp. 43110.
9. The Age of the Himalayas. Geol. Mag. decade 3, vol. IX.,
pp. 161 168, (1892).
10. On a Stag (Cervus thoroldi} from Tibet, and on the
Mammals of the Tibetan Plateau. Proc. Zool. Soc. 1893, pp.
444-449.
11. BOURNS, F. S., and DEAN, C. W. Preliminary Notes on Birds
and Mammals collected in the Philippine Islands. Occasional
Papers Minnesota Acad. vol. I., pp. I 64, (1894).
12. BULMAN, G. W. The Effect of the Glacial Period on the Fauna
and Flora of the British Islands. Natural Science, vol. ill.,
pp. 261 266, (1893).
384 APPENDIX.
13. CARPENTER, G. H. Nearctic or Sonoran ? Natural Science,
vol. v., pp. 5357, (1894).
14. EVERETT, A. H. A Nominal List of the Mammals inhabiting
the Bornean Group of Islands. Proc. Zool. Soc. 1893, pp.
492496.
15. FORBES, H. O. The Chatham Islands; their Relation to a
Former Southern Continent. Supplemental Papers R. Geogr.
Soc, 1893, pp. 607637.
1 6. HEDLEY, C. On the Relation of the Fauna and Flora of
Australia to those of New Zealand. Natural Science, vol. III.,
pp. 187 191, (1893).
17. HEILPRIN, A. The Geographical and Geological Distribution
of Animals. International Scientific Series, London, 1887.
1 8. HUXLEY, T. H. On the Classification and Distribution of
Alectoromorphas and Heteromorphas. Proc. ZooL Soc. 1868,
pp. 294319.
19. MERRIAM, C. H. The Geographic Distribution of Life in North
America, with special reference to the Mammalia. Proc.
Biol. Soc. Washington, vol. VI I., pp. i 64, (1892).
20. Laws of Temperature Control of the Geographic Dis-
tribution of Terrestrial Animals and Plants. Nat. Geogr. Mag.
vol. VI., pp. 229 238, (1894).
21. NEHRING, A. Ueber Saugethiere von den Philippinen, nament-
lich von der Palawan-Gruppe. Sitzber. Ges. Naturf. Berlin,
1894, pp. I79I93-
22. OGILBY, J. D. Catalogue of Australian Mammals. Sydney,
1894.
23. OSBORN, H. F. The Rise of the Mammalia in North America.
Stud. Biol. Lab or at. Columbia College, Zoology, vol. I., art. 2,
(1893).
24. , and EARLE, C. Fossil Mammals of the Puerco Beds.
Bull. Amer. Mus. vol. VIL, pp. i 70, (1895).
25. SCHARFF, R. F. On the Origin of the Irish Land and Fresh-
water Fauna. Proc. Irish Acad. ser. 3, vol. III., pp. 479 485,
(1894).
26. SCLATER, P. L. On the General Geographic Distribution of the
Members of the Class Aves. Journ. Linn. Soc. Zool. vol. II.,
pp. 130145, (1858).
27. The Geographical Distribution of Mammals. Man-
chester Science Lectures, ser. 5 and 6, pp. 202 219, (1874).
28. W. L. The Geography of Mammals. Geographical
Journal, 1894, 1895.
APPENDIX. 385
29. SHARPE, R. B. On the Zoo-Geographical Areas of the World,
illustrating the Distribution of Birds. Natural Science,\o\. III.,
pp. 100108, (1893).
30. THOMAS, O. T. The Mammals of the Solomon Islands. Proc.
Zool. Soc. 1888, pp. 470484.
31. Preliminary Diagnosis of New Mammals from Northern
Luzon, collected by Mr J. Whitehead. Ann, Mag. Nat. Hist.
ser. 6, vol. XV. pp. 160 164, (1895).
32. WALLACE, A. R. The Geographical Distribution of Animals.
London, 1876, 2 vols. 8vo.
33. Island Life. London, 1880, 8vo.
34. What are Zoological Regions? Nature, vol. XLIX.,
pp. 6 10 613.
35. The Palaearctic and Nearctic Regions compared as re-
gards the Families and Genera of their Mammalia and Birds.
Natural Science, vol. IV., pp. 433 445, (1894).
36. ZITTEL, K. A. VON. Die geologische Entwickelung, Herkunft, und
Verbreitung der Saugethiere. Sitzber. bayer. Akad. vol. xxill.,
pp. 137198, (1893).
L. 25
INDEX.
Aard-varks, 187, 249, 256, 268
Aard-wolf, 235
Abderites, in
Abderitidcz, 1 1 1
Acaremys, 90
Acdestis, no
Acomys, 198
Ac other uhim.) 192
Acrobates, 37
Adapis, 181, 191, 219
Addax, 245, 324, 358
Adelphomys, 91
^ 157, 191, 202
$) 321
212, 275
sEpyceros, 245
sEpyornis, 222
sEpyprymnus, 36
Age of animal groups, 7
Agriochceridiz, 375
Agriochceriis, 375
Agutis, 89, 137
Alactaga, 323, 351
^&w, 164, 315
Amblotherium, 53
Amblypoda, 173, 377
Amblyrhiza, 87, 137
Ameghino, on age of Santa Cruz fauna,
68
Ammodorcas, 245
AmphictiSy 191
Amphicyon, 158, 191
.4 ?/>// icy nod on ,193
Amphidozotherium, 156, 191
Amphilestes, 53
Amphiproviverra, 109
Amphisbcend) 132
Amphisbcenidtz, distribution of, 132;
fossil, 132
AmphitheriidcB, 52
Amphitherium, 53
itragulus, 1 94
^? nalcitheriu m, 105
Anaptomorphidce, 373
Anaptomorphus, 373
Anchilophus, 166, 192, 193
Anchippodontid&i 378
AnchippodttS) 378
Anchithei'ium, 166, 196
Ancodus, 161, 193, 203, 375
Ancyclotherium, 172, 200
Anoa, 47, 164
Anomaluridce, 237
Anomalurus, 238
Anomodontia, 151
AnoplotheriidcZ) 185
Anoplotherium, 185, 193
Anops, 132
Antarctica, 56, 128; extent of, 129
Antarctogsea, 26
Anteaters, 101, 136
^4 ntech inom ys, 3 9
Anthracotheriida, 161, 192
Anthracotherium,) 163, 192, 193, 194,.
203
Anthropopithecus, 180, 202, 231, 256
Antillia, 139
Antillean sub-region, 136, 137
Antilocapra, 367
Antilocapridce, 367
Antelopes, African, 242
Amirosorex, 272
Africa connected with S. America,
127
Africa, route of migration into, 256
Aplin, Mr, on mammals crossing
rivers, 14
Aquilonian region, 26
Arabia, South-eastern, fauna of, 262
Arapaima, 134
Arch&lurus, 157
Archceoniys, 91
INDEX.
387
Arctictis, 273
Arctic sub-region, 360
Arctic zone, 310
Arctocyon, 159
Arctogale, 273
Arctogsea, 25, 26, 27, 144, 210
Arctogsea, Eastern, 179
Arctogasan region, 26
Arctogaeic fauna, features of, 147
Arctogseic realm, 27, 144
Arctotherium, 72
Arctomys, 159, 267, 351
Arc t onyx, 276
Area, 2
Armadillo, giant, 136
Armadillos, 94, 368
Artionyx, 375
Arui, 35
Arvicanthis, 239
Asses, 359
Astrapotheria, 81
Astrapotheriutn, 81
Atherura, 278
Atlantic, its recent origin, 24
Atlantosaurus, 35, 151
Auk, 347
Anlacodus, 91, 240
Australia, how it received its fauna,
54; its connection with S. America,
55 125; i ts relations with New
Zealand and other islands, 58, 59
Australian region, 25, 27, 31
Austro-Columbian region, 25
Austro-Malayan region, 27, 28, 45
Avahi, 217
Awantibo, 256
Aye-aye, 219
Babirusa, 47
Bachitherium, 164, 192
Badgers, 321
Balanoptera, 68
Banded anteater, 40
Bandicoots, 38
Banteng, 278
Barbets, 254
Barriers to dispersal, 10, 14
Bassariscus, 73, 136, 364
Bathyergus, 23 r, 239
B atomy s, 278
Bats, Notogseic, 42 ; Neogseic, 70
Baur, Dr, on relations of Galapagos
islands, 141
Bdeogale, 235
Bears, American, 318; their absence
from Ethiopian Africa, 258
Beavers, 313, 318
Beddard, on earth-worms, 126, 311;
on Fernando Noronha, 140
Bering Strait indicates a line of con-
nection between Asia and America,
178? 337
Bettongia, 30
Birds, Malagasy, 254; Ethiopian,
254
Bison, 314
Black-buck, 278
Blanford, Dr, on permanency of conti-
nents, 24 ; on zoological regions, 27 ;
on a former connection between the
southern continents, 128; on con-
nection between Africa and S.
America, 128; on survival of old
forms in Madagascar, 131; on the
birds of Madagascar and Africa,
254 ; on Oriental sub-regions, 266 ;
on the fauna of India, 267 ; on land
connection between Ceylon and
Malaysia, 293 ; on the Tibetan
fauna, 354
Blarina, 364
Blastomeryx, 74
Blesbok, 244
Boa, 132
Boas, distribution of, 132
Bontebok, 244
Boreal region, 146, 309, 360; zone,
360
Borhycena, 109
Borneo, its fauna, 294
Bos, 165, 206, 278, 314; depressicornis,
47, 164; mindorensis, 47
Boselaphus, 206
Both riospondyhis, 152
Bothremys, 131
Bothriceps, 152
Bourbon, 213
Bovidce, 164, 186, 196; Holarctic, 314;
Oriental, 279
Brachydiastematotherium, \ 70
Brachyurns, \ 36
Brachyteles, 136
Bradypodida, 100
Brady pus, 100
Bramatherium , 186, 204
Brazilian sub-region, 135
British Isles, their connection with
the Continent, 339
Brontornis, 60
Bubalis, 206, 244, 358
Budorcas, 324
Buffalo, 279
Bulman, Mr, on the submergence of
Britain, 350
252
388
INDEX.
Buphaga, 254
Burmese sub-region, 267
Buried river-channels of Britain, 339
Cadurcotherium^ 82, 170, 192
Ccenolestes, no
C¬heriidce, 163, 192
Ccenotherium, 163, 192, 193
Calamodon, 379
Callithrix, 136
Caloprymnus, 36
CamelidcE, 163, 185, 326, 377; Neo-
gseic, 74
Camelus, 163, 185, 204, 377
Camels, 326
Campos of Brazil, 65
Canadian sub-region, 360
Cane-rat, 91
Canidce, Oriental, 274; Neogaeic, 72
Cam's, 195, 202, 235, 274; antarc-
ticus, 140; dingo, ^i;frocyonides,
355
Cannabateomys, 91
Capra, 206, 230, 280, 324, 359, 360
Capreolus, 352
Capivara, 88
Capromyida, 90
Capromys, 91, 137
Caracal, 249
Cardiotherium, 89
Carcttochelyidcz, 62
Carettochelys, 62
Cariacus, 74, 344, 367
Carioderma, 96
Carnivora, Arctogseic, 157; Holarctic,
312, 321; Neogaeic, 71; North
American, 341 ; Sonoran, 364
Carpenter, Mr, on cave-faunas, 381
Carpincho, 88, 136
Carpotnys, 278
Carterodon, 91
Castor, 313
Castorida, 159, 313
Castoroides, 87, 138
Castoroidida, 87, 138
Cassowaries, 48, 58
Casuarius, 48
Catamarca beds, 67
Catonyx, 105
Caves of Lagoa Santa, 66
Ctf^a, 88
Cavies, 88
Caviidcz, 88
Cave-faunas, 381
Caxomistle, 136
Cebidce, 69
Cebochczrus, 192
Celebes, its fauna, 47; an anomalous
island, 49
Cewas, 280
Centetes, 220
Centetidce, 131, 220
Central American sub-region, 136
Central Asian sub-region, 351
Centres of evolution, 2 r
Cephalogale, 191
Cephalophus, 244
Ceratodns, 133
Ceratophora, 120
Cercocebus, 231
Cercoleptes, 72
Cercomys, 91
Cercopithecida, 231, 269; distribution
of, 180
Cercopithecus, 231
Cernaysian Fauna, 153
Cervicapra, 245
Cervicaprince, 244, 245
Cervidce, 164; absence of in Ethiopian
region, 230, 258; Holarctic, 315 ;
Oriental, 280
Cervulus, 198, 281
CVrzw, 164, 280, 326, 335'.35 8 > 359>
367; eustephanus, 352; titnoriensis ,
46; xanthopygus, 351
Cestracion, 63
Cetaceans of American Tertiary, 68
Cetotherium, 68
Ceylon, when separated from India,
2 93
Ceylonese sub-region, 266
Chcerokyus, 376
Chceromeryx, 203
Chtzropotamida:, 161, 192
Cheer opotamus, 161, 192
Cheer optis, 39
Characiniidce, distribution of, 134
Chcetomys, go, 136
Chalicomys, 159, 194, 196, 313
Chalicotheriidce, 196, 200
Chalicotherium, 170, 192, 200
Chameleons, distribution of, 222
Chamois, 324
Chelonians of Notogsea, 62
Chevrotains, 164, 281
Chimarrogale, 272
Chilian sub-region, 135
Chimpanzees, 180, 231, 256
Chinchillas, 89, 136
Chinchillidee, 89
Chipmunks, 313
Chiromyidce, 181
Chiromys, 219
Chiropodomys, 278
INDEX.
389
Chiroiiectes, 107
Chiru, 325
Chirnromys, 41
Chlamydophorus, 94, 96, 137
CJilamydotherium, 96
CholcepuS) 10 1
Chriacidie, 371
C/iriacis, 373
Christmas Island, 303
Chromididiz, 134
Chrotomys, 277
Chrysochloridiz, 230, 234
Ckrysochloris, 230, 234
Civets, 182; Oriental, 273
Clccnodon, 159
Claviglis, 238
Coatis, 72, 365
Cobus, 200, 206, -245
Cwlogenys, 89, 136
Colics, 254
Collide?, 254
Colobus, 231
Colymbus, 347
Comoro Islands, 213
Conepatus, 73, 365
Condylura, 341
Conihtrus, 41
Connection between Africa and S.
America, 127 ; Australia and S.
America, 125
Connochcetes, 244
Continental islands, 10
Continents, permanency of, 22
Cooke, Mr, on S. American molluscs,
124; on Antillean molluscs, 139;
on N. American land Mollusca,
3n
Cope, Prof, on N. American fossil
cetaceans, 68
Coral his, 132
Coryphodontidce, 174
Coryphodon, 174, 378
C0.SWJ.*-, 368
Cotton-rat, 88
Cotylopidce, 373
Cotylops, 375
Coypu, 91, 137
Crateromys, 277
Cricetince, 160, 183, 239
Cricetomysy 239
Cricetus, 160, 192, 196, 322
Crocidura, 195, 272
Crocodilus porosus, 62
Crossarchus, 235
Crossopus, 319
Cryptobranchus, 35
Cryptodira, distribution of, 8
Cryptoprocta, 220
Ctenodactylidcz, 90
Ctenodactylus, 91, 212, 240, 323, 357,
35 8
Ctenomys, 90
Cuniculus, 314
Cuscuses, 36, 46
Cusimanse, 235
Cycloturus, 102
Cyncelurus, 202, 234, 249, 272
Cynic tis, 235
Cynodictis, 158, 191
Cynodon, 191, 193
Cynopithecus niger, 47
C>, 235, 274
Cynogale, 273
Cynomys, 342
Dacrytherium, 185, 192
Dactylomys, 91
Dactylopsila, 37
Dcedicurus, 98
Damaliscus, 244
Damuda-Talchir flora, 153
Dapedoglossus, 134
Daphcenus, 158
Dasornis, 60
Dasymys, 238
Dasyprocta, 98, 137
Dasyproctida, 89
Dasypodidce, 94
Dasypus, 94
Dasyuridce, 39 ; Neogaeic, 108
Dawkins, Prof. B., on the range of
the mammoth, 334
Decastis, no
Deer, 164, 267, 367 ; Oriental, 280 ;
their absence from Ethiopian
Africa, 230, 258
Deep-sea deposits in islands, 23
Degu, 90
Dendrogsea, 26
Dendrogale, 270
Dendrolagus, 36
Dendromys, 238
Deomys, 239
Desman, 321
Deserts as barriers, 15
Diadiaphoriis , 80
Diatryma, 60
Dichobumts, 163, 192
Dichodon, 192
Dichodontidce, 185, 192
Dicroceros, 196
Dicotyles, 73, 368
Dicotylida, 74, 375
Dicynodonts, 151
390
INDEX.
Didelphyidce, Neogseic, 107
Didelphys, 51, roy, 192, 193, 194,
368
Dingo, 42
Dinocyon, 158, 195
Dinomyidce, 89
DinornithidfB, 58
Dinosauria, 151 ; wide distribution
of, 8
DinotheriidcB) 187
Dinotherium, 173, 187, 196, 200,206
Dist<echurus, 37
Dispersal, barriers to, 10
Distribution of groups, 9
Distributional Areas, 19
Distribution of families, 20 ; genera,
19 ; orders, 21 ; species, 19
Diplomesodon t 320
Dipodidce, 240, 342 ; not Hystrico-
morpha, 159 ; E. Holarctic, 322
Dipodomys, 367
Diprotodon, 38
Diprotodonts, 34
Dipus, 322
Diver, 347
Dobson, Dr, on Dipodidiz, 159
Dolichotis, 88, 136
Dolichopithecus, 180
Dorcatherium, 164, 186, 196, 197,
198, 204, 242, 256
Dorcopsis, 36
Dremotherium, 194
Dromatherium, 54
Dormice, 322 ; African, 238
Dorcatragus, 245
Dromicid) 37
Dromiciops, 107
Dryolestes, 54
Dryopithecus, 180
Dual origin of groups, 380
Duckbill, 32
Duikerboks, 244
Earth-worms, 126; of Patagonia al-
lied to those of Australasia, 126
East Central African sub - region,
261
Eastern Arctogsea, 179; its Tertiary
mammalian fauna, 190
Echidna, 33
EchidnidcBi 33
Echinomys, 91, 136
Echinops, 220
Echinothrix, 48
Edentata, 92
Edentates, doubtful fossil forms, 187
Effodientia, 187, 192
Elands, 247
ElaphodiiS) 326, 356
Elasnwtherium, 333
Elephas, 172, 206, 247, 282
Elephants, 172 ; Stegodont, 172 ;
African, 247 ; dwarf Maltese, 339 ;
European Plistocene, 334 ; Japan-
ese fossil, 356
Elephantida:, Oriental, 282
Elk, 164, 315
El lolnus, 322
Elotherium, 161, 192, 193
Emballonuridce, S. American, 70
Enhydriodon, 195, 203
Endrina, 217
Eocardia, 91
Eocardiidce, 91
Eodidelphys, 107
Epanorthidce, no
Epanorthus, no
Epomopfioriis, 221, 232
Eqttida, 165 ; S. American, 75 ; Ori-
ental, 282
Equus, 1 68, 206, 247, 282, 359; its
dual origin, 380
Erethizon, 90, 343
Ericulus, 220
Erinaceida, 181, 271
Erinaceus, 271, 233
Eriodes, 136
Eriomys, 89, 136
Ethiopia and India, their connection,
257
Ethiopian Mammals, 230
Ethiopian Region, 25, 227 ; its past
history, 255
Eucardiodon, 89
Eucholczops, 107
Euchoretes, 322, 351
Eumeces, 357
Eupetaurus, 322
En pier es, 220
European sub-region, 348
Etismilus, 157, 191
Eiitat2is, 94
Eutheria, 34
Everett, Mr, on Malayan fauna, 294
Extinct mammals of Western Arcto-
ga, 371
Extinction of large mammals, 18
347
Falkland Islands, 140
Fallow deer, 326, 359
Faunas, community of early, 148
Felidcc, African, 234, 249 ; Holarctic,
312 ; Neogaeic, 71 ; Oriental, 272
INDEX.
391
Felis, 198, 202, 249; concolor, 71;
MO**/, 351 ; megalotiS) 46
Fernando Noronha, 140
/W?r, 342
Fish-eating rats, 88
Fishes, community between those of
Australasia and S. America, 125
Flora, community of Southern Palseo-
zoic, 153
Flying phalangers, 37
Flying-squirrels, African, 237
Forbes, Dr, on Antarctica, 128, 129
Forest-bed, its fauna, 335
Fossa, 220
Foxes, 317
Galago, 217, 231
Galaginft, 217
Galapagos Islands, 140 ; Tortoises of,
141
GaleopitheciiS) 268, 270
Galerisctts, 237
Galerix, 197, 270
Galictis, 73
Galidia, 220
Galidictis, 220
Garzoniidce, 1 1 r
Gastornis, 60
Gaur, 278
Gazella, 199, 206, 245, 325, 358;
gutturosa, 351
Gazelles, 245
Ge/oats, 192, 193
Gemsbok, 245
Genetta, 182, 321, 358
Genets, 182
Geogale, 219
Geographical changes in Europe since
the Plistocene, 337
Geological sequence, 7
Gcomytd&i 366
Geomys, 366
Georhychus, 239
Gerbillince, 183
Gerbillus, 357
Giant Salamander, 356
Giant birds of Patagonia, 60; the
Eocene, 60
Gibbons, 180, 269
Giraffa, 186, 189, 204, 242
Giraffidce, 186, 242
Glacial epoch, 9; period, in America,
345
Glossotherium, 105
Glyptodon, 96
Glyptodontidce, 96
Gnus, 244
Goats, 324
Golunda, 278
Gorilla, 180, 231
Graphiurus, 238
Greenland Falcon, 347
Gregory, Dr, on communication be-
tween Atlantic and Pacific, 1 39 ; on
modern origin of Atlantic, 23, 135
Grison, 73
Groove-toothed mice, 88
Ground-sloths, 102
Guanaco, 74, 136
Gundi, 357
Gymnura, 271
Gymnobelideus, 37
Guto, 312
Habrocoma, 90
Hamsters, 160, 322
Hapalemur, 219
Hapalidtz, 69
Hafalomys, 278
Hapalotts, 41
Haploceros, 165, 343
Haplodon, 342
Harnessed Antelopes, 246
Harpyia, 42
Hawaiian region, 27, 30, 45
Hedgehogs, 181
Hedley, Mr, on the isolation and con-
nections of Australia, 59
Hegetotherium, 85
Heilprin, Dr, on migrations of mam-
mals, 15; on zoological regions, 26,
29 ; on the Boreal Region, 346 ;
on the Boreal Fauna, 347
Helaletes, 165
Helicophora, 200
Helictis, 276, 355
Helladotherium, 186, 198
Helmsley, Mr, on Galapagos flora,
142
Helogale, 235
Hemicentetes, 220
Hemicyon, 195
Hemigale, 273
Hemigalidia, 220
Hemimeryx, 203
Hemipsalodon, 258
Hemitragus, 206, 209, 230, 279, 288,
324
Herpestes, 182, 235, 321, 358, 360
Heteromys, 136, 367
Himalayan sub-region, 266
Hipparion, 167, 200, 206, 247
Hippidiuni, 75
Hippohyiis, 203
392
INDEX.
Hippopotamida, 184, 241
Hippopotamus, 204, 241, 256; cross-
ing from Africa to Madagascar, 223
Hippoligris, 247
Hippotragus, 199, 206, 245
Holarctic region, 26, 27; physical
features and extent, 309 ; character-
istics of the fauna, 311; its unity,
316; eastern division, 319; Plisto-
cene Fauna of the eastern division,
328 ; western division, 340
Holochilus, 88
Homacodon, 163
Homalodontotheriunt) 82, 170
Homunculus, 69
Hornbills, 254
Horse, 317
Horses, S. American, 75
Hose, Mr., on Malayan fauna, 294
Howorth, Sir H. H., on the mixture
of northern and southern types of
mammals in the Plistocene, 329
Humidity, influence of, 5
Hundes, mammalian remains in, 354
Hunting-dog, 236
Hunting-leopard, 249, 272
Hildas, 91, 137
Huxley, Prof., on zoological regions,
25,28; on northern origin of south-
ern birds, 130
Hyana, 182, 198, 235, 249, 273, 321
HycBnarctus, 158, 195, 198, 202, 321
HyaenictiS) 182, 198
Hycenidce, an Old World group, 182
Hycenodon, 158, 192, 193, 203
Hy&nodontida, 373
Hydaspitherium, 186, 204
Hydraspis, 132
Hydrochcerus, 88, 136
Hydromyin<z, 40
Hydromys, 40
Hydropotes, 326, 356
Hylobates, 180, 269
Hylomys, 271
Hyopotamus, 161
ffyopsodtts, 155
Hyotherium, 194, 196, 203, 376
Hyperodapedon, 63
Hypertragulus, 164
Hypocetus, 68
Hypselornis, 60
Hypsipetes, 254
Hyraces, 248, 268
Hyrachyus, 166, 192
Hyracodon, no, 170
Hyracoidea, relationship to toxodonts,
85, 248
Hyracotherium, 161, 165
Hystricomorpha, their abundance in
Neogaea, 88
Hystricidce, S. American, 90; Ori-
ental, 278
Hystricinte, 184
Hystrix, 196, 198, 203 ; javanica, 46
Ibex, 359
Iceland, 350
IchthyomyS) 88
Icticyon, 72, 136
Ictitherium, 182, 198
Ictonyx, 236
Idiurus, 238
Iguanidce, distribution, 132; fossil,
133
Iguanadon, 151
Iguanas, fossil in Europe, 62; of Fiji
and Friendly Islands, 62
India and Ethiopia, their connection,
209, 257
Indian region, 25 ; sub-region, 266
Indo-Malayan sub-region, 266
Indo- African region, 26
Indo-Chinese sub-region, 266, 267
Indrisince, 217
Indrodon, 373
Introduced mammals, 17
Insectivora, Neoggeic, 70; Arctogaeic,
156; Holarctic, 312; North Amer-
ican, 341 ; Sonoran, 364
Ireland, its connection with Britain,
340
Irish deer, 326, 333
Irrisoridce, 254
IsectolophuS) 165
Islands, continental, 60; oceanic, 10
Isomys, 239
IssiodoromyS) 89, 92
Ixocincla, 254
Java, distinctness of its fauna, 300
Jerboa-rats, 41
Jumping-mice, 342
Jungle-cat, 249
Kangaroo-rats, 366
Kangaroos, 35
Kinkajou, 72
Kirby, Mr, on Holarctic Lepidoptera,
310
Kudus, 246
Kurtz, Dr, on Argentine fossil flora,
Labyrinthodontia, 152
INDEX.
395
Lagidium, 89, 136
Lagomyidce, 159, 314
Lagomys, 196, 314
Lagopus, 347
Lagorchestes, 36
Lagostomatidce, 89
Lagostomus, 89, 136
Lagos tr op hits, 36
Lagothrix, 136
Lama, 74, 136, 377
Lamprotornis, 254
Langiirs, 269, 360
Laniarius, 254
Lanthanotheriiun, 195, 197, 270
Zate*, 312, 356, 347
Le Conte, Dr, on separation of N. and
S. America, 118
Leberon Fauna, 197
Leith-Adams, Dr, on the Maltese
Islands, 337
Lcithia, 333
Leopard, 249
Lepidosiren, 133
Lepidosirenida, distribution of, 133
Leporida, 160; Holarctic, 314; Neo-
gaeic, 92
Leptarctiis, 72
Leptodon, 200
Leptomanis, 187, 192
Leptomeryx, 164
Leptotragtdus, 163, 377
Lepus, 203
Lemmings, 314
Lemuroids, 181, 191; Arctogaeic, 155;
character of, 216; early entrance
into Ethiopian and Malagasy re-
gions, 223; extinct, 371
Leimiridce, 181, 217, 270
Lemur, 217
Libytherium, 186
Limacomys, 238
Linsanga, 235, 256, 273
Lion, 249, 272
Listriodon, 196, 203
L^thocran^^ls, 245
Litopterna, 75
Lomaphorus, 28
Lomvia, 347
Loncheres, 91, 136
Lophiodontidce, 165, 192
I^ophiodon, 165, 187
Lophiomys, 239
Lophiomeryx, 192
Lophuromys, 239
Z0rw, 256, 270
Loxomylus, 87, 137
Lutra, 202
Lycaon, 236
Lynxes, 312, 317
Macacus, 180, 202, 269, 355, 357,.
360 ; cynomolgus, 46 ; maurus, 47
Machcerodus, 157,195,202; Neogseic r
7 1
Macropus, 35
Macrauchenia, 77
Macropodidce , 35
Macroscelides, 233, 357
Macroscelididce, 233, 268; fossil, 191
Macrotherium, 172, 196, 200
Madagascar, 213
Madoqtia, 244
Malabar sub-region, 266
Malacomys, 238
Malagasy region, 26, 213; mammals,
214; molluscs, 223
Malayan sub-region, 267, 294
Malaysia and W. Africa, affinity of
faunas, 292
Malta, part of the mainland, 337
Mammals, the oldest, 9; importance
of, 9 ; classification of, 9 ; swimming
powers of, 13; means of dispersal of,
13; introduced by man, 17; extinc-
tion of, 18; of Oriental region, 267
Mammoth, 317
Man-like apes, distribution of, 180
Manidce, 187; Oriental, 283
Mam's, 187, 249, 284
Man's influence on distribution, 16
Maraga Fauna, 197
Marmots, 267
Marmosets, 69
Marsupial mole, 40
Marsupialia, 33
Marsupials, 33; Notogseic, 34; pa-
Iseontological history of, 50 ; fossil,
51; survival in Asia, 55, 57; date
of migration into Notogaea, 60;
Neogaeic, 107
Mantchurian sub-region, 355
Martens, 318
Mastacomys, 41
Mastodon, 196, 200, 206, 172; S.
American, 86
Mauritius, 213
Medio-Columbian region, 26
Mediterranean region, 26, 319; sub-
region, 357
Megaladapis, 218
Megalobatrachus, 356
Megalonyx, 105
Megalotheriida, 102
Megalotherium, 103
394
INDEX.
Metes, 321
Mellivora, 202, 237, 256, 276
Mehirsus, 202, 274
Mentawi, 303
Mephitis, 73, 365
Mergulns, 347
Merriam, Dr, on effects of tempera-
ture, 4; on W. Indies, 140; on a
Boreal region, 309; on the effects
of a glacial period in N. America,
345 ; on the Transition zone, 360,
361 ; on the Sonoran region, 363
MerioneS) 357
MerycopotamuS) 203
Mesohippus, 167
Mesomys, 91
Mesonychidce, 371
Mesonyx, 373
MesoptthecW) 1 80, 197, 200
Mesosaurus^ 133
Metatheria, 33
Mexican sub-region, 136
Miacidce, 373
MicroMotheriida, 109
Microbiotheriu m, 109
Microgale, 220, 234
Microchcerus, 155, 156, 181, 191
Micropholis, 152
Micropus, 352
Microtinat) 160
Microtus, 267, 313, 318
Minas Geraes, its caves, 66
Mixodectes, 373
Mixodectidtz, 373
Moas, 58
Moles, 321
Mole-rat, 322, 358
Mole-voles, 322
Moluccas, 46 ; their isolation, 49
Mongolian Pliocene, 201
Monkeys, S. American, 69 ; distri-
bution and dual origin of, 179, 180
Monte Hermoso, its mammaliferous
beds, 67
Monotremata, 32
Monotremes, 32 ; date of migration
into Notogaea, 60
Morenia, 91
Morosaurus, 152
Moschus, 204, 325
Mouflon, 358
Mountains as barriers, 15
Mule-deer, 368
Multituberculata, 33
Muntjacs, 281
Muridce, 160, 183; Notogaeic, 41;
African, 238; Holarctic, 313; E.
Holarctic, 322 ; N. American, 342 ;
Sonoran, 365
Murince, 160; an Old World group,
183
Muscardinus, 322
Musk-deer, 325
Musk-kangaroo, 36
Musk-ox, 315, 318, 344
Musk-rat, 342, 366
Musk-shrews, 272
Musophagidce, 254
Mustela, 195, 198, 202, 236, 358
Mustelzdce, 236; Neogseic, 73; Sono-
ran, 365
Mus, Notogaeic species, 41
Mus armandvillei, 46
Mydaus, 276
Mylodon, 103
My odes, 314
Myogale, 321
Myolagus, 196
Myopotamus, 91, 136
Myoscalops, 239
Myosorex, 233
Myoxidce, 322 ; African, 238
Myoxus, 192, 196, 322
Myrmecobius, 40
Myrmecophaga, 102, 136
Mynnecophagidce, 101
Mystromys, 238
Myxopoda, 132
Nandinia, 235, 256
Nannosciurus, 238, 277
Nanotragus, 244
Nasalis, 270
Nasua, 72, 365
Nearctic region, 25
Necrogymmirus, 182, 191, 271
Nectarinia, 254
Necrolestes, 71
NecrotnaniS) 187, 192
Nemorhtedus, 280, 324
Neofiber, 366
Neogaea, 25, 27, 64; its mammali-
ferous deposits, 66 ; its early fauna
distinct, \\.i\ distinctness of its
modern fauna, 123; its peculiar
birds, 123; its land-molluscs, 124;
connected with Notogaea, 125; con-
nected with Afi-ica, 127
Neogseic fauna, origin of, 124
Neogaeic realm, 27, 64 ; its sub-regions,
35
Neoplagiaulax, 156
Neoremys, 91
Neotoma, 342, 366
INDEX.
395
Neotragus, 244
Neotropical region, 25, 27, 64
Nesocerodon, 92, 89, 192
Nesocia, 203
Nesodon, 83
Nesotragus, 245
Neumayr, Dr, on a land-bridge across
Atlantic, 133
NeurotricJnis, 312
New Guinea, its mammals, 31
New Siberian Islands, 348
New Zealand mammals, 45
New Zealand, its relations with Aus-
tralia, 58, 59
Nimravus, 157
North America, affinity of its fauna
with that of E. Asia, 57 ; its relation
to Asia, 310
North American fauna, 340; Tertia-
ries, sequence of, 375
Nothropus, 107
Nothrotherium, 107
Notiosorex, 364
Notogcea, 25, 27, 28; its isolation
comparatively modern, 57, 58 ; its
chelonians, 62 ; its right to form a
realm, 62 ; northern origin of its
fauna, 62
Notogseic Realm, 27, 28
Notary ctes, 40
Notoryctida, 40
Nototheriuni) 38
Novo-Zelanian region, 25
Nyctea, 347
Nyctereutes, 355
Nycticebus, 256, 270
Oceanic islands, 10
Oceans, permanency of, 22
Octodon, 90
Octodontidce, 137,323; Neogaeic, 90;
African, 240
Oligocene fauna, 190
Onohippidium* 75
Onychogale, 36
Onychomys, 366
Opossums, 368; European fossil, 51 ;
Neogaeic, 107 ; originally a northern
group, 1 08
Orangs, 180, 268
Oreodonts, 373
Oreopithecus, 181
Oreotragus, 245
Or ibid, 245
Orias, 199, 206, 247
Oriental Region, 25, 27, 264; its past
history, 288
Ornithorhynchus, 32
Ornithorhynchida, 32
Ornithogaea, 26
Orthomys, 91
Orycteropodidce, 187, 249
Orycteropus, 187, 200, 249, 268
Oryx, 199, 245, 358
Oryzomys, 366
Oryzorictes, 220
Osborn and Earle, Messrs, on Puerco
Fauna, 154
OsteoglossidcE, distribution of, 134
Osteoglossum, 134
Ostriches, 255,256; distribution of, 129
Otocyon, 202, 236
Otomys, 238
Ovibos, 165, 315, 344
Ovt's, 165, 280, 314, 324, 358
Ovis antmon, 352 ; hodgsoni, 352 ;
poll) 352
Oxycena, 192, 373
Oxyodontotherium, 79
Pacas, 89, 136
Pachynolophus , 166, 192
Pachyruchida, 85
Pachyruchus, 85
Pachyuromys, 238, 239
Pala, 245
Palsearctic region, 25, 26
Palcecerinaceus, 182
Palaeogsea, 25
Palceomanis , 187
PalcEomephitis, 198
Palceomeryx, 196, 204
Palaeontology, importance of, 6
Palaoprionodori) 191
Palceorias, 199
Palaorycteropus, 187, 192
Palczosyops, 170, 377
Palawan group, 294
PalcEotapirus, 165
Palaotheriidce, 166, 192
Palaotherium, 166, 187, 192, 193
Palaotragus, 186, 199
Palhyana, 182, 198
Palorchestes, 36
Pampas, 66
Pampean beds, 66
Panda, 212, 275
Pangolins, 187, 249, 283
Panochthus, 98
Pantholops, 324
Papio, 1 80, 202, 231, 256
Paracetus, 68
Paradoxurus, 256, 273 ; hermaphro-
ditus, 46 ; muschenbroecki, 47
396
INDEX.
Parana beds, 88
Patagonian beds, 67 ; cavy, 136
Patriofelis, 373
Peccaries, 74/368, 375
Pectinator , 91, 240
Pedetes* 240
Pelea, 245
Pellegrinia, 91, 212, 240, 323
Pelomedusa, 131
Pelomedusidce, distribution of, 131,
132
Peltephilus, 96, 112
Pelycodus, 155
Penguins, a southern group, 131
Peragale, 38
Peramelidce, 38
Perameles, 38
Peratherium, 51
Perimys, 90
Perissodactyles, Arctogseic, 165
Permanency of continents and oceans,
22
Perodicticus, 231, 256, 270
Perodipus, 367
Perognathjts, 367
Petauroides , 37
Petaurus, 37, 46
Petrogale, 36
Peiromys, 240
Phacochcems, 185, 203, 242, 268
Phalanger^ 36, 46
Phalangeridie, 36
Phalangers, 36
Phascologale, 39
Phascolomyidcc, 38
Phascolomys, 38
Phascolonus, 38
Phascolotherium, 52
Phenacodus, 166, 174
Phenacomys, 342
Philippine sub-region, 267 ; its fauna,
304
Phlczomys, 277
Phororhachis, 60
Phosphorites, 191
Phyllostomatidce, 70
Picas, 314
Pichiciagos, 94, 96, 137
Pikermi Fauna, 197
PithechiruS) 278
Pithed a, 136
Plagiaulax, 147
Plagiodon, 91, 137
Plantain-eaters, 254
Platanistid<z, 112
Plattmys, 132
Platycercomys, 322
Pkctrophanes, 347
PlesiarctotnyS) 160
Plesictis, 191, 193
Plesiospermophilus, 192
Plesiorycteropus, 249
Pleurodira, distribution of, 8 ; 131
Plexoch&rus , 89
Pliauchenia, 163, 377
Pliocene Fauna of Arctogsea, 197
Pliolagostomus, 89
Pliopithecus, 180
Plohophorus, 98
Podocnemis, 131
Poebrotheriuni) 1 63
Pcecilogale, 236
Poiana, 235, 256
Poly mastodon, 149
Polynesian region, 27, 29, 45
Polyprotodonts, 34
Pontoporia, 112
Pouched mice, 39
Pouched rats, 136, 366
Porcupines, 184 ; S. American, 90
Potamogale, 234
Potamogalidcc, 220, 234
Pot or ous, 36
Pottos, 231, 256, 270
Prehensile-tailed mammals in Neo-
gsea, 124
Priodon, 94, 136
Proboscideans, Neogaeic, 86 ; Arcto-
goeic, 172
Proboscis Monkey, 270
Procamehts, 163, 377
Procavia, 248
Procaviidce, 248, 268
Procoptodon, 36
Procyon, 72
Procyonid(Z, 364 ; Neogseic, 72 ;
Oriental, 275
ProdidelphyS) 107
Prodremotherium, 164, 192
Proechidna, 33
Progenetta, 195
Prolagostomus, 89
Protneles, 198
Prongbuck, 367
PropalceohoplophontS) i oo
Protalpa, 156, 321
Protapirus, 165, 192
Protechinomys, 1 92
Proteleidce, 235
Proteles, 235
Proterotheriidce, 80
Proterotherium, 80
Prothylacinus, 40, 108
Protoceras, 376
INDEX.
397
Protoceratida, 376
Protogonia, 174
Protohippus, 168
Protolabis, 163
Protopterus, 133
Ptotoreodon, 375
Prototheria, 32
Protragoceros, 199
Proviverra, 159, 192, 193
Pseudalurus, 195, 198
Pseud h apalops, \ o 7
Pscitdochirus, 37
Psendocyon, 195
Pseudorhynchocyon, 191, 233
Pseudoscittrus , 192
Psittaci, distribution of, 129
Psittacotheriidce, 379
Psiltacotherium, 379
Psittacula, distribution of, 130
Ptarmigan, 347
Pterodon, 158, 192, 193
Pteromys, 268, 277
Pteropodidce, Notogseic, 42 ; distribu-
tion of, 221, 225, 232
Pteropiis, 221, 232, 268
Ptilocercus, 270
Puerco Fauna, 153
Puma, 71
Pyrotheria, 85
Pyrotherium, 85
Quagga, 247
Quercy Phosphorites, 191
Raccoons, 72, 364
Rafts, 15
Rangifer, 164, 315
Raphiceros, 245
Rat-kangaroos, 36
Ratitse, distribution of, 129
Ratite birds, their migration, 58, 60
Realms, 25, 27
Regions, 25, 27
Reindeer, 164, 315
Reptiles, antiquity of, 8
Ratels, 237, 256
Rhea, 130
Rheebok, 245
Rhinoceroses, 169; African, 247, 256;
European Plistocene, 333
Rhinoceros, 169, 192, 193, 206, 247,
256, 281
Rhinocerotutei 169; Oriental, 281
Rhithrodon, 88, 140, 365
Rhithrodontomys, 365
Rhithrosciurus, 277
Rhizomys, 183, 203, 240
Rhynchocyon, 233
Rhynchomys, 278
Rhynchosaurns, 63
Rietbok, 245
Rio de la Plata, its characters, 67
River-channels, buried, W. Indian,
.'38
Rivers as barriers, 14
Rocky Mountain Goat, 343
Rodents, Arctogseic, 159; Ethiopian,
237 ; Holarctic, 313; Neogseic, 86 ;
North American, 342 ; Notogaeic,
41 ; Oriental, 277 ; Sonoran, 365
Riipicapra, 324
Range of Carnivora, 5
Ruscinomys, 91
S. American Tertiaries, their age, 68
S. America connected with Australia,
125; connected with Africa, 127
S. American element in Ethiopian
fauna, 128
Sable Antelope, 245
Sab re- tooths, Neogaeic, 71
Sahara, its action as a barrier, 259
Saharan sub-region, 260
Saiga, 324
Sam bar, 280
Samos Fauna, 197
Samotheriiim, 186, 198
Sandwich Islands, 45
Santa Cruz beds, 67 ; fauna, its
origin, 124
Sarcophilus, 39
Seal ops, 364
Scapanus, 364
Scaptochirus, 321
Scaptonyx, 321
Scelidotheriuin, 105
Scharff, Dr, on the origin of the Irish
fauna, 340
Schizodon, 91
SciuridcE, Holarctic, 313
Sciuroides, 192
SciurofteruS) 195, 277
Sciurus, 195, 277 ; prevosti, 48
Sclater, Dr, on zoological regions, 25,
26; on the antelopes of Somaliland,
261
Scleromys, 91
Scotonycteris, 221, 232
Scott, Prof, on origin of Canis, 158 ;
on Dipodidce, 159; on the Equidtf,
168
Sea-otter, 312 ; 356
Secondary Reptiles, wide distribution
of, 151
398
INDEX.
Secretary-birds, 254
Selvas, in
Semioptera, 48
SemnopithecuS) 180, 202, 269, 357,
360
SerpentariuS) 254, 255
Sewellels, 342
Seychelles, 213; indicate a line of
connection between India and
Africa, 224
Sheep, 324
Shrews, 267, 272
Side-necked tortoises, distribution of,
131* 13*
Siderolites, 191
Sifaka, 217
Sigmodotii 88, 366
Szmia, 180, 202, 268
Simiidcz, 268
Simocyon, 198
Siphneus, 322
Sitomys, 88, 137, 160, 322, 342, 365
Siwalik Fauna, 201
Sivatherium, 186, 204
Skunks, 73, 365
Sminthopsis, 39
Sminthus, 322, 359
Snow-bunting, 347
Snowy Owl, 347
Solenodon, 70, 138
Solenodontida, 70
vSomaliland, its fauna, 261
Sonoran region, 26, 27, 363 ; its dis-
tinctness, 380
Sorex, 191, 198, 267, 272, 312
Soricidce, 136, 156, 319; Ethiopian,
2 3 2 33 > Holarctic, 312; So-
noran, 364
Soriculus, 272
South American region, 26
South America, separated from N.
America, 117; invaded by northern
animals in the Pliocene, 119
Southern Pateozoic Continent, 153
South African sub-region, 261
Spalacidce, 183, 239, 322
Spalacopus, 91
Spalacotheriidce, $2
Spalax, 183, 322, 358
Spencer, Mr, on buried West Indian
river-channels, 138
Spermophilus, 159, 351
Spheniscida, a southern group, 131
Sphenodon, 8, 63
Sphodromys, 90
Spiny anteater, 33
Spiny rats, 136
Spilogale, 365
Sparassodonta, 108
Squirrels, Flying, 237
Star-nosed mole, 341
Station, 2
SteatomyS) 239
Stegodont elephants, 206
Stenodelphis, 1 1 2
Stenoplesictis , 182, 191
Stereornithes, 60
Stereo stern um , 133
Sternothoerus* 131
Sthenurus, 36
StiromyS) 90
Stonestield slate, its marsupials, 52
Strepsiceros, 199, 206, 246
Strut hio, 255; distribution of, 129
Submerged forests of Britain, 339
Sucker-footed bats, distribution of.
13 r
Suida:, 184, 375; Oriental, 281
Sumatra, 300
Siiricata, 235
Sus, 184, 203, 242, 267,281; absence
of, in Ethiopian region, 230 ; cele-
bensis, 48 ; papuensis, 42
Swamp-deer, 280
Swayne, Capt., on the fauna of So-
maliland, 261
Syria, formerly connected with Africa,
259
Systemodott) 165
Takin, 324
Talpa, 156, 191, 271, 321
Talpidce, 156, 271, 312; absence in
Ethiopia, 230; Sonoran, 364
Tamandua, 102
Tamarao, 47, 279
Tamias, 159, 313
Tatniascvurus ) 344
7\ipiridce, 165; Oriental, 282
Tapirs, 74
Tapirus, 73, 165, 194, 282
Tarsiidce, 181, 270
Tarsipes, 37
TarsiuSi 2 70 ; fuscomanus, 47
Tasmania, 31
Tasmanian devil, 39
Tatusia, 94, 368
Tayra, 73
Tchitrea, 254
Telephomis, 254
Temnocyon, 158
Temperature, influence of, 3
Tenrec, 220
Teonoma, 344, 366
INDEX.
399
Tertiary mammalian fauna of Eastern
Arctogoea, 190
Tesiudo, distribution of, 129
Tetraceros, 206, 244, 280
Tetraconodon, 163, 204
Tetracus, 193
Thames Valley, brick-earths of, 335
Theridomyidic, 89, 91, 240
Theridomys, 91, 192
TheropithectiSi 231
Thomas, Mr O., on the fauna of S. E.
Arabia, 262 ; on the fauna of Sipora,
303
Thomomys, 366
ThylacimiS) 39
Thylacoleo, 37
Thyropoda, 132
Tibetan sub-region, 352
Tierra del Fuego, 140
Tiger, 272
Tillodontia, 378
Timor, 46
Titanomys, 194
Titanosaurus, 152
Titahotheriidce, 170, 377
Titanotheritim, in the Balkans, 57,
I7> 377
Tobago, continental, 137
Tolypeutes, 94
Tortoises, Galapagos, 141
Tosca, 66
Toxodon, 82
Toxodontia, 82
Toxodontidce, 83
Toxodontothcrium, 83
Tragelaphus , 199, 246
Tragocerosy 199
Tragulida, 164, 196, 204, 242; Ori-
ental, 281
TraguluS) 164, 186, 204, 281
Transition zone, 361
Tratratratra, 219
Tree-porcupines, 136
Triaulacodus , 91, 240
Trichechida, 313
Triconodon, 51
Triconodontida:, 51
Trichosums, 36
Trichys, 278
Triclis, 36
Trigonia, 63
Trinidad, continental, 137
Trilophomys, 238
Tntylodon, 149
Trogonidcz, distribution of, 129
Trogontherium , 333
Tropical region, 140
Trygenycteris, 22 r, 232
Tucotuco, 90
Tup aia, 270
Ttipaiidce, 268, 270
Tuatera, 8, 63
Ture, 348
Tylas, 254
Ty pother iidce, 84
Typolherium, 84
Tyrrhenian sub-region, 357
Uintatheriidcz, 174, 378
Ungulates, E. Holarctic, 324; Neo-
gaeic, 73; N. American, 343 ; num-
ber of African, 241; Oriental, 278;
Sonoran, 367
Uria, 347
Uromys, 41
Uronycteris, 42
Uropsihts, 321
Urotrichtis, 156, 312, 356
Ursidce, their absence from Ethiopian
Africa, 258; Holarctic, 321
Ursus, 202, 274, 318; absence of, in
Ethiopian region, 236 ; ornatus,
Vampire bats, 70
Vandeleuria, 278
Varanus priscus, 62
Vicunas, 74, 136
Viscachas, 136
Vishnutherium, 186, 204
Viverra, 182, 191, 195, 234, 273;
tangalunga, 47
Viverricula, 273
Viverridcz, African, 234; an Old
World group, 182; Oriental, 273
Voles, 160, 267, 313, 318
W. Africa and Malaysia, affinity of
faunas, 292
Wallabies, 36
Wallace, Dr, on extinction of Plistocene
fauna, 18; on zoological regions, 25;
on the Moluccas, 48 ; on Celebes, 48 ;
on origin of Australian fauna, 54 ;
on isolation of Australia, 58 ; on S.
American fauna, 123 ; on connection
between S. America and Australia,
125; on W. Indies, 138; on con-
nection of S. and N. America, 153 ;
on the past history of Ethiopia,
255; on land connection between
India and Africa, 257; on Oriental
sub-regions, 266; on relationship
between W. African and Malayan
400
INDEX.
faunas, 292 ; on Javan fauna, 302 ;
on the former union of Malta and
Sicily with Italy, 337
Wallace's line, 10
Walruses, 313
Wapiti, 315
Wart-hogs, 256, 268
Water-buck, 245
Water-chevrotain, 242
Water-deer, 356
Water-shrew, 319
West Indian sub-region, 137
West Indies connecting N. and S.
America, 139
Western Arctogsea, its extinct mam-
mals, 371
\Vhite-footed mice, 88, 342
Wildebeests, 244
Wolverene, 312
Wombats, 38
Wood-hoopoes, 254
Wood-rats, 342, 344, 366
Xenurus, 94
Xeromys, 40, 277
Xerus, 195, 197
Xiphodon, 185, 192, 193
Xotodon, 83
Yak, 314
Zaglossits, 33
Zapus, 342
Zebras, 247
Zoological realms and regions, 25, 27
Zoster ops, 254
CAMBRIDGE: PRINTED BY j. AND c. F. CLAY, AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS.
LOAN PERIOD 1
Sciences Blda. <S49.9QO7
ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS
Books needed for doss reserve are subject to immediate recall
DUE AS STAMPED BELOW
Iff
U.C. BERKELEY LIBRARIES
c
^J^
